* 5 § Me Al 90. @ ) OOK 1 948 Wowhead Amal eke hd wey Li tiadae. Vetere ey rar a ; whee RO a ey Rta waite 4 x} PNA Hai a eeesah ard We hed NLS ile ony ; “yl a SLMS a Nani WNCA ale ana ee Haneef ATRL) ROC mas rer Rn Ne Me Ney away ¥ | Oe ee (FD aw Vag gly of ese OPA a heed alba be } f i Ce to) Aaya aa Amst if ‘4 \@- * Me 7 ¥ AP A aD . etry AR WMO rote nat ube TA Le ee ee ec me cy es ey it) Y 4 ‘ " F C4u ney hed ‘ ities WC ea ity Ant ee ey ‘hw TS RT hee ee 1 18 et ew ry » ‘4 Y LA AT sinh Wye f 4 ee Ve Ske > CH) " , Mi hentia’ ys f : iM hay! Ay Cd ew nr) wy oye pay Mary 7 Wtaviciti AHO AI MAN AG Oe at ee »e yk had Psp fiw Uy * bm A tee th 4 a0. Cte hg de ded ee oa i eS Ly y, 4 he ae HME CAR Ne Sena WA byt ASA TAN So ‘ fea , Cee Oat f YEE ae rar ema ein | ty ah be ® SCAR elt tna NAD he Ney ave a 1 & ryt. MALAY {ic i eater 6 Wh vi ‘ t MT NH SA Ta a CaN SARA) AAA AON i) st i Ree t { ee : ye) a fon} VO eB te gay i ) i CUR oe se et . Hie ‘ Wie BI i, Mit C ne " Rue ar a BUCA Yen ae 1 dae hg ny wh Whaat ean) SOS au Lb 10) A in: Mets ‘ y uae aw he in ip , NY DOOR d if Aa ah EM we 4 Shee ath Roky 5) { BUN Mats RNs pare hiss ny : Lo 3 ad ey LR LAS Ky 443.) Bs TARY y 2a a VY at Py oy x a site Rite ve ? + have a aa oie ; HWW AY PDA Stee (2b ade od Ta vale DADE NL LS Ta : 43 Heeb 24 x ese giy yy dy tp iyt Ha dia ka PI Aa Rape albe da ben bane hi AL ay ‘ Dia erry MAAS be Cay) f) ER Ar ‘ vy #5 p Nr ; ; t aE, Carini ‘ 4 f Vi é ‘ NER HR TR : Ae ae Ue te oe a CARS Te ON tt eh Lay Dan Wa te it ats tus we | K Near atiG hia, ry bd: : ¢ 4 iy ’ ‘ Wale ; Oe ae rts ; pS Ub Nhs ike 4 . SF LS oh tag Pa Wrathsy ta) MAVEN Ce aad Oe UNE Aaa A A bd FW HE a ek Sergi POC Ene Bettie ‘ “4 7 Ey . vad NO a of ko + 4 bP 21 . y: ‘ es 4 fend ELI MeN) vba | ASML OC Naa np Anam Py 4 dw are 4 . r 4 ey " ) ; die Padehiae NUR a ashe CS bo ote +0 eh ee ae < ny Ler ae ete) : { \ Coens (e PUR eoe By Ben PavAcurh drat mayay, Vira ‘ vat A oe. es mA 7 Cron y ie Die C 4 ‘ Oc vewaa 4 ‘ ven Ns 4 uhhh J THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY, ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY. (BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND CHARLESWORTH S ‘MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’) CONDUCTED BY PRIDEAUX-JOHN SELBY, Eso., F.I.S., CHARLES C. BABINGTON, Ese., M.A., F.B.S., F.LS., F.G.S., JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.LS., V.P.ZS. &e., AND WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.LS., VOL. XI.—THIRD SER Za grsonian Instity 3 »\ ( 242105) NEF lonal Museum Y ee LONDON: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS. SOLD BY LONGMAN, GREEN, LONGMANS, AND ROBERTS}; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.; PIPER AND CO.; BAILLIERE, REGENT STREET, AND PARIS: LIZARS, AND MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH: HODGES AND SMITH, DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN. 1863. **Omnes res create sunt divine sapientie et potentiz testes, divitie felicitatis humanz :—ex harum usu Jonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini; ex ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper zstimata; 4 veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper inimica fuit.”— LINNZEUs. “Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rapportent toutes ses opérations.”—BruckKNER, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden, 1767. 5608553500 6 4 MN Adler joa Obey our summons ; from their deepest dells The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild And odorous branches at our feet ; the Nymphs That press with nimble step the mountain thyme And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed, But scatter round ten thousand forms minute Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles, Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread, The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne, All, all to us unlock their secret stores And pay their cheerful tribute. J. TAYLOR, Norwich, 1818. Fo" +s CONTENTS OF VOL. XI. [THIRD SERIES.] NUMBER LXI. I. Notes on the Hydroida. By Prof. ALLMAN cscocsrosesescssence core II. On the Raphides of British Plants. By GEorGE GULLIVER, F.R.S., Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Physiology to the Royal College of Surgeons .........scccccosesscnssccccseccsscecscasccssoess 13 III. On the proposed Change in Name of Gracula pectoralis. By ERGEHED Iv.) WALLACE, .ccsccccrassacccceresccscontesesrerconssvancasssss cesses ho IV. Descriptions of Five new Genera of Mollusca. By Henry Be EU EL UI ADAMS Sscacccnnncestecscesacoecsnceenecceesvenccecseecnmusce sass 18 V. On new Species of Snakes in the Collection of the British Mu- seum. By ALBpert Ginruer, M.A., M.D., Ph.D. (Plate III.)...... 20 VI. On new Species of Batrachians from Australia. By ALBERT Guypimre eas MD) Ph.D. (Plate [V.) ...ccceccccscscecscacsoacsvees 26 VII. Descriptions of newly discovered Spiders captured in Rio Janeiro by John Gray, Esq., and the Rev. Hamlet Clark. By JoHn ES OOK Wy Ang peas code eu accas scacasiacaencsestacaees scale cceesmsvassedentatans 29 VIII. On some new British Hydroids. By the Rev. THomas EIEN CIS HED At Aras cetsu cettte on coeccsnctore oaates sicbio auld deeuievegueceslensaeneddadeaer 45 TX. On the Transformations of the Porcellane. By Dr. Fritz Miri rane ote Westerc0..7,(Plate I.) ~ fo cssteccsescectecsccdesuetenenseqocetave 47 New Books :—The Student’s Manual of Geology, by J. Beete Jukes, M.A., F.R.S.—The Coal-fields of Great Britain: their History, Structure, and Resources; with Notices of the Coal-fields of other parts of the World, by Edward Hull, B.A. ............ 51—55 Proceedings of the Zoological Society ..........cscsessessovscseees 55—71 Use of the Weights and Measures of the Metric System in Scientific Pursuits; The Unicorn of the Ancients, by Dr. A. E. Brehm... 71, 72 lV CONTENTS. NUMBER LXII. Page X. Observations on some of the Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. By Roan w Armcr. (Plate, Ll.) ( svesscecass. scsiiessidvenacccteandecencssecs 73 XI. On Indian Species of Land-Shells belonging to the Genera Helix, Linn., and Nanina, Gray. By W. T. Buanrorp, A.R.S.M., F.G.S. CCC oor sstoeesesGHseseeteeoFtFFeeesesesosesese Ge SeoeteCosGraetsesaoeeesreeses eeescee 81 XII. Characters of new Land-Shells of the Genera Helix, Clausilia, and Spiraxis, from the Andamans, Moulmein, Northern India, and Wevlon., By W. EH. BENSON, DSi .o...sseccccusesanvesrsssss-vasenan deen 87 XIII. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W. K. Parker, M. Mier. Soc., and T. R. JONES, F.G.S. ......cscccesceeeeees 91 XIV. On the Genera and Species of Recent Brachiopods found in the Seas of Japan. By ArTHUR ADAMS, F.L.S. &. ..c.scseeceeeeeeee 98 XV. A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Tenie. By Lupwtc DIPTRIBA baeeace ip swaswus arecetanes hy Mouth, width from side to side . ta tal a a stead ae eee Barely leme tiie yea tte sce eo scce ts auebensl ae see ls occa ee a First dorsal fin, distance from snout . oY ee ==, Teneth of first tay, 2220). 228 ee 255 —— —— —, length of second ray .. 1,5 ——— | —__— = leneth of last ray “h-, | \-bee sone ee sls es base iors es cet chee tara py Second dorsal, distance from first dorsal .. fa = = distance from (snouts tect eekeewies 32 Pectorals, length) 23°. Sees s UAa a ee 13 s breadthiof base~ 0 0. sn eee zh , distance from snout: 4.2% .:ce Sees 35 Ventrals;leneth 2c gite ce eee cher h i hele 1i Vent, distance of its vertical from snout ...... 6% distance drom anal 26 Gee eee eee on: + Anal, lensthjor Base he eer) eerie flee 353; » height mm anpnt eee el bi emetoen Mites fy Caudal, length of longest rays .............-. 24 Fam. TRiGLIpD&. SETARCHES, gen. nov. Head and body compressed ; no transverse groove at the occiput ; vertex without spines; preoperculum armed; body covered with cycloid scales ; without skinny appendages. One dorsal fin, divided by a notch into a spinous and a soft portion. No pectoral appendages. Mr. J. Y. Johnson on new Fishes from Madeira. 69 Villiform teeth in the jaws, on the vomer, and on the palatine bones. Lateral line a broad scaleless groove. Six or seven branchiostegal rays. Pyloric appendages in small number. No air-bladder. It will be observed that this new genus is closely related to Sebastes and Scorpena, but more nearly to the former than to the latter. From both it is distinguished by the cycloid scales, the scaleless lateral line, and the absence of spines from the vertex. The single individual on which it has been founded was taken in the month of December 1861, and is now in the British Museum. It was at first assigned to the genus Sebastes, but was at once discriminated from all the species of that genus previously taken at Madeira. With these species I shall compare it throughout my description, with the view of aiding other observers in identifying specimens, if they should occur. SeTaRcHeES GUNTHERI, sp. n. DTV el, NG ea PaO MG a4 Oliv. 7 Za te: The height, compared with the total length, is as 1 to 4. The head is large, being contained in the length only 23 times. It is scaleless, and without prominent spies on the vertex ; the bones are cavernous ; the space between the eyes is flat and marked by several low ridges. At the back of the head are two broad flat spines point- ing backwards. The eye is contained 5+ times in the head, and is distant from the tip of the scaleless snout about a diameter and a half. The space be- tween the eyes is considerably more than equal to the diameter, and is to the length of the head as 1 to4}. There are no spines above the postero-superior part of the orbit. The snout is rounded and trun- cate; its length is equal to one-third of the length of the head. There is a skinny appendage at the posterior margin of the anterior nostril. The opercle is scaly, and is crossed by two strong crests terminating in long spines, which reach up to its edge; the higher of these spines is to the length of the head as tol to 71. At the border of the scaly preopercle there are five spines, pointing back- wards, of which the three highest are long, narrow, and parallel, the middle one of the three being equal in length to the larger of the opercular spines: these five spines occupy the position of those of Sebastes dactylopterus. The mouth is moderately large. The maxillary is broad below, is vertically truncate, and reaches back to the posterior margin of the eye. The under jaw isa trifle longer than the upper, which is notched in front. Both jaws, the palatines, and the vomer are set with bands of viliform teeth. The tongue is free near the apex, is very thick, and has a thin spatuliform projection in front similar to that seen in front of the tongue of S. Kuhlii, which, however, does not reach so far forward as in the case of the present species. The tongue and pharynx are black. The branchiostegal membrane, when the mouth is closed, is almost concealed by the opercular pieces and the very broad mandibular bones. The dorsal fin is long, commencing before the root of the pectoral ; its spines are stout, and the soft portion rounded. The anal fin is short, and terminates opposite the termination of the dorsal fin; its 70 Zoological Society. third spine is the longest, and is to the length of the head as 1 to 34, but it is shorter than the first three soft rays. The pectoral fin is broad and long, reaching back to the commencement of the anal fin, its length being to the total length as 1 to 33. The first two and the last five rays are simple, the others branched. The tenth, eleventh, and twelfth rays are the longest, and the last rays are the shortest. None of them project beyond the membrane. The ventral fins are placed together under the roots of the pectoral fins ; they are pointed, and extend over rather more than half the distance between their roots and the commencement of the anal fin. The spine is stout ; the two first soft rays longer than the others. The caudal fin is truncate, and is scaly only at the base. The vent is far back, being under the base of the twelfth dorsal spine. The scales are very small, and cycloid, offering no roughness to the finger when drawn from tail to head. The broad and scaleless lateral line descends gently from the shoulder to the tail, where it is straight; its membrane has thirty divisions, but the rows of scales that abut upon it are about eighty-six in number. ' The cecal stomach was found to be of moderate length, and there were only two pyloric czeca. The intestine was long, having one convolution. No air-bladder was observed. Its colour was a uniform pinky red, minutely dotted with black. In consequence of the anterior part of the dorsal fin having been injured, the comparative length of the spines could not be ascertained. The number of the branchiostegal rays on one side is six, on the other seven. From Sebastes dactylopterus, S. Kuhlii, and S. maderensis, the only three Madeiran species of that genus hitherto known, it is well distinguished by the flatness of the head between the eyes, by the absence of prominent spines from the vertex, by the third (not the second) anal spine being the longest, by the broad membranous lateral line, and by the cycloid scales. From the first-named species it is further distinguished by the soft rays of the dorsal fin being nine in number, in place of twelve; and from the two latter species by the black pharynx. With Sebastes filifer, Val. (Ich. Can. p. 21, pl. 2. fig. 2), this fish agrees in having scales with simple borders; but it differs (in addition to the characters by which the genus Setarches is separated from the genus Sedastes) in the number of the rays of the pectoral fin (22 in place of 16), in having, not all, but only the two first and the last five rays of that fin simple, in possessing five in place of four preopercular spines, and in the smaller scales (86 in place of 62 along the lateral line). Dedicated to my friend Dr. A. Giinther, the well-known ichthyo- logist, to whom I am indebted for much valuable instruction. The following are the dimensions in inches of the principal parts of the specimen, which is now in the British Museum :— Dotabilength 0. oui gelaelale WM vatS om leeiae a cints 9 PVCIS WE iin). 1. .- nin ecw yeietieyetete © elem oo murieiels oun 2} Length of head... 4 .:. \0.ciiwiee Ges bows s clae 35) of second preopercular spine.......... iy Dinmeteriol eye... 6s ais) disais «i xlwla pours») chaque leat at Miscellaneous. 71 Lengthiof maxillary . is.) ij. bacialst wal 44's 1,55 of base of dorsal igneous haloes dedc OE of pectoral fin ...... Je cee eaails Lae of base of pectoral fin’ ...5/..cm saisley ec OE VONETAL Ds cis sasece hciers gadalts aa sts 14 ——— of base of anal fin ............-0.0-- 4 of third anal spine...... or Ae ie Gh GaaMA HN cies s as 52 Hekn tape Ghee Distance of vertical of rvenit from sectits woe OF Fam. Percip#. PRIACANTHUS INSULARUM, Sp. 0. D. 10.15. A.3.15. Scales of lateral line, about 76. This species has a close resemblance to P. macrophthalmus, from which, however, the following differences Srtaeuien it:—l1. The height of the body to the total length is as 1 to 33, not as 1 to 2%. 2. The diameter of the eye is to the length of the head as 1 to 3h, not as 1 to 2. 3. The number of soft 1 rays in the dorsal fin is 15, not 13 or 14. 4. The length of the second dorsal spine is to the last as 1 to 2, not as 1 to 1%. 5. The edge of the opercle has one flat spine, and above this there is a rounded plate ; whereas the edge of the opercle of P. macrophthalmus has two flat spines. 6. In P. macrophthalmus the two borders of the preopercle form a right angle, and the margins are strongly denticulated. In the present species the angle formed by the free borders of the preopercle is obtuse, and the margins are very finely serrate. 7. The caudal is slightly emar- ginate. 8. The fins have not black edges, as is the case with P. macrophthalmus. This species is established on a single specimen, taken last May, which had a length of 143 inches, and a height of 33, the head being 32 inches long. The eye had a diameter of 14 inch. The example was coloured a uniform red, and it is now in the British Museum. MISCELLANEOUS. Use of the Weights and Measures of the Metric System in Scientific Pursuits. On the 18th of November last, a numerous deputation, composed of individuals of great eminence and belonging to various occupations and professions, waited on the Rt. Hon. Milner Gibson, M.P., Pre- sident of the Board of Trade, for the purpose of representing the expediency of carrying into effect the recommendations of the Com- mittee of the House of Commons which was appointed last session to consider the advantages of an international system of weights and measures. This Committee, after a long and careful investigation of the whole question, had unanimously resolved to recommend the adoption, for all purposes and throughout the British Empire, of the weights and measures of the metric system. Mr. Wm. Ewart, as Chairman of the Committee, introduced the deputation to the minister, who listened to all the speakers with the greatest attention and courtesy, and returned a very encouraging answer. The claims of natural history were advocated by Professor Owen, 7 Miscellaneous. who showed that the labours of British naturalists are to a great degree frustrated, so far as regards weights and measures, by the intricacy and inconvenience of the English method, and its limitation to the British Islands. If an English anatomist gives the weight of the brain or lungs, for example, of some newly discovered animal in the terms of the national method, it may not be known whether he uses troy weight or avoirdupois ; or if he gives the length of a bone or any other part in “lines,” it is uncertain whether a “‘line”’ is the tenth or the twelfth of an inch. On the other hand, the metre, the litre, and the gramme, with their decimal multiples and subdivisions, are not only accepted and understood by cultivated persons in almost all foreign countries, but they are extensively used by British che- mists and other men of science. They are learnt with the greatest ease ; when once learnt, they cannot be forgotten, and their advan- tages are found to be indisputable. Under present circumstances, careful describers find themselves obliged to employ two systems, a bad and a good one. Professor Owen has for some time used the metric system in this way, appending the dimensions in decimal parts of the metre to the denominations of the English method. ** Although,”’ as he stated, ‘‘ when the system of weight or measure is noted by the observer, its reduction in a single instance may be a small demand upon the time and attention of the reader, yet the repetition of that act takes a serious amount from the working hours of the individual ; and, when multiplied by the number of students, who are obstructed by conflicting systems of weights and measures, the impediment to the progress of the sciences of observation becomes so great as to render the subject quite worthy of the consideration of legislative authority.” The Unicorn of the Ancients. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GENTLEMEN,—Dr.A.E. Brehm has favoured me with the following communication on the subject of the “‘ Unicorn.” As the remarks are those of an African traveller, I think they are quite worth publishing in your Magazine. Enough now of the Unicorn ; requiescat in pace! Your obedient Servant, Preston Rectory, Wellington, Salop. W. HovuGutTon. Dec. 8, 1862. “Srr,—In reference to your interesting paper in No. 59 of the ‘Annals of Natural History,’ I take the hberty to inform you that also in the interior of Africa, where I have travelled, the ‘‘ Unicorn” (Anasa of the natives) is nothing more than the Rhinoceros. It will be interesting to you to learn that, at the present day, in the interior of Africa—for example, at Carthum (Cartoum)—drinking-vessels and cups are still made from the horn of the Rhinoceros, as they attri- bute to it the very same properties which Ctesias did (page 367 of your communication). They also use the horn for the purpose of making sword-handles. “Tam, Sir, yours respectfully, “ Leipzig, Dec. 2, 1862.” “A, EK. BREHM.” THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [THIRD SERIES. ] No. 62. FEBRUARY 1863. X.— Observations on some of the Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. By Rosert WaLKER*. [Plate II.] Tue following observations upon the Fossil Fishes of Dura Den are mainly based upon the examination of the large and valuable collection contained in the museum, for which we are much in- debted to Mr. and Mrs. Dalgleish, on whose property they are found. I have endeavoured to make a careful examination of their external structure, with a view to determine some points regarding their generic and specific characters, which seemed to me to require further elucidation. Before entering on this subject, it may be necessary to say a few words about some of the previous writings on this depart- ment of paleontology. The scales of Holoptychius were first described by the late Dr. Flemig, in ‘Cheek’s Edinburgh Journal,’ 1831, as the scales of some “vertebrated animal, probably those of ‘a fish ;” they had been found, a year or two before, in the yellow sandstones of Drumdryan, about a mile to the west of Dura Den, by Dr.Fleming. A few years afterwards, entire specimens of Holoptychius, Phaneropleuron, Pterichthys, and some other fishes were found in the sandstones of Dura Den, and some of these were for the first time brought into notice by Dr. Anderson in his Geological Essay in ‘ Fife Illustrated.’ It was not, however, till some of these fishes were submitted to the scrutiny of Agassiz that anything like correct generic and specific characters were assigned to them. These, with figures, were first published in the ‘ Poissons Fossiles du Vieux Grés Rouge,’ the Holoptychii under the specific names of Andersoni and Flemingii. * Communicated by the Author, having been read to the Literary and Philosophical Society, St. Andrews. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 6 74 Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. To the description of H. Andersoni perhaps little can now be added (what little may be hereafter added is more likely to affect its generic than its specific character). An additional description of this species has been given by Prof. Huxley in Dr. Anderson’s ‘Monograph of Dura Den,’ and more recently in the ‘ Tenth Decade of the Geological ‘Survey, lately published, which con- tains a restoration of Holoptychius, and some descriptive remarks on that genus comprised in Prof. Huxley’s excellent ‘ Preliminary Essay’ on the Classification of the Devonian Fishes. The name H. Flemingii was founded by Agassiz on a piece of a fish which was found in Dura Den, I believe, by Dr. Fleming. It appears to have belonged to a fish of some size—fully larger than most fishes from that quarter. The same species, according to Agassiz, was afterwards found in the “ Old Red of Russia.” Notwithstanding the distinct figure and clear description of the scales of this species given by Agassiz, it appears to have been overlooked by some geologists, and altogether disregarded as a distinct species by others. On the other hand, some > pale ontologists, while recognizing the distinct character of the scales of H. Flemingii, have asserted that they belonged to some part of H. Andersoni: among the latter was Prof. M‘Coy, who was perhaps led ito what seems to me to be an error in consequence of the fragmentary condition of his specimens; in his case, however, it appears the more remarkable, inasmuch as he had correctly observed and described the scales of H. Flemingii im his ‘ Paleeozoic Fossils.’ It would seem, however, that he had still doubts about the matter, as appears from the following sentence in the same work, in his description of H. Sedgwickit : “This species, like H. Flemingii, is remarkable for bemg found on its side, indicating apparently a compressed instead of a de- pressed form ; it also resembles that species in the sculpturing of the scales.” Nevertheless it appears to me that H. Flemingit, Agass., is not only a distinct species, but belongs also to another genus, viz. Glyptolepis. In general form H. Flemingit appears to have pretty closely resembled H. Andersoni; but in most specimens, if not in all, it was considerably deeper in proportion to the length. The pectoral and ventral fins appear to be strongly lobated ; the latter, at any rate, in some specimens, were placed fully half their own length in front of the anterior dorsal, which was small, and placed far back. The caudal fin is not very distinctly exhibited in any specimen, but, so far as shown, it appears to be unequally lobed. The scales, as already de- scribed by Agassiz, are, when entire, a good deal higher than long, especially along the sides; on the dorsal and ventral areas they assume a rounder form. The ornamental lines on the ex- posed parts of the scales, on the sides, extend pretty horizontally Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. 75 to the free edges, and seldom anastomose ;_ but along the belly and towards the back, above the lateral lie, where the sculp- turing becomes bolder and sharply defined, anastomoses more frequently take place between the lines or ridges. So far as yet stated, there is nothing to indicate more than specific differences ; but when these scales are closely examined, a number of small and very distinct points or tubercles are seen, which form a semilunar or crescentic area on the posterior part of the first half of each scale, and immediately in front of the exposed sculpture. These tubercles appear as radiating in straight lines from a centre, which is not itself apparent, and are best seen on the scales that cover the sides of the fish. I have found them, however, more or less distinctly indicated, on well-preserved specimens, on nearly all parts of the body, from the ventral to almost the extreme dorsal edge. When the scales are entire, these crescentic areas are almost hidden by the over- lapping of the anterior scales, and, excepting a very small part, they may be said to be altogether concealed. When the scales are not well preserved, of course these tubercles are obliterated altogether ; but when well-preserved specimens are met with, and the overlapping scales are absent or removed, then these tubercles are very distinct and easily recognized (fig. 2); and Fig. 1. Scale of Glyptolepis, from the side ; natural size. Fig. 2. Scale of Holoptychius Flemingii, from the ventral surface, about two inches behind the jugular plates; natural size. when compared with specimens of undoubted Glyptolepis (for which I am indebted to the kindness of Mr. Powrie), and then with the figures and description of the scales of that genus in Prof. Huxley’s essay, ‘Decade X.,’ the resemblance is at once apparent and unmistakeable. In some cases the resemblance is even closer to the figure from Pander, given in the above decade, than to that of the figures by Huxley, which were drawn (as he _ says) from a scale of Glyptolepis from Wick. To Prof. Pander is due the credit of having first discovered the true sculpture of the scales of Glyptolepis, which he wrought out of a Lethan-Bur nodule ; while Prof. Huxley has still further elucidated and con- firmed the matter, which he says he did by “ scraping away the inner layers of the scales of undoubted examples of this genus * 76 Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. in the Museum of Practical Geology,” &c. He further states, “The clear recognition of the fact that this elegant structure really characterizes Glyptolepis is of great importance, for it en- ables one to discriminate between Holoptychius (whose scales have no semilunar area of backwardly-directed points) and Gly- ptolepis.” As we have just seen, the scales of H. Flemingii, Agass., have the identical structure of the scales of undoubted specimens of Glyptolepis, so far, at least, as the crescent of points is con- cerned, which seems to be the only tangible difference between them generically (Holoptychius and Gh yptolepis). Such bemg the case, we are warranted in pronouncing H. Flemingii to be a true Glyptolepis. The head of H. (G.) Flemingii is in length to that of the body as 1 to 4 or 5, and is of a depressed roundish form, gradually tapering towards the snout, which is blunt and round. The head is covered with granulated plates of no great thickness ; on the sides of the head they join each other by squamous su- tures, extending inward and upward. In this way these bones shghtly overlap at the margins, without projecting externally. When their granulated surfaces happen to be uninjured, it is not always easy to determine where one bone ends and another begins. The occipital region is covered over by a median and two lateral bones ; the median, or supra-occipital (s.o.), is trun- cated in front and rounded behind, where it partly overlaps the Fig. 3. JU. Side view of the head of H. Flemingii. scales of the nape. The lateral or epiotic (rP.) extend back- wards and downwards till they.-meet the operculum, their upper a a Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. 77 anterior edges projecting forward a little beyond the commence- ment of the parietals. The parietals (pa.) are rather large bones, and, like the frontals, jom each other on the middle of the cranium by a suture of square edges; their posterior ends are truncated where they meet the supra-occipital, the anterior somewhat regularly rounded, the round terminating on the antero-lateral edges in points, which are rendered more apparent by their lateral margins being concave. Into these concave mar- gins the upper edge of one of two bones, which may represent the squamosal (s@.), is attached; they meet the epiotic poste- riorly, and fill in the spaces between the parietals and operculum. The operculum (op.) and sub-operculum (s.o.) are distinct bones, co-adapted, and look somewhat like a single rudely crescent- shaped plate, with the concave edge turned upward, rounded behind, and slightly so in front. The opercular and squamosal bones are succeeded in front by two bones, the upper of which may represent the supra-temporal (s.t.), and meets the lower margin of the parietal; the lower bone, which may be the hyo- mandibular (u.M.?), fills in the space between the supra-temporal and the maxilla. Both these bones have their exposed surfaces ornamented by radiating strie; on the upper bone the striz proceed from a raised horizontal centre, on the lower bone from a raised nearly vertical centre. The frontals (rR.) are about half the length of the parietals, and not much more than half their breadth ; the posterior margins, by which they meet the parietals, are concave, the anterior somewhat convex. There is a small bone on each side of the head, probably the post-frontal (pr.r.), which fits in between the frontals and the supra-temporals. The next bone in front is perhaps the post-orbital (pr.o.), which forms the posterior boundary of the orbit; its margins unite with the frontal, post-frontal, and supra-temporal; the lower edges unite behind the middle of the orbit with the sub-orbital bone (sB.o.), which thus forms the lower boundary of the orbit behind and fills in the space between the post-orbital and the maxilla. The bones in front of the orbits are not distinctly defineable on any specimen that I have seen ; but it appears as if the lower edge of the pre-frontal passed back between the orbit and the maxilla till it met the sub-orbital. Neither are the bones before the frontals clearly legible ; the space seems to be occupied by a number of small four- and five-sided plates, which may represent the ethmoid, &c. The maxille (mx.) do not appear to have been very strong; externally they were orna- mented like the bones of the head, and had a row of small (as far as I have seen) equal-sized teeth on their lower edges. There appears to me to be a pretty distinct pre-maxilla (p.mx.), which joins the maxilla under the anterior margin of the orbit, and , \ 78 Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. there is a row of small slightly hooked teeth extending round its lower border. The lower jaws appear to be strong, and are somewhat power- ful-looking bones: there are two distinct rows of plates on each side between the rami and the two central jugular plates; the Crushed head of H. Flemingit. outermost row is the largest; their exterior margins seem to have been overlapped a little by the inferior edge of the rami, while they in turn overlapped the margins of the next; these plates are longer than broad, and meet each other by oblique sutures passing inwards. The inner row of plates is about half the breadth of the outer, and they join together by more transverse sutures. These plates or bones are continued back, and turned up, on the sides of the head, behind the articulation of the infe- rior maxilla, till they terminate below the inferior margin of the sub-operculum. So far as I can perceive, the cranium above described does not appear to differ in any respect from that of H. Ander- sont: the head of the latter species is not, in general, so well preserved ; but so far as the bones are exposed, they seem to me to be the same in number, arrangement, and shape. Neither does it differ materially from the bones of the head of Glypto- pomus, as figured by Prof. Huxley; im fact, the resemblance in Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. 79 this case is very close, which is not altogether what we might expect: we should rather have expected to find the head of that genus agreeing in this respect with Glyptolemus and Osteolepis. There are some other specimens of Glyptolepis from Dura Den in the museum, which now appear to me deserving of a more particular notice than I at first thought. These fishes have appeared to me for a considerable time to be only a variety of H. Fleming ; but a more careful examination of some of these specimens has now convinced me that they are specifically di- stinct : at least, the differences between these two forms are as great as that which exists between many of our present species. Upon comparing specimens of both forms, about the same size, I find the following differences :—The fishes in question have the head rather shorter in proportion to the whole length ; the first dorsal and the ventral fins are placed an inch (in some cases more) nearer the head ; the dorsal and anal fins are larger than the same fins in any specimen of H. Flemingii that I have ever seen; and the scales, which will be more particularly noticed hereafter, have their external sculpture much finer. The specimen figured in Plate II. measures 104 inches in length ; to this we may perhaps add another inch to complete the caudal extremity. The head is to the whole length as 1 to 5 or 53. The greatest depth of the body is halfway between the termination of the head and the commencement of the first dorsal fin, where it attains to 3 inches, from which it gradually tapers to the beginning of the caudal fin, where it is 1} inch deep. The pectoral fins are not preserved on any specimen. The first dorsal fin commences six inches behind the snout; its longest rays are 1} inch in length; the second dorsal fin is inserted about an inch behind the termination of the first: this appears to have been a large fin, with a round free margin ; the longest rays measure 1? inchin length. The ventral fins are placed a little further forward than the first dorsal; but they are not in a suffi- cient state of preservation, on this or any other specimen, to show their exact form. The anal fin is situated under the second dorsal, and terminates in a somewhat pointed extremity ; its longest rays are 1} inch in length. The tail appears to be heterocercal : the lower lobe is well developed, but rather abruptly truncated at its posterior margin ; its first rays originate about + inch behind the anal fin, where they are 1? inch in length ; from this point they become gradually shorter as they near the distal end: the upper lobe consists of a number of short rays, which form a kind of marginal fringe on the upper side of the notochord. The scales are rounded, and appear to be rather thin; but they have the crescentic area of tubercles on their an- terior half very clearly exhibited (fig. 2). The exposed surfaces 80 Mr. R. Walker on Fossil Fishes of Dura Den. of the scales have fine thread-like sculptured lines extending from the tubercles to the free margin; these lines seldom ana- stomose. Whether the preceding is a new species of Glyptolepis, or not, would at present be rather premature to say. However this may be, it has never been noticed before as occurring among the Dura-Den fishes. There is another specimen in the museum which shows the Glyptolepis crescentic structure of scale on some parts; it appears to have been a fish of some size, perhaps 2 feet or more in length, and is altogether different from H. Flemingii or the fish last noticed. The specimen is laid nearly on the back; the head and a considerable portion of the anterior of the body are wanting. The scales on the ventral surface and one of the sides for about two or three inches above the lateral line are well ex- posed, although not in a very good state of preservation. The scales are about an inch, some of them rather more, in diameter, and their external sculpture is more like the scales of H. gigan- teus, Agass., than any other scales that I know: those on the belly do not show the crescentic area of points ; whether the points have never been there, or have been destroyed in lifting the specimen, is not easy to determine ; but, on the flank and above the lateral line, some of the scales exhibit the area of points in front of the exposed sculpture very distinctly. From what I recollect of the large fish found in Dura Den, last year, by Dr. Anderson, I think it not unlikely that it and the large specimen above noticed will yet be found to belong to the same species. If I am not greatly mistaken, Dr. Anderson’s specimen of last year has the same form of tail as the Gh yptolepis figured by Miller in pl. 5 of the ‘Old Red Sandstone.’ The finding of the crescent of points on the large specimen has made me look still more closely to the scales of ‘H, Andersoni ; besides, it has often appeared to me very probable that to whatever genus H. Fle- mingti might be assigned, H. Andersoni, from its close resem- blance, must also be ‘assigned : in accordance with this view, I have carefully looked over every specimen and fragment in the museum (and, thanks to the labours of Dr. Heddle, they are not few) ; but as yet I have entirely failed in finding the charac- teristic crescent of points on the scales of any undoubted speci- men of H. Andersoni. But the further consideration of this and some other matters connected with these Dura-Den fossil fishes must be left for another paper, wherein I will also direct attention to some specimens of fishes either new to Dura Den or at least not well known. Mr. W.T. Blanford on Indian Species of Land-Shells. 81 XI.—On Indian Species of Land-Shells belonging to the Genera Helix, Linn., and Nanina, Gray. By W. T. Buanrorp, A.R.S.M., F.G.S. In the course of the last few years, much has been published concerning the distribution of Indian and Burmese land-shells, and a large number of novel forms have been described, chiefly by Mr. W. H. Benson. The greater portion of this information, however, has necessarily been derived from an examination of the shells alone, and has left untouched the important question of the forms of the soft parts in the species described. In the case of forms referred to the genus Helix especially, the determina- tion of the presence or absence of a mucous pore at or near the posterior termination of the foot is essential for the natural classification of the different species. I have had opportunities, during the last few years, of collecting several Indian and Bur- mese snails in various parts of the country; and, although my notes on the forms of the animals occupying them are very im- perfect, they may suffice to correct some of the errors which prevail, in conchological works, in attributing various species to the different subgenera of Helix and Nanina*. I hope to communicate longer notices of the species enume- rated below at some future time; for the present I have not the data at hand, and I therefore confine myself to a list of the species actually observed, with the localities from which I have obtained them; and I have added in italics the names of other species so closely allied to those observed that no doubt can exist as to their subgeneric affinity. With one or two exceptions, which are noted, the observations were made by myself on the living animals. The subgenera in which I have classed the species noted are those of Albers and Pfeiffer, somewhat modi- fied, with a few necessary additions. The genus Nanina is naturally divided into two groups of subgenera by the structure of the mucous pore itself; and this subdivision is fully borne out by the characters of the shells belonging to the two groups, although, as is the case more or less throughout the Helicide, there are some indications of a passage from one group to the other. In the first of these sections the foot is narrow, and more or less abruptly truncated posteriorly ; the mucous pore is situated at the vertical or sub- vertical posterior termination, and has above it a projecting * Thus, by Albers, H. Huttoni, Pfr., H. capitium, Bens., and H. Guerini, Pfr., are incorrectly classed under Nanina; while Nanina Tranquebarica, Fabr., and N. ampulla, Bens., are arranged under Helix. Adams. and, | think, Pfeiffer, fall into similar errors, which, indeed, can only be guarded against by an examination of the animals. 82 Mr. W.T. Blanford on Indian Species of Land-Shells horn-shaped lobe, of very variable length, and possessing a cer- tain amount of contractility. Of this group, which is probably allied to Stenopus* (if, indeed, that name ought not to be adopted for it), some of the principal Indian types are N.vitrinoides, Desh., N. infula, Bens., N. pylaica, Bens., and N. ampulla, Bens. In the other group the foot is broader, flatter, and rounded poste- riorly, as in most of the true Helices. The mucous pore, gene- rally of larger comparative size than in the first specified section, is situated in a groove in the centre of the upper surface of the foot, close to the posterior extremity, with no lobe whatever above or in front of it. Amongst the principal types are N, levipes, Mull., N. bistrialis, Beck, N. Tranquebarica, Fabr., N. indica, Pfr., and N. Thyreus, Bens. Before any complete list of Indian Naninas can be made, several additional observations are necessary. Amongst the species of which notices are especially desirable are the follow- ing :— Nanina? Basileus, Bens. Anamullay Hills, 8. India. N.? Cycloplax, Bens. Darjiling, in the Sikkim Himalaya. N.? Oxytes, Bens. Cherra, in the Khasi Hills. N.? Orobia, Bens. Darjiling. N.? serrulat, Bens. Khasi Hills. N.? climacterica, Bens. Khasi Hills and Arakan. N.? anceps, Gould. Tenasserim. N.? infrendens, Gould. Molmain. N.? Bombax, Bens. Molmain. H.? radicicola, Bens. Landour and Darjiling. H1.? bifoveata, Bens. Tenasserim. H.? monticola, Hutt. Western Himalaya. The three species of Sophinat described by Mr. Benson, from Mol- main, besides several of the species from Ceylon. In the following list, all species of which I have neither seen the animals myself, nor authentic drawings of them, are marked by italics, as are also all localities not verified by myself, by my brother, Mr. H. F. Blanford, or by Mr. W. Theobald, * The name Nanina has been so generally employed by conchologists for the great genus of shell-bearig Helicide characterized by the presence of a mucous pore, that, although objectionable both on account of its signification and of other terms having unquestionable priority, no good purpose could now be served by attempting to change it. + H. Bensoni, v. d. Busch, is the same shell as N.? serrula, Bens., if the specimen of the first-named in Mr. Cuming’s cabinet is authentic, which I believe it is. + Tam inclined to anticipate that these may very possibly prove to be Nanias. belonging to the Genera Helix and Nanina. 83 Jun., to whom I am indebted for several of the shells men- tioned *. Genus Nanina, Gray. Section A. Mucous pore at the truncated posterior extremity of the foot, and with a lobe above. (?Stenopus, Guilding.) Subgenus Macrocuuamys, Bens. Syn. Orobia, Albers; Xesta, Pfr. . vitrinoides, Desh. Bengal. . semifusca, Desh. 8S. Arcot; Trichinopoly ; var. from the Kola- mullay Hills. . Perrottetii, Pfr. Nilgiri Hills, S. India. . Todarum, W. § H. Blanf. Nilgiri Hills, S. India. pansa, Bens. Thayet Myo, Pegu; Ava. . molecula, Bens. Rangoon; Ava. . textrina, Bens. Arakan and Pegu. . ligulata, Fé. Bengal; Madras. . subjecta, Bens. Rajmahal Hills, Bengal; Orissa. . lecythis, Bens. Rajmahal Hills, Bengal; Orissa. . lubrica, Bens. Daryjiling. . decussata, Bens. Khasi Hills (Theobald) ; E. Bengal. . seqguaz, Bens. Darjiling. . rorida, Bens. Darjiling. Hodgsoni, Bens. Darjiling. . Patane, Bens. Darjiling. N. Petasus, Bens. Tenasserim (Theobald). N. splendens, Hutt. Western Himalaya; Parasnath Hill, in Bengal? N. acerra, Bens. Molmain (Theobald). N. pauaillula, Bens. Thayet Myo, Pegu. be ea hits to ol to I am unacquainted with N. resplendens, Philippi, from Mergui, in the Tenasserim provinces. Specimens which I have seen so marked from Bengal were N. vitrinoides, Desh. The animal of N. ligulata differs in colour and somewhat in shape from the other species above enumerated. I am indebted to my brother, Mr. H. F. Blanford, for a drawing of it. It shows a passage into the other section of Nanina. Subgenus KaLrewua, n. subg. Syn. Trochomorpha, Albers, part. N. fastigiata, Hutt. Western Himalayas; Nilgiri Hills. N. Barrakporensis, Pfr. Base of Sikkim Himalayas ; Kalryenmul- lay Hills, near Salem, in S. India (Foote). N. aspirans, VW. § H. Blanf. Nilgiri Hills. * Absence from any collections and from almost all books of reference, at the time of writing, will render these lists less full than I could have wished them to be. I trust to be able to supply omissions hereafter. 84 Mr. W.T. Blanford on Indian Species of Land-Shells Subgenus Trocuomorpna, Albers (restricted). . attegia, Bens. Irawaddy Valley, near Prome ; Ava. . infula, Bens. Lower Bengal; Orissa. . cacuminifera, Bens. Nilgiri Hills. . are, Bens. Therabuin Hill, Tenasserim (Theobald). a IZ) iat io Subgenus DurGELLA, n. subg. . levicula, Bens. Tenasserim (Theobald) ; Prome, in Pegu. . mucosa, W.& H. Blanf. Nilgiri Hills. . seposita, Bens. Darjiling. 2AzZ Subgenus Hericarion ?, Feér. . ampulla*, Bens. Western slope of Nilgiris (Elliott) ; Malabar (Jerdon). Z Subgenus Sesarat, Albers. Syn. Tridopsis, Pfr., part. . pylaica, Bens. Molmain. N N. impendens, Gould. Molmain. N. capessens, Bens. Molmain (Theobald). Helix Tickelli, Theobald, is a variety of either of the two last- named shells, with two of the teeth in the peristome blended together. Section B. Mucous pore above the flattened posterior extremity of the foot, and without a lobe above it. (Ariophanta, Desmoulins.) Subgenus Hemrexecta {?, Albers. N. Tranquebarica, Fabr. E. coast of Southern India. N. Bombayana?, Grat. . base of Nilgiri Hills. N. Belangeri, Desh. Bombay? N. Maderaspatana, Gray. Nilgiri and other hill-groups of Southern India. N. solata, Bens. Nuilgiri Hills. N. bistrialis, Beck. Madras and Trichinopoly. N. semirugata, Beck, I have little doubt, is only a variety of Tranquebarica. WN. vitellina, Pfr., is almost equally question- able. * T am indebted to Mr. Walter Elliott for a drawing of the animal of Nanina ampulla, Bens., which I have not myself met with. It would seem to be distinguished from Helicarion by the absence of the long mantle-lobes reversed over the shell; but I hesitate to separate it without further information. Vitrina irradians, Pfr., observed by my brother, I believe to be a true Helicarion, as are probably several of the other Indian Vitrinas, e.g. V. gigas, Bens. + Classed by Albers as a subgenus of Heli. + The type of Albers’s subgenus Hemiplecta is H. Humphreysiana, Lea, which is a very different shell from any of those here attributed to the section. Perhaps also N. Tranquebarica and its allies should be separated from the remainder. belonging to the Genera Helix and Nanina. 85 Subgenus Roruna, Pfr. (? Albers). N. indica, Pfr. Nilgiri Hills. N. Shiplayi, Pfr. Nilgiri Hills. Subgenus ArtopHAnTA, Desmoulins. N. interrupta, Bens. Bengal. N. Laidlayana, Bens. Orissa. N. Nicobarica, Chemn. Cuddapah (King). N. levipes, Miil/. Bombay. N. retrorsa, Gould. Molmain (Theobald). N. Bajadera, Pfr. Nagpur, small typical var.; Bombay, large var. (Theobald). From an inspection of the type-specimens of both shells, I have ascertained that N. ammonia, Val., is founded on the type-_ variety of N. Bajadera, Pfr. I have but little doubt that N. Himalayana, Lea, is N. interrupta, Bens., the Himalayan locality being probably an error. WN. retrorsa, Gould, appears, on the other hand, to be a good species. Subgenus Oxyress, Pfr. N. Thyreus, Bens. Nilgiri Hills. N. Cysis, Bens. Nilgiri Hills. N. Cycloplaz, Bens. Daryjiling. N. Oxytes, Bens. Khasi Hills (Theobald). Genus Hetix, Linn. Subgenus Tacura, Albers. Hi. fallaciosa, Fé. East coast of Southern India; Ceylon. H. Nilagarica, Pfr. Nilgiri Hills. HI. asperella, Pfr. Central India. HI. Helferi, Bens. Andaman Islands (Haughton). H. vittata, Fér. East coast of Southern India; Ceylon. HI. proxima, Fér. Caroor, in Coimbatoor district (King). H. delibrata, Bens. Base of Himalayas, in Sikkim; Khasi Hills (Theobald) ; Arakan; Pegu. H. gabata, Gould. Molmain (Theobald). H. Merguiensis, Pfr. Molmain. The last three should perhaps be separated as a distinct sub- genus. H. ruginosa, Fér., appears to be merely a variety of H. fallaciosa, ito which it passes by insensible gradations. H. crassicostata, Bens., is more distinct ; but if it prove to be, as Pfeiffer considers it, a variety of H. ruginosa, it must also fall under fallaciosa. The animal of H. vittata shows no essential distinction from that of fallaciosa; and I can see no cause for its separation as a distinct subgenus, as suggested by Albers. 86 Mr. W.T. Blanford on Indian Species of Land-Shells. Subgenus Dorcast1a?, Gray. H. similaris, Fér. Thayet Myo, in Pegu; Dacca. H. bolus, Bens. Thayet Myo. HI. Peguensis, Bens. Pegu. H. Huttoni, Pfr. Western Himalaya; Sikkim; Nilgiri Hills; Puppa Hill, Ava. H. tapeina, Bens. Khasi Hills (Theobald); Pegu. ?H. rotatoria, v.d. Busch. Pegu. H. Akoutongensis, Theobald. Akoutoung, on the Irawaddy, Pegu ; Thayet Myo. H. Oldhami, Bens. Arakan Hills; Ava. I doubt much the distinctness of H. sculpturita, Bens., from H. similaris, Fér., of which the first-named appears to be a large solid variety. Subgenus S1veLwa, n. subg. H. castra, Bens. Darjiling; Balasore in Orissa; Ceylon ; Arakan Hills. H. lychnia, Bens. Singapore; Nilgiri Hills (H. F. Blanford). Subgenus Tuysonota*, Albers. H. Guerin, Pfr. Nilgiri Hills. H. crinigera, Bens. Nilgiri Hills. Subgenus GANESELLA, n. subg. H. capitium, Bens. Rajmahal Hills, Bengal; Orissa (Theobald) ; Ava. H. variola, Bens. Thayet Myo; Pegu. The distinctness of these two species appears very dubious. Subgenus Piectopy is, Bens. H. achatina, Gray. Molmain. H. anguina, Gould. Mergut. H. leiophis, Bens. Akoutoung, near Prome, Pegu; Thayet Myo. H. refuga, Gould. Tenasserim Valley (dextral var., Theobald) ; Tavoy (sinistral var.). H. plectostoma, Bens. Darjiling; Khasi Hills (Theobald); Arakan Hills; Bassein, Pegu. H., pinacis, Bens. Daryiling. H. retifera, Pfr. Nilgiri Hills. Type-specimens of Helix anguina, Gould, in Mr. Cuming’s collection, show that the species is quite distinct from H. acha- tina, Gray, with which, however, H. repercussa, Gould, is iden- tical. * Classed by Albers under Nanina. Mr. W. H. Benson on new Land-Shells. 87 XII.—Characters of new Land-Shells of the Genera Helix, Clau- silia, and Spiraxis, from the Andamans, Moulmein, Northern India, and Ceylon. By W. H. Brunson, Esq. 1. Helix Haughtoni, B., nu. sp. H. testa perforata, subumbilicata, solidula, subtrochiformi, irregu- lariter oblique obsolete plicatula, confertissime et minutissime spiraliter striata, epidermide rubenti-olivacea; spira depresse conoidea, apice valde obtuso, sutura impressa; anfractibus 43-5, convexis, ultimo antice breviter vix descendente, ad peripheriam angulato, subtus convexo, circa umbilicum intus callo arctatum compressiusculo ; ; apertura obliqua, subrotundato-lunata, sub- quadrangulari, intus albida, peristomate recto, marginibus callo tenuissimo junctis, dextro intus subincrassato, columellari superne breviter reflexiusculo, subtus incrassato, intus dente calloso inter- dum munito. Diam. major 31, minor 27, axis 19 mill. Habitat in insulis Andamanicis. Detexit Major J. C. Haughton. This is the largest Heliz, and the most peculiar in form and in the formation of the aperture, yet received from these islands, the columellar callus in one specimen recalling the appearance observable in some Mauritian Helices. In a second specimen, this protuberance is more slightly developed. I am indebted for it to Major Haughton, late Superimtendent of the Andaman Colony, now Chief Commissioner in Assam, whose search for the land-shells of the locality has added largely to our knowledge of the island forms. 2. Helix Gordonia, B., un. sp. H. testa perforata, orbiculata, depressa, tenui, superne oblique plica- tula et minutissime striata, infra leeviore, subpolita, confertissime radiatim striatula, striis nonnullis distantibus decussata, albida, epidermide pallide cornea induta; spira planulata, apice vix ele- vato, obtuso, suturis impressis, late marginatis; anfractibus 7, lente accrescentibus, vix convexiusculis, ultimo ad peripheriam superne compresse carinato, antice non descendente; apertura subobliqua, lata, angulato-lunata, peristomate vix reflexiusculo, intus breviter incrassato, albo, margine superiore brevi, basali late regulariter arcuato, prope umbilicum undulato. Diam. major 33, minor 30, axis 11 mill. Habitat in regione Birmanica prope Moulmein. Two specimens of this beautiful and delicate species, one of which was imperfect, were kindly sent to me from Moulmein by Mrs. Gordon, wife of Major-General Gordon, of the Madras Army, with other shells previously found in that neighbour- hood. 88 Mr. W. H. Benson on new Land-Shells 3. Helix Cyclotrema, B., n. sp. H. testa sinistrorsa, obtecte umbilicata, conoideo-subglobosa, oblique striatula, granulata, sub epidermide cornea, albida; spira conoidea, — apice obtuso, subfoveato, suturis impressis ; anfractibus 43, con- vexis, gradatim crescentibus, ultimo ad peripheriam obtuse angu- lato, unifasciato, antice lato, longe descendente, subtus convexo ; apertura valde obliqua, rotundata, peristomate dilatato, reflexius- culo, marginibus conniventibus, approximatis, callo brevi junctis, columellari late auriculato umbilicum celante. Diam. major 22, minor 18, axis 11 mill. Habitat in montibus ‘‘Soomeysur” dictis, prope regionem Nipalensem. Detexit W. Theobald jun. This interesting shell is the first of the smistrorse group allied to H. trifasciata, Chemn., which has been hitherto proved to inhabit the Himalayan region. A sinistrorse shell, alleged to have been collected by Dr. Burroughs in the Himalaya, was named H. Himalana by Dr. Lea, in a paper read before the Phil. Soc. of Philadelphia, in Feb. 1832 (date of the dedication of the printed volume, July 1834). In August 1834, the Southern Chinese H. cicatricosa (H. Senegalensis) was considered to be the shell indicated by Dr. Lea, in the opinion of the late Mr. G. B. Sowerby, and was described by me, in the Zoological Journal of that year, under Lea’s name, together with H. inter- rupta, m., which occurs abundantly in the Rajmahal range, south of the Ganges, and in the Botanic Gardens near Calcutta. There is now little reason to doubt that H. interrupta is the same as Lea’s original shell; and, even assuming that the latter had the advantage of priority of publication, the locality wrongly assigned by the name to the species should cause the abandon- ment of the designation on the same ground as that of the Chinese species originally attributed by mistake to Senegal. A single dead and imperfect specimen of H. interrupta was sent to me from the station of Darjiling, where it was picked up by Mr. Theobald near a European dwelling-house. It was pro- bably thrown away by the late Dr. Pearson, who resided at that station for some months, and who had also collected the shell, which I discovered in 1831, in the outliers of the Rajmahal range. It is highly improbable that the numerous conchological collectors who have lately explored Darjiling and other parts of the Himalayan Mountains should have missed a shell so con- spicuous and abundant where found; and when a ‘Times’ edi- torial notice could, in 1860, announce a spur of the Himalaya as being visible from Calcutta, it is not a subject for wonder that an American traveller should have mistaken a group of hills south of the Ganges for an offset of the magnificent moun- tains which form the northern boundary of Hindostan. of the Genera Helix, Clausilia, and Spiraxis. 89 4. Helix hyptiocyclos, B., n. sp. H. testa latissime umbilicata, orbiculato-planata, planorbiformi, de- pressa, fragili, oblique striatula, translucente, polita, olivaceo- cornea ; spira concaviuscula, apice foveolato, suturis profundis ; anfractibus 43, gradatim increscentibus, utrinque convexis, ultimo convexiusculo, peripheria subcarinata; apertura valde obliqua, elliptico-lunata ; peristomate tenui, acuto, marginibus conniventi- bus, callo tenui junctis. Diam. major 6, minor 5, alt. 14 mill. Habitat sub stercore bovillo ad latera collium prope Fort M‘Donald, teste F. Layard. This little shell resembles a Planorbis more closely than any known species of Helix. The specimens were taken in a living state, and it is a matter for regret that the tentacula and eyes were not examined and recorded at the time of capture. Mr. Layard, however, states that, when placed under a glass, the animals crept briskly on the interior surface, a fact which inva- lidates the idea of the shell being possibly a Planorbis. It occurred on a flat space on the side of the hills where a clearing had been made for cultivation, and where no water lay. The habits of the little Rohilkund Planorbis rotula, m., the temporary inhabitant of a precarious pool, may be compared with those of Helix hyptiocyclos, by referring to the ‘ Annals of Natural His- tory’ for May 1850. The Himalayan Hela Huttoni, Pfr., which was detected by the Messrs. Blanford on the northern face of the Nilgiri range, in Southern India, reappears in the central mountain-group of Ceylon, where Mr. F. Layard took it near Fort M‘Donald. 5. Clausilia Ceylanica, B., n. sp. C. testa vix rimata, fusiformi, oblique confertissime costulata, costulis nonnullis undulatis, fuscescenti-olivacea; spira gradatim attenuata, lateribus convexiusculis, apice obtusiusculo, sutura impressa ; an- fractibus 8, convexiusculis, ultimo ad basin rotundato; apertura subobliqua, pyriformi, lamellis contiguis, inferiore valde exserta, torta, plicis palatalibus 2, subzequalibus, elongatis, columellari im- mersa ; peristomate continuo, superne soluto, undique subexpanso, reflexiusculo. Long. 12, diam. 23 mill.; apert. long. 3, lat. 2 mill. Habitat prope Fort M‘Donald. Found by Mr. F. Layard at an altitude of 4500 feet on the central mountain mass of the Island of Ceylon. Its nearest Indian ally in form is the Darjiling C. Jos, from which it may at once be distinguished by its sculpture, teeth, and internal plice. This is the first species of the genus which has been found in Ceylon. No representative has yet occurred in Southern or Central India. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x1. fi 90 Mr. W. H. Benson on new Land-Shells. 6. Spiraxis Haughton, B., n. sp. S. testa imperforata, oblongo-conica, subturrita, solida, striata, versus suturam et apicem costulato-striata, albida, epidermide olivacea minutissime corrugata induta; spira elongato-conica, versus apicem obtusiusculum subito attenuata, sutura impressa; anfractibus 7, vix convexiusculis, subplanulatis, ultimo ad peripheriam subangu- lato; apertura vix obliqua, ovato-elliptica, intus czeruleo-albida, margine dextro tenui, acuto, columellari calloso, planato, expansi- usculo, versus basin leviter emarginato, marginibus callo, tenui expanso junctis. Long. 20-30, diam. 10-11 mill. ; apert. long. 11, lat. 5 mill. Var. oxynter testa elongato-turrita, graciliore. Long. 30, diam. 8 mill. Habitat ad Portum Blair insularum Andamanicarum. This species was, I believe, first discovered by Dr. Walker, Superintendent of the Settlement ; but the most perfect speci- mens, with the epidermis in fine condition, were received from his successor, Major Haughton. There is a tendency in the stouter form to verge towards the variety which I have called oxynter, although the extreme spe- cimens might be considered as separate species. A single spe- cimen of this variety was sent by Major Haughton. 7. Spiraxis Walker, B., n. sp. S. testa imperforata, cylindraceo-turrita, arcuato-striatissima, sub epidermide albida; spira gracili, apice obtuso, sutura profundius- cula; anfractibus 9, convexiusculis ; apertura obliqua, elliptica ; margine dextro tenui, acuto, superne arcuato, columellari calloso, subito revoluto. Long. 14, diam. 33 mill. Habitat ad Portum Blair. None of the specimens sent by Major Haughton possess a perfect epidermis, and all are more or less injured at the aper- ture. 8. Spiraxis Layard, B., u. sp. S. testa imperforata, elongato-turrita, tenui, arcuato-striatula, albida, epidermide tenui polita cornea induta; spira elongata, apice ob- tuso, sutura profundiuscula, nonnunquam eroso-denticulata ; an- fractibus 73, convexis, ultimo pone columellam impresso ; apertura obliqua, elongato-ovata, superne angustata; peristomate tenui, acuto; labro arcuato, margine columellari incrassato, modice torto. Long. 123, diam. 4 mill.; apert. long. 4, diam. vix 2 mill. Habitat ad Moopana, Bootelle, &c., insulze Ceylon. This shell, the first of the genus noted from Ceylon, was col- lected by Mr. Frederick Layard. Specimens with the polished epidermis were very scarce. Cheltenham, Jan. 5, 1863. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 91 ADDENDUM. 9. Spiraxis Cingalensis, B., n. sp. S. testa subrimata, subulato-turrita, gracili, solida, polita, striatula, striis minutis confertissimis undulatis spiralibus decussata; spira elongata, superne sensim attenuata, apice ? sutura vix im- pressa, irregulari; anfractibus superstitibus 11 (apicalibus defi- cientibus), planulatis, ultimo ad basin rotundato ; apertura sub- obliqua, emarginato-elliptica ; peristomate recto, intus ad angulum superiorem calloso ; margine dextro superne arcuato, basali incras- sato, columellari calloso, expansiusculo, subreflexo, superne plica obliqua spirali solida munito. Long. 14, diam. 3 mill.; apert. long. 3, diam. 14 mill. Habitat ad Weelgamoowe, Matelle, Ceylon. A single specimen of this peculiar form is in Mr. F. Layard’s collection. It is a dead shell, and is deficient in the superior whorls. I had not seen it before the previous part of this paper was in type. January 8. XIII.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W. K. Parker, M. Mier. Soc., and T. R. Jongs, F.G.S. Part VIII.— Teztularia. As the typical Bulimine have a strong resemblance externally to a Bulimus, so the large Textularia trochus, D’Orb., insensibly losing itself in 7. ¢turris, D’Orb., brings to mind the shape of the Trochus among Mollusca. The mimetic T. trochus, however, can scarcely be considered as the type of this very variable spe- cies; for the circularity of the transverse section or of the base of the cone is rather to be regarded as an extreme condition,— the conical forms of Textularia being homomorphous with the short forms of Bulimina variabilis and the broadly conical poly- stomous Valvulina. Teaxtularia agglutinans, D’Orb., oval in its transverse section, and with more or less irregular gibbosity of its chambers, gives, in its ordinary and moderately developed condition, a fuller idea of the species than any other variety. The 7. sagittula of De- france was the first to receive the generic name. It is smaller than the foregoing, and more compressed, and leads down to the most delicate variety, 7. pygmea, D’Orb. It does not present the mean of the specific characters, however, and thus does not supply a fair type of the species. Among the very minute organisms to be seen in marine de- posits, recent and fossil (such as chalk-dust and the mud of the Clam-beds of the Hast Indies), are tiny, delicate, translucent * 92 Messrs. W. K. Parker and T. R. Jones on the Foraminifers, consisting of symmetrically arranged globose cells, alternately placed along the axis of the shell, and rapidly in- creasing in size. These may be grouped in two sorts,—one biserial (Textularia; T. globulosa, Ehrenberg), and the other triserial (Verneuilina; V. pygmea, Kgger,sp.): the former prevails in the Chalk; and both kinds are abundant in deep seas (Red Sea, &c.). These present conditions very analogous to what obtains in other allied forms, and, like the small and delicate varieties of Bulimina, Uvigerina, Globigerina, and Rotalia (espe- cially R. Beccarii in shallow water), appear to owe their origin to one or other of the following conditions :—an excessive abun- dance of individuals, local brackishness of shallow water, or extreme and abyssal depth. Such very simply constructed forms, arrested at an early stage of growth, require great care in the observer who would arrange them specifically; and unless the little, almost transparent shell under the microscope be turned in all directions, and compared with its homomorphs in other groups, no certainty can be attaied to: seen in Canada-balsam or other liquids, or in transparent sections of rock-specimens, its nature can only be guessed at. Referrmg to Dr. Carpenter’s ‘Introduction to the Study of Foraminifera’ (Ray Society), 1862, p. 190, &c., for an account of the structure and relations of Textularia, we may state Fig. 1. that it is one of the most polymorphic and protean spe- cies of Foraminifera. Its morphology is more complex than that of Nodosarina. The first four or five chambers are often arranged in a flat Nautiloid spire (like that of ‘ Rotalia or Operculina); but this direction of the coil is soon changed, and the long and more or less compressed spire, with its biserial alternating chambers, is formed. With an almost tendril-like freedom of growth, the spire | varies widely in its proportions in different varieties. (* The nautiloid coil occurs in the flattened “ Bigenerine” condition of Textularia ; but here further licence is taken, | the shell finishing with a szngle series of chambers, and thus presenting a Trigenerine state. This trimorphism has been observed in certain individuals allied to 7. prelonga, from the Gault ; for in some Gault-clays, pro- bably of deep-sea origin, this variety commences with a flat spiral coil, then becomes biserial with an alterna- tion of chambers (Textularian), and ends uniserially, Textularia This Trigenerine variety occurs fossil also in the Oolite- 2.44.’ clays. As a useful varietal form, it deserves a distinguishing name, and may be termed Tewtularia annectens (fig. 1). Textularia prelonga, Reuss, has very often a coiled commence- ment (it is figured thus in Eley’s ‘ Geology in the Garden, pl. 3. Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 93 fig. 15, and pl. 9. fig. 15, p.196); and Bigenerine Tewxtularie with a coiled commencement occur in Baffin’s Bay. So also 7, carinata, D’Orb., is often coiled in its early stage, especially the specimens found in the London Clay; and the coiled condition of Grammostomum capreolus, D’Orb., is well and boldly illus- trated by Soldani in his ‘ Testaceograph.’ vol. i. part 2, pl. 108. G. capreolus and its subvarieties may be either coiled and bi- serial, or coiled, biserial, and uniserial (offering a form equivalent to Textularia annectens), or bi- and uniserial without the coil. It is often sandy, and of a large relative size; it occurs in the West Indies, and abounds in the Adriatic. Some of the shells arranged as Gaudryina (for instance, G. siphonella, Reuss) have their triple series of chambers sv twisted on the axis as to have a Buliminoid aspect. We possess a very beautiful specimen of this kind from the Tertiary beds of San Domingo. A slight approach to this condition occurs in the Verneuilina polystropha (Bulimina polystropha, Reuss), which we have found to be very common in the living state in Davis’s Straits (Baffin’s Bay), St. George’s Bay (Beyrout), Syra (Greek Archipelago), Abrolhos Bank, &c. A large proportion of the Textularie may be clear-shelled and tubuliferous, as the smaller individuals of Textularia proper, Grammostomum, and Verneuilina. Others are opake-shelled, because arenaceous. The calcareous cement of the shell-matter in many (Verneuilina polystropha and Bigenerina digitata) is of a ferruginous colour in the recent state, the substance of the shell having the rusty-red colour of the recent Litwola—a colour which, with other tints, occurs in both opake and clear-shelled Foraminifers*. All the larger varieties of Textularia are arenaceous ; but there is a host of small forms (many of which have been ho- noured by authors with specific appellations) entirely free from foreign matter, the shell being composed of finely perforated clear substance. These are at first sight often undistinguishable from D’Orbigny’s Bolivine (which may be said to be Textulari- form Bulimine). The larger forms, 7. trochus, T. turris, T. ag- glutinans, and T. gibbusa (essentially hyaline im their shell- structure), strengthen themselves not only with sand-grains, but * The same species of Foraminifera may be very variable in tint when taken from different habitats. Orbitolites may be either rust-coloured, livid, or pink (usually the last). In Miliola the aperture is sometimes rusty ; and sandy specimens are sometimes altogether rust-coloured, espe- cially Quinqueloculina agglutinans. Peneroplis is pmk when alive. Alveo- lina is sometimes pink, sometimes rusty. Globigerina has a beautiful pink colour. Planorbulina farcta is livid or purplish in the Mediterranean, P. vulgaris of Australia is livid; im the Indian Sea it is rosy pink; and often it is destitute of colour. ‘94 Messrs. W. K. Parker and T. R. Jones on the (as is also the habit of Valvulina) acquire some degree of rude ornament from the accretion of smaller Foraminifers, sponge- spicules, and prismatic fragments of molluscan shells. The lear and porous shell, in small and medium-sized specimens, occasionally has the pores projected as short tubes; this is well shown in a little Bigenerme Textularia in the Eocene deposits of Grignon, which is closely related to 7. pectinata, Reuss (Denkschr. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, 1850, i. pl. 49. f. 2, 3), from the Vienna Basin, but is characterized by its relatively few pseudo- podian passages being elongated as short tubes all over the sur- face (fig. 2). Planorbulina farcta has very small deep-sea varieties with similar structure—for instance, Rotalia reticulata, Czjzek, Haid. Nat. Abhandl. 11.1848, pl.13. f.7-9 (= Siphonia fimbriata, Reuss, Denks. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, 1. 1850, pl. 47. f. 6) (fig.3): these tubuliferous Planorbuline are not uncommon in the Red Sea and elsewhere, and both recent and fossil in the Mediterranean area. Textularia (Bigenerina) Planorbulina farcta, tubulifera, P. f J. var. reticulata, Czjzek. Like some of the small varieties of Bulimina, the little, parti- cularly clear Textularie frequently develope a crest with prickles, as is well seen in the 7. carinata, D’Orb., so common in the London and other Tertiary clays. The large Textularia trochus of the Miocene Sands of San Domingo adopts the habit of Zituola in subdividing its cham- bers ; so that each lobule of sarcode must itself have been most minutely lobulated. This labyrinthic condition is seen in a less degree in the large 7. agglutinans* of the Suffolk Crag. As in Bulimina, so in Textularia proper, the aperture is the diagnostic mark. It is merely a low transverse arch having for its base the middle of the septal plane of the penultimate chamber: generally the aperture has not a thickened margin; but sometimes it is slightly lipped. In many of the Textularian varieties the aperture gets more and more in the substance of the septal plane, passing upwards towards the apex of the con- * For many splendid specimens of this shell, and also of T. turris and T. gibbosa, from the same deposit, we are indebted to Searles Wood, Esq., F.G.S. Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 95 vexity of the septum, and thus becoming terminal. In this way it takes the form of a vertical slit-like aperture (generally with- out a margin) in Grammostomum (a compressed Teatularia) both in the monomorphous and dimorphous forms, and especially in the large individuals. Ehrenberg’s Proroporus (as illustrated by Reuss, Sitzungsb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xl. p. 231, pl. 12. fig. 5) is an elongate Textularia with its aperture terminal or nearly so. In Gaudryina and the sandy Sayrina the aperture is gene- rally more or less margined and terminal. In Verneuilina the later cells have the aperture more and more axial; the ter- minal chamber in large specimens having a central aperture, generally unlipped: these form Reuss’s genus Jritazia*. In the bi- uniserial varieties, also, of Textularia the mouth becomes central and pouting. A most complete confluence of all these Textularian forms, whether varying in the mode of growth, the size and shape of chambers, or position of aperture, is proved by the countless intermediate modifications yielded by most sea-bottoms, fossil and recent. The chief forms of Textularian growth may be thus enume- rated :— Textularia proper. Biserial, with transverse aperture at the base of the chamber. Bigenerina. Biserial, becoming uniserial (bi- uniserial) ; with a terminal, round, pouting aperture. Grammostomum. Usually biserial, extremely compressed ; with simple slit-like aperture at the end of the chamber : occasion- ally bimorphous or even trimorphous. Sagrina (in part : S. rugosat, D’Orb., sandy). Biserial and some- times tri- biserial; and then uniserial as far as one chamber ; with a pouting, round terminal aperture. Gaudryina begins triserially (Verneuiline), and generally ends biserially, the last aperture being Textularian ; but it runs insensibly into the foregoing. Some Gaudryine are twisted and Buliminoid. Verneuilina. Triserial. V. dubia (Reuss) = Uvigerina tricarinata, D’Orb., takes in its last chamber a central aperture (T7ritazia, Reuss): another single chamber makes it Clavuline. In V. dubia the aperture may be seen, in a series of specimens, to creep up from the base of the cell to the top. Clavulina (part). Those Verneuiline takmg on a uniserial * Sitzungsberichte Akad. Wiss. Wien, 1860, vol. xl. p. 83. + The other Sagrina (S. pulchella, D’Orb. For. Cuba, pl. 1. figs. 23, 24) (biserial, ribbed, and not sandy) is a Uvigerina. 96 Messrs. W. K. Parker and T. R. Jones on the chamber, with a round, pouting, central aperture, and no valve *, Textularie ave widely distributed: one and the same deposit usually yields many varieties ; indeed, it is a world-wide species, and it seems to thrive equally well off the North Cape and in the East Indian Seas. The largest specimens are 7’. gibbosa, T. agglutinans, and the conical T. trochus and T. turris. Shelly sands and shelly clays yield the largest Textularie at from 30 to 100 fathoms, 60 to 70 fathoms being the best depth (coast of Sicily ; English Channel ; off Vigo and Ushant; and Southern Australia). Textularia sagittula generally occurs in company with the large-sized Textularie, and is very common in all seas at a moderate depth. Remarkably large specimens of T. carinata (which usually occurs of small size) are found in the rich Nodo- sarian clay of the Vienna Basin; also recent in the line of soundings off South Arabia, between Socotra and Kurachee. The London Clay yields three varieties of Textularia—a glo- bose-chambered form, a compressed carinate form, often with a flat spiral commencement (7’. carinata, D’Orb.), and the tri- uniserial form (Clavulina communist). The Chalk and Chalk-marl are very rich in Textularian forms, especially 7. trochus, T. turris, T. prelonga, and other true Textularie, as well as Verneuilina triquetra, V. dubia, &e. The Gault of Biggleswade, Bedfordshire, appears to have been depo- sited in a deeper sea than the Gault of Kent was, if we judge by the varieties of Textularia and other genera, compared with recent conditions. It yields Textularie not only having the coiled commencement, but becoming uniserial (7. annectens). Textularia occurs in the Silurian greensand of St. Petersburg ; in the Carboniferous and Permian limestones ; plentifully (usually small, but large when Verneuiline) in some of the clays of the Oolites; abundantly in the Cretaceous rocks; and plentifully and varied in the Tertiary deposits. A List of some of the Textulariz proper. 1826. Textularia gibbosa, D’Orb. Modéles, No. 28; Ann. Se. Nat. vii. p- 262. No. 6. 1826. Textularia pygmea, D’Orb. Modéles, No. 7; Ann. Se. Nat. vii. . 263. No. 13. 1828. Textularia sagittula, Defrance, Dict. Se. Nat. vol. xxii. p. 344, pl. 13. f. 5. * Clavulina Parisiensis, D’Orb., Modéles, No. 66, is certainly a tri- uniserial Valvulina with the loss of the little ip—an accident common to the brittle Grignon fossils. Clavulina nodosaria, D’Orb., is a Bigenerine Textularia. + Nodosaria rustica, Jones, Morris, Catal. Brit. Foss. 1854, p. 38. Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 97 1839. Textularia agglutinans, D’Ord. For. Cuba, pl. 1. f. 32-34. [The type. | 1839. Textularia globulosa, Ehrenberg, Abhandl. Akad. Berlin (1838), 1839, pl. 4 (several figs.). 1840. Textularia trochus, D’Orb. M.S. G. Fr. iv. p. 45, pl. 4. f.25, 26. 1840. Textularia turris, D’Orb. M.S. G. Fr. iv. p. 46, pl. 4. f. 27, 28. 1845. Textularia pralonga, Reuss, Bohm. Kreid. i. p. 39, pl. 12. f. 14. 1846. Textularia carinata, D’Orb. For. Foss. Vien. p. 247, pl. 14. f. 32-34. A Lust of several of the best-known Varieties, Passage-forms, or Polymorphs of Textularia, with Remarks on their Synonymy. 1826. Vulvulina* capreolus, D’Orb. Modéles, No. 59; Ann. Se. Nat. vii. p. 264. No. 1, pl. 11. f. 5-7. » Vulvulina elegans, D’Ord. Ann. Se. Nat. vii. p. 264. No. 3. » Bigenerina nodosaria, D’Orb. Modéles, No. 57; Ann. Se. Nat. vii. p: 261. No. 1, pl. 11. f. 9-12. » Bigenerina digitata, D’Orb. Modéles, No. 58. [Gemmulina digitata, D’Orb. Ann. Se. Nat. vii. p. 262. No. 4.] 1838. Textularia triquetra, Minster, N. Jahrb. 1838, pl. 3. f. 19. [Ver- neuilina. | » Bigenerina pusilla, Roemer, N. Jahrb. 1838, pl. 3. f. 20. [B. nodo- saria, D’ Orb. | 1839. Vulvulina gramen, D’ Ord. For. Cuba, pl. 1. f. 30, 31. », Candeina nitida, D’Orbd. For. Cuba, pl. 2. f. 19, 20. [A small Ver- neuilina, showing afew pseudopodial passages near the junctures of the cells. | » Clavulina nodosaria, D’Orb. For. Cuba, pl. 2. f.19, 20. [Bigenerina nodosaria, D’ Orb. 1840. Verneuilina tricarinata, D’Orb. Mém. Soc. Géol. France, iv. p. 39, pl. 4. f. 3,4. [V. triquetra, Miinster. | », Uvigerina tricarinata, D’Orb. M.S. G. Fr. iv. p. 42, pl. 4. f. 16, 17. [ Verneuilina (Tritaxia) dubia, Reuss. | », Gaudryina rugosa, D’Orb. M.S. G. Fr. iv. p. 44, pl. 4. f. 20, 21. », Gaudryina pupoides, D’Orb. M.S. G. Fr. iv. p. 44, pl. 4. f. 22, 24. » Sagrina rugosa, D’Orb. M.S. G. Fr. iv. p. 47, pl. 4. f. 31, 32. 1845- Textularia triquetra, Miinst., Reuss, Bohm. Kreid. pl. 13. f. 77. 1846. [| Verneuilina. | ,, Bulimina polystropha, Reuss, Bohm. Kreid. ii. p. 109, pl. 24, f. 53. | Verneuilina; sandy, swollen, twisted. | », Textularia tricarinata, Reuss, Bohm. Kreid. pl. 8. f. 60. [ Verneui- lina triquetra, Miinst. | » Verneuilina Bronni, Reuss, Bohm. Kreid. pl. 12. f. 5. [V. triquetra, Minster. | 1846. Clavulina communis, D’Orb. For. Foss. Vien. pl. 12. f. 1. [Verneui- lina, tri- uniserial; or Clavuline Verneuilina. | » Bigenerina agglutinans, D’Orb. For. Foss. Vien. pl. 14. f.8-10. [B. nodosaria, D’Orb., elongate. | » Verneuilina tricarinata, D’Orb. For. Foss. Vien. pl. 21. f. 26, 27. LV. triquetra, Miinster. | », Gaudryina pupoides, D’ Ord. For. Foss. Vien. pl. 21. f. 34,35 [not 36]. » Vulvulina gramen, D’Orb. For. Foss. Vien. pl. 21. f. 46, 47. 1850. Verneuilina spinulosa, Reuss, Denkschr. Wien, i. pl. 47. f. 12. » Gaudryina Badensis, Reuss, Denkschr. Wien, i. pl. 47. f. 14. * This term, disused by D’Orbigny, is well replaced by Grammostomum, Ehrenberg. 98 Mr. A. Adams on the Genera and Species of 1851. Verneuilina Bronni, Reuss. Nat. Abhandl. iv. pl. 5. f. 2. [V. tri- quetra, Miinst. | Verneuilina dubia, Reuss, Nat. Abhandl. iv. pl. 5. f. 3. [Tritaxia, Reuss. Gouin Ruthenica, Reuss, Nat. Abhandl. iv. pl. 5. f.4. [Sagrina, D? Orb. Gaudryina siphonella, Reuss, Zeitsch. Deutsch. Geol. Ges. iu. pl. 5. f. 40-42. [Sagrina, D’Orbd. | Grammostomum dilatatum, Reuss, Zeitsch. Deutsch. Geol. Ges. iii. pl. 8. f. 8. [G. capreolus, D’Orb. | 1854. Nodosaria rustica, Jones, Morris’s Cat. Brit. Foss. 2nd. edit. p. 38. {Clavulina communis, D’Orb.; a Clavuline Verneuilina. | Verneuilina Muensteri, Reuss, Denks. Wien, vii. pl. 26. f. 5. [V. triquetra, Miinst. | Polymorphina silicea, Schultze, Org. Polyth. pl. 6. f. 10, 11. [Ver- neuilina polystropha, Reuss. | 1857. Bulimina arenacea, Williamson, Brit. Foram. pl. 5. f. 136, 137. [ Verneuilina polystropha, Reuss. ] Bulimina tuberculata, Egger, N. Jahrb. 1857, p. 284, pl. 12. f. 4-7. [ Verneuilina polystropha, Reuss. | » Bulimina pygmea, Egger, N. Jahrb. 1857, p. 284, pl. 12. f. 10, 11. [ Verneuilina ; smooth, inflated, twisted. ] 1860. Tritaxia tricarimata, Reuss, Sitz. Akad. Wien, 1860, vol. xl. p. 83, pl. 12. f. 1, 2. [Verneuilina, with central aperture. | XIV.—On the Genera and Species of Recent Brachiopods found in the Seas of Japan. By Arruur Apams, F.L.S. &c. THE result of my investigations into the geographical distribu- tion of the Terebratulide in Japanese waters shows that the North-European, the North-Asiatic, and the Indo-Pacific pro- vinces require to be united as regards these Mollusks. Besides Waldheimia Grayi, Terebratulina Japonica, and Terebratella Co- reanica, the North-Asiatic province yielded me Waldheimia cra- nium, W. septigera, and Terebratulina caput-serpentis. I likewise obtained Waldheimia picta, Terebratulina Cumingii, and Ismenia sanguinea, which were supposed to be confined to the Indo- Pacific province. Fam. Terebratulide. Subfam. TEREBRATULINA. Genus TrereBratuLina, D’Orb. 1. Terebratulina Japonica, Sow. Hab. Gotto; 48 fathoms. Tsusaki; 55 fathoms. 2. Terebratulina caput-serpentis, Linn. Hab. Tsusaki; 55 fathoms. Tsu-Sima; 26 fathoms. Mino- Sima; 63 fathoms. “Recent Brachiopods found in the Seas of Japan. 99 3. Terebratulina Cumingii, Davids. Hab. Tsu-Sima; 26 fathoms. Mino-Sima; 63 fathoms. Genus Watpuermia, King. 1. Waldheimia cranium, Gmel. Hab. Kuro-Sima; 35 fathoms. 2. Waldheimia septigera, Lovén. Hab. Satanomosaki; 55 fathoms. 3. Waldheimia picta, Chem. Hab. Satanomosaki; 55 fathoms. 8 4. Waldheimia Grayi, Davids. Hab. Hakodadi; Mososeki; 7 fathoms. Subfam. MaGAsIn«&. Genus TEREBRATELLA, D’Orb. 1. Terebratella Coreanica, Adams & Reeve. Hab. Hakodadi; 7 fathoms. Straits of Korea; 48 fathoms. This is 7. minzata, Gould. 2. Terebratella Marie, A. Adams (‘ Annals,’ 1860). Hab. Uraga; 21 fathoms. Gotto; 48 fathoms. Satanomosaki ; 55 fathoms. The only species at all resembling this is T. Spitzbergensis, described by Davidson in the ‘ Annals’ for 1852, and founded on a single specimen in the Cumingian collection. Genus IsmEnta, Gray. 1. Ismenia sanguinea, Chem. Hab. Mino-Sima; 63 fathoms. 2. Ismenia Reever, A. Adams. I. testa suborbiculari, globoso-lenticulari, punctata, alba, leevi, nitida, ad umbones acuminata, marginibus regulariter arcuatis; valva ventrali ventricosa, dorsali planiuscula ; foramine modico, integro, circulari. Hab. Gotto; 48 fathoms. A large pure-white species, conspicuously punctate. The loop is trebly attached, as in Megerlia ; but the shell externally has the aspect of Terebratella. 100 Mr. A. Adams on the Recent Japanese Brachiopods. Fam. Rhynchonellide. Genus RuHyNCHONELLA, Fischer. 1. Rhynchonella lucida, Gould. Hab. Satanomosaki; 55 fathoms. Gotto; 48 fathoms. Dr. Gould observes that this species might be taken for a small 7. vitrea, but is very thin and delicate, and further dis- tinguished by the absence of punctures. His examples were dredged off the Japan coast, 380° 35! N., 130° 40! E., in 110 fa- thoms sand, by Capt. Stevens, of the ‘ Hancock.’ 2. Rhynchonella Woodwardu, A. Adams. R. testa subtrigonulari, tumida, nigricante, semiopaca; valvis sub- zequalibus, impunctatis, concentrice striolatis ; umbone rostriformi, parvo, curvato, apice acuto ; margine ventrali rotundato, in medio producto. Hab. Rifunsiri; 35 fathoms. Gotto; 48 fathoms. This species differs from R. psittacea in being concentrically striolate instead of radiately grooved; the beak, moreover, is smaller and less curved; the form is more broadly triangular, and the ventral margin is rounded and produced in the middle. The young possess the same characters seen in more adult specimens. Fam. Craniide. Genus Cranta, Retzius. Crania Japonica, A. Adams. C. testa crassa, solida, suborbiculari; valva superiore convexa, ru- gosa, apice elato, subcentrali; margine irregulari ; impressionibus muscularibus validis, rotundatis, apophysi interna bifurcata, pro- minente ; impressione pallii multilobata. Hab. Gotto Islands; 71 fathoms. A very distinct and well-marked species, with the bifurcate process in the upper valve very prominent and conspicuous. Fam. Discinide. Genus Discina, Lamarck. Discina stella, Gould. Hab. Seto-Uchi (Akasi); 17 fathoms. Tsu-Sima; 17 fathoms. Tabu-Sima; 26 fathoms, ‘on coral. Tsu-Sima; 25 fathoms. Fam. Lingulide. Genus Linevra, Brug. 1. Lingula tumidula, Reeve, Conch. Icon. sp. 2. Hab. Tsaulian; 7 fathoms, mud. L. Stieda on the Teenie. 101 2. Lingula smaragdina, A. Adams. L. testa oblonga, lateribus rectiusculis, ad umbones attenuata, ad marginem ventralem subtruncata; carina dorsali valida, promi- nente; glabra, nitente, viridissima. Hab. Yobuko; 10 fathoms, mud. A bright green species, found also in the China Sea, and most nearly resembling L. hirundo, Reeve. 3. Lingula jaspidea, A. Adams. I. testa oblongo-ovali, lateribus convexis, ad umbones subdilatata; margine ventrali arcuato; carina dorsali mediocri, subdepressa ; glabra, nitente, subviridi-lutescente, antice pallidiore, rufo-fusco tincta. Hab. Mososeki; 7 fathoms, mud. 4. Lingula lepidula, A. Adams. L. testa oblongo-ovali, umbonibus acutis, productis, lateribus con- vexis, dilatatis, membranaceis ; margine ventrali rotundato ; carina dorsali depressa; glabra, nitente, luteo-cornea, in medio albida. Hab. Seto-Uchi (Akasi) ; 10 fathoms, mud. A species as small as L. semen, and shaped like L. ovals. XV.—A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Teenie. By Lupwie Srrepa*. Or the numerous Cestodea forming the group of the Tenioidea, scarcely any except the cystic Tni@ have hitherto been particu- larly investigated in respect to the generative organs, the other Tenie having received little attention. The different forms, however, as has already been shown by Pagenstecher’s descrip- tion of the several organs of Tenia microsomat, present very peculiar structures, differing in many parts from the arrange- ment of the sexual organs occurring in the cystic Tenie@; and these are of more importance inasmuch as the different structure of the generative organs will enable us to found a more certain and natural classification of the innumerable Tenzoidea than has hitherto been possible. For this reason I hope that the present short communication, in which I have endeavoured to describe the generative organs of certain Tenia, some of them unknown, others imperfectly known, will not be entirely destitute of in- terest. In the small intestine of the Field-Mouse (Hypudeus arvalis) * Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1862, p- 200. + Zeitschr. fiir wiss. Zool. ix. p. 523. 102 L. Stieda on the Teenize. there is frequently a Tapeworm of considerable size, which, ac- cording to the character given by Dujardin* with especial refer- ence to the habitat, I must regard as the Tenia omphalodes, Hermann. This Tenia is 120-160 mill. in length; the head is quadran- gular, measures 1°5-2'5 mill., and is distinctly separated from the body of the Tapeworm ; it possesses neither a proboscis nor a circlet of hooks, but only four round sucking-disks, 0°35 mill. in diameter. The so-called neck, on which no joints are per- ceived, even by the microscope, is 1°5-2°5 mill. in length, and 1 mill. in breadth. The succeeding, distinctly recognizable joints increase rapidly in breadth, so that at a distance of 25-35 mill. from the head the joints are already 4—5 mill. broad. The joints do not, however, maintain this breadth, but diminish in the lowest part of the worm to 3 mill. The length of the joints increases very gradually, but constantly; the broadest joints are 4-1 mill. in length, so that they are about five times as broad as long; the last jomts are about 2 mill. in length. In consequence of this shortness of the joints, the Tapeworm, in its upper parts, has a very finely striated appearance, whilst it is only in the lower parts that, as the jomts become longer, the notched form more or less peculiar to the Tapeworms in general manifests itself. The sexual orifices do not occur always upon the same side, but, in irregular sections, sometimes on one and sometimes on the other side. The number of joints forming the Tapeworm may be ascertained to be 250-800 by direct count- ing, which must be effected, on the parts nearest to the head, by means of the microscope. A perfectly developed uterus, with distinctly recognizable ova, is exhibited by the first joints of the third hundred ; fully developed embryos occur about twenty-five joints further on. In the 40-50 joints lying nearest to the head no development of sexual organs can be recognized, but in the part of each joint in which the sexual organs are to be produced there is a greater accumulation of cells. This becomes gradually differentiated in this way :—a rounded mass, from which the female germ-pre- paring organs are developed, becomes marked off in the middle line of the joint, on the one side from a mass situated on the lateral margin of the joint, and destined to produce the testes, and on the other from a small elongated mass of cells deposited on the opposite margin of the joint, and which serves for the development of the germiducal organs. In the following jomts (40-80), which increase chiefly in breadth, the testes are first of all developed. From the mass which is situated on the side opposite to the genital pore a large * Hist. Nat. des Helminthes, p. 578. L. Stieda on the Teenie. 103 group of small roundish corpuscles, measuring 0:035—-0:056 mill., is formed ; these, gradually increasing in size and number, soon occupy one-half of the jot. These corpuscles appear at first finely granular, afterwards pale and transparent, and represent the well-known testicular vesicles or testicular tubes of the Tenie. Transverse sections show that these testicular vesicles are enclosed by a fine structureless membrane, and still contain in the interior a cellular mass, whilst the fine, delicate, very long seminal filaments already occur rolled up at the margin. Some- times a fine efferent duct may be detected on these corpuscles. At the same time, on the side of the joint opposite to the testis, an elongated vesicle is formed from the aggregation of cells there occurring; this is 0°210 mill. in length, and 0-070 mill. in breadth at its widest part. This is the cirrus-pouch, which is somewhat pointed at the extremity turned towards the median line of the joint, and applies itself with the other (rounded) end to the genital pore. It contains the penis or lemniscus, which is 0-056 mill. in length, and 0-014 mill. in breadth. This is continued into the vas deferens, which disappears behind the cirrus-pouch, without forming any loops. In favourable trans- verse sections, however, it may be traced beyond the median line of the joint. I have never seen any connexion between it and the above-described fine efferent ducts of the testes. In the following joints (80-100), whilst the testicular vesicles and cirrus-pouch still further increase in size, the female organs also make their appearance. While previously there was only an indistinctly limited organ of undefined appearance between the testes and cirrus-pouch, we may now distinguish two organs distinctly separated from each other in form and contents. At the lower margin of each joint there is an elliptical body, with its longest axis placed in the transverse diameter of the joint ; this is the germ-stock, which measures 0-0280-0:0350 mill. in length, and 0-210 mill. in breadth, and appears to be filled with finely granular contents. Below, the germ-stock is pretty sharply defined; but above, its limits are not so distinctly marked, because the yelk-stocks are situated upon it. The latter occupy the space between the germ-stock and the upper margin of the joint, spreading out right and left; they appear as if composed of a number of larger and smaller czeca, which seem to unite at the median line of the jomt. ‘Their contents (as may be seen by tearing them to pieces, and still more distinctly in transverse sections) are coarsely granular, consisting of a quantity of very small, homogeneous, strongly refractive corpuscles. At the lower margin of the cirrus-pouch there is a more or less distinctly projecting canal, which is somewhat dilated at its orifice in the genital pore. This canal, which is 0-021 mill. in diameter at its 104 L. Stieda on the Teeniz. orifice, but subsequently only 0-007—0-014 mill., represents the vagina. Close behind the end of the cirrus-pouch which is turned towards the median line of the joint, this canal becomes suddenly dilated to the considerable size of 0°070 mill.: the limits of this dilatation escape detection in the vicinity of the germ-stock and yelk-stock ; so that it would appear as if the dilatation pushed itself in between those organs. I have not been able to discover any connexion between the dilatation of the vaginal canal and the germ-producing organs. The con- tents of this dilatation consist, as may easily be ascertained, of seminal filaments; so that we have to do, according to this, only with a remarkably extended seminal pouch of the vagina, or a receptaculum seminis. Whilst now the receptaculum seminis becomes more and more filled by increased reception of semen, and the germ-stock and yelk-stocks become more and more extended, the testes undergo a retrograde metamorphosis, and gradually disappear. At about the 150th joint the first indication of the uterus makes its appearance. Both at the upper margin and at the two lateral margins the uterus appears as a cavity in the paren- chyma of the body, furnished with diverticula and filled with a mass resembling the contents of the yelk-stocks. The following joints present the different degrees of development of the uterus, whilst the other organs gradually disappear. Towards the end of the second hundred segments, in which the uterus is shown in its full development, of the other organs only the cirrus-pouch and vaginal canal, with the receptaculum seminis, are retained ; the latter organs are completely pressed down to the lower mar- gin of the jot, and have considerably diminished in extent. The form of the uterus is characteristic, in that its principal stem, corresponding with the short but broad form of the pro- glottides, runs transversely, whilst the lateral branches or the individual diverticula are arranged in the direction of the length of the joint. As the development of the ova was not sufficiently observed by me, I only add a few words upon the mature ova found in the last proglottides. These appear smooth and perfectly round; they are 0:035-0:042 mill. in diameter, and possess two enve- lopes, of which the outer one, 0°0035 mill. in thickness, presents a stratified appearance, whilst the other, which is closely applied to the embryo, on which the embryonal hooks are scarcely visi- ble, appears to be very fine and structureless. In the small intestines of the Pield-Mouse there was some- times, although but rarely, another Tenia, to which I here refer because it perfectly agrees, in regard to the genital apparatus, with the 7. omphalodes. JI am not in a position to make very L. Stieda on the Tzeniz. 105 accurate statements as to the length and size of this Tenia, as the examples of it which I have seen were never quite perfect, and, especially, never possessed maturely developed proglottides. I mention only that this Tapeworm exactly resembles the 7. omphalodes in regard to its head and upper part, although it is of rather smaller dimensions; in the lower part, however, it differs in that the joints, as they grow narrower, become con- siderably elongated, so that the last joints are three times as long as broad, and appear somewhat compressed laterally. I regard this Tapeworm as identical with the Tenia pusilla, Goeze, which, indeed, has hitherto only been mentioned as occurring in the common mice and rats, but the description of which suits very well with the present Tapeworm. In the small intestine of the Shrew (Sorex araneus) I have met with two Tapeworms distinctly differmg from each other both in size and in the form of the hooks, which, however, do not agree with the characters given by Dujardin* of some Tenie found by him in the Shrews. I regard them, therefore, as hitherto unknown forms. One of these two Tenia, which occurs very frequently, num- bering from ten to twenty in each Shrew, and which I will de- nominate 7’. wncinata, is 10-15 mill. in length. The head is 0-280 mill. in breadth, has four sucking-disks 0-056 mill. in diameter, and a short proboscis, which has a simple circlet con- sisting of fourteen to eighteen hooks. The head passes imme- diately into the neck, which is but little narrower, and exhibits no segmentation. The number of recognizable joints is about 120. The joints immediately following the neck are 0-182 mill. in breadth; and as they advance they increase both in length and breadth, so that the last joints are about 0°560 mill. broad and 0210 mill. long. The sexual orifices all occur upon one side of the worm, each in the middle of the joint. The hooks have a very characteristic form; they are very strongly curved, and have a rather fine point. The extreme point of the hook is distant from the extremity of the root-process 0:0175 muill., and from that of the dental process only 0°0035 mill.; the two pro- cesses are 0:0140 mill. apart. The various stages of development of the sexual organs as presented in the different joints are not so easy to observe in this Tapeworm as in T. omphalodes. It appears only that in this case also the development commences especially at three points im each joint. One of these points is at the upper margin of each joint, where the cirrus-pouch and vagina are formed, whilst the germ-preparing organs are produced from two aggre- gations of cells situated in the middle of the joint. * Hist. Nat. des Helminthes, p. 562, Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 8 106 L. Stieda on the Teenize. In a sexually mature segment the most striking organ is one situated in the middle, which may be compared, as to its form, with a retort. The neck of this, which is turned towards the margin of the joint, opens into the genital pore, whilst the body of the retort almost touches the lower margin of the joint, and is surrounded here by two other organs. The diameter of the tube at its external orifice is 0:0070 mill., and enlarges to 00105 mill.; the diameter of the body is 0:035-0:052 mill. Its contents consist, as may easily be ascertained, of seminal filaments. Below or above the tube, and often completely con- cealed by it, there is a small vesicle, 0:042 mill. in length and 00105 mill. in breadth, pointed at both ends, which issues above the orifice of the tube in the genital pore. This is the cirrus-pouch, which contains the small, rarely protruded penis : posteriorly the penis passes into the vas deferens, which here also exhibits no loops, but disappears under the retort-like organ. This retort-like organ occurs also, although not constantly, of the same extent and form in other Tapeworms, and was not unknown to previous observers, but has usually received an erroneous signification. By Dujardin, as appears from his de- scriptions and figures of the Tapeworms of the Shrews observed by him (Tenia pistillum, T. tiara, T. scalaris, and T, murina*), it was regarded as the testis opening into the cirrus-pouch—an opinion which has also been expressed very recently by Wein- land+ with regard to the same organ in Tenia flavopunctata, On the other hand, Professor Leuckart, as I learn from his own communication, long since recognized the corresponding organ in Tenia nana as the vaginal canal, with a very greatly dilated receptaculum seminis. From the description above given, no further discussion is necessary as to whether here in Tenia unci- nata we are to recognize in this organ the vagina and the seminal receptacle formed out of it which particularly distinguish this group from that of the cystic Tene. On the portion of the receptacle approximated to the lower margin of the segment lies the elliptical germ-stock, filled with finely granular contents, and measuring 0°025 mill. in length and 0:0]4 mill. in breadth, and on each side the apparently coarsely granular yelk-stocks, I could find no connexion between the germ-stock, yelk-stocks, and receptaculum seminis. The remainder of the joint is occu- pied by from three to five pale transparent testicular vesicles, which are of a round form and 0:035 mill. in diameter. In the segments presenting the next grades of development all the organs, except the cirrus-pouch and the receptaculum seminis, which has a distinct canaliform process to the lower margin of * Helminthes, pp. 562 et seq. + Beschreibung zweier neuer Tanioiden des Menschen: Jena, 1861, p.9. Mr. W. H. Baily on some Coal-measure Crustacea. 107 the joint, have disappeared; on the other hand, the uterus, with its ova, immediately makes its appearance. In this case, how- ever, it does not present, as in other Tenia, the characteristic form, already often compared to a stem and branches, but only forms a sac densely filled with ova, and occupying the whole joint. Each joint contains about 100-150 eggs. The fully developed ova are elliptical, 0-0560 mill. in length and 0:0455 mill. broad ; they present three envelopes, of which the outer- most is smooth and transparent, the intermediate one very thin and slightly folded, and the innermost one, which is closely ap- plied to the embryo, 0:0035 mill. in thickness. The diameter of the six-hooked embryo is 00315 mill. ; the distinctly percep- tible embryonal hooks are 00105 mill. in length. The second Tenia met with in the Shrew, which I will call T. furcata, on account of the forked form of its hooks, is very rare. Its length is 8-10 mill.; the round head, distinctly separated from the neck, is 0°151 mill. in breadth, and possesses four sucking-disks and a short proboscis, which is furnished with a circlet of from twenty-two to twenty-eight hooks. The neck is 0:210 mill. in breadth. The width of the segments increases gradually with the length, so that the broadest seg- ments are 0°56 mill. in breadth and 0-21 mill. in length: the last joints, from which the ova are already removed, exhibit smaller dimensions; they are 0°280 mill. broad, and 0:105 mill. long. The number of distinctly recognizable segments is 100. The genital orifices are all on one side. The hooks are distinguished by a long and thin root-process, which is clearly separated from the true hook-process. The distance from the root-process to the apex of the hook is 0:024 mill.; the apex of the hook is distant 0-005 mill. from the distal process, and the two processes are 0:0210 mill. apart. With regard to the sexual organs and the ova, I have nothing to add, as all that has been said of 7. uncinata applies a to this Tenia, XVI.—Remarks on some Coal-measure Crustacea belonging to the Genus Belinurus, Konig ; with Description of two new Species from Queen’s County y, Ireland. By Wit1u1amM Heuer Bairy, F.G.S.* [Plate V.] THE generic term Belinurus was applied by Konig, in 1820, to a peculiar Crustacean from the Coal-measures, figured and named * An abstract of this paper was read at the Meeting of the British Association in 1858. 8x 108 Mr. W.H. Baily on some Coal-measure Crustacea. by him Belinurus bellulus*; previous to this, Martint gave a figure and short description of this species, which he called En- tomolithus monoculites? (lunatus), including it with Trilobites under the same generic term of Entomolithus, a name which would therefore, according to the rules of nomenclature, be in- admissible. Parkinson { figures a similar fossil from iron- stone found in the Coal-measures of Dudley, which he includes with the 7rilobites, stating at the same time that it appeared to be identical with that described by Martin. The same species is figured and noticed by Dr. Buckland under the name of Limulus trilobitoides§, and afterwards by Mr. Prestwich, in his paper on the Geology of Coalbrook Dale, who adopts the same name, giving a figure of this and other species belonging to the genus, from the Ironstone found in the Coal-measures of Coalbrook Dale||. Lastly, General Portlock figures a specimen, said to be from Carboniferous shale (most probably, however, Coal-measures), Maghera, co. Derry, which he doubtfully refers to the same species§]. Prof. Morris, in his Catalogue of British Fossils, ed. 2, 1854, cites all the above authorities, except Parkinson, referring the same species to Limulus trilobitoides, Buckland. In a paper read by me before the Geological Society of Dublin** a description was given of a specimen (the only one then ob- tained) from Bilboa Colliery, Queen’s County, discovered by Mr. G. H. Kinahan, of the Geological Survey of Ireland, in débris derived from the three-foot bed of shale immediately over the Coal No. III. of the section, Castlecomer district. The accompanying fossils in the same bed of shale were a few scat- tered plant-remains and numerous small bivalve Unio-like shells (probably Myacites), and others of a Mytiloid form, which may be referred to Myalina. In this paper some remarks were offered on the allied species from Coalbrook Dale, which had been in- cluded with it in the genus Limulus ; and it was proposed, from the characteristic differences they presented, and their greater affinity with the Zrilobites, to remove all these Coal-measure Crustacea from that genus, and group them into a new one, under the name of Steropis. Since then, more complete speci- mens have been obtained from Bilboa Colliery, which have * Tcones Fossilium sectiles, by Charles Konig, 1820, pl. 18. fig. 230, T Petrificata Derbiensia, 1809, pl. 45. fig. 4. { Organic Remains, 1811, vol. iii. p. 274, pl. 17. fig. 18. § Bridgewater Treatise, 1836, p. 396, vol.1., & vol. ii. p. 77, t. 46". fig. 3. || ‘Trans. of Geol. Soc. of London, ser. 2. 1840, vol. v. pl. 41. fig. 8. ae the Geology of Londonderry and Tyrone, 1843, p. 316, pl. 24. fig. 11. ** Journal of the Geological Society of Dublin, 1858, vol. viii. p. 89. Mr. W. H. Baily on some Coal-measure Crustacea, 109 still further confirmed my views with regard to the advisability of separating them from Limulus; and, on reconsideration, [ preferred adopting the appropriate name of Belinurus, which was applied by Kénig to one of the most common species, in pre- ference to that under which I had formerly proposed to group them. In the Explanation of Sheet 137 of the Maps of the Geological Survey of Ireland*, I have given a short account of the fossils from the Coal-measures of this district, which includes a notice of these remarkable Crustacea from Bilboa, after visiting the locality, when I was fortunate enough to obtain the very perfect specimen named by me Belinurus Regine, and represented at Pl. V. fig. 1 A.t On another visit, a still more perfect specimen (fig. 1 B) was obtained by the gentleman who accompanied me on that occa- sion, Mr. John Edge, to whom I am indebted for that and the loan of other specimens which have materially assisted me in drawing up these descriptions {. CRUSTACEA. ENTOMOSTRACA. Legion PHCILOPODA. Order Xiphosura. Genus breiinurus, Konig. Etym. Bédos, a dart; ovpa, the tail. Gen. Char.—General form suborbicular. Head or cephalic shield semicircular, slightly arched; the central portion (y/a- bella?) prominent and declinmg towards the circumference, surrounded with a flattened margin, and terminating at its pos- terior angles in long spines. Body composed of five segments, which terminate in spines and diminish gradually towards the * Explanation of Sheet 137, Geol. Survey of Ireland, Paleontological Notes, pp. 12-14. tT Since writing this paper for the British Association, I found that Pictet, in his ‘ Traité de Paléontologie,’ ed. 2, 1854, had anticipated me by removing these Crustacea (as I had proposed to do) from the genus Limulus, restoring them to that of Belinurus, with the following remarks :— “Les Belinurus, Konig, different des deux genres précédents par l’arti- culation de la queue, et surtout parce que le bouclier abdominal présente deux sillons longitudinaux qui lui donnent ne ressemblance avee le corps des Trilobites.”’ The following is from his classification of Crustacea :— Order XIPHOSURA. Genus 1. Limutus. Genus 3. BELINURUS. Genus 2. HALYCINE. Genus 4. PreRYGOTUS. + Lalso take the opportunity to acknowledge the kind assistance I have received from Benj. b. Edge, Esq., J. P., of Clonbrock House, Crettyard, near Carlow, who has aided me, on the several occasions of my visits, with valuable information and the loan of specimens. 110 Mr. W. H. Baily on new Species of Coal-measure Crustacea posterior extremity, ‘Tail or caudal portion small, with a few slight radiating divisions, to which is articulated an elongated spine (telson). Belinurus Regine, n. sp. Pl. V. fig. 1 A-D. Diagnosis.—B. latus, limbo scuti cephalici orbiculari, angulis longi- spinosis; corpore decurtato; thorace quinque articulis longi- spinosis munito ; pleuris sulco longitudinali, usque ad finem spine producto ; tripartita cauda, cui spina preelonga coaptatur. Description.— General form broadly ovate, acuminate poste- riorly ; axis convex. Cephalic shield three and a half times as broad as long, bow-shaped anteriorly, and surrounded by a nar- row and flattened margin; the posterior angles produced into long spines, which are directed outwards; central portion, or elabella, smooth and moderately convex, of the same breadth as the axis of the thorax at its junction, but decreasing gradually towards the anterior margin, having an arched division on each side extending towards the anterior margin. Eyes central, lunate, attached to these divisions. Thoracic rings (somiées) five, the lobes of the first twice as broad as the axis, those of the last rather less in breadth than the axis, the lateral lobes extending in a straight line, each being furrowed and terminating in a spine, the length of which diminishes in regular gradation to- wards the tail; each of the rings of the axis bears a moderate- sized tubercle. Tail or caudal portion very small, having about three slightly marked divisions on each side, to which is ap- pended or articulated (?) an extremely long spine (éelson), beng three times the length of the other portion of the animal, broad at the base, and tapering gradually to a point. Remarks.—The little Crustacean to which I have given the above specific name (PI. V. fig. 1 A) was found by me in the débris of the same coal-pit which yielded the next species; it is in a very perfect condition, and exhibits in a remarkable manner the extravagant development of its various segments into long spines spreading out on each side of the body, and gradually decreasing as they approach the tail, from which proceeds an enormous spine. These characters sufficiently distinguish it from any other species. The head and body in the specimen figured ap- pear to have been a little squeezed together. Another specimen of what I believe to be the same species (fig. 1 B), obtained by Mr. John Edge, is still more perfect, with the exception of the tail- spine, a portion of which has been broken away: this specimen is enlarged at fig. 1 C, D, and shows a slight wrinkling or furrowing of the expanded margin of the cephalic shield, as well as the sulcated pleurze and single tubercle upon each ring of the axis terminating in a larger and more obtuse prominence on the tail. from Queen’s County, Ireland. Lil The spine or telson which is attached to this portion exhibits a central longitudinal ridge, having a membranous expansion on each side similar to that noticed by Parkinson as occurring in the species described by Martin, and which I have referred to B. bellulus, Konig. The following are the measurements of fig. 1 A :— [The line is considered as being the twelfth of an inch. | Total length from anterior margin of cephalic shield to point of telson.. 1 inch 1 line, or 27 mill. Breadth at widest part of spines .. 7 lines or 15 ,; Yr of cephalic shield ........ Eh bys Or Oe ie Length of telson ..060¢¢ ser essuess 1h ae or 20" 3 Measurements of fig. 1 B:— Length of, from anterior margin of cephalic shield to end of tail .... 5 lines or 10 mill. Length from anterior to posterior margin of cephalic shield ........ 21 4; Diy Breadth of cephalic shield ........ Gog else, Length of body and tail .......... ee Tae Breadth of body at cephalic shield... 4 ,, Sesh Locality. From Coal-shale, Bilboa Colliery, Queen’s County. Belinurus arcuatus, n. sp. Pl. V. fig. 2 A-C. Diagnosis.—B. latus ; limbo scuti cephalici orbiculari, angulis longi- spinosis ; glabella spinis duabus brevioribus munita ; thorace quin- que articulis brevispinosis; pleuris usque ad terminos sulcatis ; tripartita cauda, cui spina longa coaptatur. Description.—General form broadly ovate, acuminate poste- riorly ; axis convex. Cephalic shield semicircular, slightly ele- vated, declining towards the circumference, and surrounded by a narrow flattened margin ; the central portion or glabella having three ridges extending to about two-thirds the breadth of the shield, rounded at their anterior extremity, and forming a doubie arch, the central portion being broadest at its posterior extremity, the two outermost ridges curving at about half their length to- wards the very slightly raised semicircular eyes, and continuing beyond the posterior extremity of the shield im two sharp straight spines, which project over the body about one-tenth of an inch; the posterior angles of the cephalic shield are produced into long spines, as in the preceding species, three-tenths of an inch in length, slightly curved, and spreading out on either side from the body. Thoracic rings five, which, as in the pre- ceding species, decrease in breadth towards the posterior extre- mity ; the lateral lobes, extending in a straight line, terminate in a short spine, and have an angular furrow, which proceeds to the end, curving at the same angle to the point of each spine. 112 Mr. W. H. Baily on new Species of Coal-measure Crustacea Caudal extremity small, with two or three radiating divisions, to which is appended a spine about equal in length to the head and body. Remarks.—This Crustacean differs from the preceding one in having much shorter spiny terminations to the pleura, and a much shorter tail-spine. The detached head or cephalic shield (Pl. V. fig. 2 A, B) is more orbicular, and the arched ridges proceeding from the middle portion of the head (g/labella) terminate on each side in short spmes—a character not observed in any of the specimens of B. Regine. I have not succeeded in obtaining good specimens of this species with the body and tail entire: an imperfect one (fig. 2 C) forms the centre of a concretion in the shale, and exhibits a portion of the body with the tail-spine uncompressed, showing distinctly the division of each thoracic ring, with its grooved lateral angles as in the Jrilobites. In another specimen, which was accidentally relieved from the shale, exposing both sides, the body was found to be doubled back upon the head, like an Ampyz or Trinucleus. This species is allied to Belinurus bellulus, Konig, but differs from it im the more orbicular form of the head, the spiny termiations of the pleuree, and the greater proportion of the body to the cephalic shield. otal Tenet nt sisie i= sls eee ee 1 inch, or 25 mill. . wreadth), 24... nee ysie ddelnes sor? tae Lensthyof ody: | scia (eic.. + esos figs LD ais Breadth of cephalic shield ...... Ske Ly pate Length of cephalic shield ...... Ass San a telson, about .......- 4 inch 12 Locality.—Found with the previous species at Bilboa Colliery, Qucen’s County. A third species, closely allied, if not identical, with Belinurus (Limulus) rotundus, Prestwich, sp., was also obtained at the same locality ; but as it is scarcely perfect enough for description, I have preferred referring it, with a doubt, to that species. A figure, of the natural size and enlarged, is given on Plate V. fig. 3 A, B. The following is a list of the species of Belinurus, with their synonyms and localities :— 1. Belinurus bellulus, Konig, Icon. Foss. Sect. pl. 18. fig. 230. Coal-measures, Coalbrook Dale, Shropshire. Syn. Entomolithus (monoculus) lunatus, Martin, Pet. Derb. pl. 45. fig. 4. Near Mansfield, Nottingham. ——, Parkinson, Org. Rem. vol. iii. pl. 17. fig. 18. Dudley, Shropshire. Limulus trilobitoides, Buckland, Bridg. Treat. pl. 46”. fig. 3. , Prestwich, Geol. Trans. ser. 2. vol. v. pl. 41. fig. 8. —— — ? Portlock, Geol. Report, pl. 24. fig. 11. From Queen’s County, Ireland. 113 2. Belinurus arcuatus, n. sp., Baily. Bilboa Colliery, Queen’s County, Ireland. 3. Regine, un. sp., Baily. Bilboa Colliery, Queen’s County, Treland. 4, anthrax, Prestwich, Geol. Trans, vol. v. pl. 41. figs. 1-4, Coalbrook Dale. a: rotundus, Prestwich, ibid. Coalbrook Dale and ? Bilboa Colliery, Queen’s County. The discovery of these peculiar Coal-measure Crustacea in Ireland, with associated shells and plants corresponding so re- markably with those found in similar deposits at Coalbrook Dale in Shropshire and other parts of the Midland counties in England, is a point of great paleontological interest, showing their distribution over a wide area, and indicating the prevalence of the same conditions in both countries, although at localities so widely distant. The great differences observable in some parts of their structure to that of the more recent and living forms of Limulus may be accounted for by the wide interval which sepa- rates the Coal-measnre strata in which their remains are found from the Upper Jurassic formation, where those of true Limuli first occur. There are, however, certain points in their structure analogous to that of Limulus, which they somewhat resemble in their general form and in being provided with a tail-spine that was most probably (although the articulation is not clearly shown), like that of Limulus, capable of mobility; on the other hand, as we recede in time, we find intermediate forms, such as Pterygotus and Himantopterus, connecting them with the Trilo- bites, to which they are also allied by the moveable nature of their body-segments, and in other particulars. We have, there- fore, in these Coal-measure Crustacea such a modification of structure as may be considered sufficient to constitute them a distinct genus, and show them to be a link in the chain leading from the important group of Trilobites, so characteristic of the Paleozoic rocks, to the Oolitic Lamulz, in which the whole body is covered by a double shield, the segments of the abdominal portion being merely rudimentary and immoveable, like those of the existing species. As to the question of the freshwater or marine habitat of these Crustacea and their associated fossils, I am inclined to the opinion that the deposits in which they occur were of freshwater or estuary origin, from the abundance of small shells like Unio, and others very similar to the freshwater Mytilus (Dreissena) polymorpha, accompanied by the remains of succulent or marshy plants. This opinion corresponds with the observations of Martin and Prestwich. Other theories have been advanced 114 Dr. A. Giinther on new Species of Fishes attributing a general marine origin to the Coal-beds, in support of which great stress has been laid upon the fact of the occur- rence of minute spiral bodies found attached to some of the plant-remains, and formerly referred to Spirorbis, a marine genus of Annelida common upon our shores at the present day, where it is generally attached to sea-weeds, and is well known as Spirorbis nautiloides. These little spiral bodies of the Coal-measure plants have, however, been described by Gép- pert as a Fungus, under the name of Gyromyces Ammonis, and are figured by Geinitz in his fine work on the Coal-plants of Saxony*. We have here, therefore, an instance of the great caution required in drawing general conclusions from insufficient data, and would rather concur with the remarks offered on the subject at page 54 of this Journal, believing that the Coal- measures afford evidence of having been deposited under both freshwater and marine conditions. EXPLANATION OF PLATE V. Fig. 1 A-D. Belinurus Regine, n.sp.: A, B, natural size; C, D, enlarged 3 diameters. (The dotted limes represent*the part restored.) Fig. 2A, C. Belinurus arcuatus, n. sp. : A, detached cephalic shield, natural size; B, the same, enlarged 2 diameters ; C, a small uncompressed specimen from a concretion. Fig. 3A, B. Belinurus rotundus?, Prestwich: A, natural size; B, enlarged 3 diameters. (The dotted lines represent parts restored.) XVII.—On new Species of Fishes from Victoria, South Australia. By Dr. Atpert GUNTHER. A coLLecTion of fishes from Victoria, sent to the International Exhibition, and procured for the British Museum, was distin- guished by the unusually large size of the specimens. They are all stuffed, and unfortunately not accompanied by smaller exam- ples preserved in spirits, so that we are obliged to leave the de- scriptions of the new species incomplete m some points. We hope, however, soon to make up for this deficiency, as we may expect further supphes from that colony. Lates colonorum. B.6. D.8{ 7, A.2. L.lat. 55. L. transv. 8/21. 38 The specimen is 17 inches long, apparently a female, and rather extended by stuffing; the length of the head, however, appears to be a little less than one-third of the total (without * Die Versteinerungen der Steinkohlenformation in Sachsen, pl. 34. figs. 1-3. Dr. Geinitz first called my attention to this little fossil on a Calamite- stem from a neighbouring colliery, in Mr. B. Edge’s collection. from Victoria, South Australia, 115 the caudal). Teeth minute, villiform; the bands on the palate are half as broad as those in the upper jaw; the vomerine band short, crescent-shaped, separate from the palatine bands. Maxil- lary broad, triangular. ‘The preopercular limb is naked, finely serrated behind, and with coarse spinous teeth below, directed forwards ; no large spine at the angle. Operculum terminating in a larger spine, with several smaller ones above ; preorbital, sub-, and interoperculum finely serrated. The dorsal fins are continuous at the base; the spines are strong; the fourth is the longest, its length being contained twice and a third in that of the head. Caudal fin slightly emarginate. The third anal spine is rather longer than the second, and as long as the sixth dorsal spine. Uniform greenish-olive above, silvery on the sides and on the belly. “ Perch”? of the colonists. MELAMBAPHES. Similar in general habit to Glyphidodon. Body covered with small ciliated scales ; cheeks, opercles, and the soft parts of the vertical fins with very small scales. Of all the bones of the head, only the preoperculum is slightly crenulated. Hach jaw with a series of trenchant tricuspid teeth, and with a broad band of vil- liform teeth behind ; no teeth on the palate. Fourteen or thirteen spines in the dorsal fin, and three in the anal fin. Having only one stuffed specimen for examination, we are unable to say whether this fish belongs to the Acanthopterygians proper or to the Pharyngognaths. If to the former, it is to be referred to the group Cantharina, and to the Pomacentride if it should prove to have the lower pharyngeals united. In either case it appears to be the type of a distinct genus, which we have so characterized that it may be readily distinguished from all the other Sparoid and Labroid genera. Melambaphes nigroris. Glyphisodon nigroris, Cuv. & Val. v. p. 485. D. ii, AS Zr BE. late 100. We have but little doubt that the “ Black Perch” of the colonists is the Glyphisodon nigroris of Cuvier and Valenciennes, although their description is extremely short, giving as the for- mula of the fins, D. +3. A. 5%. Glyphidodon Victoria. D.13. A... L. lat. 30. L. transv. 4/10. The height of the body is somewhat less than one-half of the 116 Dr. A. Giinther on new Species of Fishes. total length (without the caudal). Teeth narrow, not emarginate, twenty-one on each side of the upper jaw. Infraorbital scaly ; the width of the preorbital is two-thirds of that of the orbit. Vive or six series of small scales on the cheek. Vertical fins scaly nearly to their margins. ‘The third to the seventh dorsal spines are nearly of equal height, one-half of the length of the head. Caudal forked. Reddish-violet (in a dried state); fins blackish. Nine inches long. The “ Rock-Perch” of the colonists. Labrichthys ephippium. ? Labrus ephippium, Cuv. & Val. xii. p. 96. D.%. A. L. lat. 27. LL. transv. 3/10. A posterior canine tooth. Cheek with three series of very small scales. Base of the dorsal fin not scaly. Hach tube of the scales of the lateral line with numerous branches. Coloration in a dried specimen :—Back violet-olive to the end of the spinous dorsal; head, belly, and tail reddish, the latter with a broad violet-olive band between the posterior halves of the soft dorsal and anal. A blackish spot behind the opercle ; the pectoral, ventral, caudal, and spinous dorsal reddish or yel- lowish, the first with a black spot superiorly in the axil. The soft dorsal and the anal blackish-violet. Seventeen inches long. The “ Parrot-fish ”’ of the colonists. Pseudophycis barbatus. Bf. D8 ble ALnSut Wo5. saalat aed) 140 The ventral fin does not extend to the vent. Sixteen or eighteen series of scales between the anterior dorsal and the lateral line. This fish is similar to its congener, P. breviusculus, Richards., from New Zealand, but may be readily distinguished by the characters given. We have received a specimen 17 inches long. The species 1s called “ Rock-Cod” by the colonists. With re- gard to the characters of the genus Pseudophycis, we refer to ‘Catal. Fish.’ iv. p. 350. Lotella callarias. B. 7... DiGhioh ok: Zann bee. Weg, The two outer ventral rays produced into a filament. Uniform brown. Similar to Z. fuliginosa, Giinth. (Catal. Fish. iv. p. 347), but with a shorter head, the length of which is one-fifth of the total (without the caudal). The ventrals, with the filament, are as long Bibliographical Notices. Tl? as the pectoral; the barbel is not quite half as long as the head. The typical specimen is 19 inches long. The fish is called “ Cod” by the colonists. Rhombosolea flesoides. Bob De G2, AA Similar to R. leporina (Ginth. Catal. Fish. iv. p. 460), but with the body more elevated. Its greatest depth is rather less than one-half of the total length (without the caudal), the length of the head two-sevenths. Hyes separated by a narrow, low, naked ridge, the lower being in advance of the upper. A cuta- neous flap is suspended from the maxillary, overhanging the mouth. The gill-opening does not extend upwards beyond the base of the pectoral. The dorsal fin terminates at a distance from the caudal, which is one-fourth of the depth of the free portion of the tail ; the first dorsal ray is inserted immediately be- hind the maxillary appendage, and the four or five anterior rays are produced beyond the connecting membrane, but consider- ably shorter than those behind the middle of the fin, which are nearly half as long as the head. Caudal subtruncated, its length being rather more than one-sixth of the total. The length of the pectoral is somewhat more than one-half that of the head. Ventral fins as in R. monopus and R. leporina. Uni- form brown. : Length of the typical specimen 14: inches. Called “ Flounder” by the colonists. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. The Flora of Essex. By G. 8. Greson, F.L.S. 12mo. London: Pamplin. 1862. Mr. Watson justly remarks, in his valuable ‘Cybele Britannica,’ that his difficulties in discovering the geographical distribution of plants in Great Britain have been greatly increased by the small number of good county floras. The works produced by the last generation of botanists are of course useless for his purpose, owing to the want of exactness so prevalent at the time of their production. Their authors had no idea that it was necessary, or even desirable, to do more than compile a simple catalogue of the plants found in their districts, and to record the localities of the rarer species. Doubt- less such records as these are valuable, if the compilers were suffi- ciently good botanists to render their determination of the species trustworthy. Unfortunately, this was often not the case; and fre- quently plants were marked as “common,” not from any certain determination of their frequency, but from an impression that such was the case. It thus became necessary for Watson to discover by 118 Bibliographical Notices. some other means the correctness of these entries; for it not unfre- quently happened that the so-marked “common”? plant was an un- likely species to be “common” in that particular district ; and even, in a few cases, one or more of them has been found to be altogether wanting in it. There is also another class of local “‘ Catalogues” which is of very little use to the scientific botanical geographer. We mean those which only profess to name the rarer species. These books are often useful to collectors, and therefore deserve local en- couragement; but as works of science they rank very low. Even such books as Leighton’s ‘Shropshire’ and Bromfield’s ‘Isle of Wight’ do not come up to the point now required. In the former case the large county is not diyided into districts, as has now become the habit ; and therefore the distribution and more or less frequency of the plants is not easily discovered from it, even if discoverable at all. Dr. Bromfield’s book relates to a very limited area, and therefore division into districts was hardly called for; but it is a posthumous work, not very well edited, and showing most manifest signs of wanting the last touches of its author. Indeed, the chief value (and it is great) of these two works is that they contain very many useful descriptions of plants and much elaborate critical dis- cussion. The date of Leighton’s work causes it to occupy a promi- nent position in the history of the present movement for placing the flora of Britain on a level with those of several of the Continental nations. It was one of the first books where an attempt was made to identify our plants with those of foreign botanists, and to submit the names used by us to the laws which regulate botanical nomen- clature. Previous to that time we were not much in the habit of consulting the local floras of foreign countries ; and Fries’s writings concerning the Phanerogamic plants of Scandinavia had attracted very little attention in this country. We well remember the com- motion which took place amongst the botanists attending the British Association Meeting at Bristol (a.p. 1836), when the lamented Edw. Forbes drew from his pocket Reichenbach’s ‘ Flora Excursoria.’ It was like opening a new world to those who had been previously satisfied with Smith’s ‘English Flora’ and Hooker’s ‘ British Flora’ in its earlier form. The discovery of Reichenbach was soon followed by that of Koch’s ‘Synopsis,’ and English works began immediately to show the results of a study of Fries, Reichenbach, and Koch. We need not follow this movement any further. It was strongly opposed in some quar- ters, gained ground slowly but steadily, and is still, in spite even of faintly continued opposition, making its way amongst those who especially desiderate an accurate knowledge of their country’s plants. But it may be asked, What has this to do with Gibson’s ‘ Flora of Essex’? We answer, much; for without the knowledge attained, and the exactness of observation acquired, by a study of the modern local floras of Europe, such a work could not have been produced. Mr. Gibson divides the county of Essex into eight districts, and in effect gives a more or less complete flora of each of them. The same plan had previously been followed by Babington for the county Bibliographical Notices. 119 of Cambridge, and, at a still earlier date, by Webb and Coleman for that of Essex. But possibly the very first attempt at recording the plants of a province in this way was made in Babington’s ‘ Flora of the Channel Islands.’ He there always records the presence of a plant, when known to him, in each of the four principal islands, and thus gives a tolerably complete flora, not only of the whole group, but also of the two larger islands, and less perfectly of two of the smaller ones. We believe that there are no other books in which this valuable mode of determining the frequency of each plant within the range of a local flora is employed. Mr. Gibson has manifestly taken much pains to render his book as complete as possible. He records about 1120 plants as said to have been found in Essex, but marks a considerable number as either mistakes, naturalized, or otherwise more or less ambiguous as species or as natives of the county. This weeding of the list seems to have been done with care, and we very rarely see any reason for arriving at a different opinion from that announced by the author. We may, perhaps, instance as a few of these differences our doubt if Nymphea alba can require the mark of doubtful nativity appended by Gibson; and the same may perhaps be said of Rosa rubiginosa. On the other hand, it seems nearly certain that Saponaria officinalis is a naturalized plant in the east of England, whatever claims it may show to be thought indigenous on the borders of Wales. But we will not occupy valuable space by following up a subject so open to contro- versy, and on which each careful observer must judge for himself. We have said that the Essex flora contains an enumeration of about 1120 plants, thus exceeding that of the adjoining county of Cambridge by nearly 200 species. This is chiefly caused by the extensive sea-coast which bounds Essex, and the almost total absence of maritime plants from Cambridgeshire. Very much addition is made to the value of this book by the ex- ceedingly numerous, learned, and accurate remarks introduced into it by the Rev. W. W. Newbould, one of our best botanists and a gentleman especially conversant with contemporary foreign floras, and also with the writers of the ante-Linnzan period and their herbaria. His remarks are usually (although, we think, not always) pointed out by the letter N being appended to them. Mr. Gibson observes in the Preface :—‘‘I cannot omit to refer more particularly to my valued friend W. W. Newbould, to whom I am indebted for the assistance which he has most kindly and freely rendered. In addition to the time bestowed on ancient authorities and herbaria, he has undertaken excursions into several districts, for the purpose of noting localities ; and, besides offering various important suggestions, he has revised the manuscript, assisted in correcting the proof-sheets while they were passing through the press, and added many critical notes. The accuracy of the work has been much enhanced by W. W. Newbould’s exertions.” This acknowledgment we consider fully required ; for we have personal knowledge of the great labour and care with which he treated the manuscript. Newbould makes an interesting remark upon Carex ericetorum, which has been re- 120 Bibliographical Notices. cently recorded as a British plant, and supposed to have been first noticed by Messrs. Ball and Babington on the Gogmagog Hills, in Cambridgeshire. He states that the original drawing published in ‘English Botany’ as C. precowx, and made by the late James Sowerby, represented C. ericetorum, but that ‘Smith saw that the glumes were not those of C. precox, and the details were in consequence altered.” Thus the plant was found by some botanist at least as long since as the year 1802; but, unfortunately, the locality is not recorded. His researches have shown that, unfortunately, such alterations of the original drawings were not unfrequently made by Smith, and that thus many of the difficulties have arisen which we now meet with when endeavouring to identify plants with the other- wise valuable plates in ‘ English Botany.’ Some interesting papers appear in the Appendix. First, a table showing the dates of the earliest and latest notice of many plants in Kssex. Some few of these are as early ‘as the sixteenth, and a good many occur in the seventeenth century. Next we have a table of the comparative abundance of each plant. They are arranged as “common,” ‘‘rather local,’ and ‘“‘very local.” No.3 is a com- parison of the floras of Essex, Cambridge, Hertford, and Kent. No. 4 relates to the arrangement of the plants of Great Britain according to their comparative frequency, as given in Watson’s ‘Cybele Britannica,’ vol.iv. No. 5 gives a short list of plants not unlikely to be found in Essex. No. 6 includes biographical sketches of the celebrated John Ray, who commenced and ended his life in Essex ; of Samuel Dale, Richard Warner, and the recently lost and justly lamented Edw. Forster. It will be seen by what we have said, that this is a work quite up to the requirements of the present time, highly creditable to its author, and well deserving of the attention of English botanists ; and it is probably unnecessary to add that it does not contain descriptions of the plants, but that the general floras of Britain are referred to for information of that kind, as is now the usual and laudable custom of writers on local botany. A Manual of European Butterflies. By W. F. Kirsy. Williams & Norgate. 1862. A descriptive Manual of the Butterflies of Europe has long been a desideratum with those of our travellers who, not caring to make a close study of entomology, still take some interest in the more conspicuous objects of natural history. Of these objects none are more striking or beautiful than the numerous butterflies which, in our Continental rambles, at once attract notice, whether they rise from the rushes on the steep mountain-side, or on the sultry plain flit lazily from flower to flower, a ‘‘ joy for ever” to all whose hearts sympathize with nature. Mr. Kirby offers us descriptions of 321 species of Rhopalocera: these descriptions are partly original, partly compiled or condensed from the best foreign authorities. We may here be permitted to Bibliographical Notices. 121 protest against the singular use which our author has made of the signs * and +, to indicate that specimens have been examined by himself. Mr. Kirby is a young author, and we are sure that he will forgive our pointing out that these signs are very perplexing to the eye, and, besides, have been used for quite different purposes in other scientific works. How much easier to have appended the usual “p.m.” or the marks “!!” or “edi spec.’ In the same way, when the descriptions are quoted or abridged, how much more satisfactory if these had been noted by inverted commas or an abbreviated name. At the head of each genus, we find an analysis of the species comprised init. Here we cannot but regret that Mr. Kirby has not adopted the Lamarckian or dichotomous method. The use, also, of italics for the more distinctive characters in the specific descriptions would have been a great boon to the traveller, whose time is so valuable. We think that the authority should have followed the specific names in the body of the book, as well as in the synonymic list given in the Appendix. We say it with reluctance; but the care- lessness of entomologists is in this respect quite proverbial. We could have wished that the best figure of each insect had been quoted throughout ; and certainly some indication of the range might have followed the specific descriptions. By using five capital letters for “ North, Middle, South, East, and West’ Europe, much informa- tion might have been condensed in a very short space. The alpine or mountain insects might have been distinguished in a similar manner, and the “ kind of station”? would have been another welcome addition. Having relieved our mind by these free remarks, we have no hesi- tation in recommending Mr. Kirby’s handy-book to the notice of our summer tourists. ‘Travellers are in these days |very apt to run into zoological eccentricities. It is not at all uncommon to see blue or green gauze nets waving on the Rhigi or from a passing carriage, in many parts of the Continent. The ‘Manual of European Butterflies’ is a work of good promise, and a proof of no small diligence on the part of its author. But why should entomologists have a monopoly ? With the excep- tion of Lord Clermont’s little book on the Mammals and Reptiles of Europe, we know of no portable Manual for the English traveller of zoological tastes, when he is starting for a six-weeks’ ramble on the Continent. Have we not other naturalists who might give us the digested results of their long study of different branches of the European Fauna? Might we suggest to Mr. Alfred Newton how useful would be a manual of the European birds? And will not Dr. Giinther take pity on the poor fishes, all neglected since the illus- trious Agassiz left Europe tor his Transatlantic home? A very useful feature of Mr. Kirby’s book is the table of geo- graphical distribution, inserted as an Appendix. ‘This table is admirably constructed; for Mr. Kirby has succeeded in showing not only the country in which each insect has been found, but also the Ann. § Mag. N, Hist, Ser. 3. Vol, xi, 9 122 Royal Society ;— name of the authority in every ease. We commend this Appendix as quite a model of how much information may be conveyed in a few pages. A second Appendix supplies a complete and partly synonymic catalogue of all the European Butterflies, amounting, as we said before, to 321 species. In his estimate of the number of species Mr. Kirby has wisely contented himself with following a good recent authority—Staudinger. We must now leave the Butterflies of Europe in the hands of Mr. Kirby and his fellow entomologists. We trust that enough has been said to stimulate travellers to the contemplation, if not the capture, of some of the 321 species. PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ROYAL SOCIETY. Noy. 20, 1862.—Major-General Sabine, President, in the Chair, “On the Fossil Remains of a long-tailed Bird (Archeopteryx macrurus, Ow.) from the Lithographic Slate of Solenhofen.’ By Prof. Richard Owen, F.R.S. The author details the cireumstances connected with the discovery of the fossil remains, with the impressions of feathers, in the Litho- graphic slates of Solenhofen, of the Oxfordian or Corallian stage of the Oolitic period, and of the acquisition for the British Museum of the specimen which forms the subject of his paper. __ The exposed parts of the skeleton are,—the lower portion of the furculum; part of the left os innominatum ; nineteen caudal vertebree in a consecutive series ; several ribs, or portions of ribs ; the two scapulee, humeri, and antibrachial bones; parts of the carpus and metacarpus, with two unguiculate phalanges, probably belonging to the right wing; both femora and tibize, and the bones of the right foot; im- pressions of the quill-feathers radiating fan-wise from each carpus, and diverging in pairs from each side of the long and slender tail. The above parts indicate the size of the winged and feathered creature to have been about that of a rook. The several bones, with their impressions and those of the feathers, are described, and the bones are compared with their homologues in different Birds and in Pterodac- tyles. Whence it appears that, with the exception of the caudal region of the vertebral column, and apparently of a biunguiculate manus, with less confluent condition of the metacarpus, the preserved parts of the skeleton of the feathered animal accord with the ornithic modifications of the vertebrate skeleton. ‘The main departure there- from is ina part of that skeleton most subject to variety. Twenty caudal vertebree extend from the sacrum in a consecutive and naturally articulated series, resembling in structure and proportions those of a squirrel. The tail-feathers are in pairs corresponding in number with the vertebree, diverging therefrom at an angle of 45° backward, be- Prof. Owen on the Archeopteryx macrurus. 123 coming more acute near the end, and the last pair extending nearly parallel with and 33 inches beyond the last caudal vertebra. This feathered tail is 11 inches long and 33 inches broad, with an obtusely rounded end. This novel and unexpected character of the tail is owing to the constancy with which all known existing and tertiary birds have presented the short bony tail with the terminal modification in most of them of the ploughshare bone. Professor Owen next gives the results of investigations into the osteogeny of embryo birds, showing the number of vertebrze corre- sponding to the anterior caudals in Archeopteryx which coalesce with the pelvis in the course of growth, and the degree to which the posterior candals retain a resemblance to those of Archeopteryx in the Birds with rudimental wings. From eighteen to twenty caudal vertebrae may be counted in the young Ostrich. In Archeopteryx the embryonal separation persists, with such continued growth of the individual caudal vertebree as is commonly seen in long-tailed Vertebrates, whether Reptilian or Mammalian. The author remarks that the modification and specialization of the terminal bones of the spinal column in modern birds is closely analogous to that which converts the long, slender, many-joimted tail of the modern embryo fish into that short’ and deep symmetrical shape, with coalescence of terminal vertebree into a compressed lamelliform bone, like the ‘os en charrue’ of birds, to which the term ‘homocercal’ applies— such extreme development and transformation usually passing through the heterocercal stage, at which, in palzeozoic and many mesozoic fishes, it was arrested.” Thus he discerns in the main differential character of the mesozoic bird a retention of structure which is em- bryonal and transitory in the modern representatives of the class, and consequently a closer adhesion to the general vertebrate type. The least equivocal parts of the present fossil declare it to be a Bird, with rare peculiarities indicative of a distinct order in that class. Although the head is absent, the author predicts, by the law of cor- relation, a beak-shaped mouth for the preening of the plumage ; and he also infers a broad and keeled sternum in correlation with the remains of feathered organs of flight. The paper is accompanied by drawings of the fossil and its parts, and of homologous parts in Birds and Pterodactyles. The author as- signs to the fossil animal the name of Archeopteryx macrurus, Dec. 18, 1862.— Major-General Sabine, President, in the Chair. “Description of a new Specimen of G/yptodon, recently acquired by the Royal College of Surgeons of England.” By Thomas Henry Huxley, F.R.S,, Hunterian Professor of Comparative Anatomy at the College. In the present brief preliminary notice I propose to give an account of the more remarkable features of the skeleton of a specimen of the extinct genus Glyptodon, recently added to the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons. The specimen was obtained in 1860, by Signor Maximo Terrero, on / * 124 Royal Society :— the banks of the River Salado, and was presented to the College by that gentleman, through the instrumentality of the late President of the College, J. F. South, Esq. It arrived in England in an extremely broken and mutilated con- dition; but, by the exercise of great care and patience, Mr. Waterhouse Hawkins, to whom the President and Council of the Royal College of Surgeons entrusted the task of adjusting the scattered fragments, has succeeded in restoring to their natural condition the greater part of the vertebral column, the limbs, and much of the head. In the execution of this laborious undertaking Mr. Hawkins has had, from time to time, all the anatomical aid that Mr. Flower, the Conservator of the College Museum, and I could afford him ; and the authorities of the College have finally entrusted me, as one of the Professors of the College, with the duty of describing the specimen. This duty I propose to discharge by preparing a full description of the skeleton in a memoir to be presented (accompanied by a draught of the requisite illustrations) to the Royal Society. But as the preparation of such a memoir will require some time, I wish, at present, to lay before the Royal Society a preliminary account of those particulars in the structure of this animal which must interest anatomists in general as much as the special student of the fossil Edentata, in the hope that the notice may appear in the ‘ Proceed- ings’ of the Society. The mass of bony fragments which arrived from South America has afforded material for the reconstruction of the carapace, and of the following parts of the skeleton :—the anterior moiety of the skull with the entire palate ; the mandible ; some of the cervical, and the greater part of the dorsal, lumbar, sacral and coccygeal vertebrae, with vertebral and sternal ribs ; the pelvis and the hind limbs ; part of the scapula, and an entire fore limb. And there can be no doubt that all these remains belong to one and the same animal, as no duplicate bones have been discovered, nor any which there is the least reason to believe belong to a different individual. This circumstance gives a particular value to the present specimen, apart from the fact that, notwithstanding the researches of Professor Owen, of D’ Alton, of Lund, and of Nodot, our knowledge of the structure of the anterior part of the skull, of the vertebral column and pelvis, and of the fore limb of Glyptodon and its immediate allies, is either nil or extremely imperfect. I now proceed to note the more important and the novel anatomical peculiarities which it reveals. Of the sku// the new specimen exhibits the anterior moiety, from the anterior boundary of the cranial cavity to the anterior end of the nasal bones, together with the almost entire bones of the face and the lower jaw ; it thus furnishes a nearly complete supplement to the fragmentary cranium, consisting of the brain-case and the nasal bones, with the zygomatic processes, formerly described by Professor Owen as a part of Glyptodon clavipes, and now set up in the College Mu- seum, together with a carapace, a tail, and a hind foot, as the typical example of that species*. In the form of the frontal bone, of the * The parts thus combined together were not found so associated, and the Prof. T. H. Huxley on a new Specimen of Glyptodon, 125 orbits, of the nasal bones, and of the zygomatic process, the skull of the new specimen agrees very closely with that of Glyptodon clavipes. From the slighter rugosity of the supraorbital region, the less deve- lopment of the temporal ridges, and the fact that the nasal suture persists in the new specimen, I conceive it to have been a younger animal, The anterior nasal aperture is trapezoidal, and narrower below than above. The vomer is very thick and strong, and the turbinal bones are well developed. The premaxille, though small slender bones, enter largely into the lateral boundary of the nasal aperture. Inferiorly they are separated in the middle line by a narrow fissure, which runs back into the crescentic anterior palatine foramen. The maxillary bones are extremely elongated ; while the palatine bones are small in proportion to them, and, like the premaxillee, are separated by a very narrow median fissure. The extreme length of the roof of the palate, formed by these three pair of bones, is 10 inches ; while its width (between the inner edges of the teeth), though rather greater in front than behind, nowhere exceeds 14 inch. From before backwards the palate has a double curvature, being concave downwards from the anterior end of the premaxilla to the level of the third tooth, and convex thence to the end of the palate- bones ; so that the posterior part of the palate has a very marked inclination upwards and backwards. There were eight teeth in each maxilla, all trilobed, the longitu- ee grooves separating the lobes being less marked in the anterior teeth. The mandible is represented by the two horizontal rami, with the symphysis, the greater part of the right coronoid process, and the entire right condyle, together with many of the sixteen teeth. It very closely resembles the mandibles of Schistopleuron gemmatum, de- scribed by Nodot, but is wholly unlike the restored jaw of Glyptodon clavipes given (on the authority of a drawing) by Professor Owen*. The articular surface is situated almost wholly upon the anterior surface of the condyle of the mandible, looking but very slightly upwards; it is transversely elongated, slightly concave from side to side, and convex from above downwards. In all these respects it furnishes a counterpart to the glenoid articular surface of the tem- poral bone of Glyptodon clavipes, already described by Professor Owen. The length of the head of the present specimen, when entire, was probably not less than 13 inches. The greatest depth of the cranium, from the centre of the frontal bone to the middle of the question may arise whether the skull, hind foot, and tail are really parts of the animal to which the carapace (on whose characters the species is founded) be- longed. Provisionally I assume that they are. But so many difficulties are in- volved in the precise determination of the species of these extinct Armadillo-like Edentata, that for the present I leave the question open. * The mandible of the Turin Glyptodon, mentioned at the end of this paper, is quite similar to that of the new specimen, and to that of M. Nodot’s Schisto- pleuron. 126 Royal Society :— palate, is about 6 inches ; the length of the mandible can hardly have been less than 12 inches. Of the vertebral column, the greater part of the sacral and dorsal region, and some fragments of the cervical region, are preserved. The latter show that the atlas was distinct, but that the axis was anchy- losed with one or two succeeding vertebree, as in the Armadillos. The fifth and sixth cervical vertebree were probably free, but no traces of them have been found. The anterior part of what remains of the rest of the vertebral column consists of a very broad flat bone, composed of three vertebree firmly anchylosed together, and having their spinous processes represented by a short but very stout osseous knob, which projects upwards and backwards. Anteriorly, these anchylosed vertebra exhibit on each side of the neural canal an arti- cular facet with a convex surface, resembling a segment of a horizontal cylinder ; posteriorly, articular surfaces of a similar character, but concave, are situated in corresponding positions. Each side of this ‘trivertebral bone’ presents two large and deep articular cavities for the heads of ribs, fragments of which are still preserved. The anterior rib, remarkable for its stout and massive proportions, was undoubtedly the first ; and this circumstance I believe gives a clue to the precise character of the vertebrae which are anchy- losed together to form the trivertebral bone; for in the Armadillos the head of the first rib is fitted into a deep fossa, formed partly by the last cervical, and partly by the first dorsal vertebra. Furthermore, the body and transverse processes of the last cervical vertebra in the Armadillos present articular facets of an essentially similar character to those observable on the anterior face of the bone under description* ; and, finally, the last cervical vertebra is practically immoveable upon the first dorsal in many Armadillos, while the two vertebree are com- pletely anchylosed together in the priodont Armadillo. I conceive, then, that this remarkable bone of the Glyptodon is formed by the anchylosis of the last cervical and first and second dorsal vertebra. Of the remainder of the spinal column thirteen consecutive ver- tebree are preserved ; and all of these were immoveablv united into one long continuous tunnel or arched tubular bridge of bone, a struc- ture which is without a parallel among the Mammalian Vertebrata. Of these thirteen vertebre, the four janterior are so completely an- chylosed together, that the original lines of demarcation between them are hardly discernible. Persistent sutures separate the fourth from the fifth, and the latter from the sixth ; but all trace of the primitive distinction of the sixth and seventh is lost. The other vertebrae are separated by sutures which become coarser and less close posteriorly. In all but the first, second, third, eleventh, and thir- teenth vertebree, the parts representing the vertebral centra are broken away; but where they persist, they are so similar that they were doubtless of similar form throughout. Hach centrum is, in fact, a * J may remark in passing, that all the cervical vertebrz of the Armadillos, from the third backwards, are articulated together by joints similar in principle of construction to those which connected together the trivertebral bone of Glyp- todon with the vertebrz in front of and behind it. Prof. T. H. Huxley on a new Specimen of Glyptodon. 127 comparatively thin bony plate, so curved as to form a segment of a hollow cylinder of much larger diameter in the front than in the hinder vertebrae, the sides of which pass superiorly into the arches of the vertebra. The foremost vertebra of the thirteen is as broad as the posterior part of the ‘ trivertebral bone,’ and presents a couple of convex arti- cular facets which articulate with the lateral articular concavities described above in that bone. The vertebrae rapidly narrow, how- ever, until the fourth is not more than three-fifths as wide as the first, while it is proportionately deeper; and this increase of depth relatively to width goes on until in the thirteenth vertebra the spinal canal is deeper than it is wide. The spinous processes of these vertebree are all broken short off ; but sufficient remains of their bases to make the following points clear. The spinous process of the first is almost obsolete, being a mere ridge sloping back towards the second, with which it is continuous. This appears to have been necessary to afford the requisite play for the knob of the trivertebral bone in its movements of flexion and ex- tension on the rest of the spinal column. The spinous process of the second vertebra was long and thick, and probably somewhat high. It appears to have been completely distinct from the third, which was thinner, and was anchylosed with its successors (as far as that of the twelfth vertebra inclusive) into a long continuous crest. The apices of the spinous processes may, however, have been distinct. So much as is left of the base of this crest shows that it was thickest at the sixth and seventh vertebre (of the thirteen), and that it became thinner both anteriorly and pos- teriorly. The spinous process of the twelfth vertebra, forming the termina- tion of the crest, appears to have ended in a free, thin, but rounded edge. What remains of the spinous process of the thirteenth ver- tebra, on the other hand, thins off anteriorly to a natural edge, which is inclined upwards and backwards. Posteriorly the spinous process becomes very thick and stout, and appears to have had a considerable height. It ends in a fractured hinder margin. The broad wing-like plates which represent the coalesced trans- verse processes of the first, second, and third vertebra of the thirteen, exhibit distinct articular surfaces for the capitula and tubercula of ribs. Further back, the natural edges of the apophysial ridges are broken away, up to the eighth vertebra. Here they are entire on the left side and broken on the right; but, curiously enough, the broken processes are higher than the entire ones, so that the transverse processes in this region of the body must have been asymmetrically developed. The thirteenth vertebra presents peculiarities which could only be made intelligible by a lengthened description, and by figures. The contours of the articular processes become first di- stinetly traceable at the posterior part of the eleventh vertebra. They are better marked at the posterior part of the twelfth, and at the an- terior part of the thirteenth vertebra. 128 Royal Society :— The nervous foramina are not intervertebral, but pierce the arches of the vertebrae throughout the series. In the thirteenth the outlet of the foramen is separated, by a longitudinal bar of bone, into an upper and a lower division. The posterior part of the thirteenth vertebra is much injured, and does not adjust itself naturally to the anterior end of that part of the lumbar region of the vertebral column (consisting of two vertebrze) which remains continuously anchylosed with the sacrum. One or two vertebrae may possibly be wanting, or even three; but I conceive the last to be the extreme limit of the deficiency * The great Priodont Armadillo has twenty dorso-lumbar vertebre. If the Glyptodon had the same number, there would be three missing ; for there are two dorsal vertebrze in the trivertebral plate, thirteen follow it, and two lumbar are anchylosed with the sacral, making altogether seventeen. The ‘sacrum,’ composed of anchylosed lumbar, proper sacral, and coccygeal vertebree, contains at fewest twelve, and perhaps thirteen vertebree. The centra of the two lumbar vertebre and of the two proper sacral vertebrze which follow them are preserved. They are thin and broad plates, flat above and slightly concave below, exhibit- ing a most marked contrast with the half- cylinder of the hindermost of the thirteen dorsal vertebrae above described. It would seem to require the interposition of at least two, if not three, vertebre to effect the transition of the one form of centrum into the other. The last coccygeal is the only vertebra among all those preserved the centrum of which exhibits characters at all like those of an or- dinary mammal, its terminal face being a very broad oval, slightly concave, disk. ‘The centrum of the penultimate coccygeal is much flatter and narrower ; and this flattening and narrowing predominates still more in the antepenultimate and that vertebra which lies before it, or the fourth from the end. From this point to the two anterior sacrals the floor of the vertebral canal is completely broken away, but there can be no doubt that the centra were represented by a thin bony plate. The line of the centra of the coccygeal vertebrae forms a very marked arch behind the two sacral vertebrae, whose centra form a nearly horizontal floor ; while the dorso-lumbar vertebre (including the trivertebral bone) form a second arch, flatter than the first. The spinous processes of,all these lumbo-sacro-coccygeal vertebrze, up to the fourth from the end inclusively, are anchylosed together in a long and strong osseous crest, broad and extremely rugose above, eight inches high in front, but slowly diminishing as it follows the curve of the centra posteriorly to five inches. The spinous process of the penultimate coccygeal vertebra is very thick, but is broken short off. It was probably not less than 4 inches high, and afforded a middle point of support for the carapace between the ischial protuberances. The sides of the median crest, and of the two vertebrae which appear to constitute the true sacrum, are anchy- * Unless I greatly err in my interpretation of the photographs, these three missing vertebree are preserved in the Turin Glyptodon. Prof. T. H. Huxley on a new Specimen of Glyptodon. 129 losed firmly with nearly the whole of the inner edge of the vast ium. Behind these the vertebrae seem to have been devoid of transverse processes, as far as the fourth from the end. But the antepenultimate had a long and slender transverse process on each side; the penultimate has an equally long but much stouter process, while the last coccygeal vertebra has transverse processes of no less length, and extremely stout. The expanded distal ends of these processes unite with one another, and with the inner surfaces of the greatly expanded ischia. The ilia are immense quadrate bones, slightly concave anteriorly and posteriorly, with their planes so directed as to form rather less than a right angle forwards with the vertebral column. The crest of each iliac bone is thick, expanded, and rugose, and so arched as evidently to have afforded attachment and support to the carapace ; which therefore rested directly, partly on the three transversely disposed pillars afforded by the coccygeal vertebree and the two ischia, partly on the longitudinally arched crests of the sacrum and of the thirteen dorsal or dorso-lumbar vertebree, and partly on the second great transverse support yielded by the arched crests of the ilia. Apart from their anchylosis, the whole of the parts named must have been practically fixtures in consequence of this arrange- ment of the carapace ; and the only moveable parts of the vertebral column must have been the tail (of which unfortunately no portion has been found in the present specimen), posteriorly moveable on the last coccygeal vertebra,—the trivertebral bone with its two pair of ribs, capable of an up-and-down motion on the foremost of the thir- teen vertebree,—and then the cervicals, more or less moveable upon the anterior part of the trivertebral bone and upon one another. I am not aware of the existence of any mammal in which the ver- tebral column presents characters of a similar singularity. The mobility of the rib-bearing trivertebral bone, by a hinge-joint upon the rest of the vertebral column, is peculiarly anomalous. How- ever, if, as appears to have been the case, the heads of the ribs attached to this bone were incapable of movement, and the first rib was furthermore directly anchylosed with the sternum, respiration must have been carried on entirely by the diaphragm, if the anterior dorsal vertebree had been immoveable on the posterior ones. The hinge-like movement of the trivertebral bone, on the other hand, by permitting the ribs and sternum to describe a longitudinal are alter- nately downwards and forwards, and upwards and backwards, would allow of a most efficient bellows-action of the thorax, similar in principle to that effected by the ordmary movements of the ribs. The trivertebral bone is about ............ 6 inches long. The thirteen vertebrze along their convexity .. 293 ,, MVE; SaCilMbwapatstars siaici siete cicicea < ore on «sate OO bs V5, If three lumbar vertebree are wanting allow .. 9 99 80 Judging by the analogy of the Armadillos with which the Glyp- 185... Royal Society. todon presents such close resemblance, and from the shortness of such cervical vertebrae of Glyptodon as can be reconstructed, the neck did not exceed in length jth of the length of the vertebral column from the first dorsal to the last coccygeal. That would give 8 inches for the neck, and would give a grand total for the spinal column, exclusive of the tail, of 88 inches, or 7 feet 4 inches. The length of the carapace of Glyptodon clavipes in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons is 5 feet 7 inches. The carpus of G/yptodon is in some respects very like that of Dasypus sexcinctus, but it consists of eight bones instead of seven, the trapezium and trapezoid being perfectly distinct, instead of form- ing a single bone as in Dasypus. ‘The scaphoid articulates with the os magnum, and the cuneiform with a metacarpal, as in Dasypus. But it is not a little remarkable that, whereas in Dasypus it is the fifth metacarpal whose proximal end partially articulates with the cuneiform, in Glyptodon the corresponding bone articulated wholly with the cuneiform, and not with any of the distal row of carpal bones. The metacarpal articular end of that bone is, in fact, divided into two facets—an inner, larger, which articulates with part of the proximal end of the fourth metacarpal, and an outer, smaller, which is appropriated by the proximal end of the fifth metacarpal. That the cuneiform should articulate with two metacarpal bones, and that the unciform should not articulate with the fifth metacarpal at all, are very remarkable peculiarities of the wrist of Glyptodon. The pisiform is a large curved bone, the proximal end of which articulates by a large facet with the ulna, and by a small one with a facet on the palmar aspect of the cuneiform. It closely resembles the same bone in Armadillos. The trapezium and trapezoid, taken together, have a form closely resembling that of the single trapezio-trapezoid of Dasypus. The trapezium possesses only a very small double articular facet on its palmar face. If this gives support to a metacarpal, it must have been very small; and as at present neither it nor any of the hallucal phalanges have been discovered, it is possible the pollex may have been altogether rudimentary. In any case the pollex must have been so much smaller and more slender in proportion than that of Dasypus, that the animal must have had a practically tetradactyle fore foot. The second metacarpal is the longest of all which have been disco- vered, but is not quite so thick as the third. Its proximal end arti- culates with the trapezium, trapezoid, and magnum. The third metacarpal, an almost cuboidal bone, but broader than long, articulates with the magnum, the cuneiform, and the adjacent metacarpals. The fourth metacarpal, still shorter and broader in proportion, articulates with the unciform and cuneiform, and with the adjacent metacarpals. The fifth metacarpal has not been found. The two proximal or first and second phalanges are very short, broad, discoidal bones in the second and in the third digits ; and the second, which alone exists, Zoological Society. 131 in the fourth digit has the same character. The proximal phalanges of the fifth digit have not been found. The distal or third phalanx is a broad bone, squarely truncated at the extremity, and longer than the rest of the digit, in the second, third, and fourth, and presumably in the fifth digit. Each of these phalanges is thicker on one side than on the other, so that the upper surface, which is convex from side to side, and also from before backwards, slopes from the thick towards the thin edge. The distal phalanx of the second digit has its thick edge on its ulnar side, but all the others have their thick edges radial. The distal phalanx of the fifth digit is more pointed, smaller, and thicker in proportion than the others. The hind foot is quite normal in structure, possessing five toes and the regular number and disposition of tarsal, metatarsal, and phalangeal bones. The third or middle digit is the longest, and its distal phalanx is the longest of all. It is nearly square, and its outer and inner edges are almost equally thick. The distal phalanges of the other toes are all thicker on the side turned towards the middle toe. That of the second toe is almost as square as that of the third ; but the distal angles of that of the third and fourth are bevelled off on the fibular side, while the termiaal phalanx of the hallux is similarly bevelled off upon the tibial side. The metatarsal bones have the same thick prismatic form, and the proximal phalanges the same discoidal character as in the fore foot. The calcaneal process is directed outwards at an angle of 45° from the axis of the foot, and must have been much raised in the natural position. While the work of restoration, whose results have just been briefly detailed, was going on, we learned from Dr. Falconer that a nearly entire specimen of a Glyptodon was exhibited in the Museum at Turin. An application was at once made to the authorities of the Museum for information, and, if possible, for photographs of this skeleton, and was responded to with the most obliging readiness. These photographs of a skeleton in some respects more, in others less perfect than that of the College, have confirmed the conclusions already arrived at in the most satisfactory manner; and I trust before long to be in possession of descriptive details of parts of this specimen which are wanting in our own, and which will enable me to complete the anatomy of the skeleton of the gigantic extinct Armadillo. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. June 10, 1862.—Professor Busk, F.R.S., in the Chair. List or MAMMALIA FROM THE CAMAROON MovunrTaAINS, COL- LECTED By Capt. Burton, H.M. Consut, FerNanpbo Po. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. CROCIDURA MORIO, Sp. nov. Uniform rather brownish black, rather paler and browner beneath, 132 Zoological Society :— Teeth white. Feet very slender, weak. ‘Tail nearly as long as the body and head, very slender, annulated, covered with very short closely adpressed hair. Length of body and head, dry, 2? inches ; tail, dry, 2 inches. “© Mole from Camaroon Mountains, 7000 feet above the level of the sea, January 1862.” Scrurvus IsaBELLa, sp. nov. Yellowish brown, minutely grizzled, with four broad dorsal streaks —the two central from the crown of the head to the base of the tail, the side ones from the shoulder only ; the underside whitish grey. Tail slightly annulated. Length of body and head 7 inches ; tail 5 inches. «Squirrel from the Camaroon Mountains, 7000 feet above the level of the sea, January 1862.” I have great pleasure in naming this beautiful new species after Mrs. Isabel Burton,—her husband, the discoverer of it, having re- quested that any novelty that might be in the list should be so named. ANOMALURUS BreEcrortt, Fraser. “A Flying Squirrel, shot in the Camaroon Mountains, 7000 feet above the level of the sea. Colour of the eyes dark grey. January 18, 1862.” Mus MADURA, Sp. nov. Fur very soft and silky ; above black, slightly marked with brown from the minute brown tips of the hairs ; beneath whitish—the hair of the underside black, white-tipped. Teeth very narrow, orange. Fars rounded, moderate. Sides of the nose and edge of the orbits black. Eyes covered with very short close-pressed hairs. ‘Tail very long, slender, closely annulated with very slender, very short ad- pressed hair. Length of body and head 43 inches; tail 5 inches; hind foot very nearly 1 inch. ‘“ Camaroon Mountains, 7000 feet above the level of the sea.” EURYOTIS IRRORATA, Sp. Nov. «‘ Rat from the Camaroon Mountains, 7000 feet above the level of the sea. January 1862.” I am not certain about this species until I can compare the skull with those of the other species of the genus from Africa, as they are all very similar externally. With these animals was sent the skin of a Chimpanzee without its skull, but with the bones of the hand and feet enclosed in the skin. This skin differs from all the other specimens of this species which I have seen, in being covered with much more abundant and softer fur, and in the fur of the back being of a brown colour, from the large brown tips to the blackish hair. It would seem to indicate a distinct variety or species, which may be designated, until we re- ceive better specimens and more particulars, Toglodytes vellerosus. Mr. A. R. Wallace on new Species of Pitta. 133 June 24, 1862.—E. W. H. Holdsworth, Esq., F.L.S., in the Chair. Descriptions oF THREE NEw SPECIES OF PITTA FROM THE Mouvuccas. By AuFrrep Russet WALLACE. These birds are brought before the Society, detached from the collections of which they form a part, because a Monograph of the Pittide, by Mr. Elliot, is now in course of publication, and it is de- sirable that they should be described in England before appearing in a foreign work. They are interesting as showing the permanent modifications in form of these semiterrestrial birds, in islands within sight of each other. I may mention as a curious fact, that the great island of Ceram appears to contain no Pitta, although one or two species occur in almost all the other islands of the Moluccan group. I have myself collected for several months in various parts of Ceram and Amboyna, without seeing or hearing of the genus; and the natives were positive no such bird was to be found in their country. The naturalists collecting for the Leyden Museum were not more suc- cessful; and recently a German ornithologist, M. Rosenberg, has resided some years in the island, and up to the time of my departure had seen no Pitta. This is the more remarkable, as in the little island of Banda, within sight of Ceram, a species exists which, with two others, I now proceed to describe. PITTA RUBRINUCHA.. Head reddish brown, darker behind, where there is a subquadran- gular spot of bright red, and above it an obscure blue vertical stripe ; back dull olive-green, shading into slaty blue on the wings and tail ; quills blackish, with a white spot on the third and fourth; a small white spot on the shoulder; underside with the slaty-blue breast and crimson belly, exactly as in P. celebensis, but the black line separating the two colours is narrower. Bill blackish horn-colour ; feet light dull blue; iris pale olive-brown. Total length 7 inches ; wing 32 inches ; bill, from the gape, 1 inch. Hab. Island of Bouru (Moluccas). Remark.—This species is at once distinguished from its near ally, P. celebensis, by the red nuchal spot, and by having much less blue on the wing- and tail-coverts. It is also considerably smaller. Pitta VIGORSI. Pitta Vigorsi, Gould, Birds of Australia, vol. iv. pl. 2. I had proposed a name for this species, supposing it to be new, and misled by Bonaparte’s ‘Conspectus,’ which gives ‘‘ gula nigra” asa character of Vigorst. Having since, at Mr. Gould’s suggestion, com- pared my bird with the type in the Museum of the Linnean Society, I find it to be the same. My specimen is a fine adult male, and differs from Gould’s figure and description in having the bill en tirely black, and in the red of the under parts being much mixed with black on the breast, 134 | Zoological Society :— — Total length 7 inches; wing 42 inches ; bill, from gape, 1} inch. Hab. Banda Island (Moluccas). Remark.—The habitat “Australia” is probably a mistake, as the birds of this genus are very local, and no well-authenticated speci- men has ever been received from that country. PirTa CRASSIROSTRIS. Similar in colour to P. Vigorsi; but the superciliary stripes are altogether pale rufous, the colour beneath is lighter (agreeing with P. concinna), and the chin is black, which colour extends in a tri- angle on to the throat, without being produced into a stripe, as in P, concinna. Bill black, with the hase of the lower mandible horny ; feet very pale flesh-colour ; iris black. Total length 71 inches; wing 42 inches; bill, from gape, 1} inch. Hab. Sula Island (Xulla of the English maps), E. of Celebes. Remark,—This species differs from its nearest allies by its very strong bill, as well as by the peculiarities of colouring above de- scribed. It is very like Temminck’s figure of P. rena from Timor ; but that species appears to have much more blue on the back, and the bill entirely black, and not so strong. It is also highly impro- bable that the same bird should be found in such distant localities, when so many of the neighbouring islands have each their peculiar species. Descriptions oF New Species or ReEptiLes AND FISHES IN THE COLLECTION OF THE British Museum. By ALBERT GintuHer, M.A., M.D., Pa.D., F.Z.S. CHLOROSCARTES. (Fam. AGAMID&.) Head short, body and base of tail compressed, tail exceedingly long. Head covered with numerous smooth, small shields; all the scales keeled, small, those of the belly and tail being the larger ; scales on the throat conical. Femoral pores very prominent, in a longish series ; praeanal pores none. A low crest of triangular scales on the neck ; a series of enlarged, sharp scales along the median line of the back and tail. Fingers five, and toes five, all elongate, and armed with sharp claws; the middle toe fringed along the basal joints. Throat with a small pouch and cross fold. No prominent scales at the ear. CHLOROSCARTES FASCIATUS. Grass-green, with three very broad dark-green cross bands. Feejee Islands. Description.—Head rather elevated and obtuse ; pouch below the throat and transverse fold in front of the shoulder well developed ; body and basal portion of the tail compressed, the latter rounded in the middle and posteriorly, tapering, three or four times as long as the body. ‘Tle fore limbs extend backwards to the loin; the third and fourth fingers are equal in length. The hind limbs are as long Dr. A. Giinther on new Reptiles and Fishes. 135 as the trunk; the third toe has a series of enlarged triangular scales along its inner margin, forming a serrated edge. Shields on the upper and lateral parts of the head very numerous and smooth. Nostril in a single somewhat elevated shield, situated above the second and third upper labials. Rostral shield much broader than high, subtriangular; nine upper labials, the posterior being considerably lower than the anterior; there are three or four series of small shields between the labials and the eyelid; eyelids entirely scaly. Seven lower labials; scales on the throat conically elevated. Scales of the upper parts of the body very small, of equal size, each with a short keel or conical protuberance. A low crest, formed by compressed triangular scales, runs from the occiput to- wards the middle of the tail, where it is gradually lost. Scales on the belly in transverse, slightly oblique series, small, but much larger than those on the sides, strongly keeled. Limbs with keeled scales of moderate size. The scales of the middle and posterior parts of the tail are much larger than those on its basal portion; all are keeled, the keels forming continuous longitudinal ridges. Each femur with a series of twelve to fourteen large pores filled with a greasy substance ; preeanal pores none. Tympanum larger than the eye. Each jaw with eighteen to twenty teeth on each side; teeth tri- cuspid, the lateral points being small; palatines with small teeth posteriorly. Bright grass-green ; head and nape of the neck, three broad cross bands on the trunk, and. about fourteen broad rings round the tail dark green. Nasal shield white. inches. lines. Perallenethre 2 dp tae ate alee geste xe SA Ss) Gea Length of head (to tympanum) .......... aay 3 trunk (from tympanum to vent). 4 5 Me CE GME ae a iat Ra 26 G Bs BAMCRINI ete erate ti ie arena ahertimche aa fae “a CIMECU SUPER oo ei wots ¢ cain slg a ts coy Gd ie 1 TTL 2 10019 Pe ee eae RL St 4. 0 a third. €OC . 5s ces osc Raters aconeS i 0 2 > intus sulcato. Hab. Japan. Coll. Cuming. A very pretty species, resembling in form S. cassidarieformis, Reeve, but with very different colouring and sculpture. 12. Stphonalia concinna, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-conica ; spira elata, quam apertura breviore, fulva, fasciis duabus latis transversis albidis ornata; anfractibus 6, leevibus, in medio angulatis, longitudinaliter plicatis, plicis distantibus, postice nodulosis, in anfractu ultimo obsoletis; anfractu ultimo antice transversim sulcato; apertura ovata; labio levi, tenui, canali brevi, valde reflexo ; labro intus leevi. Hab. Kuro-Sima. A neatly-painted species, with smooth and nodosely plicate whorls. 13. Siphonalia ornata, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-fusiformi; spira conica,‘quam apertura breviore, fulva, lineis transversis rubris (in anfractu ultimo septem) ornata; an- fractibus 6, planis, serie nodulorum in medio instructis, longitudi- naliter striatis, transversim liratis; apertura ovata; labio crasso, a proposed new Genus of Gasteropodous Mollusca. 205 calloso, canali subproducto, ad sinistram inclinato, valde recurvo ; labro intus valde lirato. Hab. Japan. Coll. Cuming. An elegant lineated species, with a series of conspicuous no- dules in the middle of the whorls. 14. Siphonalia filosa, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-fusiformi; spira clata, acuta, aperturam equante, pal- lide fulva, lineis transversis filiformibus aurantiacis ornata; anfrac- tibus 8, convexis, longitudinaliter plicatis, plicis rotundis, vix no- JCIBRe gE in anfractu alana obsoletis, transversim liratis, liris con- fertis, eequalibus ; apertura ov ata; labio calle leevi instructo, ca- nali mediocri, ad sinistram iolnatas recurvato ; labro intus lzevi. Hab. China Sea; 14 fathoms. Coll. Cuming. A slightly plicate subfusiform species, with the whorls adorned with orange thread-like lines. 15. Siphonalia ligata, A. Adams. S. testa acuminato-ovata; spira conica, quam apertura breviore, alba, lineis filiformibus pallide aurantiacis distantibus ornata ; anfractibus 6, planatis, postice angulatis, longitudinaliter subplicatis, trans- versim valde liratis, liris ad plicas nodulosis, elevatis, distantibus, regularibus; apertura ovata; labio tenui, simplici, canali brevi, lato, vix recurvato ; labro postice angulato. Hab. Japan. Coll. Cuming. A delicate white species, adorned with elevated pale orange transverse lines, and most nearly resembling S. lineata, Kiener. 16. Siphonalia grisea, A. Adams. S. testa acuminato-ovali, cinerea aut grisea; anfractibus 6, planis, oblique nodoso- plicatis, transversim valde liratis ; liris zequalibus, planis, interstitiis profunde exaratis ; anfractu ultimo magno, serie nodulorum ad peripheriam instructo ; apertura ovata, canali brevi, aperto, recurvato ; labio vix calloso; labro intus lirato. Hab. Simidsu. An ashy-grey species, with a series of nodules in the middle of the last whorl. 17. Siphonalia colus, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-fusiformi, pallide fusca ; spira elata, aperturam equante; anfractibus 8, convexis, postice excavatis, longitudinaliter obtusim plicatis, plicis rotundis, transversim liratis; liris confertis, fili- formibus, subeequalibus ; apertura ovata, canali elongato, aperto, subrecurvato ; labio levi; labro intus sulcato. Hab. Mino-Sima; 63 fathoms. An elegant fusiform species, with the whorls finely lirate, and 206 Mr. A. Adams on the Japanese Species of Siphonalia. with the siphonal canal produced anteriorly into a somewhat long recurved beak. 18. Siphonaha acuminata, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-fusiformi, pallide fulva aut alba, hic et illic rufo tincta; spira acuminata, quam apertura longiore ; anfractibus 9, convexis, postice excavatis, longitudinaliter plicatis, plicis rotundis, regularibus, subconfertis, transversim striatis, in medio anfractuum biliratis, liris ad plicas nodulosis ; anfractu ultimo liris 6 instructo; apertura rotundato-ovata, canali subproducto, tortuoso, vix re- curvo. Hab. Gotto; 48 fathoms. A light brown acuminate species, with the whorls nodosely plicate, and with the siphonal canal rather produced and tor- tuous. 19. Siphonalia pyramis, A. Adams. S. testa pyramidato-fusiformi, pallide fusca ; spira elata; anfractibus 7, subimbricatis, planis, longitudinaliter plicatis, transversim liratis, liris confertis, zequalibus, ad plicas subnodulosis ; apertura ovata, canali brevi, tortuoso, recurvo ; labio levi; labro intus sulcato. Hab. Satanomosaki; 55 fathoms. A somewhat pyramidal species, with an elevated conical spire, subimbricate whorls, and a short, tortuous siphonal canal. 20. Stphonalia munda, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-fusiformi, pallide fulva, hic et illic fusco tincta, maculis subquadratis rufo-fuscis, in serie unica dispositis, in medio anfrac- tuum ornata; spira producta, quam apertura longiore ; anfracti- bus 9, convexis, postice excavatis, longitudinaliter nodoso-plicatis, transversim crebre liratis, liris confertis, regularibus, eequalibus ; apertura oyato-oblonga, canali subproducto, tortuoso ; labio leevi, simplici. . Hab. Kuro-Sima; 35 fathoms. A neat, fusiform, fulvous species, with a series of subquadrate red-brown blotches in the middle of the whorls. 21. Siphonalia nodulosa, A. Adams. S. testa ovato-fusiformi; spira acuminata, aperturam equante, pal- lide fusca; anfractibus 7, convexis, postice subexcavatis, longitu- dinaliter valde plicatis, plicis distantibus, antice et postice obso- letis, transversim liratis, liris confertis, regularibus; apertura ovata; labio levi, canali mediocri, tortuoso; labro in medio recto, postice rotundato-angulato. Hab. Mino-Sima; 63 fathoms. A somewhat fusiform species, with strongly nodulous plicate whorls. Colour uniform pale brown. Prof. J. D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals. 207 XXIII.—On the higher Subdivisions in the Classification of Mammals. By Jamus D. Dana*. THE precise position of Man in the system of Mammals has long been, and still remains, a subject of discussion. There are those who regard him as too remote from all other species of the class to be subject to ordinary principles of classification. But zoologists generally place him either in an independent order (or subclass, if the highest divisions be subclasses) or else at the head of the order containing the Quadrumana. Science, in searching out the system in nature, leaves psychical or intellectual quali- ties out of view; and this is right. It is also safe; for these immaterial characteristics have, in all cases, a material or struc- tural expression ; and when this expression is apprehended, and its true importance fully admitted, classification will not fail of its duty in recognizing the distinctions they indicate. Cuvier, in distinguishing Man as of the order Bimana, and the Monkeys of the order Quadrumana, did not bring out to view any profound difference between the groups. The relations of the two are so close that Man, on this ground alone, would be far from certain of his separate place. No reason can be derived from the study of other departments of the Mammals, or of the animal kingdom, for considering the having of two hands a mark of superior rank’to the having of four. Prof. Owen, in his recent classification of Mammals +, makes the characteristics of the brain the basis of the several grand divisions. But, as he admits, the distinctions fail in many cases of corresponding to the groups laid down; and although the brain of Man (his group Archencephala) differs in some striking points from that of the Quadrumana, yet no study of the brain alone would suggest the real distinction between the groups, or prove that Man was not coordinal with the Monkeys. In fact, the nervous system is a very unsafe basis of classification below the highest grade of subdivisions—that into subkingdoms. The same subkingdom may contain species with, and without, a di- stinct nervous system, and a class or order may present very wide diversities as to its form and development, for the reason that the system or plan of structure in species is far more authoritative in classification than the condition of the nervous system, The fitness of the parts of the body of Man for intellectual uses, and his erect position, have been considered zoological * From the American Journal of Science and Arts, vol. xxxv. Jan. 1863. Communicated by the Author. + Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean Society of London, for Feb. 17 and April 21, 1857. 208 Prof. J.D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals. characteristics of eminent importance, separating him from other Mammals. But even these qualities, although admitted to be of real weight, are not, to many zoologists, unquestionable or authoritative evidence on this point. But while the structural distinctions mentioned may fail to establish Man’s independent ordinal rank, there is a character- istic that appears to be decisive, one which has that deep founda- tion in zoological science required to give it prominence and authority. The criterion referred to is this—that while all other Mam- mals have both the anterior and posterior limbs organs of loco- motion, in Man the anterior are transferred from the locomotive to the cephalic series. They serve the purposes of the head, and are net for locomotion. The cephalization of the body—that 1s, the subordination of its members and structure to head-uses— so variously exemplified in the animal kingdom, here reaches its. extreme limit. Man, in this, stands alone among Mammals. The author has shown elsewhere* that this cephalization is a fundamental principle, as respects grade, in zoological life. He has not only illustrated the fact that concentration of the anterior extremity of the body and abbreviation of its posterior portion is a mark of elevation, but, further than this, that the transfer of the anterior members of the thorax to the cephalic series is the founda- tion of rank among the orders of Crustaceans. In the highest order of this class, that of the Decapods (containing crabs, lobsters, shrimps, &c.), nine pairs of organs out of the fourteen pertaining to the head and thorax belong to the head—that is, to the senses and the mouth. In the second order, that of the Tetradecapods, there are only seven pairs of organs, out of the fourteen, thus devoted to the head, two of the pairs which are mouth-organs in the Decapods being true legs in the Tetra- decapods. In the third or lowest order, that of the Entomos- tracans, there are only siz, five, or four pairs of cephalic organs; and, besides, these in most species are partly pediform, even the mandibles having often a long foot-like branch or extremity, and the antenne being sometimes, also, organs of prehension or locomotion. Two of the laws bearing on grade, under this system of ce- phalization or decephalization, have been stated—its connexion with (1) a concentration of the anterior extremity and abbrevia- tion of the posterior extremity, and the reverse, and with (2) a * See his Report on Crustacea, the chapter on Classification, p. 1395 ; also Silliman’s Journal, vol. xxii. p. 14, 1856, where the principles ex- plained in this paper are illustrated by many examples, and with direct reference to the general subject of classification. Prof. J.D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals. 209 transfer of thoracic members to the cephalic series, and the re- verse. There is a third law which should be mentioned to ex- plain the relations of the Entomostracans to the other orders, namely, (3) that a decline in grade, after the ]axness and elonga- tion of the anterior and posterior extremities have reached their limit, is further exhibited by a degradation of the body, and especially of its extremities. In the step down from the Decapods to the Tetradecapods, there is an illustration of this principle in the eyes of the latter being imbedded in the head instead of being pedicellate. In the Entomostracans (1) the elongated abdomen is destitute of all but one or two of the normal pairs of members, not through a system of abbreviation, as exhibited in crabs, but a system of degradation; and in some species all the normal members are wanting, and even the abdomen itself is nearly obsolete. Again, (2) the two posterior pairs of thoracic legs are wanting in the species, and sometimes more than two pairs. Again, (3) at the anterior extremity, one pair of antennze is often obsolete, and sometimes the second pair nearly or even quite so. The Limulus, though so large an animal, has the abdomen reduced to a straight spine, and the antenne to a small pair of pincer legs, while all the mouth-organs are true legs—the whole structure indicating the extreme of degradation. In the order of Decapods having nine as the normal number of pairs of cephalic organs, the species of the highest group have these organs compacted within the least space consistent with the structure of the type; in those a grade lower, the posterior pair is a little more remote from the others, and begins to be some- what pediform ; a grade lower, this pair is really pediform, or nearly like the other feet ; and still lower, two or three pairs are pediform. Still lower in the series of Decapods (the Schizopods), there are examples under the principle of degradation above ex- plained—(1) in the absence of two or three pairs of the posterior thoracic appendages, (2) in the absence or obsolescence of the abdominal appendages, (3) in the Schizopod character of the feet. These Decapods, thus degraded, approximate to the Ento- mostracans, although true Decapods in type of structure. Thus the principle is exemplified within the limits of a single order, as well as in the range of orders. This connexion of cephalization with rise of rank is also illus- trated abundantly in embryonic development. It is one of the fundamental principles in living nature*, * Tn his ‘ Manual of Geology,’ just published, the writer, speaking of the ancient Ganoids, has preferred to use the term vertebrated tails rather than 210 ~~ Prof. J.D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals, When, then, in a group like that of Mammals, in which two is the prevailing number of pairs of locomotive organs, there is a transfer of the anterior of these two from the locomotive to the cephalic series, there is evidence, in this exalted cephalization of the system, of a distinction of the very highest significance. Moreover, it is of the more eminent value that it occurs in a class in which the number of locomotive members is so nearly a constant number. It places Man apart from the whole series of Mammals, and does it on the basis of a character which is fundamentally a criterion of grade. This extreme cephalization of the system is, in fact, that material or structural expression of the dominance of mind in the being, which meets the desire both of the natural and intellectual philosopher. This cephalization of the human system has been recognized by Carus, but not in its connexion with a deep-rooted structural law pervading the animal kingdom. It is the comprehensive- ness of the law which gives the special fact its great weight. Aristotle, in his three groups of Mammals, the Dipoda or two- footed, the Tetrapoda or four-footed, and the Apoda or footless species, expresses distinctions according with this law. The term Dipoda, as applied to Man, is far better and more philosophical than Bamana. The erect form of the structure in Man, although less authori- tative in classification, is a concomitant expression of this cepha- lization ; for the body is thus placed directly beneath the brain or the subordinating power, and no part of the structure is either anterior or posterior to it. Two feet for locomotion is the smallest possible number in an animal. Cephalic concentration and posterior abbreviation are at their maximum. ‘The charac- ters of the brain distinguishing the Archencephala (Man) in Prof. Owen’s system, so far as based on its general form or the relative position of its parts, flow from the erect form. Man’s title to a position by himself, separate from the other Mammals in classification, appears hence to be fixed on struc- tural as well as psychical grounds. heterocercal, because this characteristic of a prolonged vertebral column is a mark of inferiority of grade, on the principle explained; and the disap- pearance of it, in the Mesozoic era, was an instance of that abbreviation of the posterior extremity connected with a rise in grade. It is well exempli- fied also, as Agassiz has made known, in the development of the modern Ganoid, the young having a vertebrated upper lobe of the tail, which is lost before reaching the adult size. Another reason for using the term vertebrated is, that in some of the ancient Ganoids with vertebrated tails the vertebral prolongation is central in the tail, and the form is therefore not at all heterocercal. Prof. J.D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals, 211 The other Mammals are either true viviparous species, or semi- oviparous. The latter, including the Marsupials and Monotremes, con- stitute a natural group, as usually so regarded, the most funda- mental characteristic of which—the immaturity of the young at birth, by which they are related to oviparous Vertebrates— suggests the name Odticoids. The viviparous species are variously arranged by different zoologists*. Prof. Owen, basing his subdivisions largely, as has been stated, on the characters of the brain, makes the two groups Gyrencephala and Lissencephala, the former so named from having, in general, the surface of the brain convoluted, and the latter from its being, with some exceptions, smooth. The Gyrencephala include, in Prof. Owen’s system, three groups :—I. the Unguiculata (consisting, as presented by him, of the orders 1, Quadrumana, 2, Carnivora); II. the Ungulata (1, Artiodactyla or Ruminantia; 2, Perissodactyla or Solidungu- lata and Multungulata, 3, Proboscidia, 4, Toxodontia) ; III. the Mutilata (1, Sirenia, 2, Cetacea). The Lissencephala comprise four orders, arranged by him as follows: (1) Bruta or Edentata (Sloth, &c.), (2) Cheiroptera or Bats, (3) Insectivora (Mole, Hedgehog, &c.), (4) Rodentia. Although the characteristics of the brain do not set forth satisfactorily the distinctions between the Gyrencephala and Lissencephala, the groups themselves (first laid down with the limits here assigned, as Prof. Owen states, by Jourdan) appear to be founded in nature. In the arrangement of the groups under these two divisions, however, the system proposed below widely differs from the above. The Crustaceans have here also afforded the writer the prin- ciples of classification on which he rests his conclusionst. The orders among Crustaceans are based not only on a dif- ference of structure and cephalization, but also on a difference * See Professor Owen’s memoir already referred to, for an account of different earlier systems of the classification of Mammals. + Principles are none the less important because indicated among these lower Articulates. The turns of a closed spiral are easily mistaken for circles, as was long the case with those of flowers in plants; but if the spire be drawn out long, it then exhibits its true characters, and may dis- play details that are otherwise undiscoverable. The class of Crustaceans is an example of a type of structure thus drawn out, its species ranging from the microscopic memberless Rotifer to the highest crabs; and the genera are distributed, so to speak, at distant intervals along the course of the series, since they are comparatively few in number. Fundamental principles in zoological science are therefore exhibited in this class on a magnified scale, easily perceived and understood. 212 ~=—- Prof. J.D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals. in the normal magnitude of the life-system. The Decapods are built on a life-system of large size as to plan as compared with that of the Tetradecapods. Deducing the relative size from the mean dimensions of the active species under the two types, the ratio is nearly as 4: 1. (See the papers of the author already referred to.) Moreover, while thus distinct, the subdivisions of the two orders form parallel series,—the Brachyurans, Anomou- rans and Macrourans running a close parallel with the Isopods, Anisopods and Amphipods; for the Isopods are literally Bra- chyural Tetradecapods, and the Amphipods Macroural*. The life-system in the Entomostracans is on a still smaller olan. Among the viviparous Mammals (exclusive of Man) the first group differs from the second on this same principle—the fact of a larger and more powerful type of structure or life-system. This fact stands out boldly to view on comparing active species of each—the orang-outang with the largest bat, the tiger with any Insectivore, the horse or elk with any Rodent, a Cetacean with any Edentate. The species of the second division are rela- tively small and feeble animals; and if they are sometimes of great bulk, as some ancient sloths, it is an example, though natural to the species, of vegetative overgrowth ; for the bodies of the sloths, great and small, are, in fact, too bulky to be wielded well by the small life-system within. Adopting this view as presenting the true basis for the sub- division of the viviparous Mammals, the two groups are sig- nificantly designated (1) Megasthenes (from peyas, great, and aGevos, strength), and (2) Microsthenes (from pxpos, small, and oOevos). Judging of the mean size of the hife-system in the two divisions from their more active as well as powerful species, the lineal ratio is not far from 4:1, as between the Decapods and Tetradecapods. The orders in these two groups, the Megasthenes and Micro- sthenes, have throughout a precise parallelism. The Bats or Chiropters in the latter represent the Monkeys or Quadrumanes in the former, these orders having such close relations that they are made to follow one another in Cuvier’s system; the Insecti- vores represent the Carnivores ; the Rodents represent the Herbi- vores ; and the Brutes or Edentates the Mutilates. * The parallelism is complete; for the Amphipods differ from the Iso- pods just as the Macrourans from the Brachyurans, in having a larger and less compacted head, looser and larger mouth-organs, longer segments to the body, and an elongated foot-bearing abdomen—all points of inferior concentration and cephalization. Prof. J.D. Dana on the Classification of Mammals, 218 The classification indicated is then as follows :— I, Arcuontra (vel Dirropa)—MaAn (alone). II. MrGaAstHeENa. III. MicrostHena. 1. Quadrumama. 1. Cheiroptera. 2. Carnivora. 2. Insectivora. 3. Hlerbivora. | 3. Rodentia. 4, Mutilata. } 4, Bruta (Edentata). IV. Odricormea. 1. Marsupialia. 2. Monotremata. It is interesting to observe, also, that the four orders of Mega- sthenes rise in grade, from the 4th to the 1st, on the principles of cephalization stated ; and this affords other evidence, superadded to that of higher importance based on difference in type of structure, as to the naturalness of these subdivisions. The spe- cies of the 4th (the Mutilates) are characterized by a degrada- tion and partial obsolescence of the limbs, by the body being massively prolonged behind, by a large part of the elongated vertebral column being used for locomotion, by the form and the low grade of structure of the head, and by the teeth, always of extreme simplicity of form, in most species of one set only, in some excessively multiplied in number, in others all wantng— peculiarities indicating a very low degree of cephalization, and even a degradation of the anterior as well as posterior extremity. Those of the 3rd (the Herbivores) by a more abbreviated body, by the two pairs of limbs being complete, but serving only for locomotion, by an elongated head. Those of the 2nd (the Carnivores) by the limbs being still more perfect, and serving, the anterior especially, for grasping, by the head being shorter and more compacted and, in general, more complete in the series of teeth. Those of the lst (the Quadrumanes) by the anterior limbs serving still more perfectly as hands, by the cephalic extremity being further shortened, also by the mammez being pectoral, as in Man. There is, in the series of orders, an advance by stages towards that acme of cephalization, Man. Among the Microsthenes, the rise in rank on this principle is no less apparent. It is well seen between the lowest (the Brutes) and the others. These have posteriorly a remarkably lax verte- bral column, but two or three of the vertebra being soldered together to form the sacrum. The cephalic extremity exhibits, not only a low grade of cephalic concentration, as shown in the larger number of cervical vertebra in some species, the excessive num- ber of teeth im some species, the characters of the skull, but also a marked example of cephalic degradation in the jaws, in 214 Mr.T.V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. the very few teeth in most species and their total absence in some, in the inferior character of the teeth and the growth of but one set—in all of which characteristics, as well as their bulky bodies, there is a close parallelism with the Mutilates, the lowest of the Megasthenes. XXIV.—Diagnostic Notices of New Canarian Coleoptera. By T. Vernon Wottaston, M.A., F.LS. Havine been occupied for some time past in preparing a Cata- logue of the Coleoptera of the Canarian Archipelago, and beimg unavoidably delayed in the completion of it, the following dia- gnoses of a few of the new forms which have long been described at considerable length in my manuscript, and many of which are now widely distributed in European collections, may serve to secure the priority of the names which I have imposed upon them. Fam. Carabide. Genus Meraserus, Goebel. 1. Metabletus inequalis. M. eneus, distincte alutaceus, sat nitidus; prothorace cordato ; elytris plus minus inzequalibus, distincte striatis, utvoque foveis 2 magnis notato; antennis femoribusque nigro-piceis, illis ad basin, tibiis tarsisque plus minus piceo-fuscis. Long. corp. lin. 15-14. Habitat in Canaria, Teneriffa, Gomera et Palma, preesertim in syl- vaticis degens. Genus Tarus, Clairv. 2. Tarus zargoides. T. subnitidus, fusco-piceus, pilis mollibus erectis brevissimis sat dense vestitus ; capite prothoraceque dense et profunde scabroso- punctatis, hoc cordato angulis ipsis posticis paulo exstantibus ; elytris ovalibus, subconvexis et undulato-inzequalibus, profunde (sed subirregulariter) punctato-striatis, interstitiis minute punctu- latis, limbo vix rufescentiore ; antennis palpisque testaceis, pedibus pallido-testaceis. Long. corp. lin. 24-22. Habitat in sylvaticis montosis Teneriffe, sub lapidibus rarissimus. Genus Masorzvs, De}. 3. Masoreus arenicola. M. nigro-piceus, distincte (oculo armato) alutaceus; prothorace transverso, subconvexo, postice in medio plus minus conspicue transversim impresso sed vix rugato, canalicula centrali haud pro- Mr. T. V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. 215 funda necnon antice et postice plus minus sub-obsoleta; elytris leviter subcrenato-striatis, ad basin plus minus distincte rufescen- tioribus ; antennis, palpis pedibusque piceo-testaceis ; unguiculis leviter.denticulatis. Long. corp. lin. 2-21. Habitat in arenosis maritimis (plus minus salinis) Lanzarote et Fuerteventurze, tempore hiberno et vernali, hinc inde vulgaris. Genus Amara, Bon. (Subgenus Lr1ocnemtis, Zimm.) 4. Amara versuta. A. breviter ovata, nigro-picea, sneo-micans, convexa; prothorace brevi, transverso, ad latera marginato et zequaliter rotundato, basi vix punctato (interdum impunctato) sed utrinque foveis 2 (interna sc. majore longiore, sed externa parva, minus profunda, subrotun- data) notato, postice in medio transversim impresso ; elytris paulo dilutioribus (fusco-piceis), crenato-striatis ; antennis, palpis pedi- busque testaceis. Long. corp. lin. 2-24. Habitat Lanzarotam et Fuerteventuram, sub lapidibus, passim. Genus Cratoenatuus, Dej. 5. Cratognathus solitarius. C. ater, subcylindrico-oblongus; capite magno; prothorace sub- quadrato, postice vix angustiore, basi utrinque fovea sat profunda punctata impresso ; elytris oblongis, profunde crenato-striatis, in- terstitio septimo ad apicem ipsissimum punctulis circa 2-4 (inter- dum indistinctis confusis) notato ; antennis, palpis tarsisque rufo- ferrugineis, femoribus tibiisque piceis. Long. corp. lin. 43-5. Habitat Lanzarotam et Fuerteventuram, sub lapidibus in locis inter- mediis et editioribus sat vulgaris. 6. Cratognathus fortunatus. C. piceus, oblongus ; capite magno ; prothorace subquadrato, postice subrecte angustiore, basi utrinque vix punctulato vix impresso ; elytris subovato-oblongis, striatis, interstitio septimo ad apicem punctis circa 2-4 notato; labro rufo-piceo; antennis, palpis pedi- busque rufo-ferrugineis. Long. corp. lin. 5-52. Habitat montes Canarize Grandis, in pineto quodam regionis “‘ Tara- jana”’ dictee mense Aprili a.p. 1858 sat copiose repertus. 7. Cratognathus micans. C. preecedenti similis, sed paulo minor, in utroque sexu fere sequaliter nitidus ; prothorace_ad latera paulo magis sinuato; elytris antice 216 = Mr. T. V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. paulo magis truncatis (ergo vix brevioribus), interstitii septimi punctis obsoletis; pedibus paulo pallidioribus. Long. corp. lin. 43-5. Habitat in Teneritfa et Gomera, hinc inde haud infrequens. Genus Trecuvs, Clairv. 8. Trechus flavolimbatus. 7. niger, nitidus ; prothorace transverso-subquadrato, postice paulo angustiore, angulis ipsissimis posticis minutissime prominulis, basi utrinque leviter foveolato ; elytris oblongo-ovalibus, subdepressis, limbo plus minus flavo-testaceo, striatis (striis vix subcrenatis, exterioribus obsoletis); antennis nigro-fuscescentibus, ad basin rufo- testaceis ; pedibus pallido-testaceis, tibiis plus minus obscurioribus. Long. corp. lin. 14-13. Trechus flavolimbatus, Schaum, in litt. Habitat in Canaria, Teneriffa, Gomera, Palma, et Hierro, vulgaris. Genus Pertieprus, Schaum. 9. Perileptus nigritulus. P. omnino P. areolato similis, sed yix major minusque nitidus (oculo fortissime armato grossius, preesertim in elytris, alutaceus), paulo magis pubescens ; capite postice dilute rufescentiore ; elytris (limbo postico pallido excepto) totis nigris, paulo magis parallelis, interstitiis vix minus convexis; antennis paulo longioribus, robus- tioribus. Long. corp. lin. 1-14. Habitat Teneriffam, inter lapilios per marginem paludis cujusdam parvee prope urbem Sanctze Crucis site copiose deprehensus. Fam. Dytiscide. Genus Haxtptus, Lat. 10. Haliplus suffusus. H. oblongus; capite nigro-piceo, latiusculo, punctato ; prothorace festacea: antice, postice in medio, necnon in disco nigrescente, basi lato (elytrorum basin paulo superante), ad latera oblique sub- recto, in medio profunde punctato, postice utrinque linea curvata abbreviata notato; elytris testaceis (preesertim pone discum), nigro suffusis, antice subparallelis, punctato-striatis, interstitiis parce punctatis ; antennis pedibusque testaceis. Long. corp. lin. 14-13. Habitat in aquis Canarize et Gomere, hine inde parum vulgaris. Fam. Anisotomide. Genus Anisotoma, III. 1]. Anisotoma canariensis. A, ovalis, convexa, nitida, nigro- vel fusco-picea ; capite prothoraceque Mr. T. V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. 217 sat distincte punctatis ; elytris versus basin paulo rufescentioribus, sat profunde punctato-striatis, interstitiis punctulatis ; antennis ad basin pedibusque piceo-ferrugineis, femoribus muticis. Mas tibiis posterioribus distinctius arcuatis. Long. corp. lin. 1. Habitat in Canaria et Hierro, rarissima. Fam. Nitidulide. Genus Bracuyrtervs, Kugel. 12. Brachypterus velatus. B. oblongo-ovatus, subconvexus, viridescenti-niger, nitidus, grosse flavescenti-cinereo pubescens, dense punctatus; prothorace ad la- tera subzequaliter rotundato, angulis posticis obtusis ; scutello ob- tuse triangulari ; antennis pedibusque rufo-testaceis, illarum clava tarsorumque apicibus ipsissimis nigrescentibus. Long. corp. lin. 3-1. Habitat in Lanzarota, Canaria, Teneriffa et Hierro, super folia Urtice urentis, L., parum vulgaris. Fam. Cucujide. Genus Sytvanus, Lat. (Subgenus Aurapuitus, Redt.) 13. Silvanus nubsgena. S. angusto-elongatus, subconvexus, fusco-niger, dense flavescenti- cinereo pubescens; capite prothoraceque rugose punctatis, hoc eequali, angusto, subcylindrico, postice vix angustiore, ad latera subrecto ac distincte crenulato, angulis ipsis posticis obtusis sed argute determinatis, penicillatis; elytris rugose et dense seriatim punctatis, versus humeros interdum paulo fuscescentioribus ; fe- moribus piceis ; antennis, tibiis tarsisque piceo-ferrugineis. Long. corp. lin. 1-14. Habitat in aridis excelsis Teneriffe, inter lapillos ramulosque emor- tuos sub arbusculis Spartii nubigene humi jacentibus, velocissime currens, necnon fere ad 9000! s. m. ascendens. Fam. Cryptophagide. Genus Crypropuacus, Herbst. 14. Cryptophagus hesperius. C. fusiformi-oblongus, rufo-ferrugineus, pube brevi albida parce ves- titus ; prothorace profunde et dense punctato, postice angustato, angulis anticis ampliatis, ad latera denticulis acutis circa 4-5 ar- mato; elytris subfusiformibus, sat dense punctatis ; antennis pedi- busque longiusculis, graciusculis, vix pallidioribus. Long. corp. lin. 2-3. Habitat in sylvaticis subsylvaticisque Canarie, Teneriffee, Gomere, Palme, et Hierro, vulgaris. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol, xi. 15 218 Mr. T. V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. Fam. Dermestide. Genus TrLorgs, Redt. 15. Telopes multifasciatus. T. ovalis, niger, nigrescente pubescens; prothorace utrinque et in maculis 2 posticis s elytrisque i in fasciis 3, necnon ad apicem, pallido pilosis ; antennis nigris, ad basin picescentibus, articulo ultimo (in utroque sexu) parvo; pedibus piceis, tarsis vix pallidioribus. Mas. Antennarum clava paulo longiore, articulis penultimo et antepenultimo leviter elongatis. Fom. Antennarum clava paulo breviore, articulis penultimo et antepenultimo terminali vix (singulatim) majoribus. Long. corp. lin. 14-12. Habitat Canariam Grandem, ad flores varios tempore vernali frequens. 16. Telopes fasciatus. T. breviter ovalis, niger, nigrescente pubescens ; prothorace utrinque et in maculis 2 posticis elytrisque in fasciis 2 (postica subevanes- cente), necnon mox ante apicem, pallido pilosis ; antennis nigris, ad basin picescentibus ; pedibus piceis, tarsis vix pallidioribus. Mas. Antennarum clava paulo longiore, articulo ultimo leviter elongato. Fem. Antennarum clava paulo breviore, articulis tribus inter se subzequalibus. Long. corp. lin. 14—vix 13. Habitat im floribus Teneriffe, Gomerz et Palmee, tempore vernali frequens. Fam. Elateride. Genus Corrostrruus, Woll. 17. Coptostethus brunneipennis. C. elongatus, niger vel fusco-niger, elytris plus minus brunneis, fulvo pubescens ; prothorace elongato, basi paulo angustato; ely- tris pube suberecta tenui vestitis, sat profunde crenato-striatis, interstitiis subconvexis ; antennis pedibusque elongatis, testaceis. Long. corp. lin. 23-33. Habitat in Teneriffa, Palma et Hierro, sub lapidibus, passim. Fam. Curculionidae. Genus Nanopuyes, Schon. 18. Nanophyes lunulatus. N. ovatus, pallido-testaceus, flavescenti-albido pubescens; elytris profunde subpunctato-striatis, fascia media parva subluniformi utrinque valde abbreviata (interdum per suturam fracta), necnon in interstitio quinto seepe maculis (una vel duabus) parvis, nigro ornatis. Long. corp. lin. 2~3. Habitat Canariam Grandem, in foliis arbuscularum Tamaricis gal- lice per margines rivuli ad Mogan crescentium deprehensus. Mr. T. V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. 219 Genus AcCALLEs, Schon. 19. Acalles verrucosus. A. lateraliter compressus, supra valde arcuatus, squamis nigrescenti- bus densissime tectus et dilutioribus irroratus ; prothorace postice paulo angustato, ad latera late albido squamoso, ante medium setoso 4-tuberculato ; elytris postice paulo coarctatis sed ibidem decurvis, nodulis plurimis setosis instructis, argute striato-punc- tatis, mox pone medium macula parva obluniformi utrinque valde abbreviata albido ornatis: pedibus tarsorumque articulo 1™° elongatis, tibiarum squamis erectis elongatis. Long. corp. lin. 23-3. Habitat in elevatis sylvaticis Teneriffee et Palmee, rarissimus. Genus Ecutnopera, Woll. 20. Echinodera crenata. E. squamis fuscis nigrescentibusque dense variegata et cinereis plus minus maculata, setis longiusculis suberectis obsita ; prothorace profunde et dense punctato, setis apicalibus vix longioribus ; ely- tris elongato-ovatis, ad humeros vix oblique truncatis, sat profunde crenato-striatis, pone medium macula magna obluniformi (antice et postice plus minus nigro terminata), necnon nebula (plus minus magna, suffusa) versus humeros, cinereo ornatis. Long. corp. lin. 13-2. Habitat in montibus editioribus Teneriffe, sub lapidibus inter 6000! et 9000’ s. m., ultra regiones sylvaticas, occurrens. Genus Ariantis, Woll. 21. Atlantis angustuia. A. angustulo-subeylindrica, atra, subnitida, subtiliter pubescens pilis- que elongatis erectis in elytris obsita ; rostro crassiusculo, punctato, oculis rotundatis, prominentibus ; prothorace convexo, per basin ipsissimam subsinuato et distincte marginato, sat profunde sub- ruguloso-punctato punctulisque minutis intermediis valde distinctis parum crebre irrorato ; elytris subcylindricis, profunde punctato- striatis ; antennis tarsisque piceis ; femoribus tibusque nigris. Long. corp. lin, 3-49. Habitat Canariam Grandem, sub lapidibus in inferioribus et inter- mediis late diffusa. Genus Lararocerrus, Schon. 2. Laparocerus excavatus. L. niger, nitidus, fere calvus; prothorace convexo, minutissime, dense et levissime punctulato punctisque majoribus sed vix pro- fundis parce notato, fere simplici ; elytris basi subbisinuato-trun- catis, callo humerali valde incrassato, profunde punctato-striatis, interstitiis minutissime transversim substriguloso-rugatis et punctis remote obsitis; antennis rufo-ferrugineis, pedibus rufo-piceis. 15% 220 =Mr.T. V. Wollaston on new Canarian Coleoptera. Mas szepius nitidior, tibiis anticis intus versus apicem profunde excavatis, posticis fortiter sed parce serratis. Long. corp. lin. 4-53. Habitat in montibus sylvaticis Teneriffee, preesertim inter muscos et lichenes ad truncos arborum crescentes. 23. Laparocerus crassifrons. L. niger vel piceo-niger, parum nitidus, plus minus dense et grosse submetallico-squamoso tessellatus ; capite convexo, crasso, rostro crasso subtriangulari grosse denseque punctato et profunde canali- culato ; prothorace convexo, punctato punctulisque minutis inter- mediis dense irrorato ; elytris oblongo-subovalibus, punctato-stri- atis, interstitiis vix punctulatis et pilis brevibus suberectis remotis priesertim postice obsitis ; antennis rufo-ferrugineis ; pedibus rufo- piceis. Long. corp. lin. 33-5. Habitat sub lapidibus scoriisque in regionibus Teneriffie valde ele- vatis, usque ad 8000! s. m. ascendens. . 24. Laparocerus inequalis. L. enescenti-niger, nitidus, parce submetallico-squamoso tessellatus pilisque plus minus elongatis erectis fulvescentibus preesertim in elytris parce obsitus ; prothorace parvo, angusto, subcylindrico- conico, sat grosse punctato punctulisque scar aerate intermediis dense irrorato; elytris latiusculis, subquadrato-oblongis, punctato- striatis, interstitiis alternis valde tuberculato-inzequalibus, tuber- culis paulo fulvescenti-squamoso fasciculatis ; antennis, tibiis tar- sisque ferrugineis, femoribus ferrugineo-piceis. Long. corp. lin. 3-4. Habitat Teneriffam sylvaticam, in lauretis editioribus supra Tagana- nam captus. 25. Laparocerus ellipticus. I. ferrugineus, subnitidus, dense sericeo-metallico-squamoso tessel- latus pilisque elongatis suberectis postice obsitus ; rostro crasso, oculis magnis; prothorace parvo, angusto, ruguloso-subalutaceo, parce et leviter punctato, basi subemarginato ; elytris ovato-ellip- ticis, basi conjunctim trisinuatis, leviter punctato-striatis, imter- stitiis alternis plus minus leete tessellatis. Long. corp. lin. 4-5. Habitat in sylvaticis excelsis Teneriffee et Palmze, vel inter muscos lichenesque ad truncos arborum crescentes, vel sub cortice laxo latitans. Genus Srronrs, Germ. 26. Sitones punctiger. S. oblongus, squamis griseis cinereisque variegatus et setis piliformi- bus demissis obsitus; capite prothoraceque profunde rugoso- punctatis, illo postice punctis duobus cinereis ornato, oculis ob- longis rotundatis valde prominentibus, hoc ad latera pallidiore Bibliographical Notice. | 221 rotundato, linea media et punctis 2 vel 3 utrinque annexis pal- lidioribus ornato ; elytris cylindricis, per suturam obscure albidis, interstitiis alternis lete fulvo nigroque tessellatis; antennis ad basin pedibusque (squamosis) clarioribus. Long. corp. lin. 23-3. Habitat Lanzarotam et Fuerteventuram, sub lapidibus in aridis are- nosis et calcariis degens. 27. Sitones setiger. S. oblongus, squamis griseis inzequaliter vestitus ; capite prothorace- que densissime et profunde rugoso-punctatis, illo oculis oblongo- rotundatis prominentibus, hoc subcylindrico, intra apicem (sub- elevatum) constricto, ad utrumque latus linea paulo albidiore ornato; elytris profunde punctato-striatis, vel obscure variegatis (interstitiis alternis obsolete tessellatis) vel dense fusco aut ochraceo- fusco squamosis, szepius versus latera squamis albidioribus obscure plagiatis, interstitiis setosis (setis nigrescentibus sed in interstitiis alternis setis albidioribus distantibus commixtis); antennis brevi- bus pedibusque rufo-ferrugineis, capitulo femoribusque obscu- rioribus. Long. corp. lin. 14-2. Habitat im aridis insularum Canariensium, in Palma sola hactenus haud detectus. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE. Outlines of Botany, designed for Schools and Colleges. By J. H. Batrour, M.D. &c., Prof. of Botany in the University of Edin- burgh. 12mo, pp. 712. Black, Edinburgh, 1562. Tue title of this book shows the intention of its author in the pre- sent republication of the article ‘‘ Botany ”’ from the ‘ Encyclopzedia Britannica.’ We are sorry to add that we look upon it as a mistake to think that the book is well fitted for schools and colleges; for we presume that here “colleges” is simply a synonym of “schools.” It does not differ sufficiently from the same author’s valuable books en- titled ‘ Manual’ and ‘ Class Book’ to be suited to the inferior class of teaching usually, and perhaps necessarily, given in those places. It seems to us far too hard, much too long, and not sufficiently autho- ritative for young scholars. In short, it is too good for its purpose. If Dr. Balfour had allowed this treatise to continue in the position for which it was written, and to which it is well fitted, and had prepared a small—very much smaller—book containing the elements of botany in simple language, he would have done more service to science. Such simple elements should be written as by a master stating his determinations, and usually omitting all notice of the opinions of others (which are to be found properly in the larger Class-books and Introductions), leaving out most of the chemistry as unintelligible to the young student, and omitting the greater part of the technicalities relating to the Natural Orders, but inserting in 222 Zoological Society :— their place an outline of the natural arrangement adopted by De Candolle and most modern systematic writers. We think that 150 pages devoted to this latter part of the science is almost alto- gether out of place in a book “intended to give the important facts of botanical science as briefly and popularly as possible.”’ But we must not be misunderstood. This is an excellent book, and well fitted to follow a ‘brief and popular” primary volume, such as Henfrey’s ‘ Rudiments.’ It will even, we suspect, supersede Balfour’s ‘ Manual’ in many places where that has been usually em- ployed: this is a misfortune; for the ‘Manual’ is far better fitted for the more advanced student than are these ‘ Outlines.’ PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. June 24, 1862.—E. W. H. Holdsworth, Esq., F.L.S., in the Chair. DESCRIPTION OF CROCODILUS FRONTATUS, a New Croco- DILE FROM Oxup Canasar River, Wesr Arrica. By ANDREW Murray, Assist. SECRETARY, Roya Horticut- TURAL SOCIETY. CrocopiLus FRONTATUS, Nov. Sp. Head broad and deep, much broader than in C. vulgaris, very flat on the vertex, and with the margins of the flat portion slightly raised ; the lateral margins very slightly curved ; the suture inside of the lateral margin placed at rather more than a fourth of the breadth of the vertex from its side. This suture is not throughout parallel to the lateral margin; it is nearly so for about two-thirds of its Be." 1. posterior length ; towards the front it bends a little outwards. Fig. 1 shows the form of the sutures in this species, while fig. 2 shows their form in C, vulgaris, and fig. 3 in C. leptorhynchus. The ver- Mr. A. Murray on a new Species of Crocodile. 223 tex in the two last, although flattened, is not so depressed, but is slightly rounded, so as to be Panic hak higher at the middle than at Fig. 2. Fig. 3. the margin. The colour in C. frontatus is yellowish with blackish spots, instead of brown with blackish spots, as in C. vulgaris and C. Fig. 4. leptorhynchus. The muzzle is shorter than in either of the others, deeper, and the front rises higher above it; the nostrils are more 224 Zoological Society :— prominent and turned up. Both the head and the lower jaw are deeper than in C. vulgaris and C. leptorhynchus. (See fig. 4, which represents the head of C. frontatus seen in profile, and figs. 5 and 6, which respectively represent the profiles of the head of C. vulgaris and C. leptorhynchus.) The disposition of the scuta or plates along Fig. 6. the nose or muzzle is different in each species. Fig. 7 shows them in C. frontatus ; fig. 8, in C. vulgaris; and fig. 9, in C. leptorhyn- chus. It will be seen that the arrangement in C. frontatus is much nearer that in C. vulgaris than that in C. leptorhynchus, which is upon a totally different plan, the middle space in it being free from scuta, soft, and smooth, with transverse wrinkles or lines, while in the other two the space is covered with scuta, those in the middle being trans- verse. The commencement of these transverse scuta between the eyes is also different. Mr. A. Murray ona new Species of Crocodile. 225 The scuta on the nape of the neck are differently proportioned and placed in all three; and here the arrangement in C. frontatus bears most affinity to that of C. leptorhynchus, instead of to that of C. Fig. 8. Fig. 9. vulgaris. Fig. 10 shows this arrangement in C. frontatus ; fig. 11, in C. vulgaris; and fig. 12, in C. leptorhynchus. In C. frontatus Fig. 10. and C. leptorhynchus the four large scuta are of a subquadrate form ; in C. vulgaris they are irregularly subhexagonal. In the latter, not only these but also the scuta generally are flat, with a longitudinal raised line or carina. In C. leptorhynchus, those in the neighbour- 226 Zoological Society :— hood of the four larger scuta bear a projecting oblong umbo; and C. frontatus has this developed in a manner still more marked. Pie The same character prevails in the rest of the seuta. In all three species there are six rows of large scuta down the back, varying in width, diminishing to four rows in the lumbar region. In C. vulgaris these scuta are flat, with only a slightly raised longitudinal line or carina. In C. leptorhynchus this carina is much more raised, so as to form regular crests. In C. fronéatus some of them have an oblong umbo, others a crest, and others only a raised line: the affinity in this respect is greater with C. leptorhynchus than C. vulgaris. It is the same with regard to the crest down the tail. In all three the rows of dorsal scuta down the back become only four in number after passing the hind legs, forming four raised lines, two on each side of the spine; the inner crests or lines on each side then gra- dually approximate (in C. vulgaris forming a narrow channel) and thin off and become obliterated. The outer crest on each side, at about the seventh or eighth jomt behind the hind legs, becomes broader and spreads out into a flat plate or leaf turned out horizon- tally on each side. There are about seven joints in which this flat table-shaped position of the scuta occurs, and about the same number prevails in all three. As this disposition, however, does not com- mence suddenly at any particular joint, but proceeds by gradations out of the crest on the back, the number may be modified according to the degree at which the observer reckons the horizontal leaf to commence. The size of these scuta is proportionally larger in C. frontatus and C. leptorhynchus than in C. vulgaris. These hori- zontal thin scuta extend one on each side for a certain distance ; and then all at once the double row ceases, and is replaced by a series of single erect scuta running down the top of the tail. In my specimens the number of joints before this single crest commences, reckoning from immediately behind the hind legs, is as follows :— CSU GOIN By ic Re, hte at sushi choe te, Raa 18 Ce lepton hy Qchus, perc. «sur nieve ery et Ci JE ORLAEUS a tel. ks eat ener a cd Mr. A. D. Bartlett on the Habits and Affinities of the Kagu. 227 And the number of erect terminal joints is— COOUNGRHES Ty ds ee salen 20 C. ens pene sei 6: 2 Jl hate ates ued othe gees LUD C. frontatus. . The colouring of C. frontatus is Ant nearer that of C. lepto- rhynchus than C. vulgaris. The latter is coloured pale ashy brown, blotched irregularly with dark brown. The other two have the dark blotches distributed in transverse bands,—C. frontatus having every alternate two rows of transverse scuta pale and dark—a disposition followed in C. leptorhynchus, but not so regularly. Total length of my specimen, 21 inches; total length of head, from tip of snout to back of under jaw, 34 inches ; breadth of head, 1? inch; length of muzzle to front of eye, 1} inch; length of eye, nearly 1 inch; height of head, 2 inches; length of body, from occi- put to back of hind legs, 8 inches; total length of tail, 12 inches ; length of tail to commencement of single crest, 53 inches; length of the part of it with single crest, 73 inches. On the whole, this new species seems to combine many of the characters both of C. vulgaris and C. leptorhynchus. In its head it is nearest to C. vulgaris; in its colouring, scuta, and tail to C. lep- torhynchus. I owe this specimen to the kindness of the Rev. W. C. Thomson, the accomplished missionary at Old Calabar. He wrote me word long before I received it that there was another species of Crocodile in the Old Calabar besides the two generally known, that it was ex- tremely scarce, but that he would endeavour to procure a specimen for me. He did so, and sent me the individual from which this de- scription is taken, alive. It reached Liverpool in good health, but, most unfortunately, was drowned on the railway on its passage to Edinburgh. The gentleman who was kind enough to charge himself with it thought it would not live unless brought in water, and he put it in a foot-pail half full of water. The water was too deep to allow the poor animal to rest on the bottom of the pail and stretch up its head for breath; and when the jolting of the railway com- menced, it was kept in a constant state of submersion. The con- sequence which might have been anticipated ensued, and my Croco- dile arrived dead. There is no doubt that it is a good species, half- way between C. vulgaris and C. leptorhynchus. Note ON THE Hasits AND AFFINITIES OF THE KaGu (Ruinocuetus supatus). By A. D. Barrier. At the first sight of this bird, one is struck with its resemblance to several different genera, and at once calls to mind Hurypyga, Gdi- enemus, Cariama, Psophia, Nycticorax, and Scopus: one and all appear more or less represented in its singular combination of cha- racters. The actions and movements of the Kagu are generally quick and lively, so opposite to the slow and chameleon-like movements of the true Herons that one can hardly suspect it to be an Ardeine bird. 228 Zoological Society. This, however, it doubtless will prove to be, but so modified and adapted to a different kind of diet and mode of life, that its real affi- nities are difficult to recognize. With its crest erect, and wings spread out, the Kagu runs or skips about, sometimes pursuing and driving before him all the birds that are confined with him in the same aviary [among these are several Blue Waterhens (Porp/yrio) |, evidently enjoying the fun of seeing them frightened ; at other times he will seize the end of his wing or tail and run round, holding it in his bill: from a piece of paper or dry leaf he derives amusement by tossing it about and running after it. During his frolic he will thrust his bill into the ground and spread out his wings, kick his legs in the air, and then tumble about as if ina fit. At other times he appears intent upon catching worms: he steps slowly, his neck close to his body, his crest flat on his back, all his feathers smooth and close ; he raises one foot, and with two or three gentle strokes he paws the ground, swiftly he darts his bill into the earth and draws forth a worm, a sudden shake and it is swallowed; again he runs ; stopping suddenly, he makes another dart ; and thus he continues to capture this kind of food. With respect to feeding, this bird differs much from the Heron family, seeking out, in every hole and corner, worms, snails, and other living things, whenever they are not in motion: as soon as a snail is found, he breaks its shell by repeated knocks upon the ground, and after shaking the fragments of the broken shell off, the animal is swallowed. In no instance, however, that I have observed, does this bird eat bread; seed, or any kind of vegetable, but he strictly confines himself to in- sects and other animal substances. The skeleton and internal anatomy of the Kagu being entirely un- known to me, I can only form an opinion of the affinities of this bird by its external characters, habits, &c.; and I find that the re- markable powder-down tufts, which are well developed in all the Ar- deines, are carried to a greater extent in this bird; for above and around the wings, on the breast beneath the wings, and on the back and belly, this structure exists, and the enormous quantity of the white powder given off is surprising. I have seen the bird enter the small pond and attempt to wash; and upon dipping partly under water, the whole surface of the water was covered with a white film, like French chalk. The strong resemblance between this bird and Zury- pyga, even in the markings upon the wing- and tail-feathers, the mode of spreading out the wings, and other resemblances, convince me that I am right in considering the Kagu to be more closely allied to Eurypyga than to any other bird that has come within my notice. MISCELLANEOUS. Notice of a Flycateher new to the Fauna of Great Britain. By G. R. Gray. AN imperfect specimen of a bird in flesh has been received from G. A. Copeland, Esq., of Carneythenack House, Constantine, near Miscellaneous. 229 Falmouth, who informed me that it was shot, while resting on the house, on Saturday the 24th of January last. Its imperfectness, Mr. Copeland tells me, was occasioned by mice having carried off the head. The rest of the bird, however, was in a sufficient state of completeness for me to prove its identity with the Red-breasted Fly- catcher, Muscicapa (Erythrosterna) parva, Bechst. I believe this example is the first of that species which has been obtained in this country. I have therefore thought that a notice of the capture of so remarkable an insectorial bird at this season of the year might interest some of the readers of the ‘Annals,’ and have therefore sent it for insertion. On the Development, Structure, and Functions of the Tissues of the Anther. By A. Cuartin. The successive investigations of Mirbel, Meyen, and Purkinje have furnished the following data :— The anther is divided at first into four and afterwards into two cells (Mirbel). The anther has its valves formed of two membranes, first distin- guished by Mirbel, and denominated exothecitum and endothecium by Purkinje. The endothecium, or internal membrane, is formed of cells called fibrous by Purkinje, lobate by Mirbel, filamentous by A. DeCan- dolle. The fitamentous cells afte only produced towards the moment of dehiscence (Mirbel). The whole of the subepidermic tissue is converted into filamentous cells. The conversion of the simple utricles into filamentous cells is so rapid that the moment of its taking place cannot be perceived (Mirbel). There is a relation between the form of the cells of the endo- thecium and the natural families (Purkinje). These cells are the agent of dehiscence. The vessels of the filament often pass into the connective (Mirbel); they never penetrate there, but run through the whole filament (A. Richard). It may be added that the observations of M. Duchartre show that the cells may be localized towards the line of dehiscence. I. Development of the Tissues of the Anther.—The author’s ob- servations, like those of M. Duchartre, confirm the following results of Mirbel’s investigations :—Each of the two lobes of the anther is at first a homogeneous cellular mass; subsequently the utricles of the middle of each half-lobe acquire a special development: these are the pollinic utricles, which disappear after the grains of pollen are produced in their interior. His observations also agree generally with Mirbel’s upon this point : towards the period of dehiscence, the partition of the cells disappears. He has, however, seen numerous cases in which, by the 230 Miscellaneous. persistence of this septum, the anther continues quadricellular. In this case, usually (Lycopersicon, Tradescantia, &c.), two half-valves rest by their commissure upon the septum, which, after their dehis- cence, becomes contracted or destroyed; and at this moment it might be supposed that the separation or destruction of the septum preceded, instead of following, the dehiscence. A second type is furnished by Achmea, in which each of the four loculi splits in its median line. A third type of quadricellular anthers is presented in Passiflora, Scabiosa, Schaueria, &c.: in these the subdivision of each lobe is maintained until the dehiscence ; but this is less by the septa, which are too short, than by the contiguous valves reflected and applied agaist each other. On the question whether all the subepidermic utricles become changed into filamentous cells (as would appear to be the case from the statements of Mirbel, Meyen, and Purkinje), the author says that, by tracing the development of the tissues of the anther in Tradescantia, it is distinctly seen that of two layers of utricles situ- ated beneath the epidermis, only one (the outer) is converted into filamentous cells, whilst the inner layer is destroyed. This tissue within the endothecium of Purkinje was perceived in the young anther by Mirbel and Meyen, who paid no further attention to it. It is more distinct still in Passiflora, where its utricles, which alone are tinted yellow, papilliform, and radiate, are already distinct at the appearance of the pollinic utricles, and are developed parallelly to these and the pollen, but disappear a little after the production of the filaments in the utricles of the middle zone. In Tradescantia and Passiflora, as in most plants observed by the author, the internal tissue is not tranformed ; it is destroyed after a transitory existence. In other plants also it is not transformed, but persists until the dehiscence of the anther (Canna, Colchicum, Pedi- cularis, &e.); and this persistence is general (?) in the anthers which are destitute of filamentous cells (Pyrola, Melastoma, &c.). The tissue indicated as being more interior than the membrane called endothecium, and as lining the cavity of the cells, is not only characterized by its position and evolution, but also frequently by the form, consistence, and coloration of its utricles. It is as distinct from the endothecium of Purkinje as the latter from the exothecium, and is, in fact, a third membrane, which must hence- forward be included in the general structure of the anther. This third membrane, from its position, will be the true endothecium, the membrane so named by Purkinje becoming the mesothecium ; and thus the anther, at least when young, consists, not of two, but of three membranes. Nevertheless, at the approach of dehiscence, these membranes may be reduced to one in the anthers of some spe- cies (Calendula, &c.) ; and in some plants even the young anthers only contain two layers of utricles. With regard to the conversion of the simple utricles into filamen- tous cells, the author states that, although rapid, it may be followed, and usually commences in the anther at its point of attachment and at its line of dehiscence. Miscellanedus. 201 The exothecium is at first confounded with the other membranes in the homogeneous mass of primordial cellular tissues, and may re- main for a long time, or even always, in an indistinct state ; most commonly, however, it gradually acquires its characters; its utricles, which rise in papille, or even in hairs on some parts, sometimes acquire an extraordinary development. The cuticle itself may form a thick crust, which assists in hmiting the phenomenon of dehis- cence. Lastly, as with the production of the filamentous cells and the destruction of the third membrane, it is at the approach of the dehiscence of the anther that the abnormal development, or even the destruction, of the outer membrane takes place.— Comptes Rendus, Dec. 22, 1862, p. 911. On a New Pteropus from New Holland. By W. Peters. P. scapulatus, n. sp.; auriculis elongatis, patagio anali ad coccygem coarctato ; facie ex fusco canescente, mento fusco, torque collari rufo-ferrugineo ; macula scapulari utrinque ochraceo-flavida ; dorso fusco-ferrugineo, obsolete fusco maculato ; pectore ventreque fusco- ferrugineis, lateribus dilutioribus ; fasciculo pilorum suprahumerali vellereque patagiali humeri et antibrachii fulvis. Long. tota 0°230 metre ; cap. 0°065 ; auric. 0°030 ; antibrachii 0°137 ; dig. 1.0°053; dig. 2.0°098; dig. 3. 0°265; dig. 5. 0°182; tibize 0:065; patag. analis medii 0-003. Hab. Promontorium York, Nove Hollandiez. The present species nearly approaches Pteropus medius in size, and is very easily distinguished from all other species by the two humeral spots, and also by the golden-yellow colour of the abundant woolly hair on the ventral side of the wing-membranes, which appears near the lumbar region, on the humeral membrane, and near the fore- arm almost to its end. The ears are about one-half longer than the distance between the eyes and the apex of the muzzle. The upper incisors are of nearly equal size, and stand at equal distances apart ; the lower ones, on the contrary, stand in pairs, and the inner one on each side is scarcely one-third of the size of the outer one, which, however, is much smaller than the upper ones. The upper canines are slender and pointed, furnished with a broad furrow in front, and about one-half longer than the lower ones. The first upper false molar is not larger than the outer lower incisor, it stands near the canine, and is separated by a great space from the second caniniform false molar. The third true molar is small, as also the molars in general, the series of the three true and the hindermost false molar measuring 0°011 metre, and the entire dental series to the anterior margin of the upper incisor teeth only 0°020. The anterior lower false molar, which agrees pretty nearly in size with the hindermost lower true molar, stands scarcely the half of its diameter from the canine, but nearly twice its diameter from the following caniniform false molar. The length of 232 Miscelianeous. the dental series, composed of the three true and two false molars, amounts to 0:0125 metre, and of the whole lower series of teeth 0°020. The hair of the body is dense and lies smooth, and extends, gradually becoming shorter, as far as the first third of the forearm ; and on the hinder extremities, externally, to one-, and internally to scarcely two- thirds of the shank. The hair of the coccygeal region is softer and entirely covers the middle of the membrane, which is here very narrow. The hair of the ventral surface is softer and more undu- lating; the upper arm and thigh are here more sparingly clothed with hair, and a long woolly clothing of the wing-membranes appears at the sides of the lumbar region, on the humeral membrane, and below the forearm nearly to itsend. The teats are situated, as always in the genus Pteropus s. str., in the axilla; and in the lumbar region the wing-membranes approach each other within about 0°025 metre. The colour of the face is blackish brown, mixed with grey ; on the forehead and crown the hairs are dark brown, with ochreous tips or subapical rings of the same colour. The chin is blackish-brown. The entire neck is reddish-brown, somewhat darker on the nape. The back is dark rusty-brown, and this colour extends between and round the two yellow humeral spots up to the middle of the nape. The forepart of the back, below the two humeral spots, as also the region of the upper arm, is sprinkled with grey; both here and on the lower part of the back there are faint blackish-brown spots, which, on the lumbar region, stand in about six or seven irregular transverse rows. The breast and belly are dark rusty brown, the former darker than the latter; the sides, especially before the teats, appear much lighter and paler. The woolly hair of the ventral side of the wing-membrane near the loins, and before and behind the arms, and also a tuft of hair above and in front of the insertion of the wings are of a fine yellow. The narrow margin of the femoral mem- brane is free on the ventral side, and not covered with hairs. The description is from the skin of a full-grown female specimen recently obtained by the Museum from Mr. Frank. A second new species, Pteropus chrysauchen, from the Island of Batjan, has been obtained by the Museum from the same naturalist. It has much resemblance to P. Alecto, Temm., the brownish-black head, back, and belly being sprinkled with grey, the anal membrane very narrow in the middle, and the woolly hair on the lower surface of the wing-membraues blackish-brown. It is distinguished by its narrower ears, by the greater approximation (0°036 metre) of the wing-membranes on the back, and by the pale ochreous mark which not only occupies the whole nape, but descends upon the sides of the neck, and extends upwards between the ears to the vertex. The dor- sal surface of the arms and the whole of the shanks are naked. Total length of the skin of an old female 0°28 metre ; head 0:080; ear 0:026 ; forearm 0°175; thumb 0:079 ; second finger 0:125; third finger 0°325; tibia 0°080.—Monatsber. der Berl. Akad. der Wiss. August 1862, p. 574. THE ANNALS MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. (THIRD SERIES.] No. 64. APRIL 1863. XXV.— On the Classification of the Brachyura, and on the Homo- logies of the Antennary Joints in Decapod Crustacea. By Ws. Stimpson, M.D.* Dr. Srraut has recently been making some carcinological in- vestigations +, which have led him to propose a new classification of the higher Crustacea. He considers the characters of the external antenne, particularly of their second joint (basicerite) of paramount importance, and would divide the suborder Bra- chyura, in accordance with these characters, into four groups, namely, Orbata, with the first two joints of the antenna only present, the rest wanting, as in Acanthocyclus. Liberata, with the basicerite free, as im Oncinopus. Incuneata, with the basicerite wedged in between the ptery- gostomium and the epistome, as in Cancer. Perfusa, with the basicerite completely united with the neigh- bouring parts, as in Stenorhynchus. These differences are certainly of great importance, and have not generally received sufficient attention from carcinologists ; but they can scarcely be used for the primary subdivisions, as they are not coincident with characters of still higher value. By their use we should be required to dismember well-marked groups—to separate, for instance, Macrocheira from the Maioids, and Gecarcinus from the Ocypodoids ; while strange approxi- mations would occur, as of Oncinopus with Myctyris. Experience has long since shown us that it is impossible to group animals upon the variations of a single organ. Some of Dr. Strahl’s conclusions are so surprising that they * From Silliman’s American Journal for January, 1863. + Monatsbericht der Konigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1861; Ann, Nat. Hist. vol. ix. p. 299. Ann. § Mag. N. Hist, Ser. 3. Vol, xi. 16 234 Dr. W. Stimpson on the Classification of the Brachyura, may well require the closest scrutiny before acceptation. For example, he says, “The Leucosie I consider to include only Dana’s Leucosidea, with Dorippe and Atthusa. I separate the Calappide and Matutide from them, and unite them with the Parthenopine rejected from the Oxyrhyncha.” This combination is justified “by the agreement in the situation of the afferent canal of the branchial cavity and of the male sexual organs,” &e. But the Calappide are entirely removed from the Parthenopine in the structure of the mouth-parts; the buccal cavity is nar- rowed anteriorly so that the efferent branchial channels termi- nate at the middle instead of the sides of the endostome, and are covered by the indurated summits of the lacinie of the first pair of maxillipeds (tritocheirognathites). Like the Leuco- sidea they are oxystomatous, as Milne-Edwards has shown. They, indeed, differ from these latter in the situation of the efferent canals, and should therefore be separated as a distinct group; but they should no more be united to the Parthenopine than should the Dorippide, which Dr. Strahl would unite with the Leucosidea, although these are far more nearly allied to the Calappide, not having the afferent canal covered by the exognath of the outer maxillipeds, which is the case in all Leucosidea. Again, Dr. Strahl remarks, “The genus Grapsus, limited by the rejection of Leptograpsus, Metopograpsus, &c., and repre- sented by the species Pharaonis, strigosus, Webbii, &c., must be removed not only out of the Grapsoidea, but even entirely out of the Brachyura, because the structure of the external an- tenn differs completely from that which prevails amongst the Brachyura. Grapsus, for instance, has no operculum at the base of the external antenn, but a perforated tubercle, as in the Macrura, and must therefore at least be placed among the Anomura.” Here we would have Leptograpsus variegatus and Grapsus strigosus, for instance—forms so closely allied that they are placed in one and the same genus by so skilful a naturalist as Dana—separated so widely from each other that the latter species is placed among the Anomura! Let us examine fresh or wet specimens to ascertain whether Grapsus in reality has, at the base of the antennz, a structure so essentially differing from that found in ordinary Brachyura. Dried specimens are too commonly used in these investigations, and are very apt to lead to error. The “operculum” spoken of above is the coxal joint (coxocerite) of the external antenne, which is moveable im all crabs, even where the next (basicerite) is not. In a Maia, for example, this coxal joint may be raised a little, so that the mem- branous areola* which occupies its postero-interior surface may * The so-called tympanum. It is very doubtful whether the auditory organ is ever here situated. Kroyer has demonstrated (Kongl. Danske and on the Homologies of the Antennary Joints in Decapoda, 235 be partially seen. In Leptograpsus this areola is more exposed, encroaching somewhat upon the margin or outer surface of the coxal joint, or, in other words, this joint is kept permanently a little raised: In Grapsus the coxal joint (here the “ perforated tubercle” of Strahl) is still more evolved, and its sides are folded in, giving it a globular form, and contracting the areola, which is thus placed in a slit, and becomes almost wholly external. The different form of the coxocerite in Grapsus is therefore the result of a simple modification, not of structural importance. In Dromia the coxal joint is also slit at one side, but the areola is on the inner surface. This joint in Dromia is not “so shrunken that only the tubercle remains.” It is far larger in proportion than is usual in the higher Crustacea. Dr. Strahl says that “if we imagine the slit in the tubercle of Dromia carried out to one side, so that here the peripheral margin is completely separated, we have the operculum of the Brachyura in its perfect form.” But this prolongation of the slit would cut the coxal jomt in two, which is not the case in the “ operculum;” for this “ operculum ” is truly the homologue of the coxocerite of Dromia and Homarus in its entirety, as may be seen by com- parison with this part in Pi/umnus, for instance, where the basi- cerite is not soldered to the contiguous parts as is usual in Cancroids, but is free and articulated directly with the “ oper- culum” in the same manner as it is with the coxal joint in the other two genera named. Pilumnus, we may remark incident- ally, would be classed with Parthenope by the character of its antenne. Dr. Strahl proposes new names for the first two joints of the external antenne : the first (coxocerite) he would call zntercalare ; the second (basicerite) armiger, while the third (ischiocerite) he calls the first joint of the antennz, which is certainly liable to mislead. Prof. Milne-Edwards, who has done so much towards elucidating the homologies of these joints, has given to them the names in brackets, which are more appropriate ; for there is undoubtedly a perfect correspondence between them and the joints of the maxillz or feet. I believe it possible to carry the homology even further than the celebrated French zoologist has done, and that the antenna in question, like a foot or maxilliped, consists normally of seven joints. In the embryo of Hippolyte, as figured by Kroyer*, there are five distinct jomts beyond the basicerite, which would make seven in all. Moreover, they can be demonstrated in the adult Squilla, Axius, and Pagurus, and Vidensk. Selskabs Skrifter, 1856, iv. 288) that a far more complicated auditory apparatus exists at the base of the internal antenne. * Monog. Fremst. af Hippolyte’s Nordiske Arter, &c. tab. vi. f. 121, 16% 236 Dr. W.Stimpson on the Classification of the Brachyura. particularly well in Homarus, where the parts are more distinct from their large size. The “peduncle” of the antenna in the Lobster is considered by Milne-Edwards to consist of five joints; but a sixth is indicated at the base of the penult, on the lower side of the member. Here there is a small triangular piece, articulating with the second and third joints as well as the penult, perfectly mobile, and dependent upon no one of these joints more than another. An additional evidence that this piece is the representative of a distinct joint is furnished by the fact that the articulations of the two proximate joints are im the same plane, and not, as should be the case were they normally contiguous, in planes perpendicular to each other. To complete the number (seven) of joints, we have the flagellum, which cor- responds to the dactylos or terminal joint of the thoracic mem- bers. This homology is rendered probable by the occurrence, in the remarkable Hippidean genus Mastigopus*, discovered by me in the Chinese seas, of a multiarticulate dactylus to the chelipeds perfectly similar to the flagelliform terminal appendage of an antenna. The squamiform appendix of the antenna is attached to the second joint, and is homologous to the exopod of the feet, or the exognath of the maxillipeds, which has the same position. It is called scaphocerite by Milne-Edwards, but would be more ap- propriately named exocerite, a term indicating its relations with greater exactness, and corresponding in construction with that of its homologues. This appendage is normally two-jointed, as is seen in the embryo Homarus and in the adult Squilla; its basal joint is obsolete or coalesced with the terminal squamiform joint in adult Macrura and Anomura, while in Brachyura the entire appendage disappears with perfect development. ‘The little basal joint of the exocerite in the embryo Homarus is mistaken for the “armiger” (basicerite) by Dr. Strahl, who considers the large joint which supports both branches of the antenna as the “intercalare ” (coxocerite), on the ground that in the adult the third joint is articulated with both the coxocerite and the basi- cerite. But this is so only in appearance: if the antenna in a fresh Lobster or Cray-fish be bent outward, it will be seen that the posterior condyle of the third joint articulates with the basi- cerite alone. The basicerite, in the embryo Decapod, is far from being the trifling joint seen at the base of the scale-like append- age, but is, in fact, that large supporting joint which is the first to make its appearance, and which often reaches, with its exo- cerite, a large size before any trace of other joints, either coxal or terminal, can be perceived. In the figures accompanying the * Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Philad. December 1858. Not the Mastigopus of Leuckart, which is a Sergestes, On rare and little-known Fishes from Madeira. 237 valuable observations of Mr. C. Spence Bate*, this character of the basicerite is well shown in representations of the Zoea of Carcinus menas. Here we have the joint in question very large, armed with a long spine on one side and the exocerite on the other, while the rest of the antenna is in a rudimentary condi- tion, and there is no coxocerite visible. This latter joimt, with its areola, makes its appearance at a later date, at the base of the basicerite. The large comparative size of the exocerite in the embryo is in accordance with what we observe in the gradations of adult Crustacea. Those lowest in the series have generally the external branch of their members most developed ; as we rise in the scale, we observe the inner branch becoming more and more developed, while the outer branch is reduced, and may disappear entirely. Compare, for example, the thoracic feet of some Schizopods with those of the Caridea and Brachyura. XX VI.—WNotes on rare and little-known Fishes taken at Madeira. By James Yate Jounnson, Cor. Mem. Z.8. No. III. “Fam. Pleuronectide. Solea oculata, Risso. Doi6de a bees ai Ved. Cx to: Left side white; right side a pale brown, marbled with deeper brown. On the anterior part of the body are five large patches of very dark brown. The tail is also of this colour, and the patch is divided from the paler colour of the body by a series of six yellow spots. The most noticeable markings on the right side of the body consist of four round or oval dark-brown, almost black spots, each surrounded by a ring of small bright yellow spots. These are arranged in two pairs, the members of cach pair being placed over against each other at the base of the dorsal and anal fins respectively. A line drawn from one spot of the first pair to the other would divide the fish into two nearly equal portions. All the fins are edged with white. At the base of the caudal fin there is a narrow band of pale brown ; the rest of the fin is a darker brown. The irides of the eyes are bright greenish-blue, surrounded by a ring of gold. The length of the head, compared with the total length, is as 1 to 54; the height, to the total length, is as 1 to 3. There are numerous soft papillz in the neighbourhood of the * Phil. Trans. 1858, pl. xl. f. B3, &e. 238 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known mouth on the left side of the body, and this side of the body is rough with ciliated scales. Both jaws are set with minute teeth, but only on the left side. The dorsal fin commences in front of the eyes, is rounded behind, and is distinct from the caudal, which latter is slightly rounded. The anal fin does not jom the caudal, but terminates over against the end of the dorsal. On both these fins a series of small roughly ciliated scales extends along each ray. Both are coloured pale brown, with dark brown spots forming irregular lines. The left pectoral fin is shorter than the right in the pro- portion of 2 to 3. Between the operele and the caudal fin 70 scales were counted, and in the height about 44, The lateral line is straight through- out. A single example of this species has occurred, which was taken in the month of February. It had a length of 53 inches, and a height of 2 inches. The right pectoral fin was % inch long. The fish took fifty inspirations per mimute. This Mediterranean species has been taken at the Canaries, and has been described by M. Valenciennes in Webb and Berthelot’s ‘ Hist. Nat. des Canaries.’ That naturalist assigns 50 rays to the dorsal fin ; but this may possibly be a mistake of the printer; and he says that he found 50 rays in the anal fin, 8 rays in the pectoral fin, and 5 in the ventral fin. He counted only 60 scales along the flank. Rhombus cristatus, Lowe, Trans. Zool. Soc. ii. p. 15. D ROA PORN 16.0 AG eae lee Elliptico-oblong, sole-like ; the right side white, the left side a palish sepia-brown, faintly marbled with deeper brown. The height of the body to the total length is as 1 to 23, and the head to the total length is as 1 to 44. The oval eyes are close together, being only separated by a simple crest. The hinder one is distant by about its own longer axis from the snout. The iris next the mesial line of the body is spotted with white, is much wider than on the outer side, and makes an angular projection upon the pupil. There are minute pointed teeth on both sides of both jaws; and I can only detect one row of each, although Mr. Lowe says, “dentibus in maxilla superiore uniseriatis, in inferiore anguste scobinatis.” The dorsal fin commences, on the right side of the body, in front of the eyes, and extends almost to the caudal fin. Some of the rays at its fore end are produced (in the specimen the second, third, fifth, and sixth), and these rays are free for much of their length. The pointed pectoral fins are small, that on the Fishes taken at Madeira. 239 left side being longer. They are inserted below the middle of the height. The first ray is very short. The left ventral fin commences much before the right fin, whilst it extends quite as far back. They are inserted in front of the pectoral fins, and are both short. The anal fin commences immediately behind the vent, gradually decreases in height backwards, and termi- nates opposite the end of the dorsal. The caudal fin is pointed, and is about as long as the longer pectoral. The scales are rather large, and have their free edges pecti- nate. The lateral line forms an arch over the root of the pectoral fin, and is then straight along the middle of the body to the base of the caudal fin. Its scales are about 62 in number; the scales in the height are about 33, the number above being equal to the number below the lateral line at the middle of the fish. This rare fish, of which only one example has occurred (taken in the month of February, is easily distinguished from the much commoner Rhombus maderensis, Lowe, by its elongate sole-like form, the approximate eyes, the produced rays at the fore end of the dorsal fin, and the absence of pale annular markings on the coloured side of the body. inches. ite Mercy yet Se scrietah ass ave Mie eeabcl heuataye. oe 5485 Height; nearly -....-..-----.-+-~ +++ 2 PLGA Vie A eee eee ia hans Fave ate Wahi aks 135 Wiyed; Prenton axa Fi onc. . Se. ok ee 74 Dorsal, length of 2nd and 3rd rays ...... 1 Pectorals, length of left fin ............ 33 < distance from snout .......... 1t Vensrals, leneth of leftfim. 3-002: -5.-,.. ty OL TrG Eagle 709 rgd Ai ies Rae eae ae aid Fp PU BPRUCIUEY GE DASE) > gosie 245. tree chests zby Order ACANTHOPTERYGII, Cuv. Fam. Triglide. Scorpena ustulata, Lowe, = Sc. scrofa, Linn. There lately came into my hands three specimens of a Scor- pena which seem to prove that the fishes from which Mr. Lowe sketched a new species, that of Sc. ustulata (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1840, p. 36, and Trans. Zool. Soc. i. p. 2), were merely young specimens of Sc. scrofa, a common fish at Madeira. As it is of much importance that all false species should be expunged from our books, I will state the facts that have led me to conclude that Sc. ustulata falls into this category. All three specimens have the occipital depression which Dr. Giinther has pointed out as specially distinguishing the artificial 240 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known genus Scorpena from that of Sebastes; and there can be no hesitation in ascribing all three to the same species, whatever that may be. The longest has a total length of 78, inches, and a height of 24 inches. The head measures 22 inches in length, the eye } inch in diameter. The distance from eye to eye is ji; inch. The pectoral and ventral fins are respectively 1% and 14 inch Jong. These dimensions correspond closely with those given from Mr. Lowe’s notes in Dr. Gunther’s ‘Catalogue of Acanthopterygian Fishes,’ vol. 11. p. 112. The second specimen is 6,5, ches long, and the third 6} inches. The diagnosis of Sc. ustulata given in the Catalogue, and there stated to have been drawn up from Mr. Lowe’s manu- script notes, is this :— «12 Bint ' ~g- Avge (UL. lat. 24). Vert. 10/14. “The height of the body is 32 in the total length, the length of the head nearly three times. The head 1s scaleless, but che cheeks and opercles are pustulate or granulated. The length of the snout is one-fourth that of the head, the width of the space between the orbits one-seventh or one-eighth. Space between the orbits deeply concave (groove on the crown of the head as in Sc. scrofa) ; orbital tentacles none or small. The fourth dorsal spine is the longest ; the anal spines as in Sc. scrofa (the second the longest). A black blotch between the sixth and ninth dorsal spines ; an irregular chestnut-brown and blackish mark behind the eye, extending principally over the opercle.”’ Now, turning to my three specimens, I find that im the two oat) 2s Xe : 2 ; larger the dorsal-fin formula is i in the third, = whilst the anal-fin formula is in all _ The head is scaleless, and destitute’ of skinny appendages, except a tag at the posterior margin of the anterior nostril, such as is seen in Se. scrofa. The top of the head, the cheeks, and opercles are without scales, and di- stinctly pustulate or granulate. The muzzle is very short, broad, and obtuse, extending only once the diameter of the eye before it, as is stated with reference to Sc. ustudata. The length of the muzzle is one-fourth that of the head, whilst the width of the space between the eyes, which is deeply concave, is not quite one-sixth the length of the head. In the largest specimen, the fourth dorsal spine is the longest; in the second specimen, the anterior dorsal spines have been broken; but in the third speci- men the third, fourth, and fifth spines are of the same length, as nearly as may be. Comparing the length of the head and the height with the total length, the proportions in my speci- mens are— Fishes taken at Madeira. 241. A. B. C. Head in length 2°83 3 3 Height in length 3°77 3°55 3°6. Mr. Lowe having stated that in Sc. ustulata the lateral line consists of 24 scales, each marked with a little tooth or point, Dr. Giinther remarked that he had evidently counted the small scales only by which the lateral line itself is constituted ; but it was to be presumed that, if the transverse series of scales had been counted, their number would be nearly the same as im Se. scrofa, i. e. from 40 to 46. Now, in my specimens, the scales furnished with a projecting duct (evidently the “‘httle point or tooth”’) are 24 in number, whilst the rows of scales abutting on the lateral line are about 45. In regard to colour, the throat and belly are of a rich pinky red; the body reddish-brown, with dark spots and pale dap- plings; the dorsal, pectoral, and caudal fins are washed with orange and sprinkled with black spots, the ventral and anal fins being nearly immaculate. In the largest specimen there is a faint dark blotch between the eighth and ninth spines of the dorsal. In the second specimen, there is a well-marked dark blotch between the eighth and ninth spies, and another similar blotch between the ninth and tenth spies. In the third speci- men, there is a large continuous deep black blotch extending from near the seventh spine to beyond the tenth. It is evident that there is considerable irregularity in the position and inten- sity of the black blotch on the dorsal fin. In other respects, the colours, as I have described them, agree sufficiently nearly with those assigned by Mr. Lowe to the species Sc. ustulata. But then he has stated that “the great peculiarity of that spe- cies is an irregular chestnut-brown and blackish mark behind the eye, extending principally over the opercle.” Of this mark I perceive not the slightest trace in any one of my specimens. Looking, however, at the variations of colour which Mr. Lowe has himself pointed out, it may well be doubted whether any reliance can be placed upon this mark as a criterion of species. After considering the facts here stated, 1 venture to think that ichthyologists will conclude that the supposed species Scorpena ustulata must be erased, on the ground that the fishes upon which it was founded were merely forms of Scorpena scrofa. Fam. Scombride. Echeneis brachyptera, Lowe, Ginther’s Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 11. 378. An example of this species, 122 inches in length, had a sucto- 242 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known rial disk of 16 pairs of laminz. The length of this disk, com- pared with the total length, was as 1 to 33; and the width of the body between the pectoral fins, compared with the total length, was as 1 to 7-15. The lower jaw was rounded and longer than the upper, which was angular, the premaxillaries forming a somewhat obtuse angle with each other. The tongue was rough at the middle with small teeth. The caudal fin was truncate. The dorsal fin had 28 rays, the anal 23; they termi- nate in the same vertical, short of the caudal fin. The colour was a uniform brown, with a slight trace of a white edge to the anal fin at the anterior end.- The pectoral fins had rounded apices. The lateral line was straight, save for a slight rise and fall above the pectoral fins. The following are the measurements of the principal parts in inches :— Width of body between pectorals............ 18 Worgal Teneth af bases so. east ovis ceeiaaiee 3f ce! ) distance from tapiofsnout..¢ hans. ome 62 Pecforals deneth | oi. .aatse ewes vee ec sales 13 Wengrala: Temoth.f..c spre thats awtelatpiemic sierenactee iz Vent, distance from tip of mandible.......... 6 Amal; leneth Oh BAS etre. ses nie ce eiere seme mee 21 Caudal, height Seat cs sa a gh 3+ Eye, longer axis. oaiaie egies See ae amr »» distance from tip of snout. ve s.e. cs sete 1 Suctorial disk, dength /o. 6.255 s. Ja seme ce are : WIG 45 6 ses een ae Sai atlas ty Cubiceps gracilis, Lowe, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1843, p.82; Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. ii. 389. Navarchus sulcatus, Filippie Verany, Mem. Acad. Torino, ser. 2. tom. xviil. p- 187 - Elongate, fusiform, compressed. Dark purplish-grey, nearly black on the back, the belly leaden-grey, the fins grey. Clothed with moderately large cycloid scales, of which the exposed part is diamond-shaped. There is a furrow along the side at the mid- dle of the height, and halfway between this and the line of the belly there is another furrow not so long as the upper one. The lateral line is distinct from these, and is placed high up, following the curve of the back, and being straight along the tail. At the sides of the head it is forked, the branches meeting at the suprascapula. In addition to the straight longitudinal furrows already mentioned, the sides of the body are marked with transverse undulating parallel furrows, which at the middle D. 11. A. 5. P.24. V.1.5. C.v.9+8.v. MB. 6. Fishes taken at Madeira. 243 of the height are convex towards the head. Of these, 27 were counted between the opercle and the end of the dorsal fin. The height compared with the total length is as 1 to 52; the head compared with the total length is as 1 to 41. The vertex, opercles, and mandible of the unarmed head are scaly. Between the eyes it is slightly arched, and there is a low ridge along the nape and vertex, extending from the dorsal fin to the neighbour- hood of the eyes. The short truncate snout is somewhat swollen at the sides, and there is a triangular depression at each side in the space between the eye, the upper jaw, and the snout. The round eye does not reach to the profile, and its diameter com- pared with the head is as 1 to42. It is distant about a dia- meter from the snout, whilst the thickness of the head from eye to eye is rather more. The nostrils are some distance from the eye, and there are two small round openings into each sac. The nasal region is marked by some conspicuous mucus-pores. The mouth is small, the rictus being less than the width at the angle of the jaws. The lower jaw shuts inside the upper; the maxil- lary scarcely reaches back to the vertical from the anterior border of the eye. When the mouth is closed, both the pre- maxillary and the maxillary are covered by the broad thin bone behind them. The upper side of the mouth is formed entirely of the premaxillary, which, like the lower jaw, carries a single row of minute sharp ¢eeth. These are set close together, and are rather longer in front. There is a large oval patch of minute teeth on the roof of the mouth behind the vomer, which is also armed with teeth, but there are none on the edge of the pala- tines. The fore part of the tongue is thin and dilated, and the hinder part is armed with a patch of teeth. The mouth, as well as the inside of the gill-covers, is black. Pseudobranchiz are present. The rakers of the first pair of free gills have small spines on their inner sides. There is a sinus at the posterior edge of the opercle ; and the edge of the interopercle is minutely denticulate. The lower border of the preopercle is striate, but the edge is simple. The dorsal fin, which commences over the roots of the pectoral fins, has no free spines before it. Its anterior portion consists of twelve spines, but it is so deeply cleft between the eleventh and twelfth spines as to be almost formed into two fins. The spinous portion is triangular, and higher, though shorter, than the rest. The spines are weak; the first very short, half the length of the second. The longest spine is the fourth; the eleventh is very small; and the twelfth is attached to the soft portion of the fin, and almost equal to the ninth. The soft portion is angular, and rather produced behind, the base being scaly. The pointed pectoral fins are much longer than the 244 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known ventral fins, reaching back to the commencement of the anal fin. The ventral fins are inserted under the posterior angle of the roots of the pectoral fins, and fold back into an abdominal groove. They reach about halfway from their roots to the vent, which is placed a little before the middle of the total length. The spine is less than half the length of the next ray; the se- cond branched ray is the longest. The anal fin commences close to the vent, under the fourth branched ray of the dorsal, the shape of which it copies, and opposite to the end of which it terminates. It is higher anteriorly, and it is angular and some- what produced behind. Its three spines are short, and the base of the fin is scaly. There are no finlets behind either the dorsal or anal fins. The tail is longer than high, and its fin is deeply furcate, without scales. The scales of the unarmed Jateral line are about 60; and there are 20 or 21 scales in the height of the body, of which only four are above the lateral line. Two specimens of this rare fish have been obtaimed, both taken in the month of January. There was only a difference of # inch between their respective lengths. The larger was an adult female containing ova. Filippi and Verany have described the species, from Medi- terranean examples, under the name of Navarchus sulcatus; but they have certainly committed a mistake in stating that there is a furrow on the body above the lateral line, and another below it. That line, as already described, is high up, and has two furrows below it, the upper one of which has obviously been taken by them for the lateral line. This explanation renders it still more probable that there is no specific distinction between Cubiceps gracilis and C. capensis, Smith, as Dr. Giinther has suggested in his Catalogue. The following are the dimensions of the principal parts of the larger example :— inches Total length ...... ee ers obra OEE Length tor base of candal ec .o-aeeeeee 65 Height in the pectoral region .............- 13 Tighe ease chins 8 dees eee Ae ee ea qo Head . Lcd Li ake belies che Sa Ras onetime ane Gus bis fe eee Hiyest > ca Sets pale Ohare Mouth, width at the angle of the j jaws. sh he Waele te sy Dorsal, length of base ......-:..-.......-- 3g 3 S5 spinous portion............ 154 e+ 2 -distanee frou SUOUt. ct. sneer n ete ae cee 24 M length of 4th spine cate AO os Se tn » height of anterior diets of soft aaa = Pectorals, length a 8 aoa Fishes taken at Madeira. 245 Pectorals, distance from snout ............6. 1-9 10 sat oh wreth: OF DASE). a ssee SG OMe een ee Hy Wentralsienstht if. os. 5 5 - bs cae ae etemerne wy Af distance from, snout. ...... i .02. dense: Amal tenet OF DASC © ./5.0.0, a sala ii PPerpl eM th diay sdictass acca de cersaeaons ws at Macatee PEPOMCIGI oy de cctavean aiid dn) «)c.cehiel wcoeea cee an @rmidals lencthes 4 Stace osu oe o'e-uepe itor ete see 12 Zeus conchifer, Lowe, Proc. Zool. Soe. vol. xiii. 1845 ; Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. x. 49. Two examples of this rare fish, which have been recently pro- cured, presented certain variations from the descriptions hitherto published ; and these differences it may be desirable to mention. The larger specimen had a length of 281 inches, with a height of 114 inches; the smaller measured in length 273 inches, and in height 104 inches. The normal number of the branchiostegal rays of the genus appears to be 7; but in one of my specimens there were 5 on one side and 6 on the other, in the second specimen 6 on each side. As to the bony plates or scutella found at the base of the anal fin, Giinther’s Catalogue of the Collection at the British Museum (vol. ii. p. 395) speaks of 6 on each side, whereas, in one of my specimens, there were only 5, in the other 7, at each side of that fin. In the former (the larger specimen) the plates did not correspond on the two sides of the fin. On the right side the last plate but two was the largest, and the last was very small; on the left side the last but one was the largest, and the last of moderate size. In the latter specimen the plates corresponded on the two sides of the body, the last but two being the largest, and the last the smallest of each series. Between the ventral and anal fins there was, in the larger speci- men, a series of 8 pairs of bony plates; in the smaller the series consisted of 7 pairs only. The filaments of the anterior spmous rays of the dorsal are stated by Mr. Lowe to be very short ; but in my larger specimen the filament of the first spine (itself 54 inches long) projected 24 inches beyond the tip of the spine, and those of the succeed- ing two projected about 14 inch beyond their respective spines. The dorsal and anal fin formula is given by Mr. Lowe thus :— D. 9 or 104 25 or 26. A. 2+(1+25 or 26). In the larger of my specimens the rays were, D.9+4+25. A, 3+24; in the smaller D. 9+27. A. 3+26. In the British Museum Catalogue it is stated, in the diagnosis 246 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known of the genus, that there are no teeth on the palate. In both of my specimens there was a small patch of minute teeth on each palatine bone. The “thumb-mark” on the sides of both specimens was nearly obsolete. The colour was a lilac-grey, deeper on the back, with an iridescent lustre i in various parts. Cytius (Zeus) roseus, Lowe, sp. The genus Cyttus was established by Dr. Gunther, in his ‘Catalogue of Fishes in the Collection of the British Museum’ (ii. p. 396) for the reception of fishes which are distinguishable from those falling into the genus Zeus by the want of bony plates along the base of the dorsal and anal fins, and by the spines of the latter fin beg limited to two. The present species had been briefly defined by Mr. Lowe as a member of the genus Zeus in the Proc. Zool. Soc. 1843, p. 85. Two examples having lately occurred, taken in the months of February and March, I proceed to give a fuller description of this very rare fish. D7 or 8-28 or 29., A. 1 or 2-29, PP. 14. Vi 9... Bev C.1v.5+6. 1v. The Dory-like body is compressed, elevated, and coloured a pinky red, without macule, the sides, in certain lights, being silvery, washed with red. Very small scales are imbedded in a smooth shining skin, those of the lateral me being about 75 in number. Between the throat and the vent there is a series of five (Dr. Giinther says three) oval bony plates, each marked with radiating striz, and having a median crest which becomes on some of them a short spine directed backwards. In one speci- men the third plate is the longest, in the other the fourth. The height of the body is to the total length, the mouth being closed, as 1 to 24. The head, when the mouth is closed, is to the total length as 1 to 34, and is therefore less than the height. The thickness of the body behind the pectoral fins compared with the greatest height varied in the two specimens from 1 to 5 to 1 to 33, the larger being proportionally much thicker. The vertex is covered with a smooth, transparent, scaleless skin. Behind the eyes the sides of the head are striate, and at the nape there is a broad transverse depression. The large eye is round, or slightly oval, with a diameter which is contained in the length of the head, the mouth being closed, about 21 times. It is placed high up, and takes part in the profile. The border of the frontal bone above it is toothed. The distance from eye to eye is about equal to the diameter. The openings into each pituitary sac are close together, above the anterior margin of the eye. The outer and posterior one is large, and obliquely oval, Fishes taken at Madeira. 947 In front of each smaller orifice there is a conspicuous mucus- pore. The cheeks are flat, and covered with a smooth skin, in which almost imperceptible scales are buried. ‘The opercular pieces are unarmed, but the border of the preopercle is strongly striate, the strie parallel with the margin. The mouth is ex- cessively protrusile, the pedicel of the premaxillary being very long ; and the lips are furnished with thick skin. The ambit of the open mouth is nearly circular. The maxillary is thin, trans- parent, and much dilated below. The jaws are roughened with bands of minute feeth, that in the upper jaw being very broad at the sides. There is a patch of similar teeth on the vomer, but none on the palatines. i The branchiostegal membrane was furnished in both specimens with seven rays on each side ; small pseudobranchiz are present. The spinous portion of the dorsal fin is distinctly connected with the soft portion, the former being shorter but higher than the latter, which is more elevated behind than in front. The stout spines are strongly striate at their sides, and carry short filaments at their apices (Mr. Lowe says, “dorsali haud fila- mentosa”). The first spine is only half as long as the third, and the last spine is shorter than the first. This fin commences considerably behind the root of the pectoral fin, and a space equal to the diameter of the eye separates its termination from the base of the caudal fin. None of the rays of the soft portion are branched. The pectoral fins are inserted about the middle of the height ; they are rounded and much shorter than the ventral fins, reach- ing back not quite so far as the vertical of the vent. The rounded ventral fins are large, reaching back nearly to the middle of the anal fin, and they are inserted under the roots of the pectorals. The abdomen in front of their roots is flat. The vent is placed under the middle of the spimous portion of the dorsal fin. The anal fin, like the soft portion of the dorsal fin, which it resembles in shape, rises out of a deep groove, and has none of the rays branched. It commences under the commencement of the first dorsal, and terminates under or a little posterior to its end. None of the rays are branched. The first spine is short, stout, and subtriangular, with ribbed sides. The rounded caudal fin has three short spinous rays at each side. The ateral line is high up, and much arched, following pretty nearly the curve of the back, and being straight on the tail. None of the fins are scaly. The larger of the two specimens afforded the admeasurements set forth in the following table :— 248 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. inches Total length, mouth open .............00 13;h »» -) mouth "closed aan. 28 ee 2 Heicht between vent and anal fin .......... se Head, leneth, mouth Gpeny.k RE. S06. nn eck 5 e: mouthjelosed eher Lak e5 5% onus 335 Eye, CiskME LEE gis E. ORS «eh yIwew RMR 6 are iors 154 Byes/idistunce apart fees dint anywkee wise 15 Nostrils, distance apart? 50 dy. simatic wena hs T Mouth, when open, 158; by.............04. 13 Premaxillary, length of pedicel ............ 2555 Dorsal, length of base of spinous portion .... 2 a Soft portion...) ach 3t & length of third Siu BR Saares 4-5 Ba 3 1} Pectordismlenciliien ec stccn te eet eee Ls 4! distance behind anterior margin of eye 2345 Weatraly, length je 124..k. tan eke ees 3 rial, Hemera Rei ie sie its ct Lek BEM Ee ele 3y ao) 1 Heleht posteriorly jiils (ni ieinktcion eee 155 Pail, height at middle c).. Lk sis.s bak en, wee min Garidal Reng) ntsc gee areola ech ieee na ee 15 iad tessa d ciele ioiaks nik tek GeO ace Cee ee 355 XXVII.—On Ephedra. By Joun Mirrs, F.R.S., F.L.S. &c. [Continued from vol. x. p. 140.] Tue long interval that has elapsed since the appearance of the former part of this paper demands a word in explanation. When that portion was ready for the press, I was charged by the Go- vernment of Brazil with duties arising out of the International Exhibition, which required my undivided attention for many months; and it is only now that I am able to complete the fol- lowing description of all the South-American species of Ephedra known to me. In the mean time Dr. Hooker’s memoir on Welwitschia has. appeared in the Linnean Transactions, which renders it incum- bent on me to reconsider my former views concerning Ephedra. That memoir will claim attention from every botanist, not only for the careful description of the structure of this remarkable plant, but for the admirable manner in which the elaborate details of its analyses are illustrated; and it is fortunate for science that Dr. Hooker had at his command ample materials for the investigation. For the present purpose it will be necessary to refer only to such points in that memoir as may relate to Ephedra. In the absence of the smallest information concerning the female flower and the ovary of Ephedra, and with the knowledge Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. 249 that in Gnetum the male and female flowers are found in distinct whorls on the same node, I had suggested the possibility that in Ephedra both sexes might prove to be developed in the same common spikelet, in which the male flowers in the lower whorls had fallen away before the female flowers became developed in the terminal whorl—a supposition rendered more probable by the fact that male and fructiferous spikelets are sometimes found on the same plant. But the changes shown in the gradual development of the ovary and fruit of Welwitschia render the above supposition improbable; and by analogy we may now form a tolerable conjecture of the nature of the female flower in Ephedra. From these data we may infer that the two ovaria developed in the terminal pair of involucels are deficient of a corolla—a circumstance which sometimes occurs in Huphor- biacee, where the male flowers are provided with both calyx and. cor olla, while the ovary is destitute of any floral envelope. The ‘application of the term “cone” to the flowering heads of Welwitschia and Ephedra is calculated to mislead many persons in regard to the affinity of the Gnetacee; for they bear little analogy to the cones of the Conifere. They are more properly spikelets, because they bear regular petaloid sessile flowers along a common axis, much after the manner of a spike of Plantago ; and they offer more claims to this category than the spikelets of Myrica, the aments of Betula, or the spicated inflorescence of many other genera. The structure of the male flowers and the mode of inflores. cence in Welwitschia present a striking resemblance to those in Ephedra, both showing an advanced state of floral development. Dr. Hooker considers the ovule in the female flower to be deficient of any carpellary covering, and therefore gymnospermous ; but the circumstances he has demonstrated tend rather to evince that it is enveloped in a distinct carpel. The important fact of the existence of hermaphrodite or polygamous flowers in this family serves to throw much light on this pomt. It is shown in pl. 6. fig. 14 that Welwitschia (besides its floral envelopes) pre- sents a monadelphous ring of regularly formed stamens sur- rounding an ovary constituted in the usual manner of angio- spermous plants—that is to say, with a simple style and stigma surmounting an oblong 1-celled carpel containing a single erect ovule, thus exhibiting a floral development and pointing to a position in the system far higher than the gymnospermous orders of Conzfere and Cycadacee. But the ovule of the herma- phrodite flower is always sterile, and it is only in such flowers as are deficient of corolla and stamens that embryo-sacs are formed in the ovule which admit of its fertilization ; and here it is seen that the style becomes so far depressed that the stigma Am. & Mag. N, Hist, Ser, 3. Vol, xi. 17 250 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. remains sessile on the summit of the carpel, leaving the small apical pervious aperture constantly found in the fruits of Wel- witschia and its congeners. This depression of a pervious stigma I have shown to exist in several other instances. The entire development imparts a truly angiospermous character to the Gnetacee, notwithstanding the pervious aperture in the carpel, while the peculiar mode of fertilization, as Dr. Hooker seems to indicate, is analogous to some instances in Santalacee and Lo- ranthacee. I long ago pointed out the existence of vascular threads in the viscous cap which crowns the seed in Loranthus (Struthanthus), the nature of which I did not then understand, but which may perhaps be analogous to the development shown in Welwitschia. The involucels in Ephedra, even in a young state, resemble those of Welwitschia in this particular—that the margins are simply reticulated and petaloid, while the central discoid portion is formed of three easily separable lamine, the external plates being simply reticulated and epidermoid, while the inner lamina consists of numerous closely disposed spicular fibres shaped like those shown in Welwitschia; these are imbedded in paren- chyma, as well as two conspicuous distant and parallel nervures which consist of bundles of ordinary spiral vessels. The bilabiate perigonium in Ephedra is quite reticulated and petaloid, and exhibits no trace of any similar fibres or vessels. Its achenium bears all the usual features resulting from the growth of a regular carpel : it is thick and coriaceous, containing within its somewhat fleshy mesoderm a number of long hair-like threads of pellucid woody fibres, nearly of its entire length ; there is no resemblance in this structure to the perianth of the male flowers. Dr. Hooker, however, considers the similar peri- carp of Welwitschia to be the growth of a perianth surrounding a gymnospermous ovule deficient of any true carpellary covering —a conclusion apparently formed upon hypothetical grounds. T have to make an essential correction in regard to the tubillus : from recent examinations of the seeds of Kphedra dumosa (in which the seminal integuments are somewhat thicker) and of immature seeds of LH. Americana, lately obtained, it is seen that the tubillus is expanded below, like an inverted funnel, quite free from the apical gland, which it surrounds, and is continuous with the outer integument, of which it is a simple extension. In the cases previously observed, this dilated portion was so ex- tremely delicate, and adhered so closely to the gland, that the tubillus seemed to rise out of it. The fact, as above stated, is now beyond all doubt. I have again examined carefully the suspensor in Ephedra, but can discover no trace of those embryo-sac-bearing filaments Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. 251 which are found in Gnetum and Welwitschia. The tubillus, as above stated, is a prolongation of the outer integument ; the red fleshy gland is attached to and closes the mouth of the inner integument. To a small point in the centre of this gland is attached the white cylindrical and tubular suspensor, hemi- spherical at its apex, the lower extremity of which descends upon and adheres firmly to the upper part of the albumen, thus forming a kind of white cap upon it for a quarter of its length. This suspensor is capable of considerable extension; and when cut open along one side and examined under the microscope, it is found to consist of a loose mass of condensed and extremely fine flocculent tissue, confusedly huddled together like paper- pulp, without the slightest trace of any of the coiled filaments seen in Welwitschia and Gnetum, or any vessels whatever. The albuminous mass is just the length of the embryo, and does not extend over the summit of the radicle, which is quite naked within the hollow cylinder, but it disappears gradually, and becomes lost in the flocculent substance of the suspensor, be- coming at last so far attenuated as to disappear in the form of separate granular cells. From these facts we may infer that this suspensor is only a portion of the amniotic body which has not been obliterated, or in which albuminous grains have not been deposited—a condition of development clearly indicated by the acute sagacity of the late Mr. Robert Brown*. We ought not, therefore, to attach much importance either to the mere circumstance of a suspensor as a proof of the close alliance of the Gnetacee with the Conifere and Cycadacee, seeing that it is always diversified im the several genera, and different from that structure in those families—or to the occasional pre- sence of filaments bearing sterile embryo-sacs, for these never occur in Ephedra, and not always in Gnetum—or to the exist- ence of disciform dotted vessels in the wood, for they are found only in Gnetum. These are only partial comeidences, and con- sequently of little value in comparison with the strong evidence showing a far more advanced perfection of floral structure in the Gnetacee, and pointing to a much higher position in the system. Other analogies remain to be discovered before this point can be * “Tn other cases the albumen is formed by the deposition of granulated matter in the cells of the nucleus. In some of these cases, the membrane of the amnios seems to be persistent, forming, even in the ripe seed, a proper coat for the embryo, the original attachment of whose radicle to the apex of this coat may also continue.” (Gen. Rem. p. 57.) This view applies as well to the origin of the vitellus in many seeds as to the peculiar development existing in Ephedra; and it is probable that future researches may show the existence of an analogous development in other cases, and may lead to a knowledge of the true affinities of the Gnetacee, which we have yet to learn. 17* 252 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. safely determined. I may here mention that all the details of structure which I have observed will be minutely shown in the drawings of the various analyses intended to illustrate the genus Ephedra. From the circumstances above stated, it is requisite to correct the former diagnosis of Ephedra, as far as regards the female plants, in the following manner :— Flores % ignoti (forsan achlamydei). Achenia 2, distincta, fel rarius abortu solitaria, summo spice amentiformis (ei 3 similis) affixa, involucellis omnino vel semi-obtecta, oblonga, subtri- gona, plano-convexa, collateralia, erecta. Pericarpium siccum, corlaceum (mesocarpio fibrillifero), glaberrimum, indehiscens, apice glandulzeformi pro tubilli transitu pervium, uniloculare. Semen unicum, basi affixum, loculo paulo brevius, apicem versus attenuatum ; integumenta 2, simplicia, ab imo usque ad medium coalita, dehine superne libera et distincta; eate- rius tenuiter membranaceuin, apice subito longe contractum et in ¢ubillum persistentem tubulosum per foramen pericarpil prolatum et sepe longe exsertum attenuatum ; interius cras- sius, opacum, corrugato- plicatum, apice glandula subglobosa majuscula carnosa clausum ; hilum cum chalaza basali con- fusum, substipitatum ; raphe nulla; albumen oblongum, sub- compressum, obpyriforme, carnosulum, embryo eequilongum, apice suspensum ; suspensor brevis, ¢ cylindri cus, opacus, floccu- losus, ad imum glandule integumenti affixus, et ad partem superiorem albuminis‘arcte adherens ; embryo carnosus albu- mine equilongus et dimidio angustior; cotyledones lineari- oblong, semiteretes, parallelim collaterales (commissura spice axin spectans), radicula lis equilata et equilonga, supera, subcompressa, gradatim ad apicem obtusum angustata. Ephedra Chilensis, n.sp.;—ramis ramulisque oppositis, vali- diusculis, pallide viridulis, granuloso-striatellis, imternodiis longiusculis vel mediocribus, axillis valde nodosis; foliis ru- dimentariis, oppositis, crassiusculis, margine tenuibus, imo in vaginam membranaceam serius ruptam connatis, laciniis li- neari-acutis ; ramis floriferis axillaribus, brevibus vel brevis- simis, apice spicellas 1-2-3 sessiles gerentibus;_ spicellis ovatis vel oblongis, ex mvolucellis per paria 6, decussatim op- positis et imbricatis; involucellis ovatis, obtusis, per paria imo connatis: floribus ¢ in involucellis solitariis, hine decus- satim oppositis, perigonio incluso; antheris 6, in columna subsessilibus et exsertis: fl. 9 pedunculo im axillis solitario, elongato, supra medium 2- ee spicella solitaria termi- nato, involucellis per paria 5 imo nexis; acheniis 2, termina- Mr. J. Miers on Hphedra. 258 libus, inclusis.—Chile, Prov. Valparaiso, v. v. in variis locis ; v.s. in herb. Hook. et Mus. Brit. (Cuming, n. 372; Bridges). A low shrub, with numerous virgate constantly dividing branchlets, which are opposite in most of the nodes, more rarely 4, verticillate, from 1 to 14 lme im thickness, the internodes being 14 to 2 inches apart; the opposite leaflets, 2 to 3 lines Jong, are at first united for nearly their entire length into a membranaceous vaginant sheath, which afterwards becomes torn, by the swelling of the node, into two acute segments, coriaceous at base. The male inflorescence consists of one to four crowded spikelets upon a very short pedicel, thus forming almost glo- merated heads on each side of every node : each spikelet is 3 lines long, 24 lines broad; the petaloid perigonium in each involucel is turbinately tubular, compressed, delicately membranaceous, of an orange-yellow colour, 1 line long (thus somewhat exceeding the length of its involucel), its border consisting of two rounded concave, erect lobes, which are imbricated in estivation in the manner before described; the exserted anthers are subglobose, of a bright yellow colour, opening by two pores in the apex. The female peduncle is 10 lines long, bearing spikelets in which the achenia were destroyed by insects*. 2. Ephedra bracteata, nob. Tray. 11.531 ;—ramis erectis, ramulis ternatim verticillatis aut oppositis, tenuoribus, divaricatis, fusco-viridibus, minutissime granuloso-striatellis, mternodiis longiusculis ; foliis oppositis, rarius ternis, Imo in vaginam submembranaceam connatis, apicibus longissime et anguste linearibus ; inflorescentia ¢ et 2 interdum in eadem planta ; spicellis ¢ 2-3 in quaque axilla subsessilibus, imo bracteatis, involncellis 1-floris, per paria 6-8 imo connatis decussatim imbricatis, perigonio involucello paulo longiore, flavido, peta- loideo, antheris 6 sessilibus longe exsertis ; spicellze 9 mvolu- cellis imbricatis, majoribus, coriaceis, marginellatis, achenia 2 collateraliter terminalia ultra medium velantibus.—Chile, Prov. Valparaiso et Coquimbo, v.v. ad Concon; v.s. in herb. Hook., Viiia de la Mar (¢ & ? Bridges, No. 178), Viiia de la Mar (Anderson, anno 1830), Coquimbo (Harvey ¢). A shrub growing to the height of 2 to 5 feet, with the habit of the preceding, from which it differs by several marked cha- racters. The branches are more slender, darker, with internodes 11 inch apart ; the leaflets are opposite, sometimes ternate, 3 to 4 lines long, united at base into a vaginant tube | line in length, the segments being somewhat erect and linearly setaceous. The * A drawing of this species, with analytical details, will be given in the ‘Contributions to Botany,’ vol. ii. Plate 75a. 254: Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. male spikelets are 24 lines long, 14 line broad, formed of two sets of basal bracts and six or eight pairs of floriferous decussately imbricated involucels, united into as many vaginant sheaths at their bases; the perigonium of each solitary opposite flower is of a yellow colour, 1 line long, with a two-lobed erect border ; the staminal tube is 14 line long, supporting the subsessile sub- globose yellow anthers, which open by two pores in the apex. The fructiferous spikelet is 3 lines long, 2 lines broad, formed of four series of imbricated involucels void of flowers; they are coriaceous, 14 line long, 14 line broad, each united with the oppo- site one into a sheath at its base; the two terminal achenia, more than half invested by the superior involucels, are 2 lines long, 11 line broad, flat on the contiguous faces, and convex externally, of a somewhat glauco-fuscous colour, the summit being termi- nated by an obtuse perforated gland, through which the shortly exserted slender tubillus passes, which has a unilabiate termi- nation. The pedicel supporting the fructiferous spikelet, which in Bridges’s specimen is not fully grown, is 4 lines long, with a pair of bracteoles a short distance below: in Anderson’s speci- men the pedicel is 10 lines long, the bracteoles being at a dis- tance of 2 lines, and the spikelet is double the size of the former. It should be remarked that, in Bridges’s plant, a fructi- ferous spikelet is found on one of the lower branches of the same specimen the upper branches of which all bear male flowers *. 3. Ephedra monticola, n. sp.;—ramis oppositis, substrictis et suberectis, valde ramosis, striatis, brunneis, ramulis junioribus teneribus, imo in vaginam vix nexis; pedunculis axillaribus in flor. ¢ subbrevibus vel brevissimis, spicellam unicam ovatam gerentibus; involucellis in paribus 8-5 decussatim imbricatis, ovatis, obtusis vel mucronulatis, subcoriaceis, margine mem- branaceo cinctis et floribus totidem includentibus ; perigonio petaloideo, vix longiore ; columna staminifera 2-plo longiore ; antheris 5—7, ovalibus, subsessilibus: spicellis fructiferis soli- tariis, ovatis, pedunculo ramuliformi 2-bracteolato suffultis ; acheniis 2, in involucellis supremis absconditis.—Chile, Cor- dillera de los Andes, utroque latere; v.s. in herb. Hook. (3 et 2 Bridges, No. 1210). A shrub, from its very elevated locality, probably of low growth, with more erect and more slender branches than the preceding species, from which it differs in its general appearance, im its much smaller bractiform leaflets, and in its achenia being hidden by the last pair of involucels. Its branchlets are oppo- site, but sometimes two superimposed grow out of each axil : these are floriferous, nearly $ line in diam., with internodes 9 to * This species will be. figured in the same work, Plate 75 B, Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. 255 11 lines apart. The peduncles are axillary, 1 to 2 lines long, with a pair of bracteoles supporting them at their origin; and they bear a solitary male spikelet, which is ovate, 24 to 3 lines long, bracteated at base, with four pairs of imbricated involucels briefly conjoined at their base into a sheath, subcoriaceous and 1 line long; perigonium somewhat longer than its own involucel; staminiferous column twice its length, bearing 5-7 sessile yel- low anthers opening by two pores in their apex. ‘The fructi- ferous spikelets are on a distinct specimen: here the peduncle is 1 inch long, 2-bracteolate a little above the middle, bearing a solitary oval spikelet 3 lines long, 2 lines broad; involucels broadly ovate, gradually diminishing towards their summits, coriaceous, with a narrow membranaceous border; two erect achenia 14 line long, elliptic, plano-convex, perforated at the apex, with no portion of the tubillus exserted*. 4. Ephedra Andina, Popp. ; Meyer, Mem. Acad. Petrop. v. 78; —caulibus plurimis subhumifusis, ramis ramulisque ramosis- simis adscendentibus, singulis ad pedem vaginatim foliosis, flexuosis, nodosis, ea nenealutias internodiis “subbreyibus, vie ridiusculis, granuloso-striatellis ; foliis minimis, oppositis, co- riaceis, acutis, imo vaginatim nexis, lobis in junioribus subu- lato-acuminatis, mucronulatis, serius distinctis ; spicellis ¢ axillaribus, breviter pedunculatis, solitariis vel binis glomeratis, basi 2-bracteolatis ; involucellis per paria 6 decussatim oppo- sitis et imbricatis, imo vaginatis, obovatis, primum submem- branaceis et flavescentibus, serius subcoriaceis et membranaceo- marginatis ; perigonio petaloideo, limbo 2-lobo; columna staminifera longe exserta, antheras 5-6 sessiles apice 2-porosas gerente: spicellis fructiferis axillaribus, solitarius, longe pe- dunculatis; pedunculo in medio 2-bracteolato; involucellis majoribus, magis coriaceis; acheniis 2, collateralibus, termi- nalibus, glaucis, striatellis, imvolucello paulo longioribus, apice perforatis; tubillo breviter exserto, apice imeequaliter fisso aut lacerato.—In Andibus Chilensibus ; v. s. in herb. meo et Hooker., 5 Cordillera de Maule (Germain) ; in herb. Hooker., 2 Chile australis (Dr. Philippi). In the memoir above cited, Meyer has confounded together (but with some doubt) all the Chilean species of Ephedra. The above-described plant, from the provinces south of the River Maule, the region visited by Poppig, has been selected as the type of HE. Andina, Popp. It is a well-marked species. The foregoing diagnosis, drawn wholly from it, should be substituted for the more general character assigned by Meyer. It seems to be avery bushy plant, its lower branches hanging on the ground, * A figure of this plant will be seen in (Joc. cit.) Plate 76. 256 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. and its ramifications rising upwards. In Germain’s specimens, a cross section of its branches exhibits three or four distinct annular zones, showing a solid white wood with close medullary rays: these are 24 lines in diameter, and very flexuose ; its bark is thick and of a brownish colour, but in the younger branchlets of the last year’s growth it is of a yellowish green, the inter- nodes being 13 to “2 inches apart. "The axillary branchlets or peduncles which bear the 3 flowering spikelets are generally half a line, seldom 2 lines, in length ; Sires: spikelets are 2-24 lines long, with six pairs of imbricated involucels ; the perigo- nium is $ line long, and the staminal column, rising above it, becomes 14 line in length. The fructiferous spikelets, upon a distinct plant, supported by a peduncle 2 to 4 lines long, are 3 to 34 lines in length, and are formed of three pairs of imbricated involucels, with a pair of bracts upon the peduncle. The two terminal achenia, embraced by the last pair of involucels, which. are somewhat shorter than them, and subscarious, are plano- convex, oblong, poimted towards the small perforated apex, where they are marked by a small yellowish glandular ring which I have considered to be the persistent sessile stigma ; the exserted portion of the tubillus is barely a line long, and is irregularly lacerated and scarcely 2-lobed*. 9. Ephedra dumosa, n. sp. ;—ramis arcuato-flexuosis, valde ra- mosis et intricatis, internodiis subbrevibus aut mediocriter distantibus ; steers divaricatis, striatellis, granuloso-scabri- dulis, rufescentibus vel fuscis; foltis oppositis, corlaceis, granuloso-striatulis, fusco- rubescentibus, imo in vaginam amplam brevem connexis, vix marginatis, apicibus breviter mucronato-acutis, vagina demum rupta Imearibus: spicellis fructiferis solitariis, brevissime pedicellatis ; involucellis per paria imo nexis, imbricatis, ovatis, subcarnosis, rubescentibus, achenia omnino aera Les achentls nigris, nitidis, tu- billo breviter exserto, obsolete 2-lobo.—In Andibus Chilensi- bus, v.v. ad Cortaderas costa orientali; v. s. im herb. meo et FHook., Cuesta del Inca (Gillies). A low bushy shrub, which I found growing near the Ladera de las Cortaderas, on fhe eastern side : the Andes, and of which I still preserve the ripe fruits, though my specimen was lost. Dr. Gillies’s plant, from the eastern side of the Portillo Pass, is more dwarfish, and is without flower or fruit. The branchlets are opposite, the internodes being only 6 to 12 lines apart; the vaginant portion of the combined opposite leaflets is 5 line long and subcampanulate, the segments being of equal length, and * A representation of this species, with ample details, will be seen in the work before mentioned, Plate 76 B. Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. 257 triangular. The fructiferous spikelets are solitary, 3 lines long, 2 lines in diameter; the involucels, broad and very fleshy, of a dull dark ruddy hue, quite conceal the two terminal achenia the latter are ovate, diminishing upwards, plano-convex, shining, unevenly striated, each obtuse at its acumination, where it is per- forated and surrounded by an apical annular gland; the tubillus, rising through this, is very little exserted, and very briefly bifid, or rather lacerated into two very short, erect, concave, rounded, unequal lobes*. 6. Ephedra ochreata, n. sp. ;—suffruticosa, ramis virgatis ramu- lisque validis adscendentibus, szepissime fusco-viridibus, stria- tellis, granuloso-scabridulis, epidermide facile rimosa, inter- nodiis remotiusculis; foliis 3-nis vel 4-nis, rigido-submem- branaceis, in vaginam longiusculam striatellam connexis, api- cibus subulatis, serius omnino disruptis, tunc liberis et reflexis: spicellis ¢ oppositis, 3-nis vel 4-nis, in axillis sessilibus et subglomeratis, oblongis, ad basin imbricato-bracteatis ; invo- lucellis in seriebus ternatis 6-9, imo nexis et decussatim al- ternantibus, ovatis, subcoriaceis, margine vix membranaceis, perigonio subequilongis; antheris 5-6, exsertis: spicellis fructiferis 2—4, breviter pedicellatis, subverticillatis ; acheniis 2, oblongis, subacutis, ultra medium exsertis.—In Provinciis Argentinis, Travesia de Mendosa 2 mihi lecta; v. s. in herb. Hook. et Mus. Brit., 3 Patagones, Prov. Buenos Ayres (Twee- die), Bahia Blanca (Darwin), Port S. Elena (Capt. King), Bahia San Antonio. Var. striata 3 et 2 Mendosa (Gillies). A very distinct species, with long virgated and somewhat curving branches, which are striated, | to 2 lin. diam., the inter- nodes being 2 inches apart; the younger ones are somewhat fistulose, with a central pith, but the older branchlets are en- tirely woody ; four branchlets issue from a node, two being su- perposed in each opposite axil; or there are three verticillate branchlets at a joint ; the leaves are 4 lines long, seldom oppo- site, most frequently ternate, and united together as far as their middle into a sheath which loosely embraces the stem; they are membranaceous, with a subulately acuminate apex terminating in a long cuspidate point proceeding from the excurrent nerve ; four sessile male spikelets are placed verticillately round each node within the ruptured sheath, the leaves now becoming re- flexed and withered ; these spikelets are 2 lin. long, and 14 lin. broad ; each consists of three series of imbricated bracts at base, and nine other floriferous series closely imbricate and alternately _ * This plant, with analyses of its carpological structure, will be shown wePL 77 As 258 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. decussate, each series consisting of three involucels vaginately united at base; the flowers, from twenty-five to thirty in each spikelet, are therefore ternately verticillate in each series. The perigonium is petaloid, of the usual form, of delicate reticulated texture, the areoles being generally disposed in longitudinal rows sometimes anastomosing with each other, each areole being isolated and replete with a coloured fluid; there is no vestige of any nervure or spicular cells as in Welwitschia. The involucels are similarly reticulated, but they finally become thickened, opake, and coriaceous, except round the margins; the coriaceous portion is constituted in the manner described in a preceding page (p. 250). The fructiferous spikelets, upon distinct but similar plants, are two to four in each node, 4 to 43 lines long, 2 lines broad, verticillately disposed, each upon a separate - pedicel ; their involucels, in about five gradually decreasing imbricated pairs, are smooth, opake, subcoriaceous, with almost obsoletely membranaceous margins. The two terminal achenia, half im- vested by the last pair of involucels, are ovate, somewhat attenu- ating upwards, trigonous, with an obtuse pallid perforated sum- mit, the tubillus, with lacerated apex, being scarcely exserted*. The variety striata of Gillies possesses all the specific features ; but the branchlets are less than half the thickness, they are glandularly scabrid, of a pallid colour; the mternodes in the male plant scarcely exceed an inch, while those of the fructiferous plants are 1 to 14 inch apart; the leaves, 23-3 lines long, are united for above half their length into a 3-fid vaginant tube. There are about six smaller glomerated heads around each node. The fructiferous spikelets are 3 lines long, 2 lines broad, with three pairs of subcoriaceous involucels with scarious margins, the terminal pair enclosing two finely striated, opake, fuscous achenia. It may probably form a distinct species; but there is little that can be characterized. 7. Ephedra Americana, H.B.K. ii. 2; Rich. Conif. 31. tab. 29; Meyer, Mem. Acad. Petrop. v. 100 ;—ramulis graciliusculis, erectis, subflexuosis, striatellis, pallide virentibus, vix scabrel- lis; foliis oppositis, imo ad nodos in vaginam brevem nexis, lobis liberis longiusculis, linearibus, subulato-acuminatis, erecto-patulis, submembranaceis, glaberrimis, crebre striatellis, serius ruptis et divaricatis, linea transversali tunc nexis: spi- cellis ¢ axillaribus, sessilibus, subglobosis, oppositis vel 4-ver- ticillatis ; involucellis per paria 8-10, floriferis, imbricatis, valde concavis ; perigonio paulo longiore, petaloideo ; columna * Ample details of structure, and a figure of the plant, will be given in Plate 77 B. : Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. 259 staminali 7-nervi; antheris 5-7, exsertis: spicellis fructiferis in quaque axilla solitarius vel binis, breviter pedicellatis ; in- volucellis majoribus, glauco-opacis, marginibus anguste mem- branaceis ; acheniis 2, terminalibus, subinclusis, apice calloso perforatis—In Peruvia; v. s. in herb. Mus. Brit., 3 et 2; in herb. Hook., 2 Chachapoyas (Mathews, 1838). Kunth describes this as a somewhat erect or repent shrub, very much branched ; the branchlets are slender, scarcely 4 line diam., with internodes 1 to 14 inch apart. The leaves are 3 to 5 lines long, 1 line broad, setaceously acute, of a reddish colour, and ultimately subreflexed. According to that botanist, the male and female flowers are found on the same plant, in the pro- portion of three of the former to one of the latter; but in the instances I have seen, the sexes are on different specimens. The male spikelets are solitary and sessile in each opposite axil ; they are 2 lines long, 14 line broad, with six or eight series of flori- ferous opposite involucels conjoined at base in alternating pairs, and three series of basal bracts; the involucels are suborbicu- lar, with a fleshy very concave centre and a simply reticulated margin, the central portion being formed of three separable laminz, as described in page 250. The perigonium is petaloid, simply reticulated, with spotted areole, but without vessels of any kind. The fructiferous spikelets are elliptic, 3 lines long, 2 lines broad, supported on pedicels 1 line long. The mesocarp of the pericarp is filled with numerous very long, and apparently solid, filiform woody fibres imbedded in fleshy matter. Ina half-ripe state, the tubillus is distinctly seen to be continuous with the outer integument of the seed, a considerable space in- tervening between it and the gland, and between it and a long portion of the summit of the seed*, 8. Ephedra rupestris, Bth. Plant. Hartw. p. 253 ;—humilis, in- tricato-ramosissima; ramulis rectiusculis vel arcuatis, fusco- opacis, valde striatis, granuloso-scabrellis, ad axillas paulo nodosis ; foliis oppositis, imo in vaginam brevem nexis, su- perne in lobos triangulares extus subcarimatos mucronatos terminatis, minute granulosis, coriaceis, hematicis: spicellis é axillaribus, solitariis vel binis, sessilibus ; involucellis oppo- sitis, imo nexis, 3—4-serialibus, imbricatis, carnosulis, fuscis, perigonio brevioribus; antheris circiter 5, sessilibus, longe exsertis: spicellis fructiferis in axillis solitariis, breviter pedi- cellatis; mvolucellis per paria 4-5, imbricatis, fuscis, carno- sulis, minute granulosis; acheniis 2, terminalibus, inclusis ; tubillo exserto, subtruncato, rubello.—Ecuador ; v. s. in herb, Hooker., 3 Monte Pelzhum, altit. 12,000 ped. (Jameson), * This plant, with full structural details, will be shown in Plate 78 a. - 260 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra, Monte Cotopaxi, altit. 12,000 ped. (Jameson), Monte Anti- sana 2 (Hartwegg, No. 1394). Apparently a shrub of stunted growth, found in the fissures of rocks at a great elevation, ies branchlets being 4 to ? line thick, with internodes 5 to 7 lines apart ; opposite leatlets 1 line long, ‘which for half their length are united into a vaginant tube round each node, becoming afterwards more or less torn to their base. The male spikelets are 2 lines long, 1 line broad, with involucels and perigonium 3 line long; staminiferous column yellow, ¢ line long, bearing five clustered sessile anthers opening by two pores in the apex. The fructiferous spikelets are 21 lines long, 13 line diam.; the involucels are of a dark brassy metallic hue, evidhia finely g eranulated surface. The Ephedra hme Weddell (Ann. Sc. Nat. sér. 8. xii. 251), from Puno in Bolivia, does not appear to be specifically distinct from the above plant. ‘The species is much allied to the Ephedra dumosa described in a preceding page. 9. Ephedra Tweediana, Visch., Meyer, Mem. Acad. Petrop. v. 99. tab. 9 ;—ramis ramulisque oppositis, ramosis, erectius- culis, teneribus, subvirgatis, pallidis, striatis, subgranulosis, imo vaginatis, ad axillas nodosas subarticulatis, internodiis subelongatis; folius oppositis, aut rarius verticillatim ternis, distinctis, imo linea transversali nexis, basi concavis, superne hyalino-membranaceis, acuminatis, et in setam longissimam filiformem terminatis: spicellis ¢ in quaque axilla solitariis, vel 2-3-4 glomeratis, sessilibus, oblongis, acutis, basi 4:-brac- teatis; involucellis per paria 4—5, imo nexis, decussatim im- bricatis, ovalibus, crassiusculis, margine membranaceis, peri- gonio subsequilongis ; antheris sepius 3, interdum 4-5, sessi- libus, oblongis, vix exsertis: spicellis fructiferis similibus, sed 2-plo majoribus, brevissime pedicellatis ; involucellis ma- joribus ‘et paulo crassioribus, pallidis, coriaceis, anguste mar- ginatis ; acheniis 2, navicularibus, pallide opacis, oblongis, eradatim angustioribus, apice obtuso perforatis, tubillo ex- serto, irregulariter lacerato.—In Provinciis Argentinis, v. v. Coro Corto (Prov. Mendosa) et Travesia de Mendosa, cet 2 (mihi lecta, anno 1826) ; v. s. a herb. Hooker., Travesia de Mendosa (sub H. Mendocensis) et in Pampas (sub titulo H. australis) (Gillies); Patagones (Carmen, Rio Negro) in Proy. Buenos Ayres, det 2 (Tweedie). This species appears to have a wide range over the extent of the Pampas, in localities which are more or less saline. It has a branching ligneous root, from which numerous slender stem- lets ascend, which throw off other occasional branchlets at the nodes, forming a shrub 1 or 2 feet in height, with somewhat Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. 261 longer branches which run along the ground or trail upon others for support. The opposite or verticillately disposed branches are slender, subflexuose, of a pale greenish colour, 3 to 1 line diameter, with internodes 1 to 1? inch apart; the nodes are somewhat swollen, often articulate, and embraced by the bases of the leaves, which form opposite cup-shaped cartila- ginous projections at each node, joined together by a transverse line; the leaflets are 3 lines long, subulate, suberect, with hya- line membranaceous margins, gradually diminishing into a long curved setaceous point. The male spikelets generally abound in the younger branchlets, where two or three are often crowded together in each axil; these are oblong, somewhat tapered, formed of about five pairs of decussately opposite involucels, each pair united at base into a short vaginant tube; the mvo- lucels are ovoid, slightly acute or obtuse, glaucescent, subfleshy, with a narrow membranaceous margin, each enclosing a petaloid perigonium of about their own length, which is campanulately tubular, compressed, and expanded into two broad rounded erect lobes, as long as the tube, imbricated in estivation; the stami- niferous column, scarcely exceeding the length of the perigonium, bears on its apex three to five crowded, erect, sessile anthers, which are 2-celled and open by two pores in the apex. In the specimen from Patagones, the number of anthers is constantly three, which number occurs in the other localities, but only oc- casionally. The fructiferous spikelets are on different specimens, and vary only from those of the male flowers in being generally solitary upon a very short pedicel in each axil, and are about double their size, being 3 lines long, 2 lines broad, gradually narrowing upwards, with about six pairs of involucels, the three upper pairs being the largest, and all barren except the last pair, which embraces ? of the length of the two terminal achenia ; these involucels are greenish, and ultimately brown, 2 lines long, 11 line broad, and pointed: the achenia are fuscous brown, opake, broadest at base, gradually attenuated upwards, flat in- side, with a somewhat sharp margin, rounded and carinated on the opposite face, their section being somewhat trigonous, 3 lines long, 14 line broad, the small obtuse apex being glandular and perforated; the tubillus is exserted, and irregularly lacerated, not disciform as Meyer has stated, although he figures it as I have described 1t*. 10. Ephedra scandens, n. sp. ;—scandens, vage ramosa; ramis strictis, ramulis junioribus floriferis seepe 4-12 verticillatis ex quoque nodo, gracilibus, subflexuosis, pallidis, striatellis, fere * A representation of this species, with structural details, will be seen in Plate 78 B. 262 Mr. J. Miers on Ephedra. levibus, internodiis longiusculis, ad nodos subarticulatis ; foliis in axillis oppositis, imo inter se nexis et vaginatis, lobis brevibus, obtusis, membranaceis, serius disruptis et liberis : spicellis ¢ in quaque axilla 1-2-3 glomerulatis, spheericis, ca- pitulum globosum simulantibus ; involucellis rotundatis, con- cavis, fusco-rubentibus, subcarnosulis; ramulis floriferis de- mum elongatis: spicellis fructiferis 1 ad 3 ex quaque axilla, longe pedicellatis ; acheniis seminclusis.—In Provincia Uru- guay; v.s. in herb. Hook., Banda Oriental (Tweedie, Baird), Parana et Entre Rios (Gibert, Nos. 9 et 75). Tweedie describes this species as climbing to the tops of the loftiest trees of the forest; and Baird says it is used by the natives for dyeing a fine scarlet colour. The branchlets are slender, of a pallid green, not more than } to # line diameter, with inter- nodes 14 to 2 inches apart. The leaves are very small and membranaceous, not exceeding 1 line in length. The male. spikelets, generally about six, are crowded together in a capitate form around each node ; the spikelets are subglobose, 1 to 14 line diam., composed of about five pairs of closely imbricated invo- lucels, which are rounded above, and concave, somewhat fleshy, of a dark ruddy colour, and opake; the perigonium, of the same size, is of a reddish hue, beyond which six to eight bright yellow sessile anthers are exserted. The fructiferous spikelets, on distinct specimens, are usually solitary in each axil; each spikelet is supported on a very slender pedicel, 2 to 3 lines in length, which is deflected; it is acutely elliptic, 3 lines long, including the two terminal achenia, which are half-enclosed within the last pair of involucels; the involucels are in three imbricating pairs, with two pairs of bracts at base; they are ob- long, rather obtuse, of a greenish-brown colour, becoming some- what reddish, with a very narrow white margin: the achenia are acuminately oblong, trigonous, 3 lines long, 13 line broad; eranularly striated, of a dark ruddy brown, with a somewhat 3-lobed white gland in the apex, which is perforated for the passage of the tubillus, this being scarcely exserted and lace- rated at its apex*. 11. Ephedra frustillata, n. sp.;—mnana, ramosissima; ramis ramulisque iterum ramosis, brevissimis, oppositis, vel szepe 4-natim verticillatis, sulcatis, granuloso-asperatis, rufo-auran- tiacis, singulis mmo vaginatis; foliis axillaribus, oppositis, parvis, ovatis, concavis, rubescentibus, crassiusculis, margine vix marginatis, primum usque ad medium in vaginam 2-den- tatam connexis, serius disruptis: spicellis ¢ in apice ramu- lorum ultimorum solitariis, sessilibus, subovatis ; involucellis * This species will be shown in Plate 79 a. Prof. G. Guiliver on the Raphides of Isnardia. 263 per paria 4-6, decussatim oppositis, et basi nexis, crebre im- bricatis; perigonio 2-labiato, involucello 2-plo longiore, la- biis adpressis, rotundatis ; antheris 5, globosis, in columnam exsertam crebriter sessilibus.— Patagonia ; v. s. in herb. Hook. et Mus. Brit., Port Desire (Darwin). A stunted shrub, apparently not more than 4 inches in height, with a repent caudex, out of which the somewhat ascendent branches originate, which immediately divide themselves at every half-inch distance into verticillated ramifications round each axil, the ultimate ones being floriferous, with a pair of short vaginant bractiform leaflets round each node, and a similar sti- puloid sheath round the base of each ramification. They are all of a dull reddish orange-colour. The male spikelets are ovate, 2 lines long*, XXVIII.—On the Raphides of Isnardia. By Prof. Guiuiver. Havine, through the kindness of Mr. W. H. Baxter, of the Oxford Botanic Garden, received a fragment of a few leaves of an old dried specimen of Isnardia palustris, I have examined it, and find that, like its congeners Epilobium, Cinothera, and Circa, it abounds in true raphides. They were easily detected, in the form of bundles, under a magnifying power of about one hundred and sixty, linear admeasurement, in bits of the leaf which had been macerated in water; and the needle-like crystals were also separately diffused through the water im which the leaf had been comminuted. This plant was the only one required to complete the series of observations on British Onagracee formerly made by me; and now it is certain that raphides are abundant and of similar shape in all our genera of this order. How well it is thus characterized may at once be seen by comparing a portion of Epilodbium with a like part of Lythrum, when the profusion of raphides in the one plant and their absence in the other will plamly show the difference. This observation, in connexion with others given in the ‘An- nals’ for January last, pp. 18-15, would appear to warrant the following conclusions :— 1. Raphides form a regular part of the healthy, growing, or perfect structure of several plants—from the ovary to mature parts, as stem, leaves, sepals, and testa,—contrary to the state- ment of Schleiden that “ crystals are rarely met with in cells in a full state of vitality.” 2. Crystals resulting merely from chemical] changes connected * A representation of this plant will be given in Plate 79 B. 264 Mr. A. Adams on new Genera and Species of with decay in the stem, bark, and other parts helong to a different category. 3. Numerous species and orders of plants are nearly or quite devoid of raphides as a regular part of the growing and healthy structure. 4. Certain orders may be so readily distinguished from their near allies by raphides alone, and this even in minute fragments of the leaf and other healthy parts, whether in the fresh or dried state, in the absence, too, of the flower and fruit, that the fact should henceforth be comprised in the descriptive characters of our plants of those orders. 5. Onagracese and Lemnacez have now been proved, as far as regards the British plants, to be such orders. 6. The common and abundant Willow-herbs and Duckweed, being thus very laboratories for the formation and collection of phosphate of lime, should be worthy of attention as valuable manure. Edenbridge, March 2, 1863. XXIX.—On some new Genera and Species of Umboniide from the Seas of Japan. By Artuur Apams, F.L.S. &c. MM. Lesson and Vatencrennzs have made known Umbonium giganteum and U. costatum from Japan; and Gould has recently described U. superbum, found by Stimpson at Kagosima Bay. One species (U. moniliferum of Lamarck) is in estimation among the Japanese for the superior lime it furnishes; and the same species is sold in their shops, under the name of “ Aru,” for ornamental purposes, such as the manufacture of bracelets. U. vestiarium, L., so common in the north of China, is hardly met with in Japan, a few dead examples only having been detected by me at Tsaulian Harbour, which, although in the Sea of Japan, more properly belongs to the Korea. But although, very naturally, the more conspicuous and bril- liant species have been brought by travellers to Europe, yet there remain still unknown many smaller and more obscure forms of the family, some of which I now propose briefly to elucidate. Genus Umponivum, Link. 1. Umbonium vestiarium, Linn. Trochus vestiarius, Linn. Syst. Nat. ed. 12. p. 1230. Rotella lineolata, Lamk.; Rot. rosea, Lamk. Hab. Tsaulian, Umboniide from the Seas of Japan. 265 2. Umbonium giganteum, Lesson. Rotella gigantea, Less. Illust. de Zool. pl. 17. Globulus giganteus, Phil. Rotella aucta, Sow. Hab. O-Sima. 3. Umbonium costatum, Valence. Rotella costata, Val. Kien. Sp. Conch. viv. pl. 11. £5. Globulus costatus, Phil. Conch. Cab. pl. 7. f. 15. Hab. Simoda; Hakodadi; Tsu-Sima; Tsaulian. 4. Umbonium moniliferum, Lamk. Rotella monilifera, Lamk. Hist. des Ann, s. Vert. vol. vii. p. 8. . Rotella javanica, Lamk. Globulus monilifer, Phil. Hab. Nagasaki; Simoda; Tatiyama; O-Sima; Tago. 5. Umbonium anguliferum, Phil. Globulus anguliferus, Phil. Conch. Cab. pl. 8. f. 3. Hab. Simoda. 6. Umbonium superbum, Gould. Rotella superba, Gould, Otia Conch. p. 156. Hab. Kagosima. Genus Microtuyca, A. Adams. Testa globoso-turbinata, late umbilicata, subporcellana, longitudi- naliter rugoso-plicata; suturis canaliculatis; anfractibus ad suturas erenulatis. Apertura semicircularis, peritremate continuo; labio incrassato, arcuato ; labro margine incrassato ; umbilico crenulato. 1. Microthyca crenellifera, A. Adams. Isanda crenellifera, A. Adams, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1862. Hab. Gotto Islands, 71 fathoms; Seto-Uchi, 17 fathoms. In this curious little form, which I referred to Isanda (not having the type of that genus to compare with it), the peritreme is continuous, and the outer lip thickened—characters which prevent its being referred to any existing genus. Genus Umsonetia, A. Adams. Testa globoso-conoidea, solida, porcellana, polita, anguste umbili- cata. Apertura subquadrata; labio rectiusculo, antice dilatato ; umbilico angusto, margine crenulato-rugoso. 1. Umbonella murrea, Reeve. Turbo murreus, Reeve, Conch. Icon. sp. 54. Isanda maculosa, A. Adams, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1862. Hab. Gotto Islands; 71 fathoms. Ann. § Mag. N. Mist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 18 266 Mr. A. Adams on new Genera and Species of This genus is founded on a small, turbinate, porcellanous shell, which I described under the name of Isanda maculosa. There is, however, a figure in Reeve’s Monograph of Turbo which seems to represent the same shell, and is called 7. mur- reus. The nearest genus appears to be Chrysostoma of Swainson; but in that the aperture is circular, and the axis is imperforate. Genus Ernaria, H. & A. Adams. 1. Ethalia perspicua, A. Adams. Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1861. Hab. Kino-O-Sima; Takano-Sima. 2. Ethalia sobrina, A. Adams. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1861. Hab. Akasi, 17 fathoms; Tsu-Sima, 25 fathoms. 3. Ethalia candida, A. Adams. Annals & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1862. Hab. Gotto Islands, 71 fathoms. 4. Hthaha polita, A. Adams. Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1862. Hab. Gotto Islands, 71 fathoms. 5. Kthalia omphalotropis, A. Adams. E. testa ovato-discoidali, alba, levi, nitida, semidiaphana ; spira ela- tiuscula ; anfractibus 34, convexis, rapide accrescentibus, suturis impressis ; anfractu ultimo ad peripheriam rotundato ; umbilico aperto, margine valde carinato; apertura subcirculari; labio callo parvo umbilicum partim tegente. Hab. Yobuko, 17 fathoms. This species has a peculiar sharp keel surrounding the umbi- licus. Like all the other examples of the genus, it is entirely devoid of coloured markings. 6. Hthalia nitida, A. Adams. E. testa helicoidea, tenui, semiopaca, leevi, nitida, sordide alba; an- fractibus 23, convexis, ultimo antice subdilatato, ad peripheriam rotundato; apertura subcirculari; labio in medio indentato, sub- calloso, peritremate in angulo postico producto. Hab. Yobuko, 14 fathoms. A thin helicoid species, with the whorls smooth and polished, and the inner lip callous and indented, but not emitting a callus sufficiently large to cover or conceal the umbilicus. The peri- Umboniide from the Seas of Japan. 267 stome is produced into an angle, which ascends on the last whorl. Genus Ternostoma, A, Adams. 1. Teinostoma concentricum, A. Adams. T’.. testa orbiculato-ovata, superne convexa, alba, solida, semiopaca, sulcis concentricis confertis concinne msculpta, lineisque increment radiantibus subtilissime decussata ; anfractibus rapide crescentibus, ultimo dilatato, ascendente, alios involvente vix usque ad apicem, peripheria rotundata, basi convexo; umbilico callo convexo leevi omnino obtecto ; apertura subcirculari, antice vix producta. Hab. O-Sima; Takano-Sima. A solid, convex species, with the surface finely concentrically grooved—a peculiarity which distinguishes it from any of the species already known. 2. Teinostoma radiatum, A. Adams. T. testa orbiculata, depressa, superne convexiuscula, basi subplana, semiopaca, alba, lineis incrementi radiantibus conspicue ornata ; umbilico callo excavato angulato obtecto; anfractibus subito crescentibus, ultimo alios involvente usque ad apicem ; apertura depressa, antice producta. Hab. O-Sima. This species is distinguished by its depressed form and the conspicuous radiating lines which proceed from the axis towards the periphery. The callus covering the umbilicus presents a sharp angular excavated edge near the inner lip. 3. Teinostoma lucidum, A. Adams. T. testa oblique ovata, depressa, superne convexa, inferne planiuscula, alba, leevi, pellucida, striolis incrementi obsolete radiata ; umbi- lico callo plano subcirculari opaco obtecto; anfractibus rapide crescentibus, ultimo ascendente, alios involvente usque ad apicem ; apertura subhorizontali, depressa, antice producta. Hab. Simoda. This species differs from the others already described in being smooth and pellucid; the last whorl is also considerably more dilated anteriorly. Genus Catcroxina, A. Adams. Testa neritiniformis, oblonga, depressa; spira parva; anfractibus rapide accrescentibus; regione umbilicali callosa. Apertura semi- circularis, intus non margaritacea; labio callo magno-lato obtecto, postice umbilicum tegente ; margine antico recto, simplici. This little genus is established on a shell I found at Tanabe, and which I believe to be the same as the Neritina pusilla of 18* 268 Mr. T. J. Moore on the Occurrence of C. B. Adams. It seems to be most nearly allied to Teinostoma, with which my brother and myself have placed it in our ‘ Genera.’ Calceolina pusilla, C. B. Adams. Neritina pusilla, C. B. Adams, Conch. Contrib. p. 112. Teinostoma anomalum, H. & A. Adams, ‘Genera of Recent Mollusca,’ vol. i. p. 123. Teinost. pusillum, Append. p. 615. C. testa albida, subopaca, superficie rugulis incrementi confertissimis striata ; sutura valde impressa; anfractu ultimo depresso, magno, ad peripheriam compresso. Hab. Tanabe, in shell-sand. XXX.—Notice of the Occurrence of a rare Cetacean (Lageno- rhynchus albirostris, Gray) at the Mouth of the Dee. By Tuomas J. Moore. ; On the 29th of December last, at daybreak, a fresh wind blowing from W.S.W., and the tide being about quarter-ebb, a large Cetacean was discovered stranded at Little Hilbre, one of two closely contiguous islands at the mouth of the Dee. It was observed by Mr. Barnett, Inspector of Buoys, who resides on the larger island, and who had noticed others off the shore a few days previously. I had urged Mr. Barnett, on the occurrence of such creatures, to endeavour to secure examples for this Mu- seum ; and he was, in consequence, kind enough immediately to proceed to the mainland for a suitable conveyance, into which it was carefully removed and brought to Birkenhead Ferry, and thence across the Mersey to this building. The creature was still living, spasmodically breathing at irregular intervals; the body was warm to the hand; and tear-like moisture oozed from its eyes as it lay quiescent in the cart. I was desirous of giving it a fresh chance of life, and my first anxiety was to obtain a vessel large enough to form a bath for it. This I succeeded, after some delay, in securing; but, to my great mortification, the creature gave up the ghost (with con- siderable violence, too) at the very moment when we were pre- pared to remove him into it. It was then getting dark, and the poor animal had thus lived about eight hours out of water. It was a male; and upon. endeavouring to make out the spe- cies, I was agreeably surprised to find it approximate most nearly to the description of the White-beaked Bottle-nose (La- genorhynchus albirostris), as given in Dr. Gray’s ‘Catalogue of Cetacea in the British Museum,’ p. 99, and in the ‘ Zoology of the Voyage of the Erebus and Terror,’ p. 35, the skull agreeing well with the figures in the latter work, pl. 11. a rare Cetacean at the Mouth of the Dee. 269 © I subsequently sent the skull to Dr. Gray for comparison ; and he confirmed my supposition of its being an individual of the species above named, namely, L. albirostris, which was founded upon a specimen taken at Great Yarmouth in October 1845, and recorded by Mr. Brightwell in the ‘Annals’ for 1846 (vol. xvii. p. 21, pl. 2), under the name of Delphinus tursto. This addition to our local fauna is a matter of considerable interest, as its place of capture comes within the range taken by Mr. Byerley in his “ Fauna of Liverpool,” published in the ‘Transactions of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Liver- pool, in 1854, and in which only two Cetaceans are recorded, namely, Phocena communis and Hyperoodon Butzkopf. The general colour is a rich black. A long and narrow greyish streak extends on either side diagonally across the ribs; and a similar greyish hue occurs on each side of the dorsal ridge, extending nearly from the fluke to the tail. The beak white, irregularly blotched with blackish, the white extending slightly above the constriction of the beak. The under jaw and throat milk-white, which colour extends along the belly, but becomes less clear as it approaches the vent. Its dimensions were as follows :— feet. inches. Total length from snout to cleft Olstallee ee Onn) LET NG HERS SB Bom 6 clnk Umibecd Bae QO 105 Abate loc), ce Pee Boge nae ie eine 0 t », of under jaw beyond the upper .. 0 = nei {LOM SHOUDTOIEVEs| rcs) sac sss: 1 14 a ss to blowsholey wie 3. ba ee $5 to commencement of dorsal fluke ...... on be a Fe to,end: Of Gitto.’ sau. 3. ae) 2.6 7% bE TOypectoral faite sas) 1 9 Breddeiiol tales. setae Sagas estes eels NES Deflection of cleft of tail from a line drawn Detwgemrits' tipis so ign taeiretee: Glee a er 0. 6% Girth in front of pectoral fin............ 3 Wh rh sy dorsal) fluke fs 52.3.) ./: 5) 60 Behind, Gorsal MUKEls y.t1e0 ele ae Ae Oy The body becomes much attenuated towards the tail. Im- mediately in front of the dorsal fluke, the vertical and transverse diameters are nearly identical, the former being 314 inches, and the latter 304. Halfway between the end of the fluke and the commencement of the tail, the vertical diameter is 13 inches, and the transverse 6; and immediately before the commence- ment of it, the vertical diameter is 44 inches, and the transverse 24, or exactly one-half. 270 ~=Dr. A. Gerstacker on the Geographical Distribution The dorsal fluke measures 24 inches along its convexity, and is 11 inches high. The pectoral fin, at its junction with the trunk, is 7 inches across, and its greatest length (diagonal) is 19 inches; measured round the curve, it is 21. The eye is $ inch long by $ an inch. ‘The orifice of the ear is 24 inches behind the eye in a slightly diagonal direction, and is less in diameter than a puncture by an ordinary pin. The transverse diameter of the blow-hole is 1? inch, and the longi- tudinal 1 inch, the points being directed forwards. The skin has been stuffed, though with much difficulty, owing to its want of tenacity ; and the contrast of colour is now almost imperceptible. The skeleton is in maceration, and will shortly be mounted. The dimensions of the skull are as follows :— inches Totaleneth Pye .hink aehele esis wane. SAL aes 195 Pength of nose hack atk ace} ack eek vies 0 Width, at orbit, sich 66x nc pluie el shee jee betel 10 5 MOTCHES, H20. |. cvdins Ge cated e Sheee eeeeereae a % MIGGLE OF NOKE * t)..csie.g ei peels aee sha eee 44 Denoth of lower qaw s. 2 curielenee tec metres ul aa: Width at cOnGyies....% meer erie rier mere or 9 Teeth = =; curved, and acute where not slightly worn. Free Public and Derby Museum, Liverpool, Feb. 17, 1863. XXXI.—On the Geographical Distribution and Varieties of the Honey-Bee, with Remarks upon the Exotic Honey-Bees of the Old World. By Dr. A. Grrstacker*. Arter a few observations upon domestic animals in general, and the difficulty attending their identification with any existing wild species, the author remarks that the mutual relation of the various races of Honey-Bees is less subject to doubt, since, not- withstanding that they have been described as distinct species by various authors, they really present no distinctive specific characters. Nevertheless, as with the other domestic animals, the native country of the Honey-Bee is unknown, as may be seen from the opinions expressed by the various entomologists who have written upon this subject. Latreille says of the supposed species of Honey-Bees, “ One (viz. Apis mellifica, Linn.), which is predominant and most generally cultivated, probably origi- nated in the north, also found in Barbary, &c.” +, and therefore * Abstract of a paper read to the eleventh ‘ Wander-Versammlung Deutscher Bienenwirthe,’ Potsdam, 1862. + Humboldt, Recueil d’Observations en Zoologie, p. 299. and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 271 believes that our northern Bee, from which he distinguishes the Italian Bee (A. Ligustica, Spin.), is probably indigenous to the North of Europe. This view is supported by Brun in his article on “ Exotic Races of Bees”*, who regards the North of Africa as the southern limit of the Honey-Bee, and the centre of Europe as the centre of its existence. An opposite opinion was held by Lepelletier de Saint-Fargeaut, who says, “A native probably of Greece, and perhaps also of Anatolia, it has been transported over the whole of Europe, Northern Africa, &c.” Kaden{ thinks “that the native country of our Honey-Bees is to be sought under the hot zones, and that they have been in- troduced into Europe with some trouble ;” and the latest writer on Bees, Von Berlepsch, regards this opinion as firmly esta- blished, saying §, “ Our Bee is demonstrably indigenous in the hot southern countries of the Old World, where an almost per- petually serene sky enables it to bustle about im balmy airs through the whole year, with very little interruption. But at a very early period human civilization carried it imto northern localities ; and here, in consequence of the roughness and cold- ness of the climate, it is often compelled to remain for from three to six months in its dwelling,—contrary to its nature ; for that so long a period of confinement is contrary to the mode of life originally impressed upon the Bee, opposed to its innate nature, is at once shown by the fact that it has no winter-sleep, like other allied insects indigenous to this country.” The grounds of these various opinions are easily discovered. Latreille, regarding the different races of Bees as distinct spe- cies, was evidently of opinion that each of these supposed spe- cies was indigenous in the country where it occurred; and Brun, following Latreille in considering the African Bees (Apis fasciata, Latr., from Egypt, Apis Adansonii, Latr., from Senegal, &e.) as distinct from Apzs mellifica, Linn., erroneously placed the southern limit of the latter on the north coast of Africa. Lepelletier’s opinion is evidently derived from the direction of European civilization; Kaden abstains from all evidence in sup- port of his similar view; whilst Von Berlepsch endeavours to maintain it only by analogies which will not bear examination. Because the Wasps and Hornets, of which only females survive the winter, pass this season in a torpid state, there is no reason that Bees should do the same. The Bee must pass the winter in society, because the continuance of its existence depends upon this ; hence it is impelled to lay up a supply of food against this * Bienenzeitung, 1858, p. 37. + Hist. Nat. des Hyménopteres, i. p. 401. + Bienenzeitung, 1857, p. 214. § Die Bienen und die Bienenzucht : Mihlhausen, 1860, p. 461. 272 ~=©Dr. A. Gerstacker on the Geographical Distribution period, and is also endowed with the physical property of over- coming the cold by the close approximatien of numerous indivi- duals. What countries are particularly meant by Von Berlepsch under the term “hot southern lands of the Old World” does not appear: if Italy be one of them, we have the evidence of Pliny* that in his time the Bees of Italy were quite inactive for sixty days, that they became more lively after the rising of Arcturus, but still fed for some time on their stores. ven if the expression be intended to refer to the tropical regions of Africa, the activity of the Bees would even here be interrupted, or at least much hindered, for several weeks, by the rainy season, which occurs twice in the year; so that the difference between their existence in southern and northern latitudes would consist solely in the different duration of the interruption of their activity. That such climatal or local differences in the mode of life of one and the same species are not necessarily to be ascribed to its artificial dispersion is shown by many insects — of all orders. But although the long interruption to the activity of the Bees in northern regions can furnish no sufficient reason for their not being indigenous there, on the other hand it is difficult to prove that they existed among us before the spread of civilization, however probable this may be; at any rate, the expression that the Bee has ‘demonstrably ”’ been introduced here is certainly not justified, The author considers that we are still to regard this question of the origin of the Honey-Bee as in a state of complete uncertainty. The solution of this question must be effected, if effected at all, by the examination of historical data, coupled with the investigation of the geographical distribution of the different varieties of the Bee, the latter acquiring increased value when the historical investigation leads only to negative results. If we cannot prove historically the transportation of the Bee from one country to another, neither have we the least certainty that no such transportation took place; and we can by no means rest contented with the assumption that the ancients never thought of the transportation of such an animal as the.Bee; for we know that honey and wax were, among the ancients, indispensable articles, and also that in Egypt, Attica, and Italy the hives were carried from place to place, with the view of increasing their weight. That the common Bee was the animal described by the Greek and Roman authors under the names of wédAcoa and Apis cannot be doubted, as (with the exception of the Bombi) this is the only social honey-gathering Bee found in the parts of the Eastern hemisphere known to the ancients, the * Hist. Nat. lib. x1. cap. 15; see also lib, x1. cap. 5. and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 273 Bees found in Italy and Egypt, in Greece and Asia Minor, being specifically identical with the Apis mellifica. The intimate connexion of the Bee with the mythology of the ancients, and especially with that of the Greeks, furnishes a certain proof of the high value put upon this insect by them, and at the same time demonstrates that it must have existed amongst them from time immemorial. Of all those natural products which the Greeks represented their deities as making use of in Olympus, or regarded as direct presents from the deities to mankind, we may be sure that they were not intro- duced from without at any determinable historical period. The origin of the Bee is carried back by Nicander of Colophon to the age of Saturn, in which, as is well known, the earth ‘“ flowed with milk and honey.” By others it is brought into immediate con- nexion with the youngest dynasty of deities, as especially in the narrative of Euhemerus of Alexandria, according to whom, at the birth of Jupiter, the Curetes performed an armed dance, by the noise of which the Bees produced on the Island of Ceos by the hornets and the sun were attracted into Crete, and induced to feed the new-born god with honey, which they collected as the dew of heaven. In gratitude for this, according to Diodorus, Jupiter afterwards gave them a bronze or golden-bronze colour ; that is, he gave them the colour of the noblest metal. Ovid applies a somewhat similar myth to Bacchus*. Whatever value these myths may possess as historical docu- ments, the customs founded upon them and continued for cen- turies and perhaps thousands of years, and the representations (such as sculptures and coms) which have come down to us, may be taken as evidence of them. Thus we have, in historical times, the Nephalia, in which honey was offered as one of the costliest sacrifices; and figures of the Bee occur upon the coins of several Greek cities, and, amongst others, upon those of the Island of Ceos. From Homer we learn that the Bee, by its production of honey, was closely connected with daily life from a period of high antiquity; and, from the fact that Homer enters into such full details upon everything which appears somewhat out of the ordinary way, we may be sure that he would not have referred to honey so briefly as he does+, if both it and the insect producing it had not been of every-day occurrence, but intro- duced shortly before his time. Against such an introduction, which could only have taken place from Asia Minor or Leypt, we have also Cicero’s statement that, in the time of Xerxes, the Attic honey of Mount Hymettus was celebrated even in Asia; and Xenophon’s narrative { of the poisoning of his soldiers by * Fasti, lib. ii. vv. 739-744. T Sce Iliad, xi. v. 630, {~ Anabasis, lib. iv. cap. 8. 274 Dr. A. Gersticker on the Geographical Distribution honey “at Trebizond, where the people also had many bee- hives,” seems to show that the Greek general was astonished at finding Bees kept by the barbarians. The antiquity of the culture of the Bee amongst the Greeks is shown not only by the laws of Solon, but also by an indirect reference in Hesiod, who, in verses 594, 595 of his Theogony, speaks of the “evil-doers,” the drones, which the bees nourish in their “ well-covered baskets,” thus showing most clearly his acquaintance with the culture of the Bee. Passing to Egypt, it is very remarkable that the Bee was either altogether omitted from the animal-worship of that coun- try, or, at least, played a subordinate part in it. The Bee is not mentioned in Prichard’s ‘ Analysis of the Egyptian Mythology.’ Nevertheless some antiquaries, amongst others, Keferstein*, are of opinion that in the name Apis, given to the sacred Bull of the Egyptians, the sacredness of the Bee is indirectly indicated. However this may be, we know from the Old Testament that honey was used in the heathen sacrifices of Egypt—a custom which probably arose from the notion that it was necessary to offer to the sacred Bull what came from the Bull, it being a wide-spread superstition amongst the ancients that Bees were produced from the decomposing carcases of oxen. The domes- tication of the Honey-Bee in Egypt appears, at any rate, to be as old as this sacrifice of honey; so that its introduction into that country appears less probable than into Greece. The em- ployment of the Nile by the Egyptians for obtaiming an abun- dant harvest, which extends, as regards corn, to the most ancient periods, must have led to a similar proceeding in connexion with the cultivation of Bees. De Maillet+ states, with regard to the latter, that Bees are very numerous in Hgypt, and that a custom introduced by the ancients of sowing saintfoin as soon as the waters of the Nile leave the land uncovered, and sending the Bees from all parts of Egypt into Upper Egypt at the commence- ment of the season of flowering of the saintfoin, is still prac- tised. The hives are packed in a pyramidal form upon boats specially adapted for their reception ; in these they are conveyed up the river to the part where the flowers are earliest, and then gradually brought down the stream, stopping every two or three miles. As Greék civilization is eenerally supposed to have been influenced by the older civilization of Egypt, we may suppose that the custom prevalent in Attica in the time of Solon, of sending the Bees into favourable localities, was derived from Egypt; and upon this we may even found a second assumption, namely, that the Bees themselves may have been transported * Oken’s Isis, 1837, pp. 866 ef seq. + Deser. de l’Egypte, ed, Le Mascrier: La Haye, 1740, p. 117. and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 275 from Kgypt into Greece in prehistoric times. These suppositions can neither be confirmed nor refuted absolutely ; but, indepen- dently of the high antiquity of the Bee in Greece, the difference between the Egyptian and Greek races of Bees is such that the one could hardly have been derived from the other. Among the Romans, according to Magerstedt*, the business of Bee-keeping occurs only at a comparatively late period; so that those who maintain the gradual transmission of the Honey- Bee from the south and east might here assume a transportal from Greece. This supposition may be supported by the fact that the Roman poets, such as Ovid and Virgil, in their myths place the origin of the Honey-Bee, not in Italy, but in Greece, which it might be concluded would not have been the case if the Bee had existed as long in Italy as in Greece. But such a conclusion is not admissible; for, just as the worship of the Romans accommodated itself to Greek views, and, indeed, based itself upon the Greek worship, so the myths and poetry of the Romans approached most closely to those of the Greeks. Nor does the late occurrence of Bee-keepig among the Romans furnish any support to the introduction of the Bee from Greece; for the constant wars of the Romans must have kept back all civilization even in Italy itself. It is, however, possible that the management of Bees, like many other occupations, may have been taught to the Romans by the Greeks, and perhaps prac- tised chiefly by the latter. If, as Magerstedt’s investigations prove, there was no Bee-keeping in Italy before the end of the second Punic war, and its considerable extension only dates from the time of Varro (B.c. 116), it seems very probable that it was introduced amongst the Romans by the Greeks, as the subjugation of Greece occurred between these two dates. In favour of this is Pliny’s statement (lib. xi. cap. 9) that two Greeks, Aristomachus Solensis and Philiscus Thasius, busied themselves for a long time with observations upon Bees, and that the former did nothing for fifty-eight years but manage Bees. The occurrence of Bees simultaneously in the South of Europe, Western Asia, and Egypt may not appear improbable to those who are inclined to ascribe to the Bee a southern origin. The comparatively slight diversity of climate in the above-mentioned countries certainly renders possible its original existence in all of them; and the opinions of authors differ essentially only on the one point, whether the Bee is indigenous to northern Jati- tudes, or has been acchimatized under them. This question can- not be historically decided with absolute certainty ; but it would * Die Bienenzucht der Volker des Alterthums, insbesondere der Romer: 1851. 276 Dr. A. Gerstiacker on the Geographical Distribution almost appear that the Bee existed in Northern Germany either originally or at least before any known direct intercourse of that region with Rome. Unfortunately, nothing is to be learnt upon this subject from Ceesar or Tacitus ; but honey is mentioned by Diodorus Siculus*, a contemporary of Cesar and Augustus, as being employed among the Gauls in the preparation of a beverage. Shortly after the time of Diodorus, we find in Pliny statements which, as they indicate with some degree of certainty the existence of wild Bees in Germany, are of more consequence in the present investigation. Pliny mentions+ a swarm of Bees which settled in the camp of Drusus just before the successful battle near Arbalo ; and in another place {, when speaking of the goodness of honey from different districts, he describes a remarkably large honeycomb from Germany, which was 8 feet in length. That the Bees producing this swarm and honeycomb could have been introduced by the Romans is negatived by the shortness of the time elapsed since their access to Germany, and still more by the habits of the Romans themselves ; nor is any such introduction cf Bees mentioned by Pliny, whilst his statements and those of Diodorus involuntarily show that the Romans, on their first acquaintance with Gaul and Germany, found the Bee already there. From the statements of Pytheas, quoted by Strabo$, indeed, it would appear that honey was known in Northern Germany (Thule) at a much earlier period, namely, in the time of Alexander the Great (B.c. 800). The position of Thule is doubtful ; but Pytheas probably derived his information from merchants of Marseilles, who visited the shores of the Baltic in search of amber. The introduction of the Bee into these northern regions by voyagers, whether Phoenician or Massilian, although not impossible, is very improbable, from the character of those people and the difficulty of transport. Hence, weighing all the historical evidence, it seems more probable that the Bee is indigenous in Germany than that it has been intro- duced by civilization ; and this view is supported by a still more important circumstance, namely, the difference of our northern race of Bees from those of the southern and south-eastern parts of Europe and the bordering parts of Asia and Africa. Since the introduction of the Italian Bee into Germany, it has been sufficiently proved that, when it does not mix with the dark- coloured northern Bees, it remains perfectly constant in its cha- racters: consequently it would be quite impossible that, even after the lapse of many years, the unicolorous northern Bee should have been developed from the variegated Italian form. * Bibliothecz Historicee lib. v. cap. 26. + Lib. xi. cap. 18. t Lib. xi. cap. 14. § Rerum Geographicarum lib. iv. § 5. and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 277 The necessity of such a development cannot be denied if the Bee was introduced, in accordance with the spread of civilization, into Germany from Italy. It is true that the dark- coloured German form of Bee occurs in some parts of Italy, especially on the east coast of central Italy opposite to Dalmatia; but as these Bees are far less widely distributed in Italy, and even in ancient times were much less valued than the variegated Bees, and as the latter, being diffused over Liguria and Lombardy, would have been most likely to be transported into Germany, there seems to be the very smallest amount of probability that the dark variety which occurs only sporadically in Italy should have been selected for transmission. The remarkable circumstance that, before the introduction of the variegated Italian race into North Germany, the two races were in contact in the region of the Alps, may furnish the best proof against the derivation of the dark from the light variety. Almost every- where in Southern Europe, the Bees either (as in the south of Spain) exhibit a nearly complete agreement in colour with the German form or (as in Dalmatia, Greece, and Asia Minor) the most gradual transitions from the German to the Italian race ; on the other hand, exactly where a transference might most readily be supposed, the differences of colour are most distinctly pre- served. Hence the introduction of the Bee into Germany might rather be supposed to have taken place from Greece or the south of Spain than from Italy; but we have no proof of any trattic between those countries m ancient times. Amongst the reasons which might be adduced in favour of the opinion that the Bee is not indigenous in Northern Europe, but introduced from the south, the first to be noticed is the great power of adaptation to external circumstances exhibited by the Honey-Bee where it is known to have been introduced, as in America, which renders the possibility of its southern origin and northern acclimatization indisputable ; and had the Bee confined itself within the limits of the warmer parts of America, this would have been evidence in favour of that view. But, from the state- ments of Barton, Josselyn, and others, it appears that the parts of America which have proved most favourable to the spread of the Bee, and in which it has even become wild, are those under the same isothermal lines as Northern Europe (Germany and Sweden), namely, the central and northern States, up to 47° N,. lat., showing that it cannot be regarded as peculiarly a native of the south. As a second reason for the southern origin of our Bees, it may be said that, in our northern regions, they are rarely, and in many places never, met with in a wild state, whilst this is com- monly the case in Southern Europe and also in Asia and Africa. 278 Dr. A. Gerstiacker on the Geographical Distribution This argument would be of force if our northern countries were still m the same condition of cultivation as the more southern parts of the Continent ; and we know from the Roman authors that, in ancient times, wild Bees occurred in the forests of Ger- many. As late as the year 1783, according to Krinitz*, the pursuit of the wild Bees was still followed in Neumark, Pome- rania, Prussia, Lithuania, Courland, Livonia, Poland, &c., evi- dently because favourable localities still existed in those coun- tries. If it be urged that, notwithstanding the change produced by cultivation, the Bees, if really indigenous to the north, might still easily, like the Humble Bees and Wasps, find a sufficiency of suitable localities for their hives, as well as of nourishment, it may be replied, in the first place, that they do become wild, although not frequently, under favourable circumstances ; and in the second, that they are with us far more completely domes- ticated than in southern regions. Hence there seems to be no evidence, either historical or from the present distribution of the varieties of Bees in the temperate parts of Europe, in favour of their introduction into the latter from warmer regions. The author next proceeds to the investigation of the geogra- phical distribution of the Honey-Bee beyond the boundaries of Europe. From the want of special knowledge on the part of travellers, it is often impossible to determine from their writings whether, in mentioning Bees, our Honey-Bee is imtended ; so that an examination of specimens frequently becomes necessary. It appears that our Honey-Bee does not occur, or, at least, has not been discovered as yet, in India and the Sunda Islands, but that over the whole of the rest of Asia, from the coast of Asia Minor to China, no other species except the Apis mellifica is found. The Honey-Bees mentioned in books of travels in India, Ceylon, &c., belong to species differing from the European Bee. In Africa, on the contrary, Apis mellifica occurs in all parts, but no other species which can be confounded with it; a few small black species of Melipona from the Guinea coast, which also collect honey, differ so much from our Bee, both in size and colour, that an uninformed traveller would hardly regard them as Bees at all. For the full elucidation of the geographical distribution of the Honey-Bee in Asia the materials are but scanty. According to Loew’s personal observations, the Bee is everywhere domesti- cated, and at the same time very frequently found wild in trees, on the islands and continent of Asia Minor. Hight workers col- lected by him in Rhodes, and one from Ephesus, exhibit various * Oekonomische Encyklopidie, 4. Theil, p. 418. and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 279 colorations, directly uniting our northern Bee with the Italian race, and partly even show (by the pale scutellum) a tendency towards the Egyptian race. Of two specimens collected by Thirk, near Brussa in Asia Minor, one is dark-coloured and ap- proaches the Greek form; the other, again, which is consider- ably smaller and lighter in colour, resembles the Egyptian ; and it is evidently to Bees resembling this that the statement of Aristotle (Hist. Anim. v. 19) refers: “In Pontus there are very light-coloured Bees, which make honey twice in the month.” This statement is repeated in nearly the same words by Pliny (Hist. Nat. xi. cap. 19). With the last-mentioned specimen, one collected by Pallas in the Caucasus also agrees. The occurrence of the Honey-Bee in Arabia and Syria is proved by five specimens collected in Syria and one in Arabia Felix by Ehrenberg ; the latter agrees exactly with the Egyptian form ; and the others approach it very nearly, only differmg in being a little larger. The Bee described by Brun (Bienenzeitung, 1858, p. 38) as occurring domesticated in Circassia and Persia is probably identical with ours, although, from want of speci- mens, this cannot be stated with certainty, as the light-coloured race of Bees occurs under a corresponding degree of latitude, but much further to the east, namely on the Himalaya; this is proved by a specimen taken there by Hoffmeister, which agrees in all essential characters with those from Syria. Lastly, the extension of the Honey-Bee to the coasts of the Pacific is proved by a specimen from China, which cannot be distinguished from the Egyptian form except by the dark colour of all the hair on the vertex. This is the Apis cerana, Fabr. With regard to the northern extension of the Honey-Bee in Asia, the author cites an oral statement of Ehrenberg’s, that, during his journey through Siberia, he found Bees kept in hives near Riddersk, in the Altai Mountains, lat. 51° N., long. 86° E. The northern limit is still to be ascertained : it seems probable that the Bee does not exist in the high northern latitudes of Siberia, as it is not mentioned in Erichson’s catalogue of the Hymenoptera collected by Middendorf on the Boganida*. Admitting the difficulty of determining on historical grounds whether the Honey-Bee is indigenous in those parts of Asia where it is found, or whether it has been introduced from the west, the author indicates that the forms of Bees there oc- curring do not, at least, contradict the notion that they may have been artificially dispersed. With the exception of Asia Minor, where the Bees are evidently of a mixed race, we find, over an extent of more than five thousand miles from west to * Reise in den dussersten Norden und Osten Sibiriens, Zoologie, i. pp: 60 et seq. 280 Dr. A. Gerstiicker on the Geographical Distribution east, only one and the same form of Bee, showing in particular places only extremely slight and probably accidental variations, and resembling the Egyptian form so closely that it may without difficulty be regarded as originating therefrom. Nevertheless this resemblance does not necessarily indicate genealogical affi- nity, as many other European insects (and, indeed, many Mam- malia and birds) occur with a remarkably wide geographical range in Asia. In Africa very different conditions prevail with regard to the races of Bees. Some districts lymg under nearly the same lati- tudes exhibit very different forms; whilst, on the other hand, different varieties as to colour occur mtermixed in the same lo- ealities. Thus in Algiers and Tangier, situated only about three hundred miles to the north of Egypt, there occurs a Bee perfectly identical in colour, hair, and size with that inhabiting North Germany; whilst in Egypt the form which is most distinguished from all others (Apis fasciata, Latr.) by its smaller size and light colour occurs, and apparently remains very con- stant in its characters. A form agreeing with the Hgyptian in size and body-colouring, but differing in its darker hair, appears to be spread over the greater part of Central and Southern Africa, extending on the east coast from Abyssinia, through Mozambique and Caffraria, to the Cape of Good Hope, and oc- curring also on the west coast at the Senegal (Apis Adansonii, Lat.). It is very remarkable that at the Cape, together with this variegated form, all transitions to a nearly uniform dark one occur: the latter differ from the North German Bees only in smaller size—a peculiarity appertaining more or less to all the African Bees, with the exception of the Algerian. This uniformly dark form also occurs in Guinea together with a variety with light colour only on the anterior third of the abdo- men, described by Lepelletier as Apis nigritarum, and, lastly, in the Mauritius and Madagascar, where, according to Latreille, it is constant in its dark colour (Apis unicolor, Lat.). With regard to the diffusion of the Honey-Bee in Africa, the author cites the following statements from the writings of va- rious travellers. In Algiers, accordmg to Lucas*, the form agreeing with the northern one is everywhere abundantly dis- tributed ; it is kept in hives by the natives, and especially by the Kabyles. With respect to Egypt, the statement of De Maillet has been already quoted (p. 274) with regard to the sending the hives on boats along the Nile in search of a good store of nourishment. Niebuhr describes the proceedings of the Ngyp- tian bee-keepers in precisely similar terms ; whilst neither Ehren- berg nor Dr. Hartmann saw anything of the kind during their * Explor. Scient. de Algérie, Zool. i. p. 141. _ and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 281 travels in Egypt. The two latter agree in stating that in the countries situated to the south of Egypt, namely Nubia, Abys- sinia, Sennaar, and Dongola, the keeping of Bees is certainly not extensively carried on, but that the honey and wax are taken when wanted from the wild Bees which build everywhere in abundance in clefts of rocks and hollow trees. On the other hand, Barth* mentions that he repeatedly met at least with a wild-bee keeping in the districts of Africa traversed by him. The first passage, relating to the neighbourhood of Kussada (between 12° and 18° N. lat., long. 8° E.), runs as follows :— “Vast Adansonie rose on every side with their immense naked branches, and also gave evidence of the industry of the inha- bitants; for beehives, consisting of hollowed branches, were fixed in the summits of the Kuka. For bee-keeping this region appeared to be peculiarly adapted; for the pasture-ground, spreading far around, was adorned with sweet-smelling shrubs, which furnished nourishing food for the industrious Bees.” In the second passage, describing the Mussgu-lands lying south- west of. Lake Tchad, Barth mentions the same practice as pre- vailing in that district. Our information upon the occurrence of the Bee upon the west coast of Africa relates chiefly to Sene- gambia. Webb and Berthelot, indeed, mention the Honey-Bee as inhabiting the Canary Islands+; and as they call it Apis mellifica, without any further statement, ‘it may be concluded that it agrees with the northern variety. Of the light-coloured variety found in Senegambia, which he regarded as a distinct species, named Apis Adansonii, Latreille says :—“ Adanson found this insect on the Senegal, in the trunks of trees ;” and Adanson himself (Voyage au Sénégal) reports as follows upon it:—“In the neighbourhood of Podor, I fully expected, every day about noon, to be visited by one, two, or more swarms of Bees, which made their way into the cabin and compelled me to leave the ship. This occurred from October to December at Podor ; probably in these three months the Bees quit the old hives in order to construct new ones: hives are then found of great size. Once I saw the roof of a negro hut, measuring six- teen square feet, which was entirely covered more than four fingers thick with inhabited combs. This is, it seems to me, a sufficient proof of the incredible quantity of such insects in this country. They build everywhere, but chiefly in the hollow trunks of old trees. This year they had built three large hives in our dwelling at Podor—one between the window-shutter and * Reisen und Entdeckungen in Nord- und Central-Afrika, ii. p. 105, and iii. p. 214. + Hist. Nat. des iles Canaries, 11.2; Entom. pv, $4. Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser.8, Vol. xi. ay 282 Dr. A. Gerstiicker on the Honey-Bee. the window, and two upon the flat floors of small closets.” Adanson adds that the honey of these Bees is peculiar, being always fluid, and resembling a brown syrup. Olivier * gives, from the MS. notes of Geoffroy de Villeneuve, son of the author of the ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Insectes de Paris,’ the followmg account of the Bees of Senegambia. In descending from Guisguis, according to that traveller, numerous trees are seen bearing beehives, which are well made with straw, and have only a very small opening. The negroes of this dis- trict colleet the honey twice in the year. The first harvest is about the end of May, and is the richest ; the second takes place at the beginning of December. The occurrence of the Honey-Bee in the interior of South Africa is proved by Andersson and Livingstone. The former says t—“ Wild Bees very frequently build their nests in the gigantic edifices of the White Ants; in many years they are very numerous. The temper of these insects seems to be un- usually peaceable and patient; for I have never observed that the people, when robbing their nests, were stung by them. These nests are usually smoked first of all; but Ihave often convinced myself that the naked savages approach them without fear, and remove them without any precautions.” lLivingstone’s account} runs as follows :—* Bee-keeping is practised in Londa; bee- hives are there found set upon trees in the most solitary woods. We often met waggons with large pieces of wax weighing from 80 to 100 pounds, and in every village such were offered to us for sale; but here (namely, on the Zambesi, 16° S. lat.) we never saw even a single beehive; the Bees were met with every- where in natural cavities in the Mopané-trees. In many parts of the Batoka country, Bees exist in great abundance; and Sekeletu’s tribute was often paid in large vessels of honey. I also saw a little wax in Quillimane, which was brought by the natives of this district.” The latter place is situated in Mozambique, which has already been indicated by the author as inhabited by Bees, from some specimens obtained there by Peters§. At the Cape of Good Hope “our Honey-Bee” was observed by Frauenfeld (Verhandl. der Zool.-bot. Gesellsch. zu Wien, 1860, p. 85); and there is no doubt that it is this species which is referred to in the following statement of Lichtenstein’s, although he regards the Bee men- tioned by him as belonging to a distinct species. He says— * Enc. Méth., Insectes 1., art. Abeille, p. 49. + Lake N’Gami, or Explorations and Discoveries, &c., p. 132. * Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa, p. 614. § Peters, Naturwissenschaftliche Reise nach Mossambique, Zoologie, V., Insecten, p. 439, Dr. A. Giinther on some Species of Tree-Snakes. 288 “A peculiar species of Bee which inhabits these heights [near Lange Kloof] prepares the most beautiful honey from the flowers of the Brunia, and stores it in hollow trunks of trees and the clefts of the rocks. The honey is perfectly white ; and the waxen _ cells are so thin that during their collection they melt up with the honey, which may then be conveniently poured into a bottle. Its taste is so fine that I cannot imagine that of Hymettus to have been better. It is often collected and used instead of sugar by the colonists of Lange Kloof”*. Lastly, with regard to the dark Bee occurring in the eastern islands of Africa, namely Madagascar and the Mauritius, Latreille, who describes it as A. unicolor, speaks as follows +:—‘ The honey of this species has a greenish tinge when it is contained in the combs; its colour and excellence depend upon the diversity of the plants of those regions, and upon the temperature. The inhabitants of Mada- gascar have understood how to avail themselves of the industry of these insects; for we possess a memoir by M. dela Nux upon the form of the beehives which are in use there.” Lepelletier’s statement (Hist. Nat. Hyménoptéres, 1. p. 403), that this Bee has been introduced into the Mauritius, is contradicted by Grant’s assertion (Hist. of Mauritius, 1801, p. 67), that the Mauritian Bee, which produces very fine honey, is indigenous to the island. - [To be continued. ] XXXII.— On some Species of Tree-Snakes (Ahetulla). By Dr. Abert GUNTHER. A. The Subgeneric Division PuttotHamnus, A. Smith. Tue whole of Tropical Africa is inhabited by a group of Tree- Snakes which are distinguished by a habit which is not exces- sively slender ; by a normally shaped head; by smooth scales; by posterior longer teeth, not separated from the others by an in- terval, and not grooved; by a round pupil of the eye; and by a green coloration, almost always varied by the black skin be- tween the scales, and by white dots placed at the base of each scale. Species of this group have been named by Sir Andrew Smith Philothamnus, and three different kinds were distinguished by him—PA. semivariegatus, Ph. albovariatus, Ph. natalensis. There can be no doubt that the second of these species is iden- tical with Dendrophis Chenoniit, Reimhardt, or with Coluber irre- gularis, Leach, of which we have the typical specimens. At a later period, a similar Snake was described by Hallowell as Chlorophis heterodermus. * Reisen in siidlichen Afrika in den Jahren 1803 bis 1806, 1. Band, p. 355, + Annales du Muséum, vy. p. 168. vo 284 Dr. A. Ginther on some Species of Tree-Snakes. The species named were evidently most closely allied to one another, and from the descriptions and figures alone it was almost impossible to find out which of the differences were of a really specific value ; hence, although, in the ‘ Catalogue of Colubrine Snakes’ (p. 152), I could not hesitate to refer PA. al- bovariatus to its proper place as a synonym of A. irregularis, I withheld my opinion as to Ph. semivariegatus and Chlorophis heterodermus, of which I had seen no specimens, mistaking altogether the Ph. natalensis, which I have since recognized. M. A. Duméril was in a still more difficult position than myself when he published his paper, “ Reptiles et Poissons de VAfrique Occidentale” (Archiv. Mus. t. x.), having for exami- nation only the A. zrregularis in the collection of the Paris Museum. Therefore we can hardly be surprised to find that, in his opinion, the three species of Smith would be distinct from A. irregularis, whilst Chlorophis heterodermus would be only a synonym. In order to terminate this state of uncertainty, the attention of travellers and collectors has been directed to these Snakes ; and having brought together nearly 100 specimens, with the localities whence they were obtained well marked, I have come to the following conclusions :— 1. Coluber irregularis, Dendrophis Chenonii, and Philothamnus albovariatus ave synonyms of the same species, which is the most common of all. 2. Philothamnus semivariegatus, Ph. natalensis, and Chlo- rophis heterodermus are distinct species. 3. Ahetulla hoplogaster and A. heterolepidota are two new species. 4. All these species are distinguished from one another by at least two characters, which are constantly combined with each other; the number and shape of the temporal shields is subject to some variation, not only within the limits of the same species, but also on the two sides of the same individual. Synopsis of the Species. I. Ventral shields laterally keeled. A. Upper labiais nine, three entering the orbit. a. Anal bifid; ventral shields 164-177.... A. irregularis. b. Anal entire; ventral shields 150-157 .. A. heteroderma. c. Ventral shields 207; trunk with black cross-bands anteriorly...........00. A. semivariegata. B. Upper labials eight (seven). a. Two labials enter the orbit; ventral Sp RISAUGEy aes eceddocdu se ot A. natalensis. b. Three labials enter the orbit; ventral shields 187) (is'nt tee aoe s prernere A. heterolepidota. II. Ventral shields without a trace of lateral keels. Analubitidiens + eereveveeeeveteceeeeeeeerene A; hoplogaster. Dr. A. Giinther on some Species of Tree-Snakes. 285 Ahetulla irregularis. Coluber irregularis, Leach, in Bowdich, Ashantee, App. p. 494. Dendrophis Chenonii, Reinh., m Dansk. Vid. Selsk. Afh. x. 1843, p. 246, tab. 1. fig. 13, 14. Dendrophis (Philothamnus) albovariata, Smith, Illustr. Zool. South Afr., Rept. pl. 65, and pl. 64. fig. 3. Ventral shields with lateral keels ; upper labials nine, three of which enter the orbit; temporal shields generally 1+2; frequently one or two are broken up into two, or the two hinder ones are united ; in this case the temporal shields are generally not symmetrical on both sides. Anal bifid; ventral shields 164-167; subcaudals 108-126. Scales smooth, in fifteen rows, apparently with one apical groove. Teeth longest behind, in a continuous series. Green, skin between the scales black, each scale with a white spot on the basal half of its outer margin. Western coasts of Africa (Fantee, Gambia, MacCarthie Island) : Cape Colony. Two young specimens, which we refer to this species, were sent by Consul J. Petherick from Central Africa, 500 miles south of Chartoum. Ahetulla heteroderma. Chlorophis heterodermus, Hallowell, Proc. Ac. Nat. Se. Philad. 1857, p. 52; Cope, zbid. 1860, p. 559. Ventral shields with- lateral keels ; upper labials nine, three of which enter the orbit; temporal shields 2+2+42. Anal entire; ventral shields 150-157, subcaudals 83-92. Scales smooth, in fifteen rows, some with two apical grooves. ‘Teeth longest behind, in a continuous series. Green, skin between the scales black ; each scale with a white spot on the basal half of its outer margin. We have received several specimens of this Snake from the Gold-coast. Ahetulla semivariegata. Dendrophis (Philothamnus) semivariegata, Smith, Illustr. Zool. South Afr, pl. 59, 60, and pl. 64. fig. 1. Ventral shields with lateral keels; upper labials nine, three of which enter the orbit ; temporal shields in two rather irregular longitudinal series. Ventral shields 207 ; subcaudals 112. Scales smooth, in fifteen rows. Green anteriorly, yellowish posteriorly ; anterior part of the trunk with irregular, narrow, black trans- verse bars. Cape Colony (Bushman Flat), Ahetulla natalensis. Dendrophis (Philothamnus) natalensis, Smith, Ilustr. Zool. South Africa, pl. 64. Ventral shields with lateral keels; upper labials eight*, the * Eight specimens, examined by myself, have eight upper labials ; and 286 Dr. A.Ginther on some Species of Tree-Snakes. fourth and fifth entering the orbit ; temporal shields 2+2+42; two are sometimes united into one. Anal bifid; ventral shields 151-168 ; subcaudals 114-126. Scales smooth, in fifteen rows, without apical groove. Teeth longest behind, in a continuous series. Green, skin between the scales black, each scale with a white spot on the basal half of its outer margin. Port Natal, and probably Cape Colony. Ahetulla heterolepidota. Ventral shields with very faint lateral keels; upper labials seven or eight, the third, fourth, and fifth, or the fourth, fifth, and sixth, entering the orbit; one anteocular, two postoculars ; six of the lower labials are in contact with the chin-shields ; temporal shields 1+1. Ventral shields 187; anal bifid; sub- caudals 125. The scales are smooth, without groove, and with minute longitudinal striz (these striz are lost when the epi- dermis has gone off) ; they are arranged in fifteen series in the anterior half of the trunk, and in eleven in the posterior. The posterior maxillary teeth longest, in a subcontinuous series with the others. Head small; neck very slender; body and tail slender. Uniform greenish-olive. A single specimen, marked “ Africa,” has been purchased ; it’ is 26 inches long, the head measuring 3 in., the tail 84 in. Ahetulla hoplogaster. Ventral shields without any trace of lateral keels; upper labials eight, the fourth and fifth entering the orbit; one ante- ocular, two postoculars; six of the lower labials are in contact with the chin-shields ; temporal shields 1+1. Ventral shields 150-156; anal bifid; subcaudals 94-105. The scales are smooth, without groove, arranged in fifteen: series anteriorly, and in eleven posteriorly. The posterior maxillary teeth longest, in a continuous series with the others. Head rather small, body and tail moderately slender. Green, skin between the scales black, each scale with a white spot on the basal half of its outer margin. This Snake appears to be more common at Port Natal than A. natalensis. An adult specimen is 26 inches long, the head measuring 4 in., the tail 9 in. B. On a new South American Species of Ahztulla. Ahetulla nitida. Scales in fifteen rows, smooth, minutely striated, without this also is the number shown in the figure of the entire Snake contained in Sir A. Smith’s work. On the same plate, however, a separate drawing is given of the same specimen, showing nine upper labials: we cannot help thinking that this was an accidental variation of the normal number, that specimen having had eignt labials on one side, and nine on the other. Dr. G. C. Wallich on an undescribed Form of Amoeba. 287 apical groove. Head small, depressed, with the snout of mode- rate length, subtruncated in front ; rostral shield rather broader than high; loreal not quite twice as long as high; preorbital reaching to, or nearly reaching to, the vertical; two post- orbitals; nine upper labials, the fourth, fifth, and sixth of which enter the orbit; temporals 1+2+2; occipitals rounded, each with a larger rounded scale behind; six lower labials are in contact with the chin-shields. Eye rather large, with round pupil. Body very slender, compressed ; tail very long, angular. Ventral shields 165, angularly bent on each side, the central portion being not much broader than long; anal bifid; sub- caudals 153. The posterior maxillary tooth is the longest, not grooved, and is separated from the others by a short interspace. Above uniform metallic brownish-green, below greenish ; scales on the back narrowly edged with black ; one of the specimens has blackish dots on the crown of the head. No band either on the side of the head or of the body. This species would enter the subgenus Uromacer of Duméril and Bibron. The British Museum possesses two examples of this species, one from Demerara ; the origin of the other is not known. The latter is 82 inches long, the head measuring 7 lines, and the tail 133 inches. XXXIIT.—On an undescribed Indigenous Form of Amceba. By G. C. Watticu, M.D., F.L.S., &c. &c. [Plate VIL. ] THE occurrence of an undescribed variety of Amaba in the immediate vicinity of the metropolis is of interest both on its own account and from the indication it affords that the study of our indigenous Rhizopodal fauna is still unexhausted. The variety in question was recently obtained, in considerable abundance, from the ponds on Hampstead Heath; and inasmuch as every specimen examined by me has presented the very singular cha- racters to which I am now about to draw attention, there is every reason to believe that these are normal, although perhaps not permanent in their nature. According to the descriptions of the commoner forms—as, for example, A. princeps, A. diffluens, or A. radiosa*—it would ap- pear that the sarcode substance is uniformly differentiated into “ endosare” and “‘ectosare.” In other words, setting aside the elementary organs which may be said to be shadowed forth by the contractile vesicle, the nucleus, and the protoplasmic granular * It will, I think, eventually be found that all these are mere transitory phases of one and the same species. 288 Dr. G. C. Wallich on an undescribed bodies, neither the outer layer of sarcode, nor the more viscid mass within, is endowed with a more advanced degree of development at one point than at another. And, in addition to this, the creature possesses the power of moving with equal facility in every direction, by means of pseudopodia projected indiscriminately from any portion of its surface. In the variety under notice (see Plate VIIL.) this is not the case, inasmuch as one portion of the ectosare exhibits a structure differing permanently from the remainder—being densely studded with minute papille which, in the quiescent state of the creature, are of nearly uniform aspect and size, and cause the surface upon which they occur to resemble the villous structure of mucous membrane in outward appearance. When the animal moves, these papille or villi vary in length, and now and then several coalesce so as to form processes more nearly approaching the ordinary pseudopodial character, although still of minute proportions. The villous patch, which occupies probably from sith to Ayth of the entire supertficies, appears frequently to be employed as a prehensile organ, the creature bemg enabled through its agency to secure for itself a contimuous point @apput from which the rest of the body is pushed or flows onwards, almost invariably in an opposite direction to that in which the villous patch is itself situated. The true pseudopodia would seem never to be projected from this area; but should a retro- grade movement be about to take place, they are either thrown out from the adjacent portion of the ectosare, or the maim mass of the organism flows altogether in a backward course, the villous patch remaining fixed until it once more assumes its position at the posterior part of the advancing mass. So powerful is the prehensile power referred to, that some of the papillee at times become stretched beyond their endurance and are torn asunder ; minute shreds being left adherent to the foreign bodies in the neighbourhood. Should the animal be subjected to pressure between the slide and glass cover, the papillae may occasionally be seen to adhere to the polished sur- faces, some relaxing their hold and taking up a position in advance, whilst those described as being stretched till they detach or break asunder are, in turn, moved onwards until they once more secure an attachment for themselves. On the other hand, the pseudopodial processes and the rest of the ectosare generally seem to exercise no prehensile power. In the one case the marginal layer is broken up into a delicate villous coat, the hyaline transparency of which is destroyed and replaced by a pale cream-coloured opacity ; m the other it is perfectly hyaline, clearly defined, and unbroken. I have only in a very few instances been enabled to trace an influx of granu- Indigenous Form of Amoeba. 289 lar particles of endosare within such of the coalesced villi as, from their size, rendered observation practicable. As a general rule, the contractile vesicle and nucleus maintain a position close to the villous patch, even whilst the animal is moving—the former organ being in close proximity to it, and sometimes appearing to discharge itself, by the usual systolic action, at a spot within the villous surface. But now and then both nucleus and contractile vesicle move slowly round with the mass of circulating particles. The villous area, however, retains its position in relation to the rest of the body. In some specimens the contractile vesicle presents an appear- ance of the most delicate reticulation, resembling that described as occurring on the external surface of Actinophrys, and depending probably on a similar cause, namely, the occurrence of a number of minute vacuoles. The contractile vesicles occasionally sub- divide into several smaller cavities, as constantly happens in other forms ; and these either coalesce prior to collapse, or they collapse separately. But no sinuses of the kind described b Carter in Paramecium aurelia and other Infusoria are discernible. Vacuoles are frequent, and in some cases of suilicient size to contain large diatoms. The nucleus consists of a pale grey-coloured spherical mass of . granules, towards the centre of which may occasionally be de- tected a minute clear nucleolus. It is contained within a hya- line and somewhat elongated vesicular cavity, but never oc- cupies the entire area of the latter. Dilute alkaline and acid solutions cause the body at once to assume a more or less spherical shape, and the eranular contents to close up into a central mass, leaving a broad hyaline border around the entire surface, as described by Auerbach in Ameba bilimbosa. But these reagents fail to render apparent anything like the double outline, indicative of a definite membranous envelope, alluded to by that author. It is worthy of note, however, that, under imperfect adjustment of focus or want of due care in illumination, the semblance of a double outline can be evoked. Some of the specimens of the Hampstead Ameba are of extra- ordinary dimensions, the largest attaining a diameter of no less than 5th of an inch. The villi, in their quiescent state, seem to be about ;;4+,,th of an inch in average length. In a solitary example, the villous patch constituted a nearl circular brush-like tuft at the extremity of a cylindrical pedicle of hyaline sarcode; and at its centre was a minute vacuole- like space. I kept. my eye on this specimen for nearly a quarter of an hour without perceiving this structure alter in anywise,— the prehensile power of the villi seeming to be either suspended 290 Dr. G.C. Wallich on an undescribed Form of Amceba. or destroyed, And both brush-like tuft and pedicle being dragged behuyid the Ameba during the entire period. Unfor- tunately the’ drying-up of the water on the slide put a stop to my observation at this point. With regard to the specific value of the characters of this form, J think it unadvisable at present to express a decided opinion. Several circumstances render it probable that it may be a transient phase in the life-history of the common Ameba. Amongst the principal of these I may mention having detected traces of a like villous structure in specimens obtained , from other localities. But, whether the Hampstead form even- tually proves to be a distinct permanent type or otherwise, the characters referred to are of high interest as evincing a nearer approach, than any heretofore noted amongst the Rhizopods, to the structure of the ciliary legs of certain Infusoria, as, for example, of Plesconia or Kerona*. They also tend to confirm the view put forward by MM. Claparede and Lachmann with reference to the “ reptant”’ nature of the motion of Ameba, and the consequent suggestion of Dr. Carpenter regarding the pro- bable differentiation of the ectosare into a ventral and dorsal portion. According to present experience, “ reptation”’ takes place in forms endowed with this more highly developed state of a portion of the ectosarc, whilst the motion is of a simple “rolling” or flowing kind in those forms in which the ectosare is uniformly developed at all points. The Hampstead form corresponds in every important parti- cular with one found by me in Lower Bengal in 1856, in which the villous portion of the ectosarc constitutes a: means of permanent attachment to foreign bodies such as Confervee or the like; and the animal appears to be normally sessile in its habitst. In conclusion, I may mention that a week has passed since the supply of these Amabe was obtained at Hampstead, and that they retain the characters above described in an unim- paired degree to the hour at which I write. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII. [Figures 1 to 5 magnified about 400 diameters. | Fig. 1. Ameba in quiescent or nearly quiescent state: a, villous patch ; n, nucleus; c, contractile vesicle ; v, vacuoles {. * See Carter’s observations on these forms in the ‘ Annals and Maga- zine of Natural History, 3rd series, vol. ii. p. 241 et seq. + This variety is figured in Part I. of my ‘North Atlantic Sea-Bed,’ pl. 4. figs. 13 & 14. { Each letter applies to the same portions of the structure in the several figures. The arrows indicate the direction in which the animal is supposed to be advancing. Bibliographical Notices. 291 Fig. 2. Showing the appearance of the Ameba when moving slowly, the villi being employed as organs of prehension. Fig. 3. The same, when advancing energetically, the villous patch being aggregated into a subspherical tuft, and the contractile vesicle and nucleus now sharing in the general protoplasmic circulation. Fig. 4. A specimen with two large Pinnularie in its interior, the upper of the two frustules being enclosed within a large vacuole. Fig. 5. A specimen in which the villous patch has assumed a brush-like shape, and is supported on an elongated pedicle of sarcode ; 5a, an enlarged view of this tuft and its supporting pedicle. Fig. 6. Enlarged view of granular nucleus, nucleolus, and the nuclear vesicle or cavity. Fig. 7. Contractile vesicle, showing appearance of reticulation, BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. The Land and Freshwater Mollusks indigenous to, or naturalized in, the British Isles. By Lovet Reeve, F.L.S. Reeve & Co., 1863. On y a few months have elapsed since we had occasion to notice the publication of the first volume of a new work by Mr. Jeffreys, on British Conchology, which treats of the Inland Mollusca ; and already another handbook on the same subject lies upon our table. The valuable illustrated works on ‘Conchology’ by Mr. Reeve are well known, and more especially his splendid ‘ Conchologia Iconica;’ but, until we read the-announcement of the intended publication of the work which we are about to review, we were not aware that the author had paid any special attention to the Mollusca of our Islands. We cannot therefore expect to find in this volume the same mass of interesting detail which long years of patient and special study have enabled Mr. Jeffreys to condense in the pages of ‘ British Concho- logy.’. On the other hand, however, ‘The Land and Freshwater Mollusks’ is more fully illustrated, and the woodcuts of all the species offer an attraction which Mr. Jeffreys’s volume does not possess. The animals are engraved by Mr. O. Jewett, some from original drawings, while others are reproductions of previously published figures. The original drawings from the life, which may be recog- nized by Mr. Jewett’s autograph, are admirable. We were not pre- viously acquainted with this artist’s name as a natural-history draughtsman ; but such life-like and characteristic figures as those of Limar Sowerbyi, flavus, and cinereus, Helix aspersa, Planorbis corneus, Paludina contecta, Dreissena polymorpha, Anodonta cygnea, and Unio tumidus raise him to a high position among delineators of Mollusca. Unfortunately the same praise cannot be bestowed on Mr. Sowerby’s figures of the shells ; for while the woodcuts of the larger species are generally good, no trouble appears to have been bestowed upon the smaller and closely allied species ; and thus in those very instances where accurate illustrations were most desirable and would have been of most value, we meet with en- gravings which are not only worthless, but. caleulated to mislead. 292 Bibliographical Notices. We may mention, as examples of this carelessness, all the Zonite, but especially erystallinus, Helia pulchella, rupestris, pygmea, ro- tundata, &ce. It is with much regret that we notice the numerous changes in nomenclature which Mr. Reeve seeks to introduce, changes in almost every instance uncalled for, in many cases actually wrong. Obsolete names, originally appended to descriptions of Mollusca so loosely and inaccurately defined as to apply with equal truth to many species, are here dragged forward from their merited oblivion, and made to supersede names which have been familiar to European conchologists for the last half-century. It is impossible to criticise all the changes thus made ; but let us examine those that are introduced intoa single genus: let it be Planorbis. Planorbis imbricatus is changed to Planorbis crista, on the authority of the following synonymy :— Nautilus crista, Linneeus (1758), Syst. Nat. 10th edit. p. 709. Turbo nautileus, Linneus (1767), Syst. Nat. 12th edit. p. 1241. _ And the author remarks—‘ It may be observed on reference to the synonymy, that Linneeus made two species of this.” But Linnzeus did not make two species out of Planorbis nautileus. The facts are - that he described Nautilus crista in the tenth edition of the ‘Systema Naturee ;’ and in the twelfth edition changed the name of the species to Turbo nautileus, and reterred to his Nautilus crista of the tenth edition as a synonym. We can only account for Mr. Reeve’s mistake by supposing that he has never consulted the twelfth edition—a sup- position which is confirmed by the fact that throughout his volume the tenth edition is almost invariably referred to. It is the twelfth, however, which embodies the most matured views of the great natu- ralist, and has therefore always been justly held to be the standard edition of his works ; and it is for this reason that the name zautileus has universally been adopted. Few of Linnzus’s species are identi- fied moreover with the same degree of certainty as this little shell ; for specimens are still to be seen in the Linnean cabinet enclosed in a small paper envelope on which the name is written at full length. Planorbis marginatus (Drap.) is changed to P. complanatus (L.). Yet no one, from Linnzeus’s time to our own, has been able to say to what species the brief description of Helix complanata was intended to apply. Miiller, in his description of Planorbis umbilicatus (P. marginatus, Drap.), wrote in 1773 (only six years after the publi- cation of ‘Syst. Nat.’ 12th edit.), ‘Satis diu heesito an hic Pla- norbis Linnei, an complanatus auctorum dicatur, et descriptiones me dubium adhuce relinquunt ; quid quod, hune et Planorbem confu- disse videntur, et sequens forte erit eorum complanatus. In tantis difficultatibus has tricas solvendi, ipso,Linnzeo litteris frustra consulto. Planorbem et complanatam, nomina generi toti propria, oblivioni dandos, descriptiones et nomina aptiora magisque significantia effin- genda reor.’’ And again, in the description of Planorbis nitidus, the same author observes, ‘‘ An H. complanata Linneei, haud liquet.”’ Mr. Hanley, in his ‘Ipsa Linnei Conchylia,’ expresses his belief Bibliographical Notices. 293 that Linneeus included both Planorbis carinatus and marginatus under the name Helix planorbis, and that Helix complanatus is synonymous with Planorbis nitidus, Miller. ‘‘ Deorsum carinata,’”’ he observes, “is equally applicable to nitidus”’ as to marginatus ; “whilst ‘supra convexa—subdiaphana—apertura semicordata’ (Fauna Suecica) is much more critically correct when affirmed of that little shell than of its larger rival; and as ‘ parva admodum’ is applied to it in the ‘ Fauna Suecica,’ in the contrast of its features with those of the preceding species, I feel no hesitation in asserting the identity of nitidus with the Linneean Helix.” Surely Miller was right, when he said of such names (impossible to be identified with the species they were intended to represent), “ oblivioni dandos reor.” The chief confusion, however, which Mr. Reeve introduces into the genus Planorbis is by his adoption of the views of Moquin- Tandon respecting the Planorbis nitidus of Miller. That name is here applied to Planorbis (Segmentina) lineata (Walker) ; while the shell which has hitherto been known to British conchologists as Pla- norbis nitidus is called P. fontanus (Lightfoot). Now, on what grounds is this change made? Miiller’s description of the species in his ‘ Historia Vermium’ is very full, and agrees most accurately with P. fontanus until we reach, at the end, this sentence, ‘* Ultra quin- quaginta examini subjeci, quorum quidam strigis duabus ligamen- torum instar in superna parte extimee spire, forte ex restauratione fractze testee, notantur.’”? Now what does this sentence prove, but that the majority of the shells he examined were Planorbis fontanus ? to which species therefore his name should be applied. It is quite possible, though far from certain, that the author confused the two species, and that “quidam strigis duabus ligamentorum instar” has reference to specimens of P. lineatus; but such specimens were de- scribed as the variety, while P. fontanus is clearly the type of the species. And this becomes more evident when we find all allusion to the variety omitted in the subsequently published ‘ Zoologie Danicee Prodromus,’ the description in which work applies only to ’ the type. Mr. Reeve describes 128 species. His estimate of our land and freshwater Mollusca differs from that of Forbes and Hanley in the omission of Helix aperta, and the addition of Testacella Mauger, Vertigo Moulinsiana, Conovulus Myosotis, Cyclas pisidioides and C. ovalis, And as compared with the species described in Jeffreys’s work, we find Anodonta anatina and Pisidium roseum omitted, and Testacella Maugei, Pisidium obtusale, Casertanum (cinereum) and Henslowianum, and Cyclas pisidioides added. Moreover Jeffreys considers that Hydrobia ventrosa has a claim to be inserted as a freshwater shell. But Reeve denies the species a place; while, on the other hand, he admits the Conovuli and Assiminia Grayana, which are rejected by the former author. Mr. Reeve gives a map, in which, by a deeper or lighter tint of colour, it is intended to show the boundary of the Caucasian province of Mollusca, over which the British species range, and to indicate the part in which the most characteristic of the genera and species 294, Bibliographical Notices. congregate. Two tables also show the distribution, in Great Britain and abroad, of the several genera and species ; and a short chapter on the “‘ Distribution and Origin of Species”’ concludes the volume. Geological Observations in South Australia ; principally in the Dis- trict south-east of Adelaide. By the Rev. Jutian EpMuND Woops, F.G.S., &. 8vo. Longman, 1862. ‘«‘ Every country has its history, not alone the history of what its inhabitants said and did, nor how its people lived, conspired, quarrelled, fought, and died, but a history which stretches further back and is buried in more remote antiquity. If it had not been so, Australia might indeed be counted the youngest as well as the least interesting of continents. She has had no people that could de- scribe her vicissitudes, and there are no monuments left to chronicle her changes; but yet her history is written in an imperishable record. Of old, when the first explorers came upon the coast of a newly disco- vered territory, the rocks, the trees, the soil, and the verdure only spoke to them of one thing, namely, of fertility, or richness, or special adapta- tion to the wants of man. But now the very coast-line tells much more. Not only is the fertility or barrenness of the place itself told by the rocks, but the explorer is able to guess how far these appearances extend, and whether the country is likely to be fitted for human requirements in the present state of civilization.” These are our author’s preliminary observations in his Chapter IT. ; and he follows them up, Istly, by pointing out the evidences of former and different physical conditions presented by the existing geographical features of Australia generally; 2ndly, by giving in detail an account of the limestone-beds that form the plains of a great part of Southern Australia, and perhaps of Tasmania, describing their probable origin in a sea occupied by reefs of Bryozoa, as some seas now are by corals ; 3rdly, by treating of the extinct voleanos of Mount Gambier and its vicinity, and of their individual and general history ; Athly, by describing the caverns in the limestone of the district under notice, and the undergound drainage in connexion therewith. The conclusions that the author draws from his observations on the geology of the colony are as follows :— “J. There has been in Australia an immense area of subsidence during the Pliocene period, at a time when Rome, parts of Italy, Vienna, and parts of Austria, Piedmont, and Asia Minor were under the sea. II. This subsidence was accompanied by a [moss-] coral formation, very similar to the subsiding area of the Pacific at the present time ; and although all the appearances are those of a reef of true zoophyte corals, the predominent fossil is a massive Cellepora, while true corals are rare. III. This gives rise to the suspicion that Bryozoa may build reefs and atolls, as well as true Corals. IV. That the sub- sidence ceased; and probably about that time volcanic disturbance commenced, and gave rise to submarine craters. V. That, after the cooling of the lava from these submarine craters, a deposit of small fragments of shells was thrown down from an ocean-current. VI. Bibhographical Notices. 295 That this beeame hardened into stone, and was then upheaved from the sea; during which process large portions of it became washed away. VII. That the latter part of the upheaval was separated by a long lapse of time from the subsidence, because the latter strata show some difference in their fauna. VIII. That while upheaval was going on, until very recently, extensive volcanic disturbance took place, giving rise to craters which are now all extinct. IX. That the up- heaved [Bryozoan] rock, when decomposed, has given rise to a very different sort of soil, of a sandy character, which causes large tracts of arid, useless country in this part of Australia. X. That the same rock, being of a loose texture, easily allowed water to percolate through, forming caves and underground passages, besides honey- combing the ground in all directions. XI. That, while these opera- tions proceeded, the animal life was of a slightly different character from what is found in the same locality now, though probably the land-animals were not specially different from individuals in other parts of the Australian continent.” Lastly, that “‘ these numerous changes seem to have taken place without any vast convulsion of nature, or phenomena different from what happen in the world now.” In discussing the many geological and natural-history points of interest that occur in his work, the author, himself an amateur, often freely explains the elementary basis of his several lines of argument, quoting Lyell, Darwin, Jukes, and others, for the information of his readers as to geological systems, the theories of coral-formations, the nature of coral-reefs, &c.; and his book, thus popularly written, is rendered more readable for the general public than if written with strict technicality ; but at the same time we miss a requisite scientific accuracy, especially as to zoological nomenclature and classification, without which no geological work can have a high scientific value,— though certainly a hard-working amateur in so distant and isolated a position as Penola must surely be excused for this short-coming. Some observations by Mr. Woods on extensive recent accumula- tions of minute organisms, such as Cypride, Diatomacee, and Chare, and of mammalian bones and of lake-shells in South Australia, are to be found inChapter III., and must prove highly suggestive to geologists. The notes on the bone-breccia and accumulations of bones in caves, in Chapter XI., will also attract attention. The author’s explanation of the origin of the limestone “ Biscuits ”’ of the ** Honeysuckle flats ” (pp. 43-45) is very ingenious ; and his other numerous observations on the physical features of the district, which have been “the occupa- tion of many a passing hour in the bush, where amusements are otherwise few,” are full of interest and value. Tn his Introductory Chapter and elsewhere, the author has taken care to point out what others have already done in explaining the geo- logical features of Southern Australia; but he has overlooked the little work ‘On the Geology and Mineralogy of South Australia,’ by Mr. T. Burr, published at Adelaide in 1846. 296 Bibliographical Notices. Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, Vol. xxiv. Part 1. 1863. THanks to the exertions of its late excellent President (Prof. T. Bell) and his successor (Mr. G. Bentham), the Linnean Society ap- pears quite restored to its pristine activity. In addition to the usual annual publication of the quarto ‘Transactions’ in the autumn of 1862, and the ordinary quarterly ‘ Journal,’ it has lately issued an- other part of the ‘Transactions,’ in order to bring as quickly as possible to the knowledge of botanists the exceedingly valuable paper by Dr. Joseph D. Hooker “On Welwitschia, a new Genus of Gnetaceee.” This paper occupies the whole of the part, extends to 48 pages, and is illustrated by 14 plates. We think this proceeding in the highest degree creditable to the Society. When such a paper is brought before it, it does well to deviate from its usual course. The present essay has attracted the utmost attention from botanists. Probably nothing of equal botanical interest has appeared since the publication of Robert Brown’s papers on Rafflesia, in the thirteenth and nineteenth volumes of the same ‘ Transactions.’ The first notice of Welwitschia was sent to Sir W. J. Hooker by Dr. Fred. Welwitsch, its discoverer, in a letter from Loanda in South Africa, dated Aug. 16, 1860, which was soon followed by the dis- patch of specimens to Kew. ‘This singular plant never possesses more than the same two leaves, although it seems to be very long- lived. These leaves appear to be the cotyledons, which, instead of fading, as is usual, and giving place to ordinary leaves, are perma- nent, and attain to a length of six feet and a breadth of two. They are hard and leathery, and in the course of time split into longitu- dinal strips. They spring from a groove situated between the crown and stock of the plant, and lie flat, or nearly so, upon the ground. This is the only example of a ‘perennial flowering plant which at no period has other vegetative organs than those proper to the embryo itself, the main axis being represented by the radicle, which becomes a gigantic caulicle, and developes a root from its base and inflorescences from its plumulary end, and the leaves being the two cotyledons in a very highly developed and specialized condition.” The venation of the leaves is ‘ parallel and free, like that of Mono- cotyledons in general appearance; but there is a total absence of lateral vascular communications between the bundles,” as in many Coniferze. Its male flowers are structurally hermaphrodite, but their naked ovule is always abortive. it seems therefore probable that the plant is truly dicecious. Dr. Hooker considers its female flowers as gymno- spermous, but that the plant is rather intermediate in character between gymnospermous and angiospermous plants. We feel sure that many of our botanical readers will hasten to peruse this remarkable essay, which is a permanent monument of the high attainments of its author, such as it seldom can fall to the lot of even a Hooker to obtain. Royal Society. 297 PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ROYAL SOCIETY. Feb. 5, 1863.—Major-General Sabine, President, in the Chair. “On the Embryogeny of Comatula rosacea (Linck).” By Prof. Wyville Thomson, LL.D., F.R.S.E. &c. After briefly abstracting Dr. W. Busch’s description of the early stages in the growth of the young of Comatula, the author details his own observations, carried on during the last four years, on the development and subsequent changes of the larva. After complete segmentation of the yelk, a more consistent nucleus appears within the mulberry mass still contained within the vitelline membrane. The external more transparent flocculent portion of the yelk liquefies and is absorbed into this nucleus, which gradually assumes the form of the embryo larva, a granular cylinder contracted at either end and girded with four transverse bands of cilia. This cylinder increases in size till it nearly fills the vitelline sac, gradually increasing in transparency, and ultimately consisting of delicately vacuolated sar- code, the external surface transparent and studded with pyriform oil-cells, the inner portion semifluid and slightly granular. The vitelline membrane now gives way, and, usually shortly after the escape of the larva into the water, the third ciliated band from the anterior extremity arches forwards at one point ; and in the space thus left between it and the fourth band, a large pyriform depression indi- cates the position of the larval mouth. At the same time a small round aperture, merely separated from the posterior margin of the mouth by the last ciliated band, becomes connected with the mouth by a short loop-like canal passing under the band, and fulfils the function of an excreting orifice. A tuft of long cilia, which have a peculiar undulatory motion, is developed at the posterior extremity of the body. The larva now increases rapidly in size, assuming some- what the form of a kidney bean, the mouth answering in position to the Ailum. It swims freely in the water, with a swinging semi- rei. motion, by means of its ciliated bands and posterior tuft of cilia. Shortly after the larva has attained its definite independent form, ten minute calcareous spicula make their appearance, imbedded within the external sarcode-layer of the expanded anterior portion of the larva. The ten spicula are arranged in two transverse rings of five, the spicula of the anterior row symmetrically superposed on those of the posterior. By the extension of calcareous network, these spi- cula rapidly expand into ten plates, which at length form a trellis enclosing a dodecahedral space, open above and below, within the anterior portion of the zooid. Simultaneously with the appearance of these plates, a series of from seven to ten calcareous rings form a chain passing from the base of the posterior row of plates backwards, curving slightly to the left of the larval mouth, and ending by abut- ting against the centre of a large cribriform plate, which is rapidly 20 Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xi. 298 Royal Society. developed close to the posterior extremity of the larva. Delicate sheaves of anastomosing calcareous trabecule shortly arise within these rings, and the series declares itself as the jointed stem of the pentacrinoid stage, the basal and first interradial plates of the calyx being represented by the already formed casket of calcareous network. The skeleton of the Crinoid is thus completely mapped out within the body of the larva, while the latter still retains its independent form and special organs. Within the plates of the calyx of the nascent Crinoid two hemi- spherical or reniform masses may now be detected,—one superior, of a yellowish, subsequently of a chocolate colour; the other inferior, colourless and transparent. The lower hemisphere indicates the permanent alimentary canal of the Crinoid, with its glandular follicle ; the upper mass originates the central ring of the ambulacral system, with its czeca passing to the arms. The body of the Crinoid is, how- ever, at this stage entirely closed in by a dome of sarcode, forming the anterior extremity of thelarva. After swimming about freely for atime averaging from eight hours to a week, and increasing rapidly in size till it has attained a length of from 1 to 2 millims., the larva becomes sluggish, and its form is distorted by the growing Crinoid. The mouth and alimentary canal of the larva disappear, and the external sarcode-layer subsides round the calcareous framework of the included embryo, forming for it a transparent perisome. The stem now lengthens by additions of trabeculee to the ends of the joints. The posterior extremity dilates into a disk of attachment. The anterior extremity becomes expanded, then slightly cupped; the lip of the cup is divided into five crescentic lobes corresponding to the plates of the upper ring; and finally five delicate tubes, czeca from the ambulacral circular canal, are protruded from the centre of the cup, the rudi- ments of the arms of the Pentacrinoid. At some stage during the progress of these later changes the embryo adheres, and at length becomes firmly cemented to some permanent point of attachment. The author states his views as to the morphological and physio- logical relations of the larval zooid. He believes that all the peculiar independently organized zooids developed from the whole or from a part of the segmented yelk in the Echinoderms, and which form no stage in the development of the perfect form of the species, must be regarded as assimilative extensions of sarcode, analogous in func- tion to the embryonic absorbent appendages in the higher animals. For such an organism the term ‘pseudembryo” is proposed. In the Echinoderm subkingdom, although constructed apparently upon a common plan, these pseudembryos present considerable range of organization, from a somewhat complex zooid provided with elaborate natatory fringes, with a system of vessels which are ultimately con- nected with the ambulacral vascular system of the embryo, with a well-developed digestive tract, and in some instances with special nervous ganglia, to a simple layer of absorbent and irritable sarcode which invests the nascent embryo. The pseudembryo of Comatula holds an intermediate position. It resembles very closely in external form and in subsequent metamorphosis the “pupa stage” of the Zoological Society. 299 Holothuride, the great distinction between them being that in the Holothuride the pupa has already passed through the more active * Auricularian”’ stage, while the analogous form in Comatula has been developed directly from the egg. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Novy. 11, 1862.—Prof. Huxley, F.R.S., V.P., in the Chair. Descriptions or Two Corats FRoM MADEIRA, BELONGING TO THE GENERA Primnoa AND Mopsga. By James YATE JoHNSON, Corr. Mem. Z.S8. Fam. GORGONIID, M.-Edw. Subfam. Gorconun#, M.-Edw. Sect. Primnoaces, M.-Edw. PRIMNOA IMBRICATA, Sp. 0. White, having a tendency to branch dichotomously in one plane ; the branches slender, flexible, not plume-like, and not anastomosing. Axis pale brownish yellow, spineless, obscurely striated, effervescing in hydrochloric acid, coated with small white scales composed of carbonate of lime. Over the lower coating of scales there is another coating of larger scales, with a wide space between the two. The outer coat, which is easily removed, appears to be attached to the peduncles of the cells. These peduncles are in closely-set whorls of three or four, each of which expands into a cup-like cell, having its mouth closed in the dead coral with eight scales that have their apices in contact. The peduncles project at right angles from the stem, and are also clothed with scales. This is a much more delicate form than Primnoa lepadifera, in which species the pedunculated cells appear to be arranged spirally on the branch. Two specimens of this elegant Primnoa have been obtained, the larger of which has a height of 84 inches, with a width of 11 inches. It was attached to a piece of Lophohelia (Oculina) prolifera. The whorls of the pedunculated cells are about three-twentieths of an inch apart, and the peduncles about the same in height. The prin- cipal branch, near the base, has a diameter of one-fifth of an inch. The smaller example has been deposited in the British Museum. Subfam. Istprina, M.-Edw. MopsEA ARBUSCULUM, Sp. n. The whole coral is coated with a thin brown skin: When this — skin has been removed from the lower calcareous joints, they are found to be stony, white, subcylindrical, but rather narrower at the middle than at either end. They are finely striate longitudinally, and the striz are parallel and straight. The interjoimts do not nearly equal the joints in length, being little more than discs, and are somewhat less in diameter. They are striate, and from them spring the branches. These branches are very numerous, diverging 20% 300 Zoological Society :— in all directions subdichotomously, and making a tolerably thick bush. They are much thinner than the main stem, and they become gradually more slender upwards, the calcareous joints at the same time becoming longer. Occasionally two of the ultimate branchlets come into contact and are soldered together. Each branchlet bears at its apex a cell of a shape between campanulate and infundibuli- form, the margin of which bears eight pairs of long, upright, spine- like spicula. There are also sessile cells at the sides of the ultimate branchlets, one at each interjoint. All the cells are of a pale brown colour. The pellicle covering the branchlets contains long spicula, which are for the most part large and fusiform, whilst the smaller ones are cylindrical, and all are brown and minutely tuberculated. A single example of this Coral was obtained from a fisherman at Cama de Lobos, Madeira, and it is now in the British Museum. Its length, without the base, which is wanting, is 13 inches, and it is 7 inches across. The lower part of the main stem has a diameter of three-tenths of an inch, and its calcareous joints are about three- eighths of an inch in length. The branches are broken away from this part of the stem; but there are remains to show that some of the interjoints bore four branches, others only one. A cell, with its marginal spines, measures the fifth of an inch. This coral seems to be nearly related to Mopsea dichotoma; but M. Milne-Edwards gives the Indian Ocean (with a mark of doubt) as the habitat of that species. Strange to say, that writer, in his work on Corals (‘ Histoire Naturelle des Coralliaires,’ forming one of the ‘ Nouvelles Suites 4 Buffon’), is altogether silent as to the cells of Mopsea. Lamouroux says that the polypi (? cells) of M. dicho- toma are mammiform on the higher, tuberculous on the middle, and superficial on the lower branches. This would ill accord with the Madeiran specimen. Little agreement can be made out between that specimen and the figures of Esper, ‘ Pflanzenthiere,”’ Isis, pl. 5, figs. 1-5. Nov. 25, 1862.—E. W. H. Holdsworth, F.Z.S., in the Chair. Mr. W. K. Parker read the following abstract of a Memoir on the Osteology of the'genera Pterocles, Syrrhaptes, Hemipodius, and Tinamus, intended for publication in the Society’s ‘ Transactions :’ — “The classification of the gallinaceous birds would be easy enough if it were not for certain outliers, which refuse to conform to that particular plan of structure with which we are all so familiar in that very convenient and natural type of the group, the Common Fowl. “‘ Agreeing with this bird in all essential respects are the genera Phasianus, Polyplectron, Lophophorus, Tragopan, Pavo, Meleagris, Numida, and many others, the species of which are in many instances creatures of unsurpassed beauty. This properly typical group has, amongst other characteristics, its species provided with a robust body, short rounded wings, and very strong legs; whilst the tarsi are naked, provided with one or two spurs, and having the generally small heel elevated above the anterior toes. “‘ Notwithstanding the more subdued style of colouring, and Mr. W. K. Parker on Pterocles, Syrrhaptes, and Tinamus. 301 the rudimentary condition of the spur, the Red Partridge (Perdix rubra) ought to be placed with the Francolins in the typical group. ‘Still further, if we are to be guided by the structure of the ske- leton, and especially by that of the skull, the dwarfs of the family, the Quails (Coturnix), ought to stand in the same inner circle as the gigantic species, the Turkey and the Peacock. “In a subtypical group all those forms ought to be placed, in which, besides the quiet style of colouring, we find feebler legs, often with the tarsi feathered, a more depressed pigeon-like form of the body, anda skull with thinner and more fibrous walls, combined with a much enlarged tympanic cavity. The spur is also obsolete. “The Grey Partridge (Perdix cinerea) should be classed with this subfamily—the Tetraonide. “This beautiful and valuable bird is, as is especially shown in the structure of its skull, much more nearly related to the Ptarmigans (Lagopus) than to Perdix rubra, with its very thick-walled cellular skull, small tympanic cavities, and rudimentary spur. “There is a group of very majestic birds inhabiting the warmer parts of the New World, which differs so much from the Galline- proper and from the Tetraonide, that it must be considered to be- long to an outer or aberrant place in the great gallinaceous family. I allude to the Cracide. ‘‘ These birds, less ornate indeed than their normal relatives, are nevertheless creatures of great interest, and of no little beauty, whether we consider their form or their mode of colouring. “In this outer circle we place the Guans (Penelope), the Curas- sows (Crax), the genera Ortalida, Opisthocomus, and others. «The mode in which the Cracide differ from their terrestrial typical congeners is highly interesting ; but as the present paper is only intended to be an introductory outline, I shall not ‘ bestow all my tediousness’ upon the Society by going into details now: suffice it to say that they appear to me to connect the Gallinacee quite as much with the Plantain-eaters (Musophagide) as with the Pigeons. “The habit, which has given the family-name Rasores to the Fowl tribe, curiously enough, does not attain its highest degree in the typical species, but is developed in certain subtypical genera which are found ranging from the Philippines through the islands of the Indian Archipelago to Australia; these birds are the Megapodes*. “In the ‘ Mound-maker’ we have a bird which, whilst marvel- lously like the Common Hen in gentleness of expression and neatness of contour, has also a most striking isomorphic resemblance to certain members of a very distantly related family, viz. the Gallinules. ‘‘My acquaintance with the structure of Talegalla was made six- teen or seventeen years ago; for at that time I met with and made drawings of a precious skeleton of this bird in one of the drawers of the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons ; it has not, however, been noticed in the Catalogue. *‘ Being therefore well and safely possessed of the fact that the Brush Turkey (Talegalla) does not, in any essential point of struc- * Gould (see Penny Cyclop., art. “‘ Talegalla”’). 302 Zoological Society :— ture, differ from the Common and Ocellated Turkeys (Meleagris Gallo-pavo and M. ocellata), I was indeed surprised to find that, as late as last spring, Professor Owen had classed them with Cuvier’s Macrodactyli. “In the report in the ‘ Medical Times and Gazette’ of the fourth of Professor Owen’s Jermyn Street Lectures for this year, delivered on the 23rd of May, I find the classification which he has adopted, and in which the mound-making birds are placed between the Rail and the Screamer. “As there are in the same system of classification several other instances of what appear to me, to say the least, very odd and con- fusing misplacements, I shall crave the liberty to pot them out, and to make my own remarks upon them, especially as the position in nature of these birds is exactly what I have set myself to try and find out. It is in Professor Owen’s Second, Third, and Fourth Orders, viz. the ‘ Grallatores,’ ‘ Cursores,’ and ‘ Rasores,’ that I find most to surprise and confuse me. “The family Macrodactyli, of the Second Order, ‘ Grallatores,’ . according to this eminent author contains the ‘Coot, Crane, Rail, Megapode, Screamer,’ and ‘ Jacana.’ “The next family, or the ‘Cultrirostres,’ contains, we are told, the ‘ Boat-bill, Adjutant, Heron, Ibis, Stork, Tantalus,’ and ‘ Spoon- bill.’ “ The third family, or ‘ Longirostres,’ is said to be composed of such forms as the ‘Gambet, Avocet, Snipe, Ruff, Turnstone, Curlew, Sandpiper,’ and ‘ Godwit.’ “And the fourth, or the ‘ Pressirostres,’ the ‘Oyster-catcher, Thick-knee, Plover, Lapwing, Bustard,’ and ‘ Courser.’ “Then in his Third Order, the Cursores, Professor Owen places these genera, and in this succession, viz. :— ‘ Apteryz. Didus, Pezophaps. Ostrich, Emeu, Nandi. Cassowary. Notornis. Dinornis, Palapteryzx.’ In the Order 4, ‘ Rasores,’ he gives us two families, viz. the Gallinacei or Clamatores, and the Columbacei or Gemitores. “The first of these is exemplified by the ‘ Pea-fowl, Partridge, Quail, Pheasant, Ganga, Grouse, Pintado, Tinamu, Turkey, Curas- sow,’ and ‘ Guan.’ “The second is made to contain the ‘ Dove, Goura,’ and ‘ Vinago.’ ‘* First, as to the Macrodactylous Gralle, the Porphyriine Notornis is wanting ; and, besides the Megapode, the Crane certainly has no business there, being (as its embryology reveals) a gigantic special- ized aberrant of the Pressirostral family. “As to the Cultrirostres, I feel pretty certain that the Spoonbill and the Ibis will have to be placed in the next family, the Longi- rostres, a group less specialized from the Plover type than the Cranes. If this should turn out to be the truth, the ‘ Pressirostres’ and the Mr. W. K. Parker on Pterocles, Syrrhaptes, and Tinamus. 303 * Longirostres’ must receive accessions at the expense of the ‘ Cultri- rostres,’ which family, however, possesses the Baleniceps, the Um- bre, and the Eurypyga. ** With regard to the ‘ Cursores,’ it seems to me much better to use the simple term Struthionide, and to let Didus and Pezophaps abide where Messrs. Strickland and Melville most appropriately placed them, viz. amongst the Ground-Pigeons ; the Notornis being marched back again to its proper place, between Tribonyx and Por- phyrio*. “‘T hope to console the lover of the struthious tribe by compen- sating him for the loss of the Dodo and the Notornis with the gain of what has hitherto been considered as a true gallinaceous genus : I refer to the Tinamou. “‘The examples given of the gallinaceous genera in Professor Owen’s classification are principally remarkable for want of order, as the Ganga is not intermediate between the Pheasant and the Grouse, but between the Grouse and the Pigeon, and the Tinamou certainly has no place between the Pintado and the Turkey. “«‘ The Gemitores might stand as they are, as to the examples given; but they are not Rasores. “In the same lecture in which the ‘classification’ is given, the Notornis is said to be ‘allied to the Coots,’ and the Cassowaries * still more modified Coots.’ «This seems to me to be an inversion of the natural order of things; for the Cassowary, every one knows, is in all respects typi- cally struthious in its whole skeleton, but is most decisively seen to be so in its cranium and facial bones ; and all the Struthiones are low, embryonic, unspecialized forms. ‘That there is a near relationship between the Rail-tribe and the Ostriches I feel certain; but the former seem to me to stand on the same level typically (or in relation to the highest style of bird) as the Rasorial group, and in some respects on a higher one ; but I would not press this too far, as the skulking habits of these birds seem to point to a lower brain-development than even the Fowl possesses, and to place them in near contiguity to the Ostriches: moreover Brachypteryz is, in respect of its wings and sternum, but little in ad- vance of the great ‘ Brevipennes.’ Cranially, however, it is in ad- vance ; and it seems to be a more philosophical way of putting the matter to say that a Coot is a modified Cassowary, than that a Cas- sowary is a modified Coot. Whether Mr. Darwin is right in all respects or not, yet we all believe with him that nature does not re- trograde, but ascends from the simpler to the more highly specialized forms. «T shall not take up either the Society’s time or my own in merely arguing about these puzzling affinities, but hope soon to be able to * Dr. Mantell (Petrifactions and their Teachings, page 125) says that “the general form of the skull” of Notornis Mantelli “ approaches nearest that of Brachypteryx ;” whereas that of Tribonyx Mortieri (Osteol. Catal. Mus. Coll. Chir. vol. i. p. 239, No. 1281) comes nearer. In the sternum, however, Notornis is most like Brachypteryz. 304 Zoological Society :— bring forward some simple drawings and descriptions, such as shall enable any one to judge for himself to what type these birds really do belong. *‘T intend moreover in my larger paper to consider the relationships of Oreophasis Derbianus. “But the birds hitherto mentioned are all easily referred to their proper zoological position ; those, however, of which it is my prin- cipal business to speak stand just above the Struthionide, in such a doubtful position that it is at first hard to say whether they have declared for any one of the families by which they are surrounded. “The Sand-Grouse, the Hemipodes, and the Tinamous have in their composition such a mixture of characters, that they seem to be the very birds which might in the lapse of ages, through climatal change, a different diet, ‘the struggle for existence,’ and ‘ natural selection,’ give rise to such divaricating and dissimilar types as the Pigeons, the Gallinaceous birds, and the Plovers. “« These last-mentioned families are those the characters of which the osculant forms under consideration most affect, with, let it be remembered, a more or less broad struthious basis. ‘* There are other genera, however, the osteology of which I long to know, viz. Thinocorus, Attagis, and Chionis. “‘Speaking of these birds, Mr. Darwin, in his most pleasant ‘Journal’ (ch. 5. p. 94), makes the following remarks :— ‘*« This small family of birds is one of those which, from its varied relations to other families, although at present offering only diffi- culties to the systematic naturalist, ultimately may assist in revealing the grand scheme, common to the present and past ages, on which organized beings have been created.’ “ Thinocorus rumicivorus partakes, according to this excellent author, ‘of the characters, different as they are, of the Quail and the Snipe’ (ibid. p. 94). * As to the Attagis, Mr. Darwin says (p. 94), ‘The two species of this genus are in almost every respect Ptarmigans in their habits ;” and of Chionis alba, that it ‘is an inhabitant of the Antarctic re- gions,’ that ‘it feeds on sea-weed and shells on the tidal rocks,’ and that, ‘although not web-footed, from some unaccountable habit, it is frequently met with far out at sea’ (ibid. p. 94). “Will some lover of ornithology be on the look-out to procure something more than the shins of the birds of these three genera ?* “Tt would tend towards our knowledge of the meaning of these birds of mixed character and osculant relationship, if we knew how long each type has been on the planet ; for if our Fowls and Pea- cocks, Doves and Gouras, are really comparatively new importations to the ‘ green earth,’ then there would be some colour and life in ‘ Darwinism,’ and the Ostriches, Tinamous, and Sand-Grouse might be looked upon as a remnant of the ‘ flint-folk ’ of the bird-class. “Tt is, however, almost impossible for the most devout believer in separate creations to keep this idea of ‘ancestral relationship ’ alto- * There is a skeleton of Chionis, I find, in the British Museum. ‘Mr. W. K. Parker on Pterocles, Syrrhaptes, and Tinamus. 305. gether out of his mind when considering such birds as those we are speaking of: at any rate, dogmatism on either side, on a subject so far beyond the reach of our feeble faculties and limited knowledge, has in it something of profanity. I have, up to this time, only been able to get a sight of the skeletons of Pterocles arenarius (see Osteol. Cat. Mus. Coll. Chir. vol. i. p. 273, No. 1421), of Hemipodius varius (ibid. p. 274, No. 1423), of a specimen of an undetermined species of Hemipodius (which died soon after its arrival at the Gardens, and was lent to me by Mr. Gerrard), and of a Syrrhaptes paradoxus and a Ttnamus robustus, for which I am indebted to the Council of this Society. “JT shall now merely indicate the curious composition, so to speak, of these birds, and begin with that of the Sand-Grouse. “These beautiful and gentle birds are seen at once to have in them something both of the Ptarmigan and the Pigeon; but there is in their physiognomy a marked inferiority of expression, quite in con- trast with the sharp, intelligent look of the typical Fowls, and very much below what we see in the Pigeon-tribe. *<'This is exactly in harmony with what the skeleton reveals; for whilst the characters of both these types are almost inextricably interwoven, yet there is in many points a marked inferiority of cha- racter—a less degree of elevation above the Struthious style of strue- ture. What there is of the Bustard (O¢¢s) in them (which Pro- fessor Owen, ‘ Osteol. Catal.’ p. 274, points out) is only part of their general relationship to the Pluvialine type. ‘Tt is in those parts of the skull and face which are first mapped out in thickened blastema, and then differentiated into clear cartilage, at some considerable period of the early embryonic life anterior to the deposit of bone, that we find the most instructive modifications of structure. “T allude especially to the basis cranii and to the upper part of the first facial arch, that is, to the occipital and sphenoidal regions, and to the pterygoids, palatine bones, and vomer. Not only do these bones (with the exception of the vomer, which is absent as in the Pigeons) show a marked ‘struthious’ inferiority in the Syrrhaptes (the culmination of the Pterocline type of structure), but the ster- num, which literally unites that of the Ptarmigan with its counter- part in the Pigeon, is inferior in one important point, not only to this, but also to that of the whole Pluvialine group. “The heel, which is a mere rudiment in Pterocles proper, is ab- sent in the Syrrhaptes ; and the whole pelvic extremity is almost the counterpart of that of the Swifts (Cypselus) in deficient growth. I believe that it would take a very clever anatomist to detect any differ- ence between the wing-bones of the ‘ Pterocline’ and those of a typical Pigeon. “The elongated feathers of the tail and wings of Syrrhaptes give it one of its peculiarities of character: the two middle tail-feathers have already become elongated in Pterocles setarius (the Pin-tailed Sand-Grouse of Temminck), its nearest ally. “IT cannot conclude this rough outline of what I wish to say about 306 Zoological Society :— the Sand-Grouse, without referring to what Dr. Andrew Smith tells us of Pterocles gutturalis, Sm., in his ‘ Illustrations of the Zoology of South Africa.’ “First, what must be considered a ‘ Pluvialine’ character, the eggs are of a ‘ dirty- white or cream-colour, marked with irregular streaks and blotches of a pale-rusty and pale-grey or ash-colour ;’ and the second point is the careless habit of laying them upon the bare ground*. This habit, so untypical ornithically, so unlike the almost human family tenderness of their relatives, the Pigeons, is, however, much like the conduct of the unthinking ‘ giants’ that come next below them in the zoological scale. “So that not only the Ostrich, but also the Sand-Grouse ‘leaveth her eggs in the earth, and warmeth them in the dust, and forgetteth that the foot may crush them, or that the wild beast may break them.’ “Tf birds were intelligent in the Auman sense of the word, their relationship to the reptiles would be as humiliating as our affinity to the Simie ; but the fact is certain that these low types not merely have in themselves obscure anatomical resemblances, but their instincts and habits are plain, out-spoken evidences of their nearness in nature to ‘the creeping things after their kind.’ ““T now leave Syrrhaptes (which, at first sight, seems to run in some mysterious way without the help of feet) to speak of the stilted Hemipodius, an aberrant gallinaceous bird, which has escaped from its more steady walking allies to jom the true coursing birds. Without heel, with not only naked tarsi, but with the lower half of the tibize bare ; what can these birds be but true essential ‘ Gralla.’ “They may be in a sense grallatorial, but are not really so, as we shall see, if we work out their mixed affinities. “The Hemipodii (some of which are very small, and, like some other small creatures, very pugnacious) stand pretty exactly between the Tinamous and the Quails ; but not quite so, for the Pigeon comes in again, even here, with a touch of kinship, the connecting links being the Didunculus and the dwarf Ground-Pigeons (Chamepelia). “The characters of head are almost equally divided between those of the Ground-Pigeon and the Quail ; the sternum, between the Quail and Tinamou ; yet the legs are those of a little Sand-Plover, although they are hinged upon a pelvis which would require but little altering to suit a Quail. “I must ask for more time and space, if not to settle this dif_i- culty, yet to put it into a proper form for some fuller mind to ex- plain ; for it seems to me that my position of ‘interpreter’ is in this case more perplexing than that of the purblind patriarch, who found the hands of his hairy son Esau combined with the vocal organs of the smooth-limbed Jacob. «‘T have now merely to speak of the Tinamous ; and in their case also I must merely indicate the kind of task they present to him who would fairly work them out. . * Penny Cyclop., art. Tetraonide. Mr. W. K. Parker on Pterocles, Syrrhaptes, and Tinamus. 307 ‘Tn the first place, let me at once say that they haye no right to the dignity of the gallinaceous title ; they are little struthious birds, looking upwards from that simple rudimentary beginning of the beautiful ornithie type. “ Nearly all the specialization of this bird, by which it rises above the Struthionide, is in the direction of the true or typical gallina- ceous bird, and not towards the Ptarmigans, as is the case of the Sand-Grouse. “The Hemipodius runs upwards towards the little flat-bodied typical Quails; but there is no bird better for comparison with the Tinamou than the common Hen. Nine-tenths of the characters of the bony structures of the head in this bird are truly struthious : the residuum belonging half to the Plover and half to the Fowl. “Tt is not a little curious, however, that it outdoes the Plover in one thing, viz. the structure of the supraorbital region; for whilst the nasal or supraorbital glands in the Pluvialine are protected by a continuous beam of bone, the Tinamou has the unique character of a series of those bones. In the young Ring-Dottrel I find a series of square denticles growing out from the margin of the frontal below, and external to the large gland; these exogenous processes fuse together in the adult. *‘T had racked my memory to find an instance of multiplied supra- orbitals in a vertebrate skull, but in vain, when one turned up to me on examining the Reptilian skeletons in the Museum of the Col- lege of Surgeons, a few months ago: this example is the skull of the Trigonal Cayman. ; “There are three on each side in this latter creature, united by a triradiate suture; in the Tinamou, however, there are six or seven larger and several smaller ossicles on each side. At first sight it seems as though half the sclerotic ring had been attached there by accident ; these supraorbitals are, however, much stronger than the sclerotals. ««The sternum of the Tinamou is greatly differentiated when com- pared with that of a Rhea or Emeu; but all the improvement is gallinaceous. It is absolutely the most unique and wonderful of all the sternums I have seen, the variations of which in the bird-class, as is well known, are very great and very exquisite. “The presence of a somewhat deep keel, so seemingly fatal to the struthious theory of this bird’s relationship, strange to say, turns out a good proof of its validity and truth. Every one who has watched the larger-winged Ostriches must have noticed their habit of lifting their wings—a motion performed by the middle pectoral muscles or levatores of the humerus: to these muscles nearly all the keel of the Tinamou’s sternum is devoted, a most narrow, small corner being left for the thin abortive depressores—muscles which, not only in typical birds, but also in the heavy Gallinaceze, are of very large size. The small ‘ furculum’ is Pluvialine; but the coracoids and scapule come very near to those of the common Fowl. «The blending of the last cervical with three out of four of the dorsal vertebrze is gallinaceous ; but the absence of costal appendages, 308 Miscellaneous. except a small one on the second true rib and a trace on the third, is struthious enough. The pelvis looks, at first sight, but a few re- moves from that of the Hen; and in so much as it differs from the pelvis of the Emeu or the Apteryx (which have very compressed pelves, whilst this is broad and gently arched), in the same degree does it approach that of the Fowl. The preacetabular spur of the ilium is there; but the postfemoral part of that bone looks as if it had been pared away, leaving an enormous ischiadic notch, which is a foramen in typical birds. The tail is a mere pretence (as Wagler’s term Nothura well expresses); the caudal vertebree are therefore but little better than those of an Ostrich. The strong legs leave us the choice, at first sight, of referrmg them to either the Fowl or the Ostrich ; and the heel, small and high up, is gallinaceous. But the tarso-metatarsus, covered with transverse plates in front, has the posterior two-thirds invested by an intensely strong imbrication of horny scales; thus adapting the leg of the bird to that odd sitting position (about as elegant as that of the Ass in the first stage of the erect posture) in which the Struthionide delight.” MISCELLANEOUS. On Chlamyphorus. By Dr. BuRMEISTER. Dr. BurMetsTeR has sent from Buenos Ayres the description of a second species of Chlamyphorus. He defines them thus :— 1. Chlamyphorus truncatus. Minor, chlamyde dorsali lateribus libere dependente, subtus cum artubus vellere molli recto subsericeo indutus ; cauda thecaque anali perfecte cataphractz. Hab. Mendoza. 2. Chlamyphorus retusus. Major, chlamyde dorsali lateralibus corporis adnata, subtus cum artubus intus vellere undulato, sat lanuginoso indutus; cauda thecaque anali imperfecte cata- phractee. Hab. Circa oppidum Stee. Crucis de la Sierra Bolivia. He gives three figures of the species. On the Action of Magenta upon Vegetable Tissue. By J. G. Lynne, F.G.S., M. Inst. C.E. The author describes a series of experiments upon cuttings of Vallisneria immersed in a solution of magenta in cells under the microscope, and its effect upon the circulation in the plant. He found that so. long as the vital action continued, the cell-walls and the moving chlorophyll retained their green colour, but the injured cells were immediately deeply reddened, and their contents gradually acquired the same colour, the intensity of which was in proportion to the thickness or density of the tissue. Between the cell-walls it would appear that there exists an intercellular membrane, devoid of Miscellaneous. 309 vital action, which becomes rapidly coloured whilst the circulation continues active. On the inner surface of the cell-wall, whilst rota- tion is going on, the author observed a luminous stratum suggesting the action of cilia, but in every observation, as the dye permeated the tissue and the circulation ceased, the true cell-wall became covered with irregular markings, either corrugated or having raised excrescences, scarcely alike in any two cells; in no case were the markings visible until the rotation had ceased, and they had the appearance which would be produced by cilia falling against the cell- wall in all positions upon the suspension of vital action. The chlorophyll-vesicles appear in three forms—in a gelatinous sac or mass rotating altogether in the cells, as independent vesicles apparently homogeneous in their structure, rendered opake by colouring matter, and, lastly, as independent vesicles somewhat increased in size, of a pale green colour, almost transparent, containing nuclei, one, two, or three in number, which in reality appear to be immature vesicles within the parent, similar to Volvox globator, without rota- tory motion. The chlorophyll-vesicles appear to resist the action of the magenta for some time after their rotation has ceased, indicating a vitality, at least to a certain extent, independent of that of the cell. In some of the experiments a few of the cells assumed a purplish colour, whilst in the adjoining cells the circulation was active and the chloro- phyll green; in those the chlorophyll appeared to be decomposed, and the cell to be nearly full of very minute dots, swarming like the granules in Closterium lunula. Upon this subject the author offered no opinion. The observations were made with ith and th ob- jectives; and the paper contained minutize of several experiments, with the hours of observation, temperature of the room, and other particulars.— Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester, March 1863. The Ringed Seal (Phoca feetida). A specimen of this animal was caught at Aberystwith during last month, and has been exhibited alive in London. It is now in the Collection of the British Museum.—J. E. Gray. On the Nature of the Gas produced from the Decomposition of Carbonic Acid by Leaves exposed to the Light. By M. Bovs- SINGAULT. In an interesting paper in the ‘ Ann. Sc. Nat.’ (Bot.) sér. 4, vol. xvi. pp- 1-27, 1862, referring to the history of discovery in respect to the relations of plants to the atmosphere, Boussingault remarks that Bonnet first took notice of the emission of air from the surface of leaves. Priestley recognized this air to be oxygen; Ingenhous showed the presence of light to be necessary; and Senebier proved that the oxygen gas eliminated by leaves under the light of the sun 310 Miscellaneous. camé from the decomposition of carbonic acid gas. Théodore de Saussure, nearly at the beginning of the present century, ascertained the fact (which has since been often overlooked) that the volume of oxygen gas produced was not quite equal to that of the carbonic acid decomposed ; and also that nitrogen gas was always evolved, to an amount about equal to that of the oxygen gas which had somehow disappeared. He supposed that this nitrogen came from the sub- stance of the plant—not considering, what is now obvious, that the substance of the plant did not contain, and therefore could not have furnished, anything like this quantity of nitrogen. In more recent times, Daubeny was unable to obtain from leaves oxygen gas free from nitrogen ; and Draper states that he found the astonishing amount of from 22 to 49 per cent. of the gas emitted from the leaves of Pinus teda and Poa annua to be nitrogen. The first step towards the elucidation of the matter was made by Cloéz and Gratiolet, who, exposing the leaves of a common Pond-weed (Potamogeton perfoliatus) in water slightly impregnated with car- bonic acid, found that the first day 15°70 per cent. of the gas elimimated was nitrogen; the second, 13°79; the third, 12°00; the fourth, 10°26; the fifth, 9°53; the sixth, 8°15; the seventh, 4°34; the eighth, 2°90: that is, the oxygen gas grew purer and purer, exactly as if the nitrogen retained in the tissues of the plant, or in the water, was gradually expelled by the oxygen. Similar experiments were made by Boussingault in 1844, confirming these results, and also . later a set of comparative experiments, with and without leaves, which confirmed the truth of the conjecture as to the source of most of the nitrogen. But, after all, he could not obtain any oxygen gas free from nitrogen. Boussingault now devised a new method of proceeding, by which he avoided the difficulty about extraneous nitrogen, &c. The mean results of 25 experiments (which are detailed particularly in the memoir), made with a variety of plants, are, that 100 measures of carbonic acid gas, decomposed by foliage under the light, gave 97:2 of oxygen gas; and that 1°11 of nitrogen had appeared, which, from the plan of the experiments, could not have come from the water, nor have been contained in the plant. At this point, Boussingault raised the question whether this gas, which remained after the absorption of the oxygen by the pyrogal- late and the carbonic acid by potassa, was necessarily and really nitrogen. A series of experiments, devised and executed with this view, brought out the interesting result, that the supposed nitrogen (which, moreover, corresponded very nearly with the amount of oxygen gas that had disappeared) was oxide of carbon, 7. e. carbonic oxide! There is also a little protocarburet of hydrogen. So “ foliage, during the decomposition of carbonic acid, does not really emit nitrogen gas, but, with the oxygen gas, emits some oxide of carbon and some protocarburet of hydrogen; and these combustible gases, like the oxygen, are produced only under the light of the sun.... In other terms, to keep strictly within the conditions of the experi- Miscellaneous. 311 ments, these gases constantly accompany the oxygen of which the sun determines the production when it acts upon a vegetable sub- merged in water impregnated with carbonic acid.”’ Is this also the case when carbonic acid is decomposed by foliage in the air? Boussingault concludes his paper with the remark that the earlier observers looked at their discoveries rather from the hygienic than the physiological point of view; that, while Priestley announced his brilliant discovery by the statement that plants purify the air vitiated by combustion or by the respiration of animals, it is curious enough that, a century afterwards, it should come to be demonstrated before the Academy of Sciences, that probably the leaves of all plants, and certainly those of aquatic plants, while emitting oxygen gas, which ameliorates the atmosphere, also emit one of the most deleterious of known gases—carbonic oxide! THe closes with the pregnant and natural query, whether the unhealthiness of marshy districts is not attributable, at least in part, to the disengagement of this pernicious gas by plants? [We add, that what strikes us with most surprise is to lear that, if these results are true, the vegetable machinery would seem to work at a loss, and with a real, though it be a small, waste of material. When any carbonic acid taken into the leaves passes off unchanged, so much work is not done, but there is no waste or loss in the process of manufacture. But, looking at the food of plants and their pro- ducts—comparing the raw material with the manufactured article— it seems apparent that any carbonic acid which is reduced to carbonic oxide, and given off as. such, is so much loss or waste. We may avoid this unwelcome conclusion by the supposition that the carbonic oxide and carburet of hydrogen are products of the decomposition of some of the vegetable matter coétaneous with vegetable assimilation, but no part of that process itself. This is the more probable, since it cannot reasonably be supposed that carbonic acid supplied to the foliage is resolved into oxygen and carbonic oxide, and both set free, which seems to be the alternative. — Asa Gray. |—Silliman’s Journal for January 1863. On a new Species of Ophiura (O: Normani) found on the Coast of Northumberland and Durham. By Grorer Hones. During the summer of 1861, whilst dredging at Seaham, upon a sandy bottom, in water varying from 6 to 25 fathoms, a number of small Sand-stars were brought up, associated with Ophiura textu- rata and Ophiura albida. heir actions were so singular as to claim a more than ordinary examination, when it was noticed that, although resembling in some respects young forms of O. texturata and O. al- bida, they presented features that at once distinguished them from those species, the most striking of which were the longer and more attenuated character of the rays, as compared with the size of the disk, their excessively lively movements, and the wonderful pliability 312 Miscellaneous. of the rays. These several circumstances caused them to be regarded as distinct from the two well-known species above named: a careful examination under more favourable circumstances confirmed this opinion. The surface of the disk is beautifully rosulated, a large plate being in the centre, around which, at a little distance, are arranged five other plates ; beyond these, other five plates, and so on, the inter- spaces being filled in with circlets of little scales, producing an ap- pearance not unlike that seen in Ophiocoma bellis. At the base of the rays, close to the disk (upon the upper surface), is a crescent of short spines, the concave side of the crescent being outwards. These are features entirely different from what we find in either Ophiura texturata or O. albida; in both instances the upper sur- faces of the disks present no trace of the beautiful and distinct rosu- lated character here seen, neither do we find the crescentic arrange- ment of spines upon the basal portion of the rays. The characters of the species under consideration may be thus defined :— Disk either pentangular or round, the former pertaining to well- grown individuals, the latter to young; upper surface of disk rosulated ; under surface corresponding with the other members of the genus. Two clasping scales at the origin of each ray, each bearing above ten short spines. A crescent of eight or ten short blunt spines on upper surface of rays, close to the disk. Lateral ray-plates bearing five moderately long spines. Upper ray-scales nearly square, slightly tapering towards the disk. Rays about four times as long as the diameter of disk, which, in well-grown individuals, measures about a quarter of an inch. Colour reddish- yellow, occasionally of a pale sandy tint. These features being so constant and distinct, there can be no doubt of the species under consideration being new to our fauna ; and as such, it affords me much pleasure to name it after my friend the Rev. A. M. Norman, who is, in fact, the original discoverer, having taken a single specimen some years ago in the Frith of Clyde; and at Shetland, during 1861, he also took three or four specimens. In both instances, however, they only received a glance, and were assumed to be the young of O. texturata, for which they may easily be mistaken unless subjected to microscopical exa- mination. This species would appear to be generally distributed, having been found at three widely different parts of our coasts. It is common here, between sixty and seventy specimens having been dredged in a few hours; owing, however, to their excessive fragility, few were obtained perfect.—Trans. Tynes. Nat. Field Club, 1863, vol. v. p. 296. THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [THIRD SERIES. ] No. 65. MAY 1863. XXXIV.—A Novel Instance of the Production of Fermentation by the Presence of Infusoria capable of existing without free Oxygen and deprived of all Access of Atmospheric Air, By M. L. Pasteur. Sucu is the subject of a short paper addressed by M. Pasteur to the French Academy of Sciences, and published in the ‘Comptes Rendus’ for March 1863. About two years previously, he communicated a note to the same learned body respecting the existence of infusory ani- malcules possessing the two properties of living without free oxygen, and of acting as ferments*. ‘These were,” he says, “the first known examples of an animal ferment, as well as of animals capable of living and of indefinite self-multiplication, without contact with atmospheric air, whether in the gaseous state or held in solution. «The infusory animalcules in question constitute the ferment in butyric fermentation, which has hitherto been explained to take place by the agency of plastic azotized matters, more or less changed by contact with the air, upon sugar or lactic acid, and by the supervention of an internal molecular action giving rise to the phenomena of fermentation. “T believe I have proved that such a theory, which is applied indeed in explanation of all kinds of fermentation, properly so- called, is inadmissible, and that an albuminoid matter never constitutes a ferment, but that the true ferment (as im butyric fermentation, for example) is an organized being belonging to the Vibrios, derived from the air and present in the fermentable substance. “J am now able to add another example—viz. the fermenta- tion of tartrate of lime, determined in precisely the same way * See Annals, April, 1861, p. 343. Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 3, Vol, xi. 21 314 M.L. Pasteur on the Production of Fermentation by the presence of an infusory animalcule, existing without free oxygen, belonging also to the genus Vibrio, ‘though very dif- ferent, at least im external aspect, from the animalcule of butyric fermentation. ‘To be brief, I will at once adduce a decisive experiment in proof of this statement. I place in an aqueous solution of tar- trate of lime a minute portion (some milliémes) of phosphate of ammonia or of alkaline and earthy phosphates, either artificially: prepared, or derived from the ashes of the yeast of beer or the ashes of infusory organisms. (I prefer the ashes obtained by the combustion of organisms analogous to those whose development is sought, in order to be more certain that no useful principle, known or unknown, is omitted. It is probably as well to add some traces of sulphate of lime and of ammonia.) : “The vessel used is a glass phial, flat at the bottom, and having a curved glass tube fitted in its narrow neck. The tar- trate of lime is introduced, the phial filled up with pure water, and then placed in a chloride-of-calcium bath with the end of the curved tube immersed in a vessel of boiling water. Its con- tents are made to boil, in order to expel all the air held in solu- tion ; and when this is effected, the surface of the water under which the end of the curved tube opens is covered by a thick layer of oil. The whole apparatus is then left to cool for some hours. Under these conditions, the tartrate shows no sign of fermentation ; but if a small quantity of the Infusoria obtained from a spontaneously fermenting portion of tartrate of lime be quickly introduced within the phial, and the little water dis- placed in this process be as quickly replaced by some of the water deprived of its air by boiling, then it is found that the introduced Infusoria rapidly multiply, and the tartrate progres- sively disappears until entirely removed, all air having been in the meanwhile excluded by the curved tube of the phial being kept under the water, or, better still, under the surface of a mercury bath. “The tartrate was replaced by a deposit consisting solely of the bodies of Vibrios, of about ;,5, millimetre in diameter, but so variable in length that some measured ,/, millimetre. Like all Vibrios, they are reproduced by fission; and during the act of fermentation, the minutest quantity of the deposit formed by them showed them in more or less rapid and writhing move- ment. «The fermentation of tartrate of lime, therefore, whatever its intimate cause may be, is set up by the presence of Infusoria having the property of living without free oxygen and without contact with atmospheric air. “It may undoubtedly be objected that, at the moment when by Infusoria capable of existing without free Oxygen. 315 the ferment has been added, I have failed to prevent the contact of the air with the solution experimented upon. But I will now demonstrate that thevery strict precautions I have taken to obviate the contact of oxygen or of air are really uncalled for. The following observations will also afford a reply to the question why the germs of Infusoria which not only live without air, but are actually destroyed by it (as happens also with the butyric Infu- soria), may spontaneously originate in liquids which under the circumstances of ordinary fermentation are exposed to the atmo- sphere. “Resuming the phial filled with water, and containing the tartrate of lime and the phosphates, and having the bent tube luted in its neck also filled with water (which I will suppose to be ordinary distilled water undeprived of its air by boiling), and with its free extremity plunged under mercury, it will be found by experiment that, without adding any ferment, fermentation of the tartrate of lime takes place at the end of a few days, and that a multitude of animalcules are found living in the phial, though deprived of oxygen. “How this happens it is easy to conceive; for in all such cases the smallest Infusoria, such as Monas, Bacterium termo, &c., develope themselves in the aérated distilled water, which contains in solution traces of ammonia, of phosphate and carbonate of lime, together with oxygen gas; this last they appropriate to themselves with incredible rapidity, until it is ultimately used up, replacing it by carbonic acid in somewhat larger volume. This result is accomplished in from twenty-four to thirty-six hours at most, at a temperature of 25° to 30° Cent. ; and it is not till then that the Infusoria of fermentation make their appearance, which have no need of oxygen for their exist- ence. The question, therefore, why animalcules which do not require oxygen to carry on life, and to which air is destructive, should arise under the conditions assumed, is thus at once and naturally answered. They originate in sequence to a former generation of organisms which quickly abstract the relatively considerable quantity of oxygen in the fluid, and leave it com- pletely destitute of that element. “J shall shortly revert to this very general fact of the succes- sion of organisms which consume oxygen, and of such as do not, at least in a free state. “In the instance under consideration, it is easy to comprehend the facility with which spontaneous fermentation of tartrate of lime may be set up, whenever special precautions are not taken to prevent the access of the germs disseminated through the air, or those in. the dust deposited from the air on all objects. It is equally easy to understand the fermentation of tartrate of lime 21% 316 M.L. Pasteur on the Production of Fermentation in liquids freely exposed to the air, provided the layer of fluid is of sufficient thickness. It may under such circumstances be shown that those Infusoria which consume oxygen gas multiply at the surface; whilst those are developed in the liquid strata beneath which do not require this gas for their existence, and these are at the same time preserved from its injurious contact by the former class of bemgs. “ Tn fine, there is no need to resort to any artificial measures to deprive fluids of their oxygen gas. All the precautions I adopted in my experiments for this purpose were wholly super- fluous. The abstraction of the oxygen is naturally effected, as a matter of course, before fermentation begins, in every instance of spontaneous fermentation. “ The nature of the experiments above detailed, and the com- position of the materials employed in them, deserve particular notice when we come to inquire what may be the primary cause of the fermentation. I have referred to the prevalent theories as requiring, as indispensable for the act of fermentation, the concurrence of albuminoid matter and of a ferment. For my part, I recognize their presence to be not absolutely necessary, but useful, imasmuch as they supply a certain material for the action of the ferment, which is itself an organized bemg whose germ cannot develope or reproduce itself except in the presence of nitrogen and phosphates. These are especially the kind of suitable materials that the ferment obtains from the presence of albuminoid substances. This theory is so true in its application, that, as before seen, the azotized plastic matter may be entirely dispensed with, and its place supplied by an ammo- niacal salt mingled with alkaline and earthy phosphates. “ But it further results from the composition of the fluid just spoken of holding a tartrate in solution, that the sole carbona- ceous material for fermentation is the tartaric acid, or the fer- menting body itself. Hence this further result follows, that at the least the animalcule derives in the first place all its carbon from the fermentable matter. There is no question, if preconceived notions relative to the cause of fermentation be laid aside, that under the conditions which we have described, the ferment obtains its nutrition at the expense of the fermenting material, and that so long as the life of the infusory organism lasts, so long does a transfer of matter go on from the ferment- ing substance to that which provokes its transformation. The hypothesis of a purely catalytic action, or of simple contact, consequently cannot be admitted as true, any more than the opinion, to be afterwards combated, that the nature of a fer- ment is exclusively found in dead albuminoid matter. “Tt must be granted that the fact of the nutrition of the fer- by Infusoria capable of existing without free Oxygen. 317 ment advancing at the expense of the fermentable material does not show why the Vibrios must be the ferment. We know, in- deed, that the habitual mode of action of animals and plants on the substances from which they directly derive their nourishment is not associated with a process of fermentation, properly so called, of those substances. Yet it must be borne in mind, in making any comparison between organisms previously known and those which I have for the first time described, that animalcular fer- ments present this peculiar physiological property, heretofore overlooked, that they live and multiply without the presence of free oxygen. “We are therefore led to associate the fact of nutrition at- tended by fermentation with that of nutrition without the con- sumption of free oxygen gas. Herein, no doubt, lies the secret of the mysterious character of all fermentation, rightly so called, and possibly also that of many normal and abnormal actions in the organization of living beings. If any doubts yet remain on these points, I trust to remove them by future re- searches which I hope to lay before the Academy. “ Henceforward it may be asserted that there are two modes of life among inferior organisms—the one requiring the presence of free oxygen, the other carried on without contact with this gas, and always attended by the phenomena of fermentation. “As to the number of organisms capable of living deprived of air, and of setting up fermentation, I regard it as considerable, whether we look to those having no inherent power of self- movement, in other words, vegetable beings, or to those which have apparent voluntary motions, or animals. “‘T hope, in fact, to demonstrate in a subsequent communica- tion, that infusory animalcules living without the access of free oxygen are the ferments of putrefaction when this act proceeds without contact with air; and that there are other animalcular ferments of putrefaction under exposure to air, which are found associated with Infusoria or Mucors, that consume the free oxygen and fulfil the double purpose of agents of combustion with reference to the organic material, and of agents of preserva- tion for the infusorial ferments, by protecting them from the contact of the oxygen of the air.” The results now described apply exclusively to the case of the simple tartrate of lime; but the author has a series of researches which extend them to the other combinations of lime and tartaric acid, and which he promises shortly to send to the Academy of Sciences. J.T, ARLIDGE. slg . Mr. W. H. Benson on new Land-Shells XXXV.—Characters of new Land-Shells from the Andaman Islands, Burmah, and Ceylon, and of the Animal of Sophina. By W. H. Benson, Esq. 1. Helix hemiopta, B., n. sp. H. testa anguste umbilicata, depresso-conoidea, vix striatula, leevius- cula, minutissime granulata, opaca, albida; anfractu ultimo su- perne castaneo, versus peripheriam saturatiore; spira convexo- conoidea, apice obtuso, sutura vix impressa ; anfractibus 43, con- vexiusculis, sensim accrescentibus, ultimo superne prope peri- pheriam obtuse angulatam concaviusculo, subtus convexiusculo ; apertura obliqua, subquadrato-lunata, intus concolore, peristomate expansiusculo, superne antice arcuato, subtus breviter reflexo, marginibus remotis, columellari superne valde dilatato, umbilicum subtegente. Diam. major 16, minor 133, axis 10 mill. Habitat ad Portum Blair Andamanicum. Two dead specimens of this shell, only one of which has the aperture complete, were collected by Major J. C. Haughton. A nearly allied shell, with the surface in good condition, obliquely substriated, shimmg, and sprinkled with minute in- dentations, may possibly be a variety; but the aperture is in a state too imperfect to allow a satisfactory decision. It is milk- white, with a single dark band above the periphery and running along the edge of the upper whorls, which are slightly more convex, and divided by a more depressed suture. A single spe- cimen from Port Blair was received from Major Haughton. 2. Helix Aulopis, B., n. sp. H. testa perforata, depresso-conoidea, oblique minute striatula, striis confertissimis spiralibus decussata, pallide cornea, nitidula, trans- lucente, versus apicem rubente ; spira conoidea, apice acutiusculo, sutura leviter impressa; anfractibus 5, superne subplanulatis, vix convexiusculis, ultimo subtus convexiusculo, ad peripheriam cari- nato; apertura obliqua, quadrato-lunata, peristomate recto, tenul, acuto, marginibus subremotis, callo tenui junctis, columellari su- perne breviter dilatato. Diam. major 12, minor 10, axis 6 mill. Habitat ad Portum Blair. A single specimen of this shell, im good condition, was re- ceived from Major Haughton. It has some affinity to the Javanese H. helicinoides, Mousson. A perfect example (from the same source) of Helix Helfert, m., described in the ‘ Annals’ for September 1860, has a dark cor- neous epidermis, dull and lustreless, and the scattered hairs are like short dark-coloured prickles. The peristome is liliaceous white and polished. This and other specimens of the shell ob- from the Andaman Islands, Burmah, and Ceylon. 319: tained from Port Blair fully bear out the distinctive characters from H. asperella, Pfr., founded on the examination of a single dead specimen, 3. Helix Scenoma, B., nu. sp. H, testa anguste infundibuliformi-umbilicata, subgloboso-conoidea, oblique irregulariter striata, striis minutissimis spiralibus decus- sata, sub epidermide cornea albida, carina interdum fascia rufo- ~ castanea ornata; spira conoidea, apice obtusiusculo, sutura im- pressa ; anfractibus 6, convexiusculis, ultimo antice vix descen- dente, ad peripheriam obtuse subcompresso-carinato, subtus con- vexo, circa umbilicum compresso ; apertura obliqua, subquadrato- lunata, peristomate expansiusculo, margine columellari reflexi- usculo. Diam. major 16, minor 14, axis 11 mill. Var. depressa: diam. major 17, minor 15, axis 103 mill. Habitat prope Moulmein. A single specimen, slightly worn, of the type was received with Helix Gordonie. Specimens of the depressed form were collected by Col. Robert Gordon. 4. Helix brachyplecta, B., n. sp. H. testa dextrorsa, late umbilicata, discoidea, obesiuscula, minute arcuato-striata, striis minutissimis spiralibus obsolete decussata, opaca, non nitida, rubescenti-castanea, superne saturatiore, circum apicem succinea ; spira planata, apice vix prominente, sutura im- pressa; anfractibus 6, lente accrescentibus, convexiusculis, ultimo rotundato, superne prope suturam subangulato, antice descendente ; apertura obliqua, rotundato-lunari, subauriculata, intus lilacina ; peristomate expansiusculo, reflexiusculo, rufo-castaneo, marginibus remote convergentibus, plica arcuata proniinente parietali junctis, lamina longiuscula subascendente e medio plice intus recedente, plicis 2 parietalibus remotis verticalibus, quarum externa arcuata internaque curvata, laminis 6 remotioribus palatalibus, quarum superiore et basali tenuibus et 4 medianis incrassatis, foveatis ; umbilico lato, concavo. Diam. major 22, minor 18, axis 8 mill. Habitat ad ripas fluvii Attaran prope Moulmein. Teste Col. R. Gordon. : An obese dextrorse Plectopylis, bearmg, in some degree, the same relation in form to H. refuga, Gould, that H. Charpentieri, Pfr., does to H. Rivolit, Fér.; but the interior parietal and pa- latal laminze and plicee differ widely from those of the shell from Phye Than, referred to, in the ‘Annals’ for April 1860, as a dextrorse variety of H. refuga, and from all the other species which have come under my inspection, including two new forms discovered by Mr. W. T. Blanford in Ava and Pegu. 320 Mr. W. H. Benson on new Land-Shells 5. Helix Aspides, B.,n. sp. H. testa obtecte perforata, orbiculato-depressa, vix striatula, laevigata, polita, cornea, subdiaphana ; spira convexiuscula, subplanata, apice elevatiuscula, sutura leviter impressa, submarginata ; anfractibus 6, vix convexiusculis, lente accrescentibus, ultimo demum latiore ; apertura obliqua, late lunata, peristomate breviter patente, intus incrassato albido, subtus latiore, margine superiore prominente valde arcuato, basali arcuatim bisinuato, columellari brevissimo, superne reflexiusculo, pariete tenuissime calloso. Diam. major 11, minor 9, axis 5 mill. Habitat This shell may at once be distinguished from the Burmese H. Petasus, B., and the allied forms, by the white, thickened, and expanded inner edge of the peristome, the sinuate basal margin, and the somewhat wide superior margin of the aperture. A single specimen was sent by Mr. W. Theobald for examina- tion, without any indication of the locality, which may possibly. be Burmese. 6. Helix fritillata, B., n. sp. H., testa perspective umbilicata, depresso-subconoidea, arcuatim cos- tulato-striata, subtus leeviore polita, superne striis confertis spirali- bus impressis decussata, interstitiis conspicue quadrato-granulatis, pallide cornea; spira convexa, subconoidea, apice obtuso, leevi- gato, sutura profunda; anfractibus 6, angustis, lente accrescenti- bus, convexis, ultimo demum latiusculo, extus depresso, antice vix descendente, subtus valde convexo, circa umbilicum excavato ; apertura obliqua, oblique semiovato-lunata, peristomate superne tenui, valde arcuato, subtus breviter expansiusculo, arcuato, extus marginato, marginibus remotioribus. Diam. major 13, minor’12, axis 7 mill. Habitat in regione Peguensi. A single specimen, belonging to the Museum of the Asiatic Society of Calcutta, was received for examination. In the ‘Annals of Natural History’ for September 1860, Helix consepta, B., was founded on a single specimen found at Damatha, near Moulmein, by Major Haughton. I have since found a specimen of the same. shell in Col. Robert Gordon’s collection, made at Moulmein ; and a dwarf variety from Pegu belongs to the Museum of the Asiatic Society of Calcutta. 7. Helix phyllophila, B.,n.sp. | H. testa vix perforata, trochiformi, tenui, superne sericea, oblique stria- tula, subtus subnitente, utrinque (sub lente) striis confertissimis undulatis minutissime ornata, translucente, pallide cornea; spira conica, apice acutiusculo, sutura impressiuscula; anfractibus 63, convexiusculis, ultimo carinato; apertura obliqua, subquadrato- from the Andaman Islands, Burmah, and Ceylon. 321 lunari, peristomate simplici, recto, acuto, margine columellari ver- ticali, reflexo, superne latiore, umbilicum subtegente. Diam. major 5, minor 45, axis 5 mill. Habitat ad Badulla, Ceylon. Teste F. Layard. The fully grown shell was taken at Badulla, on Love-apple leaves ; and a depressed form, which appears to me to be the young, on those of Coffee-plants. A small specimen of a variety occurred at Fort M‘Donald. The species comes very near H. Infula, B., which inhabits the leaves of shrubs in Bengal and Bahar; but the subremote spiral lines, elevated on the upper and sharply impressed on the lower side in that species, are re- placed on both sides, in the shell now described, by minute and closely-set undulate striz. Helix Barrakporensis, Pfr., a shell which occurs in the Lower Himalaya, from Dehra Dhoon to Sikkim, and which the Messrs. Blanford, in a contribution to the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Caleutta, No. 288, for 1861, notice as found by Mr. R. Bruce Foote in the Kalryen Hills, near Salem, in Southern India, was obtained by Mr. I. Layard at Kandookerre, in Lower Ourah, Ceylon—a distribution equal in extent to that of Heli Hut- toni, Pfr. Mr. W. T. Blanford, in page 86 of the ‘ Annals’ for February 1863, under the heading “ Ganesella,” includes Heliw Capitium, Bens., from the Rajmiahal Hills, and H. variola, Bens., from Thayet Mio and Pegu, adding that the distinctness of the two species appears very dubious. On reference to the colouring of the two forms it is evident that “variola” is a misprint for “ Hariola.’ A comparison of the wide and depressed form of H. Hariola, as figured in Pfeiffer’s ‘ Novitates Conchologice,’ pl. 36. f. 21, 22, with a perfect example of the high conical form of H. Capitium, or with the well-drawn figures in Kiister’s edi- tion of Chemnitz, pl. 125. f.3, 4, will at once satisfy the inquirer that the two species are perfectly distinct. I feel assured that Mr. W. T. Blanford has not examined a fully-grown example of the Sicrigully shell discovered by Capt. Boys in the low ground intervening between that detached hill and the main range of the Rajmahal Hills. 8. Clausilia Bulbus, un. sp. C. testa sinistrorsa, vix rimata, oblongo-obovata, pupiformi, regula- riter oblique striata, rubenti-ferruginea ; spira obovata, superne ventricosa, versus apicem obtusum concamerata, sutura impressa ; anfractibus 54, convexiusculis, primis rapide accrescentibus, ante- penultimo tumido, penultimo decrescente, ultimo angustiore, pone aperturam impresso, subangulato, infra rotundato ; apertura vix obliqua, oblique auriformi, peristomate continuo, margine late 322 Mr. W. H. Benson on new Land- Shells. - expanso, reflexiusculo, albido-rubente, lamella superiore acuta, pro- minente, longe intus intrante, spirali, infera forti, oblique spiraliter ascendente, subcolumellari immersa ; plicis palatalibus 7, superiore valde elongata, late erecta, intus cum lamella superiore rimam angustam efformante, 6 inferioribus brevibus, subparallelibus, lunella nulla. Diam. anfract. antepenultimi 9, ultimi supra aperturam 5, axis 23 mill.; apert. (oblique) longa 8, lata 7 mill. Habitat ad ripas fluvii Attaran, non procul ab urbe Moulmein. This most singular form in the genus was found by Col. Robert Gordon in the same locality as Opisthoporus Gordon, Helix brachyplecta, and H. Gordonie—shells which escaped the ob- servation of former collectors in that rich district. The bul- bous pupiform figure of the shell at once distinguishes it from Cl. Philippiana, Pfr., an inhabitant of the Farm Caves, as well as from any other known species. The upper lamella runs spirally up the aperture, forming a narrow slit between it and the upper knife-like plica. 9. Bulimus Staliz, B., n. sp. B. testa rimato-perforata, oblongo-conica, solidiuscula, oblique irre- gulariter plicatulato-striata, epidermide spiraliter confertissime striatula, castanea, strigis obliquis, sutura, basi apiceque albidis ; spira elongato-conica, apice obtusiusculo, sutura impressiuscula, nonnunquam marginata; anfractibus 7, convexiusculis, ultimo ad basin compressiusculo, antice vix ascendente ; apertura subobliqua, anguste pyriformi, intus castanea, peristomate sensim dilatato, vix reflexiusculo, albido, marginibus remotis, non conniventibus, co- lumellari lato, callo obliquo superne castaneo junctis. Long. 20, diam. 7 mill. Habitat ad Boralande. Found by Mr. F. Layard in the district of Upper Ourah, in Ceylon. Its nearest ally is Bulimus proletarius, Pfr., which was taken by Mr. Layard at Bootelle and Kaluganga, 10. Opisthoporus Gordoni, B., n. sp. O. testa late et concave umbilicata, depressa, discoidea, confertim striata, sub lente striis minutis spiralibus, nonnullis elevatiusculis, decussata, albida, strigis fulguratis castaneis fasciaque fusca den- tata ad peripheriam ornata; spira planata, apice non elevato ob- tuso, sutura profunda, demum canaliculata; anfractibus 5, grada- tim accrescentibus, convexis, ultimo rotundato, antice descendente, pone alam breviter solutg, 4 millim. pone aperturam spiraculo suturali brevi retrorsum spectante, nonnunquam subobsoleto, munito; apertura valde obliqua, circulari; peristomate duplici, interno prope anfractum penultimum breviter inciso, exteriore superne et ad dextram angulatim expanso, reflexiusculo, ala On Natural and Artificial Section in some Chetopod Annelids. 323 - intus concava insuper anfractum penultimum antrorsum ascendente munito. Diam. major 22-23, minor 17-19, axis 5-6 mill. Habitat non procul ab urbe Moulmein. Invenit Col. R. Gordon. The last whorl is slightly solute behind the wing, which runs forward up the penultimate whorl, to which it adheres. This is the first species of the genus which has been discovered in Bur- mah. ‘Two specimens were found on the banks of the Attaran River, near limestone rocks, fifteen miles from its mouth. In one shell the sutural spiracle is worn down to the surface. The operculum was not obtained. Animal of Sophina. I am indebted to Col. R. Gordon for observations on the animal of Sophina. It proves to be acrommatous, and allied to Helix, from which, with reference to the anomalous slit in the columella, it may be separated on grounds as decided as those which suffice for the distinction of the genera Achatina and Streptaxis. Sophina.—Animal with four tentacula, two long and two short; the eyes situated on the summits of the larger pair. Colour greyish-blue, with a yellow tint, and a dark spot between the greyish-blue tentacula, the-dark colour extending along the neck, ; Cheltenham, April 6, 1863. XXXVIL—On Natural and Artificial Section in some Chetopod Annelids. By W.C. Minor*. THE circumstances of spontaneous fission have been observed in so few species of Annelids at present as to make every additional observation of value, even though only confirmatory of what is already known upon that subject. This consideration, and the fact that all views of its nature m the Oligocheta seem to be based upon the observation of one species (Stylaria proboscidea), have tempted me to publish the following brief investigations, however they may want any very special novelty to give them value. It is now nearly one hundred years since the distinguished Danish naturalist, Otto Fr. Miiller, studied the phenomena of spontaneous fission in the freshwater Naidst+; and his able little * From Silliman’s American Journal for January 1863. + Trembley had discovered it long before this, as he observes in his ‘Mémoires p. s. a Vhist. d’un genre de Polypes d’eau douce,’ 1744; and Roesel, in his ‘ Insektenbelustigungen,’ describes the united parent and bud; but the former did no more than observe the fact, and the latter wholly misunderstood what he saw. 324 Mr. W.C. Minor on Natural and Artificial Section work ‘von Wiirmern des siissen und salzigen Wassers,’ Kopen- hagen, 1771, largely devoted to that subject, shows that he failed only where the imperfect means at his command led him astray. The multiplication by artificial section had been observed before that, both in the Naids and other animals, and had awakened a eood deal of general interest ; but the multiplication by sponta- neous fission seems to have been very nearly, if not wholly dis- regarded at that time. Nor has its occurrence in the freshwater worms received, since then, the investigation that it seems to de- mand; for, with the exception of a discussion by Schultze and Leuckart upon some of the particulars, and the significance of this phenomenon in relation to budding, some ten years ago, and a sweeping denial of its occurrence, or, at least, of its vital and systematic nature, by Dr.Williams, about the same time, no one, so far as I am aware, has published any extended observa- tions upon the fissiparity of the freshwater Naids since the time of Miiller*. And yet the statements of Dr. Williams, in regard to both artificial and spontaneous fission, are such as to suggest at once the importance of a re-examination of the whole subject; while the great interest given to this question by the remarkable speculations of Steenstrup, together with the interesting varie- ties of the phenomenon as observed in the marine worms by Quatrefages, Edwards, Frey and*Leuckart, and others, seem to demand a more complete knowledge than we as yet possess of its occurrence in the freshwater group. I may here remark that the European species chiefly studied hitherto, Stylaria proboscidea, has not come under my obserya- tion, nor am I aware that it has been found in America. Four species of Naids common in this vicinity, Stylaria (Pristina) longiseta, Nats rivulosa, and Dero limosa, found in fresh water, and a marine Enchytreus (LE. triventralopectinatus) have been the principal subjects of my investigation. In regard to the first of these, it may be questioned whether our species is identical with that described by Ehrenberg (‘Symbolz Physicze’) as Pristina longiseta ; for his description is too brief to be of specific value. As, however, the characters given by D’?Udekem in his “Nouvelle Classification des Annélides Sétigéres Abranches ” (Mémoires de VAcad. Royale de Belgique,’ 1859, t. xxxi.) apply equally to the American species, I am compelled to regard it as the same ft. * Gruithuisen remarks, in his “‘ Anatomie der geziingelten Naide”’ (Nov. Act. Nat. Cur. t. xi. p. 243), only that it is uncommon to find a Naid with- out buds of the second generation, and refers to Miller for the details of their formation. Since writing this, I have seen, in Leuckart’s valuable yearly report in the Archiv f. Naturgeschichte for 1861, a notice of Claus’s observations on fission in Chetogaster, which, so far as there given, I can confirm. + D’Udekem remarks : “ Je n’ai pas adopté le genre Stylarta admis par an some Chetopod Annelids. 325 The second species, Nats rivulosa, already described by Leidy (Journal Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad. 1850, vol. ii. pt. 1. p. 43) very closely resembles the European Nais elinguis, with which D’ Ude- kem regards it as identical. The third species, Dero limosa, has also been described by Leidy (Proc. Acad. Philad. 1857, vol. v. p- 226), and, though overlooked by D’Udekem, appears to be distinct from the European form of the same genus. The fourth, Enchytreus triventralopectinatus, I have not been able to identify with any species described in works at my command, and have therefore named from the three anterior pairs of ventral combs after which the dorsal combs begin. ‘This character appears to distinguish it from E. socialis, if I may judge from the figure given by Leidy (Journ. Acad. Philad.). It has no eyes. The pharynx extends nearly to the fourth ventral or the first dorsal combs, from which a narrow cesophagus continues to a little back of the sixth ventral combs. Here a gradual enlargement of the alimentary canal occurs, ending abruptly just back of the eighth, in a narrow twisted tube ; and this last gradually enlarges, at the ninth ventral combs, into a moderate-sized alimentary canal, in which I observed nothing specially marked. The entire length of this Naid was about 3 inch. The occurrence of spontaneous fission in Stylaria (Nais) pro- boscidea is described as follows by Miller :—“If a virgin Naid, as I may call it, with 16 or more pairs of hair combs, or 20 or more pairs of hook combs [there are 4 pairs of hook combs anterior to the first hair or dorsal combs as in Nats and Dero], be carefully observed, it will be seen that its anal ring slowly elongates, and, after some days, appears to be transversely marked within into rudiments of future rimgs*. In each of these divi- Lamarck et Ehrenberg, parce que cette espece ne différe des autres Nais que par l’allongement tres grand de la lévre supérieure. Ce caractére n’étant accompagné d’aucune modification importante dans la forme des autres organes, je ne puis le considérer comme assez tranché pour servir a former un genre nouveau.” ‘There is, however, a marked difference in the form and position of the cordiform anterior enlargement of the alimentary canal, which even the statements and figures of Miller and Gruithuisen indicate, between the Naids with a long upper lip or proboscis and those with a short one; and the manner of fission differs in these two groups, as will be shown. Lamarck’s genus Stylaria is therefore a good one. Ehren- berg’s division of this genus, however, based upon the absence of eyes, is unfounded ; for I have seen Nats rivulosa lose them without any other apparent change, and Agassiz has stated that this occurs as a part of the normal development in many Naids. * Schultze considers Miiller in error as to the position at which fission takes place, because he describes it as occurring in a segment, and not between two. The difference of statement, however, is simply verbal, as Miller speaks of “die Zwischenraume der Borsten oder die Gelenke,” p. 26, and in many other places shows very plainly that such is his meaning. 326 Mr. W.C. Minor on Natural and Artificial Section sions beneath the skin, germs of hooks and hairs appear ; and the pulsations of the artery are evident while the food forces a way through them. The hooks and hairs gradually come through the skin in succession from before backward, while, the rings enlarging, the Naid increases considerably in length. While in this way new segments and their contents are forming within the anal ring, on the other side [anteriorly] of it a strongly marked transverse line, different from those just mentioned, ap- pears, and extends across the whole width of the animal. The angles formed at the sides of the body project, and on the top a slight projection is evident, which gradually becomes a distinct proboscis, while, finally, eyes appear back of this fission. Thus the Naid becomes a mother.”.... “‘ Frequently one may see in the anterior half of the elongated anal ring of the mother Naid a second ring-formation similar to the one just described.”.. .. “This is not all. Hardly has the second bud acquired the length of one mature ring than a third bud appears before it; and I have even seen a fourth.”.... “ Further, not only may a parent and its four offspring thus appear, but the buds themselves may give rise to new buds, their terminal joints forming new buds as they themselves were formed. Hence we may find a parent with its children and grandchildren attached to its body.” (Op. cit. pp: 34, 36.) Miller afterwards gives his observations upon a single Naid from the 20th of May to the 9th of June. During this time it gave off the buds observed posterior to the 17th pair of combs, after which a formation of rings began, without any trace of separation, until the body was elongated to over 40 pairs of combs. About this time a fission occurred between the 21st and 22nd pairs of combs. Fission occurring in this way after an elongation of the body I shall speak of as the “renewal of fission.” Further observation of individual Naids led him to conclude that each bud is formed one joint anterior to its pre- decessor, that there is thus a gradual reduction of the parent segments till a certain point; that then a re-formation of rings takes place, and an elongation of the body of the Naid to re- commence this circle of fission. Schultze, in his article “‘ Ueber die Fortpflanzung durch Thei- jung bei Nais proboscidea”’ (Archiv f. Naturgeschichte, 1849, t. xv. p. 293) confirms the statements of Miller as to the passage over of one of the parental segments to each bud*, though he was not fortunate enough to observe the recommencement of fission in the elongated Naid. He observes also (p. 801) that, contrary * Leuckart at first doubted the correctness of this view (“ Ueber die ungeschlechtliche Vermehrung bei Nais proboscidea;” Wiegm. Arch, 1857), but has since been conyinced of its justice. in some Chetopod Annelids. 327 to what Steenstrup had supposed from the analogy of marine worms, there is no relation to metagenesis in the phenomena of budding in this Naid; for he had never seen generative organs in the separated buds. He had, however, never been able to keep these buds long alive. He also had seen (p. 304) sexual organs in the parent while budding, though he had never seen well-developed sperm and ripe eggs present during this process. The phenomena of fission in Stylaria longiseta, so far as I have observed them, confirm the statements of Miiller and Schultze in substance; for there is nearly always a passage over of one parental ring to each bud; and since fission takes place, as I have seen, while the parent has eggs and sperm, and I have never seen the fullest development of the latter in the buds, I cannot believe that there is any such metagenetic relation im this process as has been observed in Sy/lis and allied genera. In Nais rivulosa, however, the facts are somewhat different ; for in several continued observations of individual Naids, ex- tending in one case over twelve weeks, I have known but once or twice of a passage of the parental rings into the bud; while, after an elongation of the parent body, I have very uniformly seen fission recommence in the point at which buds were given off before, or at some point posterior to it, and once anterior ; and finally, although I have seen fission taking place between each of the rings from the 15th to the 22nd, I have not been able to discover that it does so in any order. But here, as in Stylaria longiseta, I have found no metagenesis in the fission. The facts obtained in regard to fission in Dero limosa are un- fortunately meagre, the comparative slowness of the merismatic function making the only two series of observations carried out proportionately unfruitful. In none, however, of the succeeding buds, from Aug. 15th to Oct. 10th, was there any carrying off of parental segments by the separating parts, nor was there anything like metagenesis observed. My observations upon Hnchytreus triventralopectinatus are similarly scanty, but are just sufficient to confirm and extend the facts observed in the two other short-lipped Naids. In all the cases observed, the separation was of a part wholly new- formed, without inclusion of the older segments of the parental body. it is evident, from the above facts, that in Stylaria longiseta, as Miiller and Schultze have shown is the case in S. proboscidea, the point of fission moves regularly forward, ring by ring, and more commonly, in the former Naid, from the 16th to the 12th pairs of hook combs, though the extremes between which I have known it to occur are the 17th and 10th (to judge from Miiller’s account, it occurs further back in the latter Naid) ; 828 Mr. W.C. Minor on Natural and Artificial Section further, that in Nais rivulosa, and, as far as I know, in Dero limosa and in Enchytreus triventralopectinatus, all of which have short upper lips, the buds are given off at one point, though that point may vary in different Naids of the same species, or in one and the same Naid at different times. In the latter case, the variation occurs as part of a peculiar form of fission of which I shall speak again. Both ‘‘ parting” (Theilung) and “ budding” (Knospenbildung) occur, then, in the Naids ; and it may be added that the former appears to be peculiar to the genus Sty/aria, or to the proboscis-bearing forms. I may here remark that the distinction made by Schultze and others between “Theilung” and “ Knospenbildung,” though con- venient, does not seem to me a fundamental one. The mere inclusion of a portion of parental tissue in the bud does not of itself make an essential distinction between this and a wholly new-formed, but otherwise similar, bud; nor have I been able to see any histological or functional differences. The very fact that individuals having the same genetic relations to the parent stock are in one Naid (N. rivulosa) always or commonly pro- duced by the so-called “budding,” and im another genus (Sty- laria) by the so-called “ parting,” leads to this view. Nor, as I think, though observations are largely wanting in that direction, have the two yet been shown to be functionally different in true metagenetic processes. They are two varieties of one process ; and it would be interesting in many ways to know exactly how the various species of Naids already known follow distinctly the one or the other plan, or tend to merge them yet more com- pletely as one*. A little detail will show how closely identical the two forms of bud-formation are. In “ parting ” (‘“ Theilung ”), as has already to a great extent been described by Schultze, we find that, from the parental ring as a fixed point, there is a continuous ring- formation and elongation backward; and that anteriorly to it there is a limited elongation of the general body, also by ring- formation from before backwards. There is, then, unlimited erowth backward from the fixed point, and a limited or defined erowth backward toward the fixed point from the place of fission. The parental included ring, the most anterior of the series, is here the fixed point. In “budding” (“ Knospenbildung”’), the most anterior ring of the series also, though a wholly new-formed one, becomes the fixed point, from which, by continuous ring- formation, the Naid elongates backward, and towards which a * T have known “ budding ”’ to intercalate once in a series of fissions m Stylaria longiseta (May 31), and I have also known “ parting ” to interrupt a series of buddings in Nais rivulosa (Sept. 25), which leads me to expect that in some Naids both processes may be regularly present. an some Chetopod Annelids. 329 limited series of ring-formations proceed from the point of fis- sion*, The resemblance between the two is perfect ; and as the fixed point is not related to specializations of the alimentary tube as I at first supposed, and is in Stylaria proboscidea, where it occurs by “ parting,” four hook combs back of the mouth, as it is in Nais and Dero, where it occurs by budding, while in S. longiseta it is six hook combs back, the genetic relations of the two processes, in these genera at least, are completely one. But, as I have already said, though the distinction appears unessen- tial in the genera I have examined, the terms are convenient, and, as merely descriptive terms, are used here. The “ commencement of fission” was observed in a large pro- portion of the buds given off from the individuals of Stylaria and Nazs which were under observation, and the result is given in the following table. Stylaria. Nais. Between 12-13th combs in none. Between 17-]8th combs in 3 sa 13-14 me 2 a uy LS=19 45 3 ee en se. 19°20 SP! Ne ee oe 1 2029] TL a5 16-17 a 1 a eel? Be 3 It is evident that fission does not begin at a fixed point; nor have I been able to discover any relation between the place of its occurrence and the time of the year, temperature, &c. Now, while fission may take place by gradual reduction of the Naid Stylaria, between the 10th and 11th hook combs, the com- mencement of fission has not been known forward of the 13th. In Nais rivulosa, also, fission has been observed as far forward as the 15-1] 6th, while its commencement has not been noted an- terior to the 17th hook combs. This is all the difference between the commencement of fission and continued fission, notwith- standing the fact that, whether the former is introductory to a series of ‘ partings” or of “buddings,” its bud resembles that produced by what I shall call the “ renewal of fission.” That the “renewal of fission,” im a Naid elongated after re- duction by fission, is a somewhat peculiar form of fission would hardly have been known from observations on Stylaria alonet. * There is an interesting analogy between this process in the Naids and the embryonic growth of Terebella, as described by Milne-Edwards. He has remarked (*‘ Obs. sur le Développement des Annélides,” Ann. des Se. Nat. 1845, sér. 3. t. iii.) that the first defined part is not the cephalic nor the anal, but the oesophageal, and that growth takes place both anterior and posterior to this by succession from before backward. Other specula- tions and analogies suggest themselves here, but are, im our present know- ledge, wholly premature. + Yet Miiller seems to notice these two forms of fission, and says that, “though at first view different, they are fundamentally the same.” (Op. cit. p. 38.) Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 22 330 Mr. W.C. Minor on Natural and Artificial Section The following summary will illustrate this. In Stylaria longiseta, one example (April 16) was reduced to 10 rings, grew out but little, and divided between the 12-13th. When again reduced to 10 rings, it grew out much longer, but renewed fission at the same point as before. It was then reduced to 1] rings, and, growing out, again divided between the 12-13th. One of its buds (May 14) began fission between the 15-16th, was reduced to 12 rings, then grew out and recommenced fission between the 14—15th, and was being reduced again when lost. In another case, the Naid was reduced to 12, grew out and renewed fission at the 14—15th, was again reduced to 12, and, growing out again, renewed fission at the same point. It was a third time reduced to 12, and growing out again a third time, renewed fission be- tween the 14-15th hook-combs. It was then reduced to 11, when very unfortwnately it was lost. In Nazs rivulosa, an example that had been giving off buds just back of the 19th ring, in- creased to something like 33, and then again renewed fission between the 19-20th. Another example, that had given off buds at the 15th, grew out to over 35, and then renewed fission at the 15-16th. After two or three buds had been given off, it again elongated, and then renewed fission between the 20-21st hook combs. Now, while in Stylaria the “ renewal of fission” appears to differ from the commencement of fission, with which I believe it is essentially homologous (except by not occurring as far back), which may be owing to the want of fuller observation, and while in this genus it might be supposed to be merely a means of continuing the process of “ parting,” which must otherwise soon cease, we find that it occurs in Nais rivulosa without any change of the point of budding, without any apparent necessity, without performing the very function that we might judge from Stylaria was its peculiarity. And what is more, it also occurs in Nais rivulosa for the performance of this very function. This fact suggests something more than a physiological meaning in the “renewal of fission.” While the phenomena connected with it seem to show that the distinction between this, the ‘ renewal of fission,’ and other forms of fission is more than a difference of function, I am far from claiming that there is any fundamental difference, like that between metagenetic and monogenetic fis- sions. I may add that I have not been able to discover that the point of its occurrence bears any relation to the number of buds already given off *. The sum of the preceding observations tends to show that the “renewal of fission” has some special characters that suggest a * There are some other differences to be considered in a future paper upon the histological nature of fission. in some Chetopod Annelids. 331 wider inquiry as to its true nature ; that the two forms of fission already known as “ parting” and “ budding” both occur in the Naids, and occur so as to prove their morphologic and physio- logic identity ; that “parting” appears to characterize the Naids with a prolonged upper lip (the genus Stylaria), while “budding” appears to characterize those with a short one (Nais, Dero, Enchytreus, and Chetogaster, according to Claus) ; that the bud produced by both these processes is identical with the parent ; that as the buds are here, so far as I know, identical with their parents in function and structure, there is no metagenetic fission; and that therefore fission in these Naids, whether by “ parting” or by “ budding,” is correlative to genesis in the great function of maintenance of the species, and not a mere step in the history of the individual*. It may be worth while to refer briefly here to the power of reproduction from injuries commonly attributed to these little beings, especially as Dr. Williams, in his “ Report on the British Annelida” (Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Se. 1851, p. 247), after quoting a summary of Bonnet’s well-known experiments, says, “ On the authority of hundreds of observations laboriously repeated at every season, the author of this report can declare with deliberate firmness that there is not one word of truth in the above state- ment.” It may be presumed from this, that Dr. Williams felt the necessity of thorough and very careful investigations before contradicting the statements so often repeated upon this subject ; and I cannot doubt that his experiments have uniformly failed. But, from the almost uniform success of my own, I should won- der that they have done so, had not others reported complete or * «Fyrom the analogy of the two species (Arenicola and Nats) on which the author’s observations have been chiefly conducted, the conclusion may be deduced that the ‘fission of the body,’ in every other species of Anne- lida in which it occurs, has for object in like manner to protect and incu- bate the ova.’’.... ‘It becomes the last act of the parental worm, since the portions into which the body is subdivided by fission never take food.” .... “It is a catastrophe in which every autumn involves the whole com- munity.” (Williams, Rep. Brit. Annel. pp. 249, 250.) I should be far from wishing to extend the conclusions I have made to all other Annelids by mere analogy; but my observations are, at ‘least, wholly incompatible with a general application of Dr. Williams’s state- ments to the Naids. The exact circle of life and its duration I have not determined, nor do I feel certain that any of the general statements (see Leidy, ‘ Flora and Fauna within Living Animals,’ ‘On Stylaria fossularis,’ and Williams at large) are absolutely correct ; for I have known the process of fission to go on in winter, when the Naids were kept in a warm place, while I have also seen what appeared to be a loss of this power, as shown in badly formed and incomplete buds occurring in the warmer parts of the year. aa% 332 On Natural and Artificial Section in some Chetopod Annelids. partial failures in similar experiments. (See Dugés, Ann. des Se. 1828, sér.1. t. xv.) It must be remembered, however, that such evidence is wholly negative, and cannot weigh with the positive statements of observers like Miller, Réaumur, and Dugés. In regard to my own observations, I may state briefly that in Stylaria, Nais, and Dero I have hardly ever failed to have the head reproduced, and that the anal end has not only been reproduced in these genera, but I have seen it reproduced in Enchytreus, in Lumbricus, in Fabricia, and even in a Nereis common on our coast*; that in the vast majority of these cases I have seen food taken again; and in all, I have seen the in- current anal stream, which ceases while either end is closed, recommence. From these and other observations, 1 am inclined to believe that this power is far more general in the class than is yet supposed. That this power plays a part in the natural economy of life, the healing fragments of Naids that I have found in our pools is a proof. When saved from the attacks of Chetogaster, even the shortest, headless and almost immoveable fragments may go on to as full a recovery as when preserved by the observer. In one instance I found (Aug. 21st) what were apparently five segments of some Naid’s trunk, the two ends of which had closed and elongated. This had been preserved for some time ; for the sur-cesophageal brain was well-formed anteriorly, and the germs of hook combs were well-defined posteriorly. It went through a rapid growth, developed eyes about the 22nd, opened the newly formed mouth about the 23rd, was supplied with food, and, growing long, divided between the 15—16th hook combs, and then gave off five buds in succession at that point till Oct. 8th, when it was lost. The thin film with which the Naids line the jars in which they are kept may be seen to serve, there at least, as a protection against the attacks of the prowling carnivorous Chetogasters ; and once beneath this, a fragment, like the one just referred to, may be preserved till the eyes and mouth are formed—a period usually of a fortnight. And though we should hardly have * Careless observations, made a number of years ago, led me to think that the Nereids are destitute of the power of recovery from injuries ; and Williams states that they always sloughed away, ring after ring, in his ex- periments. Réaumur remarks, “Les expériences que j’ai fait faire sur des millepieds de mer, d’une toute autre longueur, sur de ces millepieds longs de sept & huit pouces, n’ont pas eu le méme succés : mais les essais n’ont peut-étre pas été encore assez répétés ni assez suivis.”” (Mém. pour s. a hist. des Insectes, t. vi. p.59.) Thinking the latter statement very probable, I retried the experiments, during the past year, with more care, and in every case with success. Dr. A. Gerstiicker on the Honey-Bee. 333 expected a mere piece of five segments to be preserved as this was, even though endowed with the power of recovery, yet we cannot regard so extended and remarkable a function as this appears to be as useless or inoperative in the natural course of Naid-life. XXXVII.—On the Geographical Distribution and Varieties of the Honey-Bee, with Remarks upon the Exotic Honey-Bees of the Old World. By Dr. A. GurstAckEr. [Concluded from p. 283. ] Arter some remarks on the singular fact that, in Africa, which generally exhibits such a remarkable uniformity in its insect- fauna, the geographical distribution and varieties of the Honey- Bee are more complicated than elsewhere, the author proceeds to the consideration of the diffusion of the Bee in America. The American form is identical with the dark-coloured North- European one. In some American countries, for example, Brazil, the Bee is known to have been introduced from Europe ; but it has been questioned whether this applies equally to other regions, such as North America, where the Honey-Bee has existed much longer. With the exception of Olivier (Enc. Méth. Ins. i. p. 49), who doubted the identity.of the American Bee with the European species, the best European entomologists have been in favour of the introduction of this insect from Europe into America. Dr. Gerstacker quotes Latreille*, St. Fargeaut, Westwood{, and Lacordaire § in support of this statement. Liatreille states, on the authority of Bosc, that in North America “the savages know that they are in proximity to the possessions of the Anglo-Ameri- cans by the presence of the societies of these insects.” Among the native American writers the author quotes Thomas Jefferson, who, in his ‘Notes on the State of Virginia’ (1787, p. 121), speaks as follows :—“The Honey-Bee is not a native of our continent. The Indians concur with us in the tradition that it was brought from Europe; but when, and by whom, we know not. The Bees have generally extended themselves into the country a little im advance of the white settlers. The Indians therefore call them ‘the white man’s fly,” and consider their approach as indicating the approach of the settlements of the whites.” Prince Maximilian of Wied (Reise in Nord-Amerika, i. p. 180 & i. p. 846) speaks im similar terms of the introduction of the * Humboldt, Obs. Zool. p. 299, and Ann. Mus. p. 167. + Hist. Nat. Ins. Hymén. i. p. 401. } Introd. ii. p. 285. § Introd. a ’Entom. p. 543. ws 834 Dr. A. Gerstiicker on the Geographical Distribution Honey-Bee into the United States, and adds that “it is now diffused far up the Missouri, and its honey is cut out of the hollow trees by Indians and whites.” John Josselyn (Voyage to New England, 1663, p. 120) says, “‘ The Honey-Bees are car- ried over by the English, and thrive there (in New England) exceedingly ;” and Benjamin Smith Barton, in a learned and im- partial memoir entitled “ An Inquiry into the Question whether the Apis mellifica, or true Honey-Bee, is a native of America” (Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc. ii. pp. 251-261, Philadelphia, 1793), expresses himself decidedly in favour of the introduction of the Bee from Europe, and supports his opmion by the most con- vincing proofs. Authors have not been wanting, however, especially among the North Americans, who have endeavoured to give their country the credit of the original possession of so valuable an insect as the Bee. The arguments of Van der Heuvel, in his memoir “Qn American Honey-Bees” (Silliman’s Journal, ui. pp. 79- 85, 1821), already sufficiently refuted by Brun (Bienenzeitung, 1858, pp. 87-44), are evidently chiefly derived from a treatise by a Dr. Belknap, published in 1792, and entitled ‘A Discourse intended to commemorate the discovery of America by Christo- pher Columbus.’ An appendix to this latter memoir contains an argument against the European origin of the North American Honey-Bees, supported on the following facts :—1. Columbus, on his first return from the Antilles, when threatened with de- struction in a storm, inclosed a report of his voyage in a capsule of wax which he obtained at Hispaniola. 2. According to Purchas, the Mexicans had to furnish a certam quantity of honey yearly as tribute to their kings, even before the arrival of the Spaniards. 3. Also according to Purchas, when Ferdinand de Soto, in the year 1540, came to Chiaha in Florida, he found amongst the stores of the Indians of that place a pot full of Bees’ honey. At this time no Europeans were settled in America, except in Mexico and Peru; whence the author concludes that, before the arrival of Europeans, the Honey-Bee must have existed as far north as Florida. With regard to the first case, as indi- cated by Barton, the wax used by Columbus might have been obtained from plants, such as Myrica cerifera; but indigenous Honey-Bees of the genera Trigona and Melipona existed in the Antilles before their discovery by Europeans. Clavigero was acquainted with five Mexican species of Honey-Bees, and we now know at least sixteen; so that the Mexicans could have had no want of honey even before the arrival of Cortez. Thus both the first evidences adduced by Belknap come to nothing. An apparently stronger proof of the early existence of the true Honey-Bee in Mexico, which has escaped both Belknap and and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 335 Barton, is to be found in the work of Hernandez on New Spain (Franc. Hernandez, Rerum medicarum Noye Hispanie The- saurus, Rome, 1648, lib. ix. p. 333. cap. 21). Hernandez says, “ Multa mellis genera in Nova Hispania mihi adhue observare licuit, non loco solum, veluti vetere orbe, verum ipsa materia et apum diversis generibus distantia. Primum est Hispaniensi per omnia simile idemque et quod ab apibus Hispanicis congeneribus sponte in cavitatibus arborum fabricetur, quas Indi sectas in apiaria reponunt ac congerunt.”? Such evidence as this, from an observer only seventy years later than the conquest of Mexico, would almost seem to be convincing; but it may be urged, on the one hand, that there had been time enough for the intro- duction of the European Bee into the colony and for its disper- sion, and on the other, with more probability, that, as Hernandez had no pretensions to be a practised zoologist, he mistook one of the native species for the true Honey-Bee. This is rendered more probable by the existence in Mexico of a species of Meli- pona (still undescribed) intermediate between M. rufiventris and bicolor, Lepel., which so closely resembles the European Honey- Bee, at least in form and size, that an unpractised observer of the sixteenth century might easily have confounded them. With regard to Belknap’s third proof, Barton thinks that, on account of the occurrence of indigenous Bees (Melipona, Tri- gona), the pot of honey found by Ferdinand de Soto in Florida has no more value as evidence than the Mexican tribute. But this notion is without foundation, as we have no evidence of the existence of such Bees in Florida. It is, however, not impro- bable ; for as only one species of Melipona (the Apis atrata, Fab.) is known from North America, whilst the northern extension of the Melipone and Trigone otherwise terminates with the Antilles and Mexico, we may assume with great probability that this single species, which extends beyond the proper district of its group, will exist in the southernmost portion of North America. But however this may be, Purchas’s statement can by no means lead to the assumption that the European Bee existed in Florida in the time of Ferdinand de Soto, as is shown by another report, by a Portuguese nobleman who accompanied that general (A Relation of the Invasion and Conquest of Florida by the Spaniards under Fernando de Soto). In this it is stated that “The In- dians of Chiaha had a great quantity of butter or, rather, fat, in pots, as fluid as oil; they said it was bear’s fat. We also found there walnut-oil, as clear as the fat, and a pot of honey, although neither before nor afterwards did we find either bees or honey in the whole of Florida.” Barton also quotes a statement of Wil- liam Bartram’s which directly proves the introduction of the Honey-Bee into Florida, He says, “When Bartram was in 386 Dr. A. Gersticker on the Geographical Distribution West Florida, in the year 1775, a beehive, the only one in the country far or near, was shown to him as a curiosity; it bad been brought there from England when the English, in 1768, took possession of Pensacola. In Hast Florida the Honey-Bee is certainly now (in 1793) met with in a wild state, and it has been known there for a long time, perhaps a hundred years ;” but Bartram’s investigations convinced him that it was not in- digenous there. Although the date of the introduction of the Honey-Bee into North America cannot be fixed, two circum- stances mentioned by Barton indicate clearly that it must have been introduced by the whites. One of these is the name of the “white man’s fly,” given to the insect by the Indians; the other the fact that when John Elliott was translating the Bible into the language of the Indians, no expression existed in the latter for either wax or honey. However probable it: may appear, from these considerations, that the Honey-Bee was introduced into North America from Europe, we still want the certain historical proof of the intro- duction, and of the time when it took place; nevertheless the following historical evidence renders the fact of the introduction from Europe not in the least doubtful :— 1. According to Barton (loc. cit. supra, p.251), Penn, the founder of Pennsylvania, does not mention the Bee im a letter of details to his friends, in the year 1683; had it been a native of Pennsylvania, he would not have omitted so useful an insect from his catalogue of Pennsylvanian animals. ‘The older Swedish writers upon Pennsylvania also do not mention the Bee. 2. Lawson (Voyage to Carolina, 1704) does not notice the Bee amongst the animals indigenous to Carolina. 38. Barton (/oc. cit. p- 258) says, “The Honey-Bee did not exist in Kentucky when we first became acquainted with the country. But about 1780, a beehive was brought by a Colonel Herrod to the Falls of the Ohio, since when these insects have increased extraordinarily. Not long since a hunter found thirty wild swarms in one day.” 4. Barton further states that ‘“ Honey-Bees were not found in the Jenessie district of New York either at the time when it was first visited or for a considerable time afterwards. Recently (towards 1793) two beehives were introduced, and these will undoubtedly soon spread over the neighbourhood.” 5. D. B. Warden (Statistical, Political, and Historical Account of the United States, 1819, vol. i. p. 189), quoting from Bradbury, says, “ Before the year 1797 the Honey-Bee was not found to the west of the Mississippi; they are now seen as high up as the Maha nation on the Missouri, having proceeded westward 600 miles in fourteen years.” 6, 7. Humboldt, speaking of the wax pro- duced in Cuba, says that it is produced chiefly by the European and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 337 Bee, which has been much cultivated since the year 1772*. The Bee was introduced from Florida. 8. According to Ramon de la Sagra (Historia de la isla de Cuba, 1831, p. 80) the introduction of the Honey-Bee into Cuba took place from Florida in 1764; and in that author’s ‘ Natural History of Cuba’ (i. 7. p. 827) Apis mellifica is mentioned as introduced into Cuba. 9. Ulloa, as quoted by Olivier (Enc. méth. Insectes, i. p. 49), gives the date 1764 for the introduction of the Honey-Bee into Cuba, and de- scribes the extraordinary rapidity with which the insects multi- plied and spread themselves over the country. 10. Moreau de Saint-Méry (Desc. de la partie Frangaise de l’ile Saint- Domingue, tome ni. p. 112, 1798) gives the date 1781 for the introduction of the Honey-Bee into St. Domingo; he says it was brought from Martinique by the Comte de la Croix. From these various reports we gather that, in the most dif- ferent parts of North America, where the Honey-Bee now exists, it was wanting not very long since, and that im some of them (e.g. m New York and to the west of the Mississippi) it was only introduced about seventy or even sixty-five years ago. We first find the Bee in West Florida in the year 1763; in 1780, first in Kentucky; a little before 1793, first in New York ; since 1797, westward of the Mississippi. (In English North America, according to Josselyn, it existed as early as the seventeenth cen- tury, having been introduced there from England.) Thus the diffusion of the Bee has taken place in North America in a north-westerly direction. The introduction into West Florida by the English took place in 1763; in 1764 the Bee was intro- duced from Florida into Cuba, but from San Augustino in East Florida, where, accordmg to Bartram, the imsect existed at the end of the seventeenth century, having probably been intro- duced by the Spaniards. This joint introduction by the English and Spaniards is borne out by the fact that amongst both these nations we find the dark form of the Honey-Bee, which also is the one occurrmg in America; whereas the Asiatic form, from which the American Bees would most probably have descended had their migration taken place naturally, is the most light- coloured. The extraordinary manner in which the Honey-Bee has thriven in America since its introduction is shown most strikingly by the production of wax in Cuba, where the cultivation of Bees has been carried on very extensively since 1772. According to Humboldt (Essai polit. sur Cuba, 1. p. 259), the average ex- port of wax, between 1774 and 1779, was only 2700 arrobas (=81,000 pounds) ; in 1803 it amounted to 42,700 arrobas * Essai polit. sur la Nouvelle Espagne, 1811, tome i. p.455; Essai polit. sur Vile de Cuba, 1826, tome i. p. 259. 338 Dr. A. Gerstacker on the Geographical Distribution (= 1,281,000 pounds). In Ramon de la Sagra’s ‘ Historia Fisica, &c., de la isla de Cuba (i. pp. 283 & 299) we find as the average amount for the first thirty years of the present century, 69,476 arrobas (= 2,084,280 pounds) of wax, and 84,044 arrobas (=2,521,320 pounds) of honey. The quantity has probably increased considerably in the last twenty years. Of the diffusion of the Honey-Bee in America south of the Antilles and Mexico we know very little. It is found in Hon- duras, according to Squier (Notes on Central America, particu- larly the States of Honduras and San Salvador, 1855, p. 199), but does not appear to have extended itself southwards from that country, as it is not even mentioned as occurring in Costa Rica by Wagner and Scherzer (Die Republik Costa Rica im Central-Amerika, Leipzig, 1856), although we can hardly sup- pose that Wagner would have passed it without notice had he seen it there. According to oral communication from Prof. Karsten, the Bee does not occur in New Granada and Venezuela; nor has it been sent from those republics by Moritz. The imtroduction of the Bee into Brazil (Minas Geraés) took place from Portugal in 1845, according to Reinhardt (Brun, Bienenzeitung, 1858, p- 43); and its great diffusion there is indirectly testified by Burmeister (Reise nach Brasilien, p. 220). The absence of the Bee in the States of La Plata and Chili appears from there being no mention of it in the works of Burmeister and Claude Gay (Reise durch die La Plata Staaten, Halle, 1861; Historia fisica y politica de Chile, Zoologia, tom. 1.—vil.). On the Australian continent the Honey-Bee does not yet appear to exist; and Australia appears to be peculiarly poor in honey-gathering insects, as we do not yet know even a Bombus from that country. Only a small species of Trigona has lately been described by Smith (Catal. Hymen. Brit. Mus. i. p. 414). With regard to the distinctions existing among the hive-bees of different localities, upon which Latreille and others have founded specific characters, the author remarks that these con- sist exclusively of differences of colour, and are so variable that no dependence can be placed upon them. The colour of the scutellum, upon which Latreille even based two groups of spe- cies, has so little constancy that in three specimens from the same locality as many gradations from light to dark may be de- tected. The identity of the Italian with the northern Bee is demonstrated by the perfect mutual fertility of the two forms ; and the African form approaches much more closely to the Italian than the latter does to the northern Bee. The author describes the following forms of Bees as known to him, arranging them according to the localities in which they oceur :— and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 339 1. Norta# Germany (Berlin, Neustadt - Eberswalde, Hartz, Erzgebirge).—Numerous specimens: queens, drones, and workers. a. Unicolorous dark northern Bee. Seen on the crest of the Erzgebirge, sparingly, at a height of 2800 feet; in larger quantity on the summit of the Brocken, at 3500 feet, in August 1856. 6. One specimen of a worker, captured by Klug at the be- ginning of this century, near Berlin, has on the second abdominal segment a reddish-yellow basal band of one- third of its length. ce. Italian Bee of very recent times (imported). d. Crosses of the northern and Italian Bees, of very recent date. 2. Sourn or France.—8 specimens of workers. a. (2 sp.) Unicolorous northern Bee. b. (1 sp.) of early date (beginning of this century) ; Italian Bee, with a reddish-brown scutellum. 3. Anpa.ustia (Staudinger, Waltl).—6 specimens of workers. a. (5 sp.) Unicolorous northern Bee. b. (1 sp.) More densely clothed with yellowish hair than the northern Bee; a very small reddish-yellow poimt on each side of the base of the second abdominal segment. 4. Portueat (Hoffmannsege).—3 workers, 1 drone. a. (2 sp.) Unicolorous northern Bee. 6. (1 sp.) A narrow, transverse, yellow spot on each side of the base of the second abdominal segment ; scutellum with a yellowish-red apex. 5. Liaurra (Spinola).—5 specimens, drones and workers. Italian Bee (types of the Apis ligustica, Spin.). 6. Sicrry (Schultz).—1 worker. Italian Bee with the scutellum almost entirely reddish-yellow. 7. VALTELINE (Italian Switzerland).—1 specimen*, of the year 1858. Italian Bee. 8. Borznn 1n tHE TyrRot (Kahr).—2 specimens, 1861. Somewhat smaller than the northern Bee ; first abdominal segment above, and the second to three-fifths of its length, reddish yellow ; scutellum black. (At Trent the Italian Bee only is known. Near Botzen the German form begins to occur.) 9. Datmatia (Ehrenberg, Stem).—4 specimens. a. (83 sp.) from Spalato, 1858. Unicolorous northern Bee. b. (1 sp.) of earlier date. Somewhat smaller and more slender than the German, more densely clothed with yellow hair ; * When not otherwise stated, the following descriptions are all of workers. 840 Dr. A. Gerstiicker on the Geographical Distribution first abdominal segment above, second to three-fifths of its length, and middle of scutellum reddish yellow. 10. Meuanpzia in the Banat (Stein).—1 specimen. Exactly like &. from Dalmatia. 11. Russta (Pallas).—1 specimen. Unicolorous northern Bee; sent by Pallas as Apis cerifera, Pall. 12. Greece (Kriiper).—1 specimen. Scarcely smaller than the northern Bee; second abdominal segment on each side at the base with a small reddish- yellow point. 13. Crimea (Nordmann).—16 specimens. a. (5 sp.) Unicolorous northern Bee. b. (5 sp.) Similar, but the second abdominal segment with a small yellow point on each side at the base. c. (1 sp.) The yellow point extended into a transverse spot. d. (4 sp.) Instead of the transverse spots, a reddish-yellow band on the second segment, occupying progressively one- fifth, one-third, and one-half of its length. e. (1 sp.) First abdominal segment and second to two-thirds of its length reddish yellow; scutellum reddish im the middle. 14. Ruopes (Loew).—8 specimens. a. (1 sp.) With a reddish-yellow transverse spot on each side the base of the second segment; scutellum all black, b. (1 sp.) Similar, but scutellum with a red apex. c. (1 sp.) With a reddish-yellow transverse band occupying one-third the length of the second segment; scutellum with the apex red. d. (5 sp.) Reddish-yellow band of second segment one-third to two-thirds of its length; first segment above and the whole or greater part of the scutellum yellowish red. All the specimens of the same size as the northern Bee, but more densely clothed with more intensely yellow hair. 15. Epuesus (Loew).—1 specimen. Like the northern Bee, but more densely clothed with paler greyish-yellow hair. 16. Brussa (Thirk).—2 specimens. a. Size of the northern Bee, and similar in colour and clothing, but with a yellow point on each side of the second abdo- minal segment. b, A little smaller than the northern Bee; first segment and second to two-thirds of its length, and the entire scutellum reddish yellow. 17. Caucasus (Pallas).—1 specimen. Colouring as in J. from Brussa; size a little larger. (This specimen sent by Pallas as his Apis remipes). and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 341 18. Eeyprr (Ehrenberg).—5 specimens. Smaller and more slender than the northern Bee; both the hairy and downy clothing whitish, sometimes yellowish on the thorax; smoky brown only on each side of the vertex, whitish in the middle. Apices of the mandibles and frontal tubercles rusty red ; first and second abdominal segments reddish yellow to the margin, third segment to half its length; scutellum almost entirely reddish yellow. (Apis fasciata, Lat.) 19. Arasra Fevix (Ehrenberg).—1 specimen. Agreeing with the Egyptian Bee. 20. Syria (Ehrenberg).—5 specimens. Almost identical with the Egyptian Bee, but the thorax clad all over with yellowish hair, and the yellow band of the second abdominal segment varying between one-half and four-fifths of its length ; size a little larger. 21. Himaraya (Hoffmeister).—1 specimen. Size and colouring of the Syrian specimens, but the scutellum brownish to the yellow apex. 22. Curna (Colomb).—1 specimen. Size and colouring of the Egyptian Bee, but the vertex en- tirely clothed with fuliginous hair. (A. cerana, Fabr.) 23. SenreGamBiIA (Mion).—1 specimen. Size and colourmg of the Egyptian Bee, but the hair more of a greyish yellow. (A. Adansonii, Lat.) 24, Guinea (Isert).—2 specimens. a. Size intermediate between that of the Egyptian and northern Bees ; apices of the mandibles and frontal tubercles rusty red; scutellum nearly all yellowish brown ; first abdominal segment, and second as far as the half, yellowish red above. (Apis nigritarum, Lep.) b. Same size; colour uniform light brown. 25. Care or Goop Horr (Krebs).—10 specimens. All some- what smaller than the northern Bee. a. (4 sp.) Blackish brown, with only a narrow basal margin of reddish yellow on the second segment; scutellum black. b. (1 sp.) Similar, but the yellow border of the second seg- ment dilated on each side into a spot. c. (2 sp.) Similar, but the second segment reddish yellow for almost half its length; scutellum in one specimen reddish brown. (A. caffra, Lep.) d. (2 sp.) First segment to the margin, second to two-thirds, and third to almost half its length yellowish red; scutellum with the whole middle reddish. e. (1 sp.) Similar, but the whole scutellum reddish yellow. " 342 Dr. A. Gerstiicker on the Geographical Distribution 26. Porr Nara (Wahlberg).—1 specimen. Exactly like specimen e. from the Cape. 27. MozamsBique (Peters).—4 specimens. Exactly like specimen e. from the Cape. 28. Mauritius (Deyrolle).—1 specimen. Similar in size to the Cape specimens; colour entirely dark, almost black upon the abdomen ; hair scanty. 29. Pennsytvania (Zimmermann, Sommer).—4 workers, 1 drone. Worker a little more slender than the northern Bee, like this in colour and clothing, with only a narrow reddish-yellow basal border on the second abdominal segment. 30. Mexico (Deppe).—4 workers, 1 drone. Exactly like the northern Bee. 31. Cusa (Riehl).—1 worker, 1 drone. As Mexico. 32. Porro Rico (Moritz).—1 worker. As Mexico. Of the colour-varieties here described, the most convincing proof of the inconstancy of the colour, and consequently of a probable intermixture of different varieties, is furnished by Nos. 18, 14, and 25, which at the same time prove that not the least dependence can be placed upon the coloration of the scu- tellum. The variability of the coloration under the different numbers gives transitions from one form to another; and thus it becomes impossible to define clearly limited varieties. Latreille and Lepelletier made 8 species out of the Honey-Bee; with equal justice we might now, from the existing materials, make 20-30. But by referring those specimens which evidently form transitions from one principal race to another to the race with which they have most in common, we may get six principal varieties, with the following geographical distribution :— 1. The unicolorous, dark northern Bee (including the most nearly allied lighter varieties) occurs in Northern Europe, where until very lately it was the only form; in the south of France, Portugal, the south of Spain, and Algiers; lke- wise in some districts of Italy, in Dalmatia, Greece, the Crimea, and on the islands and coast of Asia Minor; lastly, in Guinea, at the Cape of Good Hope (probably in- troduced), and in a great part of North America (certainly introduced). 2. The Italian Bee (with a black scutellum) occurs almost ex- clusively in different districts of Italy, especially in the northern parts, including the Tyrol and the Valteline. Introduced lately into Northern Europe. 8, A variety differing from the Italian Bee in its yellow scutel- lum occurs in the south of France, in Sicily, Dalmatia, and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 343 the Banat, the Crimea, the islands and continent of Asia Minor, and on the Caucasus. 4, The Egyptian Bee is diffused from Egypt, through Syria and Arabia, and passes imperceptibly, through a lighter variety occurring on the Himalaya and in China, into ' 5. The specific African Bee, which extends over the whole of Africa, from Abyssinia and Senegambia to the Cape. 6. The black Madagascar Bee is limited to Madagascar and the Mauritius. In the concluding portion of his paper the author treats of the exotic Honey-Bees of the Old World distinct from Apis mellifica. He confines his attention to the Old-World forms because, although America possesses numerous species of honey- gathering Bees, these belong to genera (Melipona and Trigona) which differ greatly from the Hive-Bee both in characters and in value; so that wherever the European Bee has been intro- duced, they have lost their importance as producers of wax and honey. Some of the East-Indian species, on the contrary, ap- pear to be of great value ; and their introduction into other suit- able localities might be found useful. These Bees inhabiting the continent and islands of India are also in considerable con- fusion as regards their specific identity, too much stress having been laid upon variations of colour in them, as in the varieties of the Kuropean Bee: instead of thirteen species, described by Fabricius, Latreille, Klug, Guérin, and Smith, the author con- siders that there are only three, all belonging to the genus Apis, but forming the following two groups :— Grovr I. Vertex distinctly narrowed by the large compound eyes, so that the posterior ocelli are more distant from each other than from the eyes. Abdomen remarkably elongated, somewhat flattened above ; metatarsus of the hind legs with thirteen trans- verse rows of bristles on the inside. In the anterior wings the recurrent nervure issues very near the apex in the third cu- bital cell. Here belongs Apis dorsata, Fab. (nigripennis, Lat.), with its two colour varieties, Apis zonata, Guér., and A. zonata, Smith. Grove II. Vertex not perceptibly narrowed, so that the hinder ocelli are not more distant from each other than from the com- pound eyes. Abdomen oval, convex above; metatarsus of the hind legs with nine transverse rows of bristles on the inside. Recurrent nervure issuing far from the apex in the third cubital cell. Here belong, with Apzs mellifica, the two smaller East- Indian species,—1. Apis indica, Fab. (socialis, Lat.), with its varieties A. Peroni, Lat., A. Perrottetii, Guér., and A. nigro. 344 Dr. A. Gerstacker on the Geographical Distribution cincta, Smith ; 2. Apis florea, Fab. (indica, Lat.), with its drone, A. lobata, Smith. The first of the three East-Indian species, Apis dorsata, Fab., is remarkable for its size, as dry specimens measure 73 to 83 lines in length. Freshly developed specimens, sent from Luzon by Jagor, are of a light pitchy-brown colour all over the body and legs, and their clothing of hair everywhere brownish grey; the wings are hyaline, with a distinctly greyish-brown tint. When completely coloured, the head and antenne are shining pitchy black; vertex clothed with long, erect, deep blackish-brown hair; the border of the upper lip and mandibles has a reddish- brown tint; the two frontal tubercles and the apices of the scapes of the antenne pale rusty red. Ocelli remarkably large. Thorax above, as far as the scutellum and sides of the breast, with blackish-brown hairs; scutellum and metanotum with tawny-yellow hairs. Anterior wings dark brown along the outer margin, paler brown over the whole disk. Legs pitchy black, fringed with hair of the same colour; the brush on the inside of the posterior tarsi ciunamon-red. The colouring of the abdomen marks three varieties :— a. Abdomen above clothed with densely adpressed hairs, of a uniform yellow colour, or only a little more dusky, or rather grey, at the apex; beneath pitchy brown, rusty yellow to- wards the base. Indigenous in Java. Described by Fabri- clus (Hut. Syst. u. p. 823. 64), in 1793, as Apis dorsata ; afterwards (1804) by Latreille (Ann. du Mus. vy. p. 170. 4) as A. nigripennis). b. Abdomen with only the back of the first two segments yellow, and the rest blackish brown or nearly black, or with the middle of the third segment also yellowish, and the base of this and the followmg segment adorned with a transverse band sprinkled with white. Upon this variety, figured by Latreille (doc. cit. pl. 18. fig. 7), Klug (Mag. Gesellsch. naturf. Freunde, i. p. 264) founded his A. bicolor, and Guérin (Bélanger’s Voyage, Insectes, p. 504) his A. zonata. It occurs with the preceding in Java, and also in Ceylon (Nietner). c. Abdomen yellow only on the anterior part of the first seg- ment ; the remainder is deep black, with white-besprinkled basal bands on the third, fourth, and fifth segments ; these also pass to the lower surface. Examples of this variety from Celebes are the largest, and others from Luzon the smallest of all. Smith described the former under the name of A. zonata (Proc. Linn. Soe. iu. p. 8). This is evidently the species mentioned by Knox, in his work and Varieties of the Honey-Bee. 345 on Ceylon, under the name of Bamburos. He says, “ Their honey is as clear as water ; they place their nests on the highest branches of trees, and take no trouble to conceal them. Ata certain season of the year, whole villages go out to collect their honey.” The queen and drone of this species are still un- known. The second species, A. indica, Fab., most resembles our Eu- ropean Bee in form and colouring, but is much smaller, dry specimens measuring only 43 lies. This species is subject to great variation of colour in most parts of the body, and even in the wings. Adopting the coloration of the abdomen as a dis- tinction, the following three chief varieties may be indicated :— a. Abdomen either light rusty red as far as the last two pitchy- brown segments, or the third and fourth segments from the apex likewise show a slight brownish tinge at the base. The scutellum is always pale reddish yellow, and the hair of the head and thorax greyish yellow. The clypeus and scape are seldom entirely pitchy brown; the former is usually reddish in its lower half, and the latter in the middle. This pale variety appears to be chiefly indigenous to the continent of India; it was first described by Fabricius (Ent. Syst. Suppl. p- 274. 59) as Apis Indica; then by Latreille (doc. cet. p. 172. 7) as A. socialis; by Lepelletier (H yménopt. i. pp. 404, 405) as A. socialis and dorsata; and lastly by Guérin (Iconogr. du Régne Anim. p. 461) as A. Delessertz. 6. Abdomen with the first two segments and the base of the third reddish yellow, the remainder blackish brown, with bands of light yellow hair. Scutellum generally pale, sometimes blackish ; the hair of the thorax brownish yellow, that of the vertex fuliginous. Clypeus generally all black, sometimes reddish at the apex ; scape dark. Principally in Java; also at Poona (Hope). Latreille (doc. cit. p. 173. 8) described this form as A. Peroni. c. Abdomen with only the anterior part of the first and the basal half of the second segment reddish yellow, the remainder blackish brown. Clothing as in 6; the scutellum partly blackish, partly reddish yellow. With a black clypeus and scape this variety is indigenous at Pondicherry and in Ceylon, and has been described by Guérin (Iconog. p. 460, f.) as 4. Perrottetii ; with a red clypeus and paler scape it is A. nigro- cincta, Smith (Proc. Linn. Soe. v. p. 93), from Macassar. The latter has lately been received from Luzon, where it is mixed in almost equal proportions with the other variety. Knox, in his description of Ceylon, says, “The first kind of Honey-Bees are the Memasses, which are exactly like our Bees Ann. & Mag. N. Hist, Ser. 3. Vol, xi. 23 346 Dr. A. Gerstiacker on the Honey-Bee. which we have in England; they build in hollow trees, into which the people blow, and from which they take honey and wax, without any dread of being stung.” Here he seems to refer to the Apis indica, which he erroneously identifies with the European Bee. The third East-Indian species, incorrectly regarded by La- treille as Apis indica, Fab., but which, from a comparison with the original specimens of Fabricius, is the Anthophora florea of that entomologist (Ent. Syst. 1. p. 341. 118), and must there- fore be called Apis florea, Fab., is the smallest of all known species, the workers measuring scarcely more than 32 lines. The author has workers from Tranquebar, Java, and Poona, and workers and drones from Ceylon. This species seems to vary less than the others, although young workers may be re- cognized by the light colour of the abdomen and the rusty-red tint of the legs, scapes, and clypeus. The coloration, in fully developed specimens, is as follows :—Head, including upper lip and antenne, black, with only the frontal “tubercles rusty red ; thorax and legs ikewise black, and, like the head, clothed with white hairs. Abdomen generally with the first two segments tile-red, the rest black, and with snow-white hair at the base ; rarely the third segment shows some red, and still more rarely the second some black. The wings are hyaline, with rusty- yellow veins. The drones which are believed to belong to these workers (Apis lobata, Smith, Catal. Apide, p. 416. 10) are con- siderably larger than the workers, namely, 43 lines long. They have the body black; thorax and two basal segments of the abdomen clothed with yellowish-grey hairs; the apex of the abdomen clothed with black hair ; the third and fourth segments naked, shining. Structural characters distinguishing these drones from those of the Kuropean species are as follow :— 1. The head is more convex, and the eyes therefore larger ; 2. The antennee are very short, the flagellum scarcely double the length of the scape; 3. The metatarsus of the posterior legs is very peculiarly forked; the outer branch of this fork is the thicker, inflated on the outside, hairy within, and bears at its apex the following tarsal joints ; the inner one has somewhat the form and position of a thumb, and is only two-thirds the length of the outer. A comb unquestionably belonging to this species has been described and figured by Latreille (Annales du Mus. iv. p. 386, pl. 69, and Recueil d’Obs. de Zool. p. 302, pl. 21). In its substance it agrees precisely with that of Apis mellifica ; its cells are hexagonal, applied to each other back to back, and with their bases alternating and interlocking. The difference in the size of the cells is very great: 332 cells of A. florea occupy the same space as 182 of A. mellifica. The drone-cells found with Mr, A. Adams on Microstelma and Onoba. 347 worker-cells in the comb are much larger, much thicker in the walls, and nearly cylindrical internally. In conclusion, the author enters upon the question of the acclimatization of new forms of Bees. For Europe, he thinks the most valuable form would be the Egyptian, partly on account of their beauty, and partly because of their unwillingness to use their stings, which appears to be common to all African Bees, and is also one of the recommendations of the Italian Bee. The Syrian Bee agrees so closely with the Egyptian that it may prove equally valuable ; and next to these in value, according to the author, are the Bees of the coasts of Asia Minor. Of the East-Indian Bees, the introduction of the fine Apis dorsata would probably be most welcome to the European bee-keepers ; but there are doubts whether it would bear a northern climate ; and before it can be introduced into Europe, it must be domes- ticated in some of its native haunts. The author suggests that some of the planters of Ceylon might succeed in effecting this preliminary object, XXXVIIT.—On Microstelma and Onoba, two Forms of Rissoid Gasteropods ; with Notices of new Species of the latter from Japan. By Artuur Apams, F.L.S. &c. In addition to the new species of Rissoid genera which I have recently published in the ‘ Annals,’ I beg to bring before the notice of your readers an entirely new form and several new species of Onoba, reserving my observations on the genus Ris- soina for a future communication, which will complete my ex- amination of the family Rissoidz inhabiting the Seas of Japan. Genus Microstetma, A. Adams. Testa turrito-ovata, rimata; spira conica; anfractibus longitudi- naliter plicatis. Apertura oblonga, antice producta, subcanaliculata ; labio incrassato, rectiusculo ; labro simplici. This very pretty form, which most nearly resembles the genus Rissoina, I obtained in the Gotto Islands, by a cast of the dredge, in forty-eight fathoms water. The shell only was obtained; so that our account of the genus, like that of many others proposed, is necessarily very imperfect. Such must frequently be the case with regard to very deep-water acquisitions from far-off and little-known localities; and such, of course, is always the case with fossil or extinct forms. In the sand from the same locality I fortunately obtained living examples of the genus Verticordia, hitherto only known 348 Mr. A. Adams on Microstelma and Onoba, from its shell ; and I may here take the opportunity of stating that the true position of the genus is in Anatinide, and not with Isocardia, with which, in a former communication, I had associated it. My brother, in examining one of my fresh speci- mens, has proved the existence of an ossicle in the hinge, very similar to that in Chamostrea or Cleidotherus. Microstelma Dedala, A. Adams. M. testa ovata, rimata, solida, alba; anfractibus 53, planis, postice angulatis et coronatis, longitudinaliter plicatis, plicis rectis, validis, zequalibus, interstitiis transversim striatis ; anfractu ultimo magno, plicis, ultra peripheriam, evanidis ; labro margine postice angu- lato. Hab. Gotto Islands; 48 fathoms. The whorls are very prettily coronate at the hind part, which suggested the generic name. In all essentials the shell appears to be of a Rissoid character, reminding one somewhat of Ris- soina. Had there been any indication of columellar plaits, it might have been mistaken for a Pyramidellid. Genus Onozpa, H. & A. Adams. 1. Onoba elegans, A. Adams. Rissoa elegans, A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1851. Hab. Seto-Uchi; 17 fathoms. Yara; 9 fathoms, mud. 2. Onoba procera, A. Adams. Onoba procera, A. Adams, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1861. Hab. Yara; 9 fathoms, mud. Mososeki; 7 fathoms. 3. Onoba mirifica, A. Adams. O. testa subulato-turrita, alba, semipellucida; anfractibus 5, con- vexiusculis, suturis profundis, transversim liratis, liris validis, subdistantibus, interstitiis concinne cancellatis ; anfractu ultimo costa basali instructo ; apertura ovata, antice integra ; peristomate continuo ; labro subdilatato, margine extus varicoso. Hab. Kino-O-Sima; Tanabe. A small shell, but exquisite in form and sculpture. 4, Onoba bella, A. Adams. Rissoa bella, A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1851, p. 267. Hab. Yara; 9 fathoms, mud. 5. Onoba spirata, A. Adams. O. testa ovato-turrita, subrimata, tenui, sordide alba; anfractibus 5, two Forms of Rissoid Gasteropods. 349 planis, spiratis, ad suturas acute angulatis, costellis longitudinali- bus tenuibus confertis, interstitiis lineis transversis elevatis decus- satis instructis; apertura ovata; peritremate continuo; labro margine anguste varicoso. Hab. Mososeki; 7 fathoms. In this rather thin species the whorls are spirate, sharply angulate at the sutures, and furnished with longitudinal riblets. 6. Onoba patula, A. Adams. O. testa ovata, solida, rimata, sordide alba; spira brevi; anfrac- tibus 33, postice acute angulatis, ultimo magno, costellis longi- tudinalibus undulatis et lineis transversis elevatis concinne decus- sato; apertura oblonga, antice dilatata; labro valde dilatato, margine reflexo, undulato, postice libero et angulato. Hab. Yobuko, west coast of Kiusu; 14 fathoms, mud. In this species the lip is greatly dilated and reflexed; the whorls are sharply angulated posteriorly, and there is an elon- gate narrow umbilical chink. 7. Onoba egregia, A. Adams. O. testa subulato-turrita, sordide alba; anfractibus 6, planiusculis, spiratis, postice rotundate angulatis, lamellis longitudinalibus erectis undulatis, interstitiis transversim pulcherrime striolatis in- structis; suturis profundis ; apertura aperta, ovali; peritremate tenui, continuo ; labro subdilatato, margine simplici, undulato. Hab. Seto-Uchi; 17 fathoms. Yobuko; 10 fathoms. A very charming species, with lamellar, undulating longitu- dinal riblets, and the interstices crossed by fine spiral elevated lines. The aperture is somewhat expanded, and there is no external varix on the outer lip. 8. Onoba lucida, A. Adams. O. testa turrito-subulata, alba, tenui, pellucida; anfractibus 4, con- yexiusculis, lineolis transversis elevatis concentricis confertis or- nata ; apertura ovali, antice integra; peritremate continuo ; labro margine tenui, varicoso. Hab. O-Sima. This species resembles O. bella in form and sculpture ; but it wants the spiral callus at the base of the last whorl, and the conspicuous varix on the outer lip; it is also much smaller and more pellucid. c00 Mr. A. Adams on the Japanese Lacunide. XXXIX.— On the Genera and Species of Lacunide found in Japan. By Artuur Apams, F.L.S. &c. Tue Lacune have been separated by Dr. Gray from the Littorine, with which they are usually associated, on account of the peculiar appendiculate opercular lobe, which is expanded at the sides and furnished with two beards behind. The animal, moreover, has no jaws, whereas in the Littorinide they are distinct and horny. The Japanese seas furnish us with examples of all the known generic and subgeneric forms, and likewise with a new and pe- culiar type which I am inclined to refer to this family. Fam. Lacunide. Genus Lacuna, Turt. Lacuna latifasciata, A. Adams. L. testa depresso-semiglobosa, tenui, late et profunde umbilicata ; spiraparva, laterali; alba, fascia lata rufo-fusca ornata; anfractibus 3, planiusculis, rapide crescentibus ; apertura semiorbiculari, regione umbilici rufo tincta ; columella recta, angusta. Hab. Kino-O-Sima. A species of the same form as L. pallidula, Da Costa, but of much smaller size, and ornamented with a broad red-brown band. Subgenus Meporta, Leach. Medoria turrita, A. Adams. Lacuna turrita, A. Adams, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1861. Hab. Rifunsiri, Subgenus Epneria, Leach. 1. Epheria decorata, A. Adams. Lacuna (Epheria) decorata, A. Adams, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1861. Hab. Rifunsiri. 2. Epheria inflata, A. Adams. Lacuna inflata, A. Adams, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1861. Hab. Rifunsiri. 3. Epheria carinifera, A. Adams. Lacuna carinifera, A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1851, p. 225. ‘Hab. Takano-Sima. 4. Epheria lepidula, A. Adams. E. testa depresso-conica, perobliqua, late umbilicata; spira brevi, acuta; alba, opaca ; anfractibus 3, convexiusculis, ultimo ad peri- Dr. G. C. Wallich on the Structure of the Valves of Diatoms. 351 pheriam angulato; apertura semiovata; labio recto, acuto; um- bilici margine carinula acuta circumcincto, Hab. Seto-Uchi; Akasi; 15 fathoms. A small white species from the Inland Sea of Japan, with the margin of the wide umbilicus encircled by a narrow elevated keel. Genus Stenortis, A. Adams. Testa compressa, elongato-ovata, auriformis ; spira brevi, acuta ; anfractibus planis, simplicibus, ultimo sejuncto. Apertura oblonga, postice angustata; peritremate acuto, recto, continuo, integro. I have founded this genus on a little shell which I obtained in the Inland Sea of Japan, and also at Yobuko, a small harbour on the west coast of Kiusu. It possesses some of the characters of Fossar, and reminds one of Vanikoro: in form it resembles somewhat a minute Naticina ; but perhaps its true relations are with Lacuna, although the members of that family are littoral in their habits. Stenotis laxata, A. Adams. S. testa elongato-ovali, compressa, tenui, sordide alba; spira parva, acuta ; anfractibus 3, planiusculis, rapide crescentibus; anfractu ultimo magno, soluto, antice dilatato; apertura auriformi, postice angustata ; umbilico patulo, margine angulato. Hab. Idsuma-Nada; 17 fathoms. Yobuko, west coast of Kiusu; 14 fathoms, mud. XL.—On the Structure of the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. By G. C. Wattiicu, M.D., F.LS., F.G.S., &ec. In a scientific point of view, it is obviously immaterial whether the markings on a Diatom-valve present this or that configura- tion, or whether minute points on its surface consist of eleva- tions or of depressions. At all events, the physiology of the Protophytes, so far as we have heretofore become acquainted with it, does not appear to have been advanced a single step by the fitful controversy that has taken place on the subject, with no better result than that of rendering it distasteful to the generality of scientific readers. But, notwithstandimg this, it cannot be denied that the accurate determination of the nature of these markings is of great importance indirectly, that is to say, by furnishing a standard wherewith to gauge the powers of our highest optical combinations, and enable us to pronounce with some approach to confidence when minute appearances are, or are not, illusory. In this sense the subject may be regarded as bearing essentially 302 Dr. G. C. Wallich on the Structure of on.every kind of microscopic research, and in this sense only do I consider it worthy of serious investigation. In a paper “ On the Structure of the Valve in the Diatomacez, as compared with certain Siliceous Pellicles produced artificially by the Decomposition in moist Air of Fluosilicic Acid Gas (Fluoride of Silicium) ”*, Prof. Max Schultze, after stating his views regarding the mode of formation and intimate structure of the pellicles referred to, enters on the special point towards which his/investigations seem to have been directed, namely, the deter- ination of the true character of the markings in Pleurosigma angulatum. Prof. Schultze alludes to the conflicting opinions entertained by English microscopists on this subject, and, whilst citing Carpenter (undoubtedly the highest of the British autho- rities on any question of microscopy) and, with him, many other observers who support the view that the markings of the valve of this Diatom consist of hexagonal depressions, associates my name with that of my friend Mr. Norman, of Hull, amongst the advo- cates of the contrary opinion, namely, that these markings con- sist of pyramidal elevations}. In the abstract of Prof. Schultze’s paper already alluded to, it is stated that, “so far as the nature of the markings on the Diatomacez is concerned, opinions may not at the present day be so much divided in this country as that author appears to think ;” and marked attention is for the second time drawn, by the Editors of the ‘ Microscopical Journal,’ to an observation made by Mr. Wenham during the discussion of my paper on these markings, read before the Microscopical So- ciety in March 1860, to the effect “that, with an object-glass of his own construction, having a focal distance of about .4,th of an inch and a large aperture, he had ascertained beyond doubt that, in P. angulatum and some others, the valves are composed wholly of spherical particles of silex, possessing high refractive proper- ties ; and that he showed how a// the various optical appearances in the valves of the Diatomacez might be reconciled with the supposition that their structure was universally the same” ft. As the hexagonal-depression structure of the valve in P. angulatum rested almost exclusively, up to that period, on evidence adduced * Verhandl. d. Naturhist. Vereins der preussisch. Rheinlande u. West- phal. Jahrg. xx. p. 1. See an abstract of this paper published in the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science for April 1863. t+ See papers “ On the Markings of the Diatomacez in common use as Test-Objects,” published in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History for February 1860; and “On the Development of Structure of the Diatom- Valve” (read before the Microscopical Society in March 1860, and published im the Transactions), by G. C. Wallich, M.D., &c. ~ See note appended to abstract to Prof. Schultze’s paper, and note appended to the above-named paper by me, published in the Transactions of the Microscopical Society, Quart. Journ. M. S. vol. viii. p. 145. the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. 353 by Mr. Wenham, it is somewhat difficult to gather from the remarks of the Editors in question whether they accepted or rejected my view. It is certain, however, that at the above period, and indeed up to a very recent date, I stood alone in supporting the pyramidal structure by evidence derived from the optical appearances of the valve under high powers of the microscope, and nearly alone as regards the secondary kind of evidence de- rived from the direction of the lines of fracture and effects of moisture. For although it was stated in the admirable work on the microscope by the lamented Prof. Quekett, published in 1852, that, under an improved method of illumination and a magnifying power of at least 1200 diameters, Mr. Gillett. had succeeded in showing “ the lines on P. angulatum to be dots or elevations from the surface,” this interpretation of the structure was speedily set aside by subsequent writers, and principally in consequence of the view put forward by Mr. Wenham with regard to the hexagonal structure. Strange to say, Prof. Quekett was himself amongst the first to repudiate Mr. Gillett’s observation. In his ‘ Lectures on Histology’ (vol. i. p. 59) it is stated that, by careful “ management of the light, Mr. Wenham has found that the oblique lines on P. angulatum can be resolved into hexagons, and that he has proved beyond doubt the structure by means of photographs taken under a power of 15,000 diameters, —all the parts accurately in focus exhibiting hexagons with a white centre, but in those out of focus the centre being black.” Mr. Wenham’s photographic figure is copied by Quekett, as also _ a figure of the structure in the closely allied variety, P. formo- sum, under a magnifying power of 5500 diameters, the lines being resolved, on the authority of the Rev. Mr. Kingsley of Cambridge, ‘into dots, studs, or beads; ” but, continues the Professor, “ notwithstanding the enormous power employed on this occasion, there are many observers who still regard these markings as depressions, and not as elevations.” In Carpenter’s work “ On the Microscope and its Revelations ” (not the latest edition), at page 306, it is stated that if we examine P. angulatum with an objective of z-inch focus and 75° aperture, the valve presents a double series of somewhat interrupted diagonal lines, inclosing between their intersections imperfectly defined lozenge-shaped spaces; but that if the valve be viewed under an objective of ;4,-inch focus and an angular aperture of 130°, “illuminated by oblique rays, its hexagonal areolation becomes very distinct. And if a photographic representation obtained by such a power be itself enlarged by photography, as has been accomplished by Mr. Wenham, the appearance pre- sented is in all respects comparable with that afforded under a low power by the valve of Triceratium or Isthmia.” Here again 354 Dr. G.C. Wallich on the Structure of we have Mr. Wenham’s figure, with the remark that “ at the upper part, which represents a portion of the object that was accurately in focus, the hexagonal areas are seen to be light, and the intervening spaces dark; the reverse being the case with the lower portion which was out of focus; and a curious transition from one condition to the other being seen in the intermediate art.” r In a short paper by Dr., Hall, of Sheffield, “On an easy Method of viewing certain of the Diatomacez,” published in the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, vol. iv. p. 205 e¢ seq., the structure of P. angulatum is described and figured as consisting of “ dots ;”” and reference is made, in confirmation of it, to the “hexagonal areolation” supposed to have been de- tected by Mr. Wenham under a power of 15,000 diameters, but evidently under a misconception as to the elevation or depression of the minute siliceous masses composing it, inasmuch as the term “areolation,” in this case, evidently refers to depressions with elevated sides, and it is quite clear that such was the gene- rally adopted interpretation of Mr. Wenham’s observations, in- asmuch as Dr. Carpenter, till very recently, laid stress on the analogy between the appearance presented by the photographic figure and the plainly discernible depressed areolar spaces of Triceratium and Isthmia. The late Rev. W. Smith, in the ‘ Synopsis of British Diato- macez ’ (vol. i. p. 61), expressed himself as having for a time coincided in the opinion of some observers that the appearances of striz arose from rows of beads or minute elevations, and not from depressions ; but that, with careful manipulation and more perfect optical apparatus, he was led to conclude “that the lines arise from internal hexagonal structure, and that the semblance both of perforations and elevations may be produced in the same object by a slight alteration of focus, such appearances being illusory and due merely to the reflection or refraction of the rays passing through the minute cellular structure of the sili- ceous epiderm.” He was also inclined to “ attribute the yellow tint seen in the valves of some diatoms to distinct hexagonal structure in their cellular condition, and a purple colour to an absence of such character” (Synopsis, p. 63). In the ‘ Micrographic Dictionary’ (p. 43) we find it stated that “ Isthmia requires defining power” (in the lens employed), “ whilst Gyrosigma (= Pleurosigma) requires penetrating power and large angular aperture to exhibit the markings; and yet the structures differ only in size.’ And, further, “ there can be no doubt that if we could examine the valve of the Gyrosigma under a power as high, relatively to the size of the depressions, as that under which we can examine the Jsthmia, the same relations the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. 355 being preserved between the angle of aperture of the object-glass and the angular inclination of the refracted rays, the various parts of the depressions and the undepressed portions would be equally recognizable in both cases.” Again, in the intro- ductory chapter to the same volume (p. 16), the Editors express their conviction that if Schleiden “ were to try to obtain a view of the hexagonal structure of the dots’ on the valves of a Gyro- sigma with his object-glasses, he would signally fail ; for the ex- hibition of this structure requires a power of about 2000 diame- ters to render it distinct beyond dispute, with the use of stops,” &c. &c., “and the fact of its impressing its own image upon photographic paper at once shows its reality, and that its per- ception is not the result of the imagination.” Dr. Carpenter, in the latest edition of his invaluable treatise on ‘The Microscope and its Revelations’ (1862), whilst seceding from the opinion that any analogy necessarily exists between the structure of the valve of Triceratium and that of Pleuro- sigma, and stating that, although the idea of the valve of the latter being composed of a series of hexagonal depressions at one time received the sanction of Mr. Wenham, the later observations of this gentleman, “with objectives of th, and even #,th of an inch focus, have led him to concur with the view now more generally accepted by microscopists, that the areole are minute tubercular elevations, the intervening network being formed by the thinner portion of the valve,’ then goes on to adduce the evidence brought forward some years ago by Mr. Hunt (Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, vol. iv. p. 175), which shows that moisture insinuates itself in such a manner between the striz and glass cover as to indicate that the “dots” are elevations, and not depressions. Lastly, as if to add to the apparent confusion of testimony, we find, in the ‘Micrographic Dictionary’ (page xxxiil., last edition), great stress laid on the fact that the line of “fracture of the broken valves” (of Plewrosigma) “ passes through the rows of dots, or the dark lines corresponding to them, showing that they are thinner and weaker than the rest of the substance; for had these dots represented elevations, the valves would have been stronger at these parts ;” whilst, in the Philosophical Maga- zine for January 1855, in an abstract of a paper read before the Royal Society “On the Structure of certain Microscopic Test-Objects, and their action on the Transmitted Rays of Light,” by Charles Brooke, F.R.S., it is stated with equal certainty and, as I am still prepared to maintain, with perfect correctness, that although “the dots have by some been sup- posed to be depressions, this is clearly not the case, as fracture is invariably observed to take place between the rows of dots, and 356 Dr, G.C, Wallich on the Structure of not through them, as would naturally occur if they were depres- sions.” Having thus endeavoured to show that Professor Schultze was correct in asserting that great difference of opinion existed in this country on the subject under discussion, it is necessary to cite the evidence on which he gives his adhesion to the belief still entertained, as he erroneously supposes, by Dr. Carpenter, that the so-called “ dots” are depressed spaces on the valve of Pleurosigma. And first with regard to the electrotype metallic casts of Pleurosigma, of which a notice is contained in the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, vol. ii. p. 244 e¢ seg. Ina note appended to Schultze’s paper (Quart. Journ. Mic. Se. for April 1863, p. 128), the editors state that Mr. Wenham’s experiments do not appear to have been limited to the two species named, as he says that he had “ obtained distinct im- pressions of the markings of some of the more difficult Diato- macez, such as N. (Pleurosigma ?) balticum, P. hippocampus, &c., leaving, as he says, no doubt of their prominent nature. But whether this prominence belongs to the areole or intermediate lines does not appear.” Schultze, in the paper now under notice, does not hesitate to characterize these experiments as perfectly successful, and as having demonstrated that the im- pressions represented “the systems of lines or dots,” thus manifestly supporting the view entertammed by Smith in the Synopsis, and most other observers, namely, that the “ striz ” are resolvable into “ dots,”’ an idea I cannot subscribe to, inas- much as it shall presently be my endeavour to prove that the appearance of striation in P. angulatum and the whole of the forms combining diagonal with rectangular striation is engen- dered at the thinnest portions of the valve, through which the rays of light penetrate most readily, and along the lies of which the valve almost invariably fractures ; whereas the so-called dots are produced only when those lines are thrown partially out of focus, the intervening elevated portions of the structure being as partially brought into focus. The main source of error and misunderstanding amongst pre- vious writers is traceable to the supposition that the diagonal and rectangular series of lines (as the case may be) constitute the portions of the valves which, under the higher magnifying powers of the microscope, become convertible into the so-termed “ dots,” “beads,” or “hexagons,’—the fact being that the ‘ striee”? seen under the lower powers, if properly exhibited, are never convertible into anything but lines, whereas the dots, beads, and hexagons are the imperfect expositions of the struc- ture occurring in the spaces included between the intersections the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. 357 of those lines. This view of the structure I shall attempt to prove to demonstration in a later portion of the present paper. But it is necessary to state in this place that, whatever parts of the valvular surfaces may have been represented as “ promi- nences” in Mr. Wenham’s most interesting electrotype casts, in his later observations on the photographic representation of these structures no facts have been advanced to indicate that the portions supposed to represent those in relief on the photo- graphs are not identical with those actually in relief on the casts; and hence it is reasonable to infer that the parts which really are convertible into “dots,” &c. (that is the spaces be- tween the intersections of the lines, and not the lines or striz themselves), constitute the seat of the elevations as presented on the casts*. But here, again, we are met with a further difficulty, if my views be correct ; for whereas I am of opinion that the in- tervening spaces in P. angulatum and its allies exhibit elevations, I think it probable that in P. hippocampus and the rectangu- larly marked series the intervening spaces between the lines, as seen on the external surface of the valves, are occupied by de- pressions. Welcker’s system for determining whether minute points of structure seen under the microscope consist of elevations or depressions on the general surface, although of service where these markings are scattered so as to leave well-defined intervals between them, becomes practically useless in testing the confi- guration of such objects as the Pleurosigmata, on the valves of which the alternate elevations and depressions are in immediate contiguity. Schultze fully recognizes this difficulty, but endea- vours to explain it away, as I conceive, somewhat unsuccessfully. He alludes to the appearance presented by the larger of the artificially prepared conical papille of fluoride of silicium, and inclines to the belief that the successively seen “ concentric rings” are attributable to these papille being “composed of superimposed lamine, gradually diminishing in size.” The same appearance of concentric rings is observable, how- ever, when any translucent uniformly curved projection or de- pression is viewed under the microscope, the illusory effect being much more marked where the penetrating power of the objective employed is limited. The truth of this statement may readily be put to the test by examining the valvular surface of some of the Melosire (M. Westii, for example), in which a continuously * For reasons which will presently become manifest, I would mention that this remark applies only to the rectangularly lined series of the Pleuro- sigmata. Mr. Wenham, in his paper on the electrotype experiments, makes special reference to P. balticum and P. hippocampus, but to none of the diagonally lined series—a fact of no little importance, for similar reasons. 358 Dr. G. C. Wallich on the Structure of transitional series of concentric rings is invariably engendered as the focal distance is altered—showing clearly that these rings are not the exponents of successive lamine of silex, or due to the “sutural and median siliceous ring” adduced as character- istic of that variety in the ‘Synopsis of British Diatomacez’;’ but that they are simply indicative of the successive horizons (so to speak) of the conical-shaped valve, on reaching which the rays of light are refracted im their passage to the eye of the observer, and during the changes in the focal distance *. Professor Schultze pomts out that the alternately luminous and darkened aspect of minute elevations and depressions is reversed according as the object is immersed in a medium of higher or lower refractive power than itself. I may add two still more perplexing difficulties which tend to render Welcker’s system nugatory, namely, the impracticability of determining at all times whether a Diatom-valve is placed with its external or its internal surface towards the observer, and of ascertaining when that precise amount of definition has been arrived at under which the luminous or dark spots are to be regarded as charac- teristic. In endeavouring to resolve the marking on Pleuro- sigma angulatum by Welcker’s method, Schultze allows that he signally failed, and that “the imdistinct bright poimts” which precede the dark points brought into view upon the accurate focusing arrived at by the lowering of the tube “do not coin- cide exactly with them in position, but may rather be said to be contiguous to them, and to represent, consequently, the borders of the depressions,”’—the general conclusion adopted by him being, “that neither spherical, conical, nor pyramidal elevations are the cause of the punctated appearance on the surface of the above-named species of Pleurosigma, although the decussating sets of ridges, at the points of intersection, afford an appearance resembling that of tubercular elevations ;” and further, “in cases where two sets of lines intersect each other at a right angle, as in P, balticum, hippocampus, &c., the disposition of the ridges at once suffices to account for the arrangement of the quadrangular interspaces. But it is not so easy, he adds, to ex- plain the disposition of the hexagons produced by the three sets of ridges intersecting each other at an angle of 60°, which exist in P. angulatum and its allies. It is most natural to suppose that they would be arranged like the cells of a honeycomb, as figured in the plate [appended to the abstract]. An arrangement of this kind is figured, amongst others, by Carpenter and Mr. Charles Hall.” * * * “That the hexagons are arranged as figured by * In specimens of this Diatom collected near Guernsey, the raised rmgs described in the Synopsis are extremely faint, the outline accordingly presenting an unbroken series of curves, the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. 359 Mr. Hall* is fully established to the author’s (Professor Schultze’s) satisfaction by some photographic representations procured by the aid of Hartnack’s combination. According to these figures, the lines in each set are not continuous in a straight direction, but are bent at short intervals, at an angle of 120°. These bends are, however, so close together as to be imperceptible with the power usually employed in the examination of P. angulatum, that is, with one of from 500 to 800 diameters. It is especially by oblique light (under which only it is generally the case that the sets of ridges appear as continuous striz) that the ilu. sion (?) becomes perfect that we are beholding sets of lines running in a perfectly direct course ; whilst observations with direct illumination, provided that the lenses have sufficient de- fining power, discloses the true state of things” (?). It will be seen from the above extract (which I have deemed it unavoidable to quote in detail) that Prof. Schultze bases his rea- soning on a fundamental error, namely, the presence of only three sets of decussating lines in Pleurosigma angulatum and its allies, whereas they invariably present four: that is to say, two series traversing the valve diagonally, so as to leave lozenge-shaped spaces between each of these intersections; and two series, one of which is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the valve, whilst the other crosses this at right angles. In the quincuncially marked group the diagonal lines alone maintain one uniform plane, and hence are invariably the most distinct; whilst the rectangular lines, which again intersect the axes of the lozenge- shaped spaces, follow the alternately ascending and descending outline of the pyramidal projections by which these spaces are occupied, and hence constitute a series of vertical zigzags, which causes them to be defined with much greater difficulty. In the rectangularly striated Pleurosigmata, of which P. baltt- cum is the type, the rectangular sets of lines are the most dis- tinctly marked, for a similar reason. They are not only on the same plane, however, as the diagonal lines are in the quincun- cial group, but, as I have recently satisfied myself, they consti- tute the actual surface of the valve, whilst the spaces bounded by them are pyramidal depressions. In the one case, the frag- ments of a comminuted valve, when viewed in section, show that the apices of the pyramidal elevations are the most prominent points on the external surface ; im the other, that the ridges, or, in other words, the rectangular strie, are the most prominent. As stated by me in my former paper on this subject (Annals and Magazine of Natural History, February 1860), analogy has * Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, vol. iv. pl. 13. fig. 2; and Micrographic Dictionary, 1856, pl. 47. figs. 41 and 48 ; the former of which is “ copied from a photograph by Mr. Wenham.” 360 Dr. G.C. Wallich on the Structure of been strained a little too far in the attempt to deduce, from the appearances presented by one group of Diatoms which happens to furnish structure easily resolvable even with the lowest powers of the microscope, and the least perfect optical combinations, the nature of the markings in another group which happens to pre-. sent a structure that is resolvable with the utmost difficulty. It is with no little satisfaction, therefore, that I find Dr. Carpen- ter, in the recent edition of his work on the microscope (1862), has relinquished the view formerly supported by him regarding the analogy subsisting between such forms as Triceratium, Isthmia and Pleurosigma, and that this emiment authority has given in his adhesion to the opinion long advocated by me, namely, that the valvular surface of P. angulatum is not studded with depres- sions, but with elevations. Moreover it is a significant fact that the woodcut representing the enlarged photographic view of this Diatom inserted in previous editions of his work is altogether omitted in the last one. Of this Prof. Schultze was obviously ignorant when he penned his remarks. Dr. Carpenter does not state, however, whether he considers these elevations as being simply tubercular or formed with distinct sides, that is, with facets, as suggested by me. Since writing my former paper, so far from meeting with any appearances or facts to cause me to modify the view then offered with regard to P. angulatum, that view has derived the strongest confirmation from repeated and careful re- examination of the structure under every condition capable of throwing light upon its true nature. But, owing to the extreme minuteness of the markings of this Diatom, it seemed almost hopeless to render them amenable to anything approaching proof until some closely allied variety should turn up, of sufficient size to meet the requirements of the case. Fortunately some specimens of P. formosum* supplied the necessary conditions. One valve in my possession measures in length ;5th of an inch, the dia- gonal striz being 25 in ‘001. Numerous other specimens mea- sure as much as =. th and ;1,th of an inch, their striation being only a slight degree finer. By means of these, I have been enabled with ease to see the various series of lines, under a Ross’s }-inch objective. With the same eminent maker’s lenses of ith, 3th, Ath, and 4th focus, and with a Hartnack’s No. 10 immersion lens, whether employing direct or oblique, natural or artificial light, and with either shallow or deep eye-pieces, not only is the lozenge-shaped character of the interspaces unmis- takeably determined, but the angulated structure of the elevations * Dredged by me at Guernsey in about 15 fathoms of water. According to the characters given in the Synopsis, this Diatom is intermediate be- tween P. formosum and P. decorum. The distinction drawn between these varieties, however, is too trivial to be tenable. the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. 361 occupying those spaces, and with it the character of the two re- maining series of lines. In short, the appearance presented by one of these valves, as seen under a Ross’s }-inch or +th inch objective and a low eye-piece, differs only in the angles* formed by the diagonal lines from what is seen on a valve of P. angu- latum when examined under a jth or jth. In both instances hexagons may be evoked by dint of a laborious effort to detect the precise error of focus essential for the production of this illusory figure ; but it is impossible to witness the contrast be- tween the perfect definition observable whilst the true structure is visible and that presented when the hexagons or “ dots ”’ are produced, without perceiving that a fictitious image is im- pressed on the retina in one case, and a true one in the other. But the question admits of demonstration in a very remark- able manner. By inserting a delicately-hinged metallic scale between the eye-piece and the tube of the microscope, so as to form a goniometer, I was enabled with accuracy to measure the two angles produced by the intersections of the diagonal lines. These were respectively 83° and 97°. By means of a piece of paper, carefully cut, so as to form a four-sided figure presenting these angles, and gummed to the plane side of the lens of the eye-piece nearest to the objective, I was subsequently able to verify the first observation. The next step was to count how many diagonal lines occupied a given number of divisions of a Ross’s screw micrometer ; and then, how many longitudinal and transverse lines occupied the same space. This done, a diagrammatic figure was prepared, the only essential condition in its formation being that the recorded angles should be accu- rately preserved. The two diagonal sets of lines being thus laid down, parallel longitudinal lines were drawn passing through the whole of the angles of 83°, and parallel transverse ones through the whole of those of 97°. It now only remained to count off as many of the diagonal series as were previously ob- served to occupy the predetermined number of divisions of the micrometer, and, employing these as a unit of comparison, to ascertain if the longitudinal and transverse series of lines on the diagram tallied in number with those occupying an equal space on the valve itself. The result, which appears to me conclusively to demonstrate the identity in the series and direction of the lines on the valve itself and the diagram, was as follows + :— * The horizontal angles in P. angulatum are respectively 120° and 60°. + It will at once be obvious that the degree of magnifying power em- ployed in this observation is quite immaterial, the relative number of lines, longitudinal and transverse, in any given number of diagonals being all that is requisite. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xi. a4 362 - Dr. G. C. Wallich on the Structure of In five divisions of the micrometer, diagonal lines 10 ” » ” longitudinal do, 15 ” ” i _ transverse do, 124 In a space equal to ten of the dia- gonal lines on the diagram, longitudinal lines 142 ” » ” transverse do, 13 It is perhaps necessary to add that, in speaking of lines, I mean to convey the idea of perfectly clear and well-defined lines, such as are visible on the finest kind of cut glass or erystal by the naked eye—and further, that, with the highest powers, it becomes perfectly manifest that the diagonal series which bound the elevated portions of the structure are not ‘‘bent at short intervals at an angle of 120°,” as supposed by Schultze and others, On this head I may remark that if the sides of an hexagonal figure, such as has been assumed to exist in P. angu- latum, are resolvable, inasmuch as each of the sides must, @ priori, occupy the length of one of these “bends,” it follows as a necessary consequence that the same degree of magnifying power, and the same adjustments of the microscope, ought to render apparent the “bends” or zigzag formed by the succes- sion of these deviations from a direct course. But inasmuch as these powers and adjustments avowedly fail to do so, it seems almost like an assumption unsupported by evidence of any direct kind whatever to regard the lines otherwise than as they appear. Again, assuming the lines to be resolvable into “ dots” or hexagons, and accepting the estimate laid down in the ‘ Synopsis of British Diatomacee’ as correct, namely, 52 in ‘001", and further assuming the diameter of each of the hexagons to be double the diameter of the “bent lines” by which they are bounded (which is about the proportion deducible from Mr. Wenham’s photographic representation), it is manifest that the diameter of the “bent lines”? would be about one 100,000th of an inch, and that this would also be an approximate estimate of the length of each deviation to the right or left of the direct line. Now, since it is well known that lines of this degree of thickness can be clearly defined, and even counted, when not closely aggregated together, it follows that the “bent” form ought to be, and indeed would be, definable, did it really exist. But, as candidly acknowledged by Schultze, “these bends are imperceptible ” with powers even of 500 and up to 800 dia- meters; and this being the case, the inference is surely war- wanted, that no faith can be placed in the apparent outline of the spaces said to be actually determined and defined by those ** bent lines.” But, as I have formerly mentioned, in the Plewrosigmata there the Valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms. ~ 363° are fowr sets of lines, and not three only, as stated by Pro- fessor Schultze. This is a material point; for there are only three sets necessary in the formation of a series of hexagons. And, lastly, I have to repeat that, whereas a change in the series which happens to be most distinet (owing to the direction in which the light comes) takes place four times during a com- plete revolution of the stage (that is to say, once in every 90°, when P. angulatum is examined), the change would necessarily take place six times, or once in every 60°, were the hexagonal figure the true one. Lastly, it is obvious that, if the striz or lines are those parts of the valve which are “ resolvable into dots” or hexagons, two of each of these lines ought to enter into the formation of op- posite sides of each hexagon. In Schultze’s figure* two of each- series are actually represented as entering into the formation of each hexagon. Hence, for every three hexagons there ought to be four lines. But it is not the lines which, under the cireum- stances described, become resolvable into dots or hexagons, but the spaces between the intersections of those lines ; and hence it will be found that the number of “dots” oceupying a given number of divisions of the micrometer does not coincide with the number of lines ascertained as occurring im a like space. There is one point, however, on which I have found it neces- sary to modify my previous opinions. To this I have already cursorily referred, namely, the depressed interspaces on the valvular surface of Plewrosigma balticum and the rest of the rectan- gularly marked series. But I am by no means prepared to speak positively regarding this or the difference presented between the outer and inner surfaces of the rectangularly or quincuncially arranged group. The existence of a difference is extremely pro- bable for several reasons. Thus the direction of the lines of frae- ture characteristic of each group is hardly reconcileable with any other hypothesis than that the lines constitute the thinnest and weakest portions of the structure; and assuming this as a gene- rally admitted fact, whether the interspaces are occupied by elevations or depressions, it follows that these cannot occur equally on both sides, otherwise the entire substance would be moniliform, which has never been asserted, to my knowledge. It might naturally be supposed that elevated portions occur- ring on one surface of a valve would impart the appearance of depressions when viewed from the opposite surface. But I have failed to satisfy myself of any such distinction. In this dilemma I caused to be prepared two models in plate glass, on one surface of which were carefully imitated the markings of the two typical forms, the other surface remaining plam. These were examined * Journal of Microscopical Science for April 1863, ly 8. fig. 11, 4% 364° Dr. G.C. Wallich on the Structure of the Valves of Diatoms. both. by direct and oblique light, being placed within a box of sufficient length to exclude the rays coming in other directions, and examined with the naked eye, an opera-glass, and a hand- glass of long focus, at varying distances. The experiment was quite satisfactory so far as the production of the appearances visible under accurate and faulty focusing is concerned, even to the creation of dots where there ought to be pyramidal four- sided figures; but so identical are the appearances engendered, from whichever side the plates are viewed, that it is almost im- possible to determine, from mere eyesight, which surface is nearest the observer. The same sort of difficulty may be noticed in looking directly through a plano-convex lens held up to the light at some distance from the eye. It is hardly to be wondered at, therefore, that the Diatom-valve should be equally intractable in this respect. It is, I presume, quite unnecessary for me to enter into the con- cluding question raised by Professor Schultze with regard to the foraminated structure of certain Diatom-valves, and more especi- ally of Isthmia and Coscinodiscus, since few, if any, microscopists in this country will be found to coincide with the opinion he ex- presses. That the thinning away of portions of the valvular surface is sometimes extreme admits of no doubt; but that it normally amounts to actual perforation is negatived by a number of well-known facts and appearances. Under these circumstances I only invite attention to the view he has hazarded, in order to show the danger of reliance on Welcker’s test as applied to such organisms as the most delicately sculptured of the Diatoms. It only remains for me to express my conviction—one arrived at under no undue bias in favour of lenses of British manufac- ture—that the apparently unavoidable and repeated succession of light and dark points, on which so much stress has been laid by Welcker and Schultze, is indicative of a very limited degree of penetrating power. Of the high qualities of the Hart- nack combination I can speak with confidence from the perfor- mance of one in my possession. It equals any lens I have ever seen for clearness of definition as well as penetrating capacity ; but the necessity for the employment of a drop of fluid between the thin glass cover of the slide and the front combination must always be regarded as an inconvenience and a drawback to its employment, more especially since our first-rate English lenses effect all that the Hartnack combination can effect, without any such supplementary aid, and under a much lower degree of mag- nifying power. Postscript.—The following is a statement of the experiments conducted with a view to ascertain the relative thicknesses of Dr. G. C. Wallich on an undescribed Form of Amceba. 3865 different portions of the Diatom-valve under the action of fluoric acid—assuming, as every portion is of precisely similar density, that the thinner parts must be the first to succumb to the eroding action. I may mention that the acid was very gradually applied in fumes to the Diatoms previously dried and fixed on slips of mica. In the stouter and more coarsely marked Navicule, in which the median line is surrounded by a broad unstriated area of silex, from the outer margin of which the striation commences, the striated portion was invariably destroyed first, the dotted points being the foremost to yield. The median line and its adjoming area yielded last. In Cocconeis distans the dots at once yielded, and then increased in size until the intervening portions of silex were altogether eroded. In Biddulphia, Triceratium, and Isthmia, the interspaces yielded first. The coste of B. pulchella and B. regina yielded last. In Pleurosigma formosum and P. balticum the action on the entire structure was so instantaneous and complete that it was difficult to apply the smallest quantity of the fumes without altogether consuming the valves. But wherever portions re- mained, the outline was identical with that shown when the valves are fractured, thus clearly confirming the view that the portions constituting the linear markings are the thinnest. In these forms the median and terminal nodules were the last to succumb. Lastly, it is worthy of notice that in those portions of the Diatom-valve which present a delicate pinkish tint the siliceous structure is the thickest. Where the tint is grey or inclining to green, the film may be regarded as being of extreme tenuity. The same feature holds good amongst the Polycystina, and is indeed more strikingly observable in that family, owing to their superior size and solidity. XLI.—Further Observations on an undescribed indigenous Ameeba, with Notices on remarkable forms of Actinophrys and Difflugia. By G. C. Watticu, M.D., F.L.S., F.G.S., &c. [Plate IX.] Tue very singular characters presented by the new form of Ameba, to which attention was drawn by me in the last Number of ‘The Annals,’ having induced me to keep it under constant supervision during the bygone month, I am glad to be enabled to confirm the description there given, and at the same time to add several new facts regarding it and two other species of in- Dr. G.C. Wallich on an undescribed Indigenous. Amceba. ous Rhizopods, which can hardly fail to excite interest. I eg to state, however, that the present and former communi- gation on this subject must only be regarded as of a preliminary nature, and published with a view to afford naturalists an oppor- tunity of personally investigating the organisms in question. When it is borne in mind that we are now treating of creatures holding the lowest position in the scale of being, and that it has been customary to assign to them a degree of simplicity of struc- ture wholly incompatible, so far as all analogy teaches, with the vital functions they are known to perform, it will, I think, be allowed that this unlooked-for phase in the history of the Rhi- zopods cannot be too minutely scrutinized. From a further supply of the material containing the Amwebe obtained towards the close of March, it would appear that the form is tolerably plentiful—occurring, however, only in those Shallow pools, highly impregnated with ferruginous matter, that are to be met with in certain parts of Hampstead Heath. In the clear pools not a single specimen, having the novel characters I have described, is to be found. Out of the numerous individuals examined by me, I should say that not more than 5 per cent. have been deficient in the villous patch ; and from the mode in which some of the larger specimens have been rent asunder by pressure whilst under observation, so as to form two distinct beings, there seems every reason to believe that these apparently exceptional specimens have been produced by similar means. Under the circumstances, I think the Ameba may safely be regarded as a well-marked species, and I accordingly propose that it should be named A. villosa. I mentioned in my former notice that the contractile vesicle and nucleus were generally to be seen in the vicinity of the vil- lous patch, and that, in a single example, the latter had assumed the shape of a spherical tuft attached to the body by a cylindrical pedicle of sarcode. During the past month I have had ample opportunity of verifying the observation that, in the majority of specimens, so long as the villous patch is not being employed as an organ of prehension, but is merely dragged along in rear of _the main body, the nucleus and contractile vesicle retain their position in its vicinity, but that they circulate with the other contained matters whenever the prehensile action of the villi is not in abeyance. Several specimens have exhibited the tuft and pedicle, but not in so symmetrical a form as the first one ob- served by me. These are very material points, inasmuch as they tend to prove that some kind of consentaneous action takes place between the contractile vesicle, the nucleus, and the villous area, even independently of the appearances now about to be described. In several specimens, a delicate funnel-shaped tubule was Dr. G. C. Wallich on an undescribed Indigenous Amceba, 367 visible passing longitudinally through the villous tuft (Plate IX. fig. 3). When this occurred, the contractile vesicle was not to be seen. Minute particles of effete matter, accompanied at times by shreds of sarcode, were frequently extruded at the infundibuliform orifice,—their passage outwards being slow till the orifice was reached, when they seemed to be forced out with a jerk. On three occasions, what appeared to be a minute vacuole (for it did not pulsate) was similarly extruded, its sar- codic investment assuming the shape of a minute villous tuft, which remained adherent for a time to the main body by a slender filament, but became eventually detached when the crea- ture had advanced to a sufficient distance to overcome its exten- sile powers (Plate IX. fig. 4). It is a very curious fact that in one of the saucers into wHidh the material containing the Ame@be was placed, and in which the water had been purposely allowed to evaporate to a considerable extent, the whole of the specimens seemed to undergo another change. This consisted in the formation of a large subspherical or ovate mass of homogeneous granular matter, which occupied the entire posterior* fourth of the body, causing it to bulge, with more or less regularity, around the base of the villous tuft, and, like the latter, never quitting that position (figs. 1, 2, & 3). In this phase of the Ame@ba the normal erratic pseudopodia were hardly ever projeeted, but the body maintamed an elon- gated cylindrical shape, with comparatively rapid flowing move- ments, during the occurrence of which the villous tuft was pas- sively dragged along. This granular mass at first sight resem- bled a much enlarged nucleus without its containing vesicle. Although its boundaries were well defined posteriorly, the granules seemed to amalgamate to some extent with the general endosare anteriorly, and at times a portion of the granules left the mass and took part in the general cyclosis. But in some individuals the true ngicleus could be seen distinctly within the boundary line of the granular mass, although it was impossible to deter- mine whether it was actually imbedded in its centre, or occu- pied a position externally to it but within the ectosarc. In these specimens the contractile vesicle was not observed to undergo its normal diastolic and systolic action ; and hence it is possible that the vesicles seen may in reality have been vacuoles, in this condition of the organism. At all ;events, further infor- mation is requisite before the point can be accurately ascertained. It is highly probable, however, that the granular mass referred * Reptation is so manifest in these Amebe, and the direction of their movements is so uniformly opposite to that in which the villous area is situated, that I have deemed it legitimate to employ the terms anterior and posterior in my description of the parts. 368 Dr. G.C. Wallich on an undescribed Indigenous Amceba. to is of the nature of a nucleus. In appreciable characters, both as to colour, form, and size, the component granules are identical with those seen in the true nucleus. But the analogy is well nigh confirmed from the circumstance that, at a still later period, when evaporation of the water had gone on to a greater extent, the entire granular mass referred to became segregated, as if by a process of segmentation, into numerous distinct nuclei, amongst which the true nucleus was not recognizable as a separate or different structure. These multiple nuclei, varying in number from five to about a dozen, were contained in no separate cavity or cavities, but occupied the position previously occupied by the single large granular mass. In the specimens exhibiting this structure, the animal seemed inclined to assume an encysted form, motion being almost totally suspended, and the short conical pseudopodia projected from all parts of the surface except the villous area, being withdrawn and re-extended with extreme slowness, and only at long intervals (Plate IX. fig. 5). After a time (whether from the pressure of the glass cover or other- wise, I am as yet unable to determine), these multiple nuclei were extruded, one by one, in the vicinity of the villous area. During extrusion, and for several minutes subsequently, they retained their spherical mulberry-like form. They then, one after the other, fell asunder as it were,—the granular disruption seeming to commence at a single central point, and afterwards to extend equally on all sides. The granules, when released, formed a delicate cloud, each granule maintaining a tremulous and apparently molecular movement for a few seconds, and ulti- mately assuming a condition of perfect rest. At fig. 5a I have shown one of these nuclear masses as seen when first extruded. In a single example, occurring in the material originally pro- cured, a very distinct membranous capsule was observable (fig. 6). This had all the appearance of being true ectosarc, inasmuch as it not only closely invested the body, but the boundaries of the villous area. I have already stated in my previous paper that acid and alkaline reagents failed to render evident any such membrane as is alluded to by Auerbach and Schneider. Re- peated attempts with these reagents have since been made by me to bring the membrane into view, but without success. In the single specimen now under notice, all movement of the body had entirely ceased, and it appeared to be strictly encysted. But there still remained a slow cyclosis of the granular particles ; so that life was not extinct. It is just possible, therefore, that the membranous capsule may not have constituted an integral por- tion of the Ameba in question, but that the latter may have accidentally insinuated itself into the effete cell of some other animal, It is a significant fact, however, that the membrane Dr. G. C. Wallich on an undescribed Indigenous Amceba. 369 resisted pressure in a manner that showed its strength and at the same time the probable absence of any aperture through which its contents, if not forming part and parcel of itself, might have escaped. In short, disruption did not take place until after the glass cover in use (measuring *008 of an inch in thickness) had been broken. The wall then exhibited very dis- tinct angular folds and a clear membranous outline, but of too great tenuity to admit of the measurement of its thickness. In this specimen the nucleus, probably owing to displacement by the pressure, occupied a position at the centre of the body— no contractile vesicle or larger granular mass being present, but several vacuoles being scattered through its substance. One of the most remarkable amongst the novel and varied characters of these Amebe consists in the vesicle in which the true nucleus is contained having been found to be distinctly membranous in some individuals. In the figures appended to my paper in the last Number of the ‘ Annals,’ I endeavoured to show the definite appearance of the vesicular chamber of the nucleus ; but at that time I had no idea of the peculiarity thereby indicated, nor did I become aware of it, or indeed believe in it, until I had seen several nuclei with their vesicular covering com- pletely isolated from the main body by means of the compressor. The fact, startling as it seems, is nevertheless certain, that in these specimens the nucleus was contained in a distinct mem- branous cell of its own, and that this cell admits of perfect isolation without undergoing rupture. The cell-wall was sphe- rical in its extruded state, perfectly hyaline, tough, and resisting, and forming irregular folds under augmented pressure, as shown in figures 7 and 7b,—a clear nucleolus, as before described, being visible in the interior of the granular nucleus, and the space be- tween the nucleus and cell-wall being occupied by a still more attenuated granular protoplasm. In contradistinction to this, the multiple nuclei, already spoken of, had neither investing membrane nor nucleolus. Can it be that the one phase repre- sents the germ-cell, and the other the sperm-cells ? Another fact is deducible from the appearances presented by the sarcode-substance of the largest of these Amawbe. The rush of granules does not follow upon a previous contractile effort exercised at the posterior portion. As the animal progresses, occasionally altering its course, there are periods during which perfect quiescence is maintained by the granules; and the rush or flow of these seems to take place, as it were, to fill up the vacuum engendered by the sudden projection of a portion of the ectosarc in the shape of a pseudopodium. Hence it would ap- pear that motion is dependent on the contractile power of the external sarcode-layer, and that the endosare only passively par- 8370 Dr. G.C. Wallich on. an-undescribed Indigenous Amoeba, ticipates in it. If this view is correct, it involves a very import- ant consideration ; for it proves that the old German doctrine of a “primary contractile mucus” is essentially correct, and that the circulation is not dependent, even in part, on the alternate expansion and collapse of the contractile vesicle. Further than this, it affords the strongest confirmation of the high degree of differentiation existing between the endosarc and ectosare of the Ameoeban group. The mysterious faculty resident in the latter portion of the structure, of forming extempore orifices for the inception or ex- trusion of food-particles, &c., may be witnessed in these speci- mens in a very singular manner, and one which, as far as I am aware, has not hitherto attracted attention. I allude to the projection of the ectosarc from some area of the general surface in the form of a hemispherical mass with a broad base, only a very small portion of the original contour line seeming to give way at first, so as to admit of the passage of the endosare and other granular contents into the newly projected part, but its entire floor appearing to be gradually dissolved, as it were, and free communication between the main body and the new pseudopodial cavity not being established until the completion of this process. Whilst it is progressing, the endosarc-granules seem to rush round a corner into the cavity, the corner gradually re- ceding, so to speak, and ultimately being altogether obliterated. From these facts it is obvious that the ectosare and endosare are not permanent portions of the Protean structure, but mutually convertible one into the other; and that tt is an essential feature of sarcode that, whilst the outer layer for the time being becomes, ipso facto, instantaneously differentiated into ectosarc, the same layer reverts to the condition of endosarc under the circumstances just described. In the latter part of the process, that is, the reversion to the condition of endosarc, the action is by no means so instantaneous as when the converse takes place. In the Actinophryans both processes are, comparatively speaking, slow. Lastly, I have to state that when the homogeneous sarcode is poured forth from these Amebe under pressure, the globules show no tendency whatever to coalesce. In general, the masses of sarcode are expelled in irregular-oblong or ovate portions of varying sizes, which rapidly detach themselves, and then at once assume a perfect spherical form. It is very rarely indeed that foreign bodies remain within these masses, or are extruded as part of their contents. They are extruded separately under these circumstances. The sarcode constituting the sphe- ules, when first it escapes, appears perfectly homogeneous, and s granules are extremely minute. After the lapse of a period arying from a quarter tohalf an hour, this homogeneous cha- Bibliographical Notice. 371, racter disappears, and a species of segmentation takes place, the minute granules becoming more closely aggregated together, so as to form irregular and somewhat darker patches within the spherule, whilst the form of the latter is in nowise modified. A representation of these phenomena is given on a largely magnified scale in figs. 8, 8a, and 8d. [To be continued. | EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX. Fig. 1. Ameba villosa, showing the position and appearance of the large granular mass, with the true nucleus, and cylindrical form as- sumed by the Amebe. Fig. 2. A specimen in which the contractile vesicle is apparently replaced by a conical-shaped vacuole. Fig. 3. The granular mass and villous tuft, showing the infundibuliform tubule. Fig. 4. The villous tuft and infundibuliform tubule, with an extruded vacuole (?), and its investiture and sustaining filament of sareode, Fig. 5. An Ameba with multiple nuclear bodies. Fig. 5a. One of these mulberry-shaped nuclei, as seen immediately after extrusion. Fig. 6. Encysted ? form, with distinct membranous envelope. Fig. 7. One of the true nuclei after isolation from the parent body, show- ing its membranous investiture. Fig. 7b. The same, as seen after augmented pressure. Fig. 8. Largely magnified portion of an active Ameba, showing the appear- ance of the sarcode-globules (8a, 8) isolated by pressure. N.B. The whole of the specimens were more or less full of minute Crumenule, with which the material in which they were found abounded. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE. On the Geology and Natural History of the Upper Missouri : being the substance of a Report made to Lieut.G.K. Warren, T.E.U.S.A. By Dr. F. V. Haypen, &c. &e. 4to, Philadelphia, 1862. (From the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, vol. xii. Read July 19, 1861.) Turis valuable memoir comprises information collected on three oc- casions :—Ist. An account of the geological observations made by Dr. Hayden when associated with Lieut. Warren’s Expedition, in the summer and autumn of 1557, from Bellevue on the Missouri (about 41° lat., 96° long.) to the mouth of the Big Sioux and back, and then across Nebraska to Fort Laramie, then northward across the Black Hills to Bear Peak (about 44° 30! lat., 105° 20! long.), and then south-eastward through the Bad Lands to the Niobara River, and along it to Fort Randall on the Missouri: 2ndly. Geo- logical explorations, by Dr. Hayden and Mr. F. B. Meek, in the north-eastern portion of Kansas territory (between 95° and 98° long., and 38° and 39° 30! lat.), in 1858. 3rdly. Some results of an ex- pedition to the north-west under Capt. W. F. Raynolds, in 185960, 372 Bibliographical Notice. Information obtained by the author on this occasion is brought to bear on observations previously made, enabling Dr. Hayden to make, in chapter xiii. of the memoir before us, “‘a condensed statement of the leading geological discoveries up to the present time, and to harmonize some of the conflicting opinions which may have been advanced in regard to the age of the different deposits in the west.” Without careful reference to this third portion of the memoir, the reader will misapprehend the author’s views on several points, such as the upheaval-era of the Rocky Mountains, the relations of the Infrajurassic sandstones, the classification of the Tertiaries, &c. The memoir is illustrated by a few woodcut sections (seriously limited on account of the cost of publication), and by a coloured geological map, based on Lieut. Warren’s survey. But this is a mere sketch-map ; it does not include the Judith River (an important locality), contains no indication of the “superficial deposits,” and mainly represents the determinations arrived at in 1857; and the names of places have been chosen for insertion with little reference to the routes of 1857-58 ; so that it proves but a poor help to the careful student of this interesting memoir. In the “ Historical Introduction”? a short account is given of former explorations made in the north-west territories. The rocks met with in the regions referred to, between the Missouri and the Rocky Mountains, and on the western slopes of the Big Horn and Wind River ranges, are :— I. Granitic, metamorphic, and eruptive rocks in the axes of the Rocky Mountains, the Black Hills, and Bear Peak (pp. 33 & 117, &c.). Some lofty and extensive ranges consist of basaltic and other voleanic rocks. II. Lower Silurian strata (referable to the Potsdam Sandstone), consisting of siliceous limestone, micaceous sandstone, and calcareous fossiliferous grit (with Lingula, Obolus, and Trilobites). This is best seen in the Black Hills, where the upheaved strata engirdle the metamorphic rocks. The author has found this fossiliferous primor- dial sandstone along the eastern margin of the Big Horn range (p. 120), and has recognized it in the Laramie Range ; and he thinks that the sandstone and conglomerate of Stansbury Island and else- where in the neighbourhood of the Great Salt Lake may be of the same age, also the so-called ‘‘ Old Red Sandstone’? (Marcou) of the Aztec Mountains in New Mexico. III. Carboniferous rocks, of great thickness, belonging to the upper part of the series, and possessing but little coal, in North- eastern Kansas and South-eastern Nebraska; whilst about 100 feet of fossiliferous limestone, turned up around the Black Hills and Bear Peak, and a variable group of sandy and calcareous strata, from 1000 to 1500 feet thick, with a few fossils, forming the western outcrop of the great Carboniferous formation, where its edge is up- raised along the Big Horn and the Laramie Mountains, and along the Sweet-water and Wind River Mountains, represent perhaps both the upper and lower members of the series (p.121). Still further north, the Carboniferous strata abound about the upper branches of Bibliographical Notice. 373 the Missouri ; and they reoccur on the western slopes of the Rocky Mountains, in South-eastern Oregon (p. 121). Notes on the fossils collected by the author from the Carboniferous strata are given at pages 61-67. One of the most abundant is Fusu- lina cylindrica, which abounds in Russia in the upper part of the Lower Carboniferous series (Mountain-limestone) ; but in Kansas it is found (F. cylindrica, var. ventricosa, Meek and Hayden) within about 300 feet of the top of the Upper Carboniferous series (Coal- measures), and occurs abundantly in numerous beds far down in the series. In South-western Iowa and in Missouri it also abounds. F. elongata, Shumard, belongs to the white limestone of the Guada- lupe Mountains, New Mexico, which has been referred to the Per- mian series by Dr. Shumard. IV. In the Kansas Valley, the Coal-measures pass upwards con- formably, from magnesian limestones alternating with clays, and containing Solemya, Myalina, Pleurophorus? subcuneatus, Bake- vellia parva, Euomphalus, Spirigera, Orthosina umbraculum(?), O. Shumardianum, &c., into clays and magnesian limestone, with Monotis Hawni, Myalina perattenuata, Pleurophorus? subcuneatus, Edmondia? Calhounii, Pecten, Spirigera, Nautilus excentricus, Bakevellia parva, Leda subscitula, Axinus rotundatus, Bellero- phon, Murchisonia, &c. The latter set of beds are the first that lose nearly all trace of Carboniferous forms; but the former are not nearly the first that contain genera (such as Synocladia and Bakevellia) peculiar to the Permian rocks of Europe. Here, then, Dr. Hayden is inclined to draw a provisional and artificial line between “Carboniferous”? and “Permian,” if such be required ; though apparently he would rather admit the existence, in this re- gion, of an intermediate and transitional group of rocks. In Illinois, however, there is an unconformity between the Carboniferous and Permian beds, according to Dr. J.G. Norwood. In Kansas, above the fossiliferous beds above mentioned, succeed calcareo-siliceous con- glomerate (breccia ?), local and about 18 feet thick ; gypsiferous clays, 95 feet; red and variegated clays, with seams and veins of magnesian limestone, 60 feet ; all unfossiliferous and doubtfully referred to the Permian series. In the Black Hills, the limestone of the Carboniferous formation is succeeded by about 400 feet of red, gypsiferous, caleareo-argilla- ceous beds and sandstone, among which is a limestone, of variable thickness, with Spirifer, Pleurotomarie, Macrocheili, and Bellero- phon; and cherty magnesian limestones, with Myalina perattenuata, were found at the foot of the Big Horn Mountains, near the head of Powder River. These are possibly Permian. They appear to have been subjected to great denudation (together with the Carboniferous rocks) previously to the deposition of the next series of deposits. V. These are red arenaceous and gypsiferous marls, overlying the Carboniferous rocks along the eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains, from lat. 49° southwards, also in the Laramie Plains, and on the west side of the Wind River Mountains, and over a vast extent of country, including the Wasatch Mountains, south of Lake Utah, also 874 Bibliographical Notice. the Green River Valley down the Colorado into New Mexico, where they have been noticed and described by various explorers. These beds have usually been correlated with the European Trias; and the fossil plants found in them by Dr. Newberry in New Mexico appear to favour that idea; but Dr. Hayden does not feel confident on the subject, especially as he says, “‘On the west side of the Wind River Mountains we have discovered fossils beneath the red beds, which may include those in the Jurassic”’ (p. 123). VI. “The Jurassic rocks are everywhere revealed overlying the red deposits just mentioned, and possess an equal geographical ex- tension.”” Around the Black Hills and along the flanks of the Rocky Mountains, they are upheaved in a zone from a quarter to three miles wide, and consist of,—1st (lowest), Laminated sandstones and shales, with Trigonia, Pecten, Mytilus, Serpula, Avicula (Mo- notis) tenuicostata, Meek & Hayden, Pentacrinus astericus, M.&H., Lingula brevirostra, &c., 60 to 100 feet. 2nd. Marls, 30 to 40 feet. 3rd. Sandstones and marls, with Arca inornata, Panopea (Myacites) subelliptica, M. & H., Avicula tenuicostata, Ostrea, Hettangia, Ammonites cordiformis, M. & H., A. Henryi, and Belemnites densus, M. & H.; and a calcareous grit, of freshwater origin [Wealden ?], with Unio nucalis, Planorbis, and Paludina (?), altogether 50 to 80 feet (p. 42 & p.123). These Jurassic strata are not the so-called ** Jurassic’ of Marcou. VII. The Cretaceous system “holds a very important position in the North-west, not only from the vast area which it occupies, but also from the number, variety, and beauty of its organic remains.” It is divisible into five members. The lowest, No. 1, ‘‘is a well- ‘marked and distinct division along the Missouri River from De Soto to a point above the mouth of the Big Sioux River in the eastern portions of Kansas and Nebraska, and in the south and south-west.” Towards the north-west it seems to merge into No. 2 division. No.1 is an important group of beds, sandy and argillaceous, about 200 feet thick in Nebraska, and containing lignite, fossil wood, impressions of Dicotyledonous leaves, Hquisetum (2), Pectunculus Siouwensis, H. & M., &e. At the mouth of the Judith River, the beds referred to the Creta- ceous groups Nos. 1 & 2 are from 1500 to 2000 feet thick, and con- tain lignite, Credneria, Inoceramus pertenuis, Mactra alta, Cardium speciosum, Meretrix Owenana, Thracia subtortuosa, Ostrea glabra, _Hettangia Americana, Panopea occidentalis, and Mactra formosa ; also freshwater beds [| Wealden?]|, with Lepidotus, Uniones, Melanie, Cyclas, and Helix (pp. 72, 125, 133). The thick red sandstones of group No. 1 afford lofty vertical bluffs in the Valley of the Elkhorn, which the Indians have sculptured with hieroglyphics. Blackbird Hill, on the Missouri, is a typical locality for this leaf-bearing Lower Cretaceous group, which here underlies a soft whitish limestone containing Inoceramus problematicus and fish- remains (group No. 3%, p. 10); on the Elkhorn it is overlain by group No. 3 (p. 71); and elsewhere, though sometimes hidden and sometimes apparently wanting, it seems usually to hold a definite Bibliographical Notice, 878 place as the lowest Cretaceous rock. Considerable care appears to have been taken by Dr. Hayden in these observations, as it has been supposed by Marcou that, in this zone of red leaf-bearing sandstone, beds of Miocene and Jurassic age may have been confounded toge- ther, In New Mexico, the equivalent of this group No. 1 has been seen by Dr. Newberry to be overlain by Inoceramus-limestone con- taining fossils thought by Marcou to be Jurassic! Cretaceous group No. 2 consists of dark grey fossiliferous clays, in Nebraska, with a thickness of 200 feet, and contains Ammonites Alpinianus, A. per- carinatus, Serpula? tenuicarinata, Inoceramus problematicus, Ostrea, Fish-remains, &c. (pp. 69 & 72). (In the table of fossils at p. 81, Ammonites Vermilionensis only is quoted for this group.) » Along the Big Horn, Laramie, and Wind River Mountains, from 800 to 1000 feet of black plastic clay, with beds of calcareous sandstone, represent perhaps both No, 2 and No. 1 (p. 124). Group No. 3 in Nebraska consists of Inoceramus-limestone (30 feet) passing upwards into marl with Ostrea congesta (100 feet) ; fish-remains are abundant throughout. In the west this group appears to be lost. Group No. 4 is represented in Nebraska by dark fossiliferous clays, 350 feet thick ; the lowest beds are locally lignitiferous ; and the lignites have in some places been burnt, and the strata thereby altered (pp. 75 & 76, note). This group is widely extended, gives a sterile character to the land, contains sandy seams impregnated with sulphate of soda, and is rich in numerous well-preserved organic remains: of these the chief are Mosasaurus, Nautilus Dekayi, Ammonites placenta, A. Halli, Baculites ovatus, B. compressus, and very many other Mollusks, &c. (See table of fossils, pp. 81 &c.): the only yet known Echinoderm of the Cretaceous rocks of the north-west occurs in these beds, on the Yellowstone River, Group No. 5 succeeds No. 4 with but little alteration in its fossil fauna; it is about 150 feet thick, consists of very fossiliferous clay and sandy beds, with much irony matter and numerous concretions: Belemnitella bulbosa, Nautilus Dekayi, Ammonites placenta, A. lobatus, Scaphites Conradi, Bacu- lites ovatus, Ostrea subtrigonalis, and many other Mollusks, &c. (pp. 69, 79, 81 &c.). On the western slope of the Rocky Mountains the series is repre- sented by 600 to 800 feet of black clays, sandy marls, sandstones, and limestones, alternating, and containing some lignitic seams. In the middle and towards the top of the series are some Inoceramus- limestones. The group has a general dip of about 20°, and passes upwards imperceptibly into the great Lignitic Tertiary group. Some of the Cretaceous beds suffered erosion before the others succeeded them; and in some cases it is evident that the groups Nos. 5, 4, & 3 were denuded before the deposition of the Tertiary beds (p. 125); but, on the other hand, the beds of group No. 5, after having gradually changed from a mainly argillaceous to an arenaceous condition (from deep to shallow-water formations), pass, in some instances without any apparent break, into the superincumbent * Estuarine Tertiaries”’ ;: indeed, were it not that Baculites, Ammo- nites, Inoceramus, &c., which abound in group No. 5, “are everys 376 Bibliographical Notice. where supposed to have become extinct at the close of the Cretaceous epoch, we would be in doubt whether to pronounce them Tertiary or Cretaceous,” the associated fossils being ‘ more closely allied to Tertiary types than Cretaceous” (pp. 30 & 128). VIII. The Tertiary formations in the north-west are divisible into 1 (uppermost). Yellow marl (Loess). 2. White River group. 3. Wind River Valley group. 4. Lignitic group. 5. Estuary group. The ‘ Estuary-group,”’ of which the Judith Basin may be regarded as the type, is widely distributed (p. 126). These beds are found at the sources of the Moreau, Grand, and Cannonball Rivers; and at the mouth of the Big Horn they are 800 to 1000 feet thick. Similar deposits occur on the west side of the mountains near Green River. The “ Estuary Beds” pass up gradually into the Lignitiferous group, the mingled brackish and freshwater shells giving place to terrestrial, lacustrine, and fluviatile forms, which alone, without any marine associates, are found in the Upper Tertiaries of these vast regions. Some dicotyledonous leaves and silicified wood occur in some of the Estuary-deposits, but are insufficient ‘“‘to indicate the great luxu- riance of vegetation which must have existed during the accumula- tion of the Lignite-strata”’ (p. 126). In the body of the memoir (p. 92) these two groups are described together under the heading ‘Great Lignite Tertiary basin.” Silicified trunks of trees, 50 to 100 feet in length, occur abundantly over hundreds of square miles along the Missouri and Yellowstone Rivers, in the Lignitic Tertia- ries; and there are from thirty to fifty beds of lignite, varying in thickness from 1 inch to 7 feet. The lignites on the Yellowstone River and elsewhere have been much affected by spontaneous com- bustion (p. 99). The Vertebrate remains as yet obtained from the Estuary and Lignite groups belong to Thespesius occidentalis, Ischy- rotherium antiquum, Mylognathus priscus, Compsemys victus, and Emys obscurus, all described by Leidy in Proc. Acad. Sc. Philad. 1856, and Trans. Americ. Phil. Soc. 1859. The list of the other fossils is given in pages 101-103 of the memoir. These interesting Tertiary beds have an enormous geographical extent. Dr. Hayden is of opinion that they reach from the Arctic Sea to the Isthmus of Darien along the Rocky Mountains, with the elevation of which they have partaken (pp. 118 & 126). - The Wind River group is from 1500 to 2000 feet thick, is inter- mediate in character between the foregoing and the next group, occurs on both sides of the mountains, and has partaken in the ele- vating movements, but in a less degree, having probably been formed whilst the uprising took place (p. 127). The White River group is of great extent, on both sides of the mountains, overlies the Lignite group, and has a nearly horizontal postion, whilst the Lignitiferous beds are much inclined (pp. 127, 128): these facts were not clearly recognized when the first part of Bibliographical Notice. 377 the Memoir was written. The White River group of Tertiary beds forms the ‘‘ Mauvaises Terres’”’ on the White (or White Earth) and Niobara Rivers. It is divisible into the (lowest) A. Titanotherium- bed, 100 feet ; B, Oreodon-bed, 100 feet; C. sandy beds, with few fossils, 80 feet; D. Grit and sand (few fossils), 400 feet ; E, Sand- stone and conglomerate, 200 feet [A—E = Miocene (?). Marcou thinks that some of these beds may be Jurassic or Triassic !] ; F. Freshwater limestone, marls and sands, sand with Mastodon and Elephas, altogether 200 feet [Pliocene]; surmounted with Post-pliocene yellow siliceous marl, &c,, with extinct and recent Vertebrates and recent Mollusks. A list of the numerous Vertebrata, described by Leidy, from these deposits, was lately given in the ‘Annals Nat. Hist.’ ser. 3. vol. xi. p. 148. The 63 extinct species (20 Ruminantia, 12 Multungula, 9 Solidungula, 6 Rodentia, 14 Car- nivora, and 2 Chelonia) are tabulated, with their stratigraphical distribution, at p. 106 of the memoir before us. The close physical and organic connexion between the Cretaceous group, No. 5, and the ‘ Estuarine group”’ induces Messrs. Hayden and Meek to regard the latter as of Eocene age, and as having “ushered in the dawn of the Tertiary epoch” with lakes and estua- ries on the upraised Cretaceous area. ‘‘The estuary deposits soon lose their marine and brackish character, and gradually pass up into the true Lignite-strata of purely freshwater origin, thence by a slight discordancy into the Wind River Valley beds, which give evidence of being an intermediate deposit between the true Lignite and the White River Tertiary beds. Then come the White River bone-beds, which pass up into the Pliocene of the Niobara by a slight physical break, and the latter are lost in the Yellow Marl or Loess deposits. I have estimated the entire thickness of Tertiary rocks in the north-west at from 5000 to 6000 feet ; and their interest will be appreciated when I venture to suggest that by thorough investigation they will doubt- less reveal, step by step, in a most remarkably clear manner the history of the physical growth and development of the central por- tion of this continent ”’ (p. 129). The author remarks that in the north-west the Lower Silurian beds indicate shallow water ; that in the Carboniferous epoch com- paratively few deep-water deposits were formed there, arenaceous beds predominating; that neither the Infrajurassic red sandstones nor the Jurassic shales and sandstones represent deep water; and that only in the middle Cretaceous strata is there much evidence of the preva- lence of ‘“long-continued periods of quiet water,’ and deep, in these ancient western seas; and these were succeeded by shallow-water conditions and dry land in Tertiary times, when the fluviatile Mollusca were such as now live in Southern Africa, Asia, China, and Siam, and when Palms, such as now exist in the tropics, flourished on the low land now represented by the Rocky Mountains, which have since formed a barrier to the moist west winds, and thus helped to bring about the comparative sterility of the central plains (p. 131). IX. The superficial deposits (p. 107, &c.) comprise, 1st (lowest), the Drift, consisting of sand, pebbly clay, gravel, and boulders, and Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xi. 25 378 Bibliographical Notice. varying from 1 to 30 feet in thickness: this seems to extend under all the vast table-land to the northward, is thicker, more constant, and more apparent towards the base of the mountains, but inter- calates with the next deposit in some places. 2nd. The yellow marl or Bluff-formation is favourable for agriculture ; consists of yellow siliceous marl with calcareous concretions, and with pebbly clays at the base; sometimes attains a thickness of 300 feet, but is variable over wide areas in the Missouri Valley. It seems to be locally syn- chronous or continuous with the Drift, and is also, at places, seen to succeed the Pliocene bone-bearing grits with imperceptible grada- tions. It contains remains of recent Mammals, as well as of extinct Mastodon, Elephas, &c., and large quantities of land and freshwater shells, mostly, if not wholly, of living species. 3rd. Erratic blocks, seldom exceeding four or five tons in weight, sometimes thickly spread over large areas (in Dakota and Minnesota), sometimes form- ing belts with a N.W.-S.E. range (near Fort Pierre and the Bijoux Hills, on the Missouri (p.110). 4th. Bottom-prairies, or the broad, fertile, old alluvial flats of the Missouri, were formed under other conditions than those now existing, which produce the present allu- vium (No. 5), of which numerous islands, sand-bars, &c., are con- tinually being made and re-made. A steamer wrecked fifteen years ago has given rise to Pilot Island, near the mouth of the Platte, several acres in extent, with a thick growth of cottonwood-trees, from 12 to 20 inches in diameter. Lastly, the author briefly treats of the river-terraces, resulting from the gradual elevation of the Rocky Mountains (p. 113). This subject, with others referred to in this memoir, will be fully handled in the forthcoming Report of Capt. Raynold’s Expedition. Part III. (p. 138, &c.) comprises notes on the zoology and botany of the Upper Missouri. Some interesting remarks are here made on the Lynx, Wolves, Foxes, Beaver, Deer, Antelope, Mountain-sheep, and Buffalo. Of the last we read (p. 150)— “The Buffalo are confined to the country bordering upon the eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains. They occur in large bands in the valley of the Yellowstone River, and also in the Blackfoot country ; but their numbers are annually decreasing at a rapid rate. Descending the Yellowstone, in the summer of 1854, from the Crow country, we were not out of sight of large bands for a distance of 400 miles. In 1850 they were seen as low down the Missouri River as the mouth of the Vermilion ; and in 1854 a few were killed near Fort Pierre. But at the present time they seldom pass below the 47th parallel on the Missouri. Every year, as we ascend the river, we can observe that they are retiring nearer and nearer the moun- tainous portion. In Kansas, they are found at this time, at certain seasons of the year, in immense droves on the Smoky Hill Fork of the Kansas, within sixty or seventy miles of Fort Riley; and from there to the South Pass they are distributed to a greater or less extent. It is true that these animals are at all times on the move, and frequent different portions of the West at different seasons of the year, or as they are driven by the hunters and Indians; but Bibliographical Notice. 379 there are certain parts of the country over which they formerly roamed in immense herds, but are never or rarely seen at the present time. The area over which the Buffalo graze is annually contracting its geographical limits. As near as I could ascertain, about 250,000 individuals are destroyed every year, about 100,000 being killed for robes. At the present time, the number of the males to the females seems to be in the ratio of 10 to 1 ; and this fact is readily accounted for from the fact that the males are seldom killed when the cows can be obtained. Skins of females only are used for robes, and [the females] are preferred for food. Besides the robes which are traded to the whites by the Indians, each man, woman, and child requires from one to three robes a year for clothing. A large quantity are employed in the manufacture of lodges, and an immense number of the animals, which would be difficult to estimate, are annually de- stroyed by wolves and by accidents. The Buffaloes vary in colour, white, cream, grey, sometimes spotted with white, with white feet and legs, &c. These varieties are called by the Indians ‘‘ Medicine Buffaloes,” and are regarded of the greatest value, often bringing several hundred dollars. About one in fifty thousand is an albino, while one robe in one hundred thousand is called by the traders a “silk robe,”’ and is usually valued at 100 to 200 dollars. Range: formerly found throughout nearly the whole of North America, east of the Rocky Mountains; now confined to the plains west of the Missouri and along the slopes of the Rocky Mountains” (pp. 150, 151). Catalogues of Birds, Reptiles, and Fishes follow, also of River and Land Shells, with interesting remarks by Lea and Binney. Chap- ter xviii., lastly, is occupied by a catalogue of Plants and a list of the Carices of Nebraska. Messrs. Baird, Cope, Gill, Lea, Binney, Engelmann, and Dewey have helped the author with the catalogues. Mr. Meek has assisted him throughout. There can be no doubt that Dr. Hayden’s observations on the geological structure of the great north-west regions traversed by him on several occasions indicate correctly the distribution of the Tertiary, Cretaceous, Jurassic, Infrajurassic, Carboniferous, Silurian, Meta- morphic, and Igneous rocks in that wide area, replacing hypothesis with facts, and supplying us with clear notions of the exact characters of the several formations there represented, and means of compar- ing them with their equivalents in other parts of North America, aud with their representatives in Europe and elsewhere. The geo- logy of the region immediately to the north of the districts examined by Dr. Hayden is described by Hind and Hector. The fossils col- lected by Mr. Hind in the “Canadian Expedition”’ were determined by Messrs. Meek and Hayden; and Dr. Hector (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xvii. p. 3888 &c.) keeps well in view the important labours of these gentlemen, especially in the Tertiary and Cretaceous geology of the conterminous region. 25* 380 Zoological Society :— PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Noy. 25, 1862.—E. W. H. Holdsworth, Esq., F.Z.S., in the Chair. The following extracts were read from a letter addressed to the Secretary by Dr. G. Bennett, F.Z.S., dated Sydney. “T have just received by Capt. McLeod a rough-dried specimen of a Megapodius, found abundantly over the New Hebrides and other groups of islands of the Southern Pacific. My specimen was procured from the island of Nua Fou, where it is named ‘ Mal- low’ by the natives. It accords with the description of M. Freyet- neti. ‘The bird measures 14 inches from the tip of the beak to the end of the tail ; the plumage is of an uniform blackish-brown colour, the mandibles, feet, and legs yellow. At Tanna they gave it the English name of ‘Bush Fowl;’ at Sandwich Island it was named Tarboosh. At the island of Nua Fou, Capt. M*Leod says the bird lives in the scrubs in the centre of the island, about a large lagoon of brackish water, which has the appearance of an extinct crater; the birds lay their eggs on one side only of this lagoon, where the soil is composed of a sulphur-looking sand; the eggs are deposited from 1 to 2 feet beneath the surface. The locality frequented by these birds is, at this island, under the protection of the king or chief, and by his permission only can the birds or eggs be procured. The num- ber of eggs deposited in the mounds varies, as the eggs are laid by dif- ferent birds in succession ; but as many as forty eggs are said to have been procured from one mound. At the other islands the birds visit the sandy beaches in retired localities near the sea about the months of September and October, and deposit their eggs in mounds of sand a short distance one from the other. Thus this bird has the habits of the Freshwater Tortoises, which scoop a pit in the sand near a river, deposit their eggs, and cover them up ; when hatched, the young force - their way out of the sand, and, guided by their instinct, make for the river. Mr. Dawson, who procured living birds from the Island of Sava or Russell Island, which unfortunately died on the passage to Sydney, informs me that the female lays daily from two to four eggs, and that the female on board laid two eggs daily until the time of her death. The natives of the various islands inhabited by these birds collect these eggs for sale (for they are richer and more deli- cious than those of the fowl), in baskets of two dozen each. The eggs are sometimes found fresh and good when opened, whilst others contain partially-formed young in different stages, even to the full- fledged bird just ready to emerge from the shell into active life. This might be expected, considering the irregular intervals of time the eggs are laid. The eggs I have vary slightly in size, but are usually of a pale brownish-red colour, and measure, for the most part, 3 inches in length and 12 inch in breadth. “Our pair of Mooruks are thriving well in the Botanic Gardens: we have placed them in a large grassed enclosure, 117 feet in length Dr. G. Bennett on some Australian Birds. 381 and 45 feet broad, interspersed with a few trees and a small circular pond of water about 2 feet deep, where they are very fond of bathing. There isa thatched shed in the centre for further shelter, if required ; and the whole is surrounded by a wire fence, 5 feet highs In this enclosure with the Mooruks are two native companions, an Emu and a sedate Jabiru. The latter is a very solitary, timid bird, always seen by himself. He moves with stately strides, and, if pursued, runs with great rapidity. When the Mooruks first arrived, they were placed with the Water-fowl, in an enclosure where there was a deep tank of water ; they are very fond of bathing (which, I also ob- serve, obtains with the Emu), and one of them leaped, as usual, into the water; but the sides being perpendicular and made of cut stone, it could not get readily out of it. Finding itself getting exhausted, it struggled against the edge of the tank, cut its face and severely injured the throat, laying open the pharynx, through the gaping wound of which the food passed; this was stitched, and the bird soon got quite well. From the birds being nearly drowned several times, they were removed to the enclosure before mentioned, with a more shallow pond of water. Mr. Dawson (who has just returned from New Britain) brought another young bird, but, from some cause or other, it died a few days after its arrival. It is nowin the Australian Museum. He says the natives pronounce the name of this bird as if written ‘Moorup.’ Fifteen eggs, brought by Mr. Dawson, that I have examined (of which he gave me two, and also a pair for the Australian Museum) differ considerably in size and colour. They have all been exposed more or less to the influence of heat and vari- ous atmospheric influences ; so that none are seen of the beautiful grass-green colour of the recently-laid eggs in the Zoological Gardens in the Regent’s Park. One was a small abortive egg, barely one- half of the natural size, but with similar markings. The birds are brought off for sale by the natives in every stage of growth, from the young chick to the full-grown bird, with its dark plumage, purple neck, and trilobed crest. The medium of purchase is pipes and tobacco.” The following letter, addressed by Dr. Bennett to the ‘Sydney Herald’ of September 3rd, 1862, was also read to the meeting :— * Since the publication of my observations on the Toothed-billed Pigeon (Didunculus strigirostris) in the ‘Sydney Herald’ of August 19th, 1862, I have received a communication from the secretary of the Acclimatization Society of Victoria, enclosing some valuable notes given to them, respecting this rare and extraordinary bird, by the Rey. John B. Stair, of Broadmeadows, Victoria, who was formerly resident for some time at the Samoan or Navigator group of islands, considered the exclusive habitat of this singular bird. I have now selected those portions relating to the bird which are either new to science or will more fully add to its history, and complete, as far as possible, our knowledge of this nearly extinct bird. Mr. Stair says he has seen the Didunculus, and that it is named by the natives Manu Mea, or red bird, from the most predominant colour of its plumage 382 Zoological Society :— being chocolate-red. It was formerly found in great numbers; and this assertion may excite some surprise that this remarkable form of bird should not have been seen and procured by the early naviga- tors. Now, Mr. Stair observes, as I have for some time suspected, the bird is nearly, if not entirely, extinct. It feeds on plantains, and is partial to the fruit of the ‘soi,’ a species of Dioscorea or yam, a twining plant found abundant among the islands, and producing a fruit resembling a small potatoe. The habits of this bird, Mr. Stair observes, are exceedingly shy and timid. Like the Ground- Pigeons, it roosts on bushes or stumps of trees, and feeds on the ground. It also builds its nest in such situations. During the breeding-season both parents aid in the duty of incubation, and relieve each other with great regularity ; and so intent are they when sitting on the eggs as to be easily captured. It was in this way two living speci- mens were obtained for Mr. Stair. They are also captured by the natives with bird-lime or springes, and shot with arrows—the sports- man concealing himself near an open space in which some quantity of the ‘soi,’ their favourite food, has been placed. ; * The first livmg bird obtained was accidentally killed ; the second, when placed in confinement, at first became sullen and refused food, but soon became reconciled to captivity, and throve well. The natives fed it upon boiled taro (the root of the Caladium esculentum) rolled into oblong pellets, in the same manner as they feed their pet Wood- Pigeons and Doves. On the departure of a friend for Sydney in 1843, Mr. Stair availed himself of the opportunity of sending the bird here, for the purpose of ascertaining if it was known, and, if so, with what genus it was to be classed, and whether it was a new species. Some natives on board the vessel paid great attention to it, and fed it care- fully during the voyage, and it reached Sydney alive. His friend informed him that he could obtain no information respecting the bird, whether it was a new species or otherwise, but left it with some bird- stuffer; and Mr. Stair heard nothing more respecting it until his return to England in 1847 or 1848, when he mentioned the subject to Mr. G. R. Gray of the British Museum, who showed him a drawing of the bird, and told him the subsequent history of the specimen he sent to Sydney. “The power of wing of most of the pigeon tribe is very great, and it also obtains in this bird. It flies through the air with a loud noise, like our Top-knot Pigeon (Lopholemus antarcticus), found in the Illawarra district, and many other of our Australian Pigeons ; and Mr. Stair describes it when rising as making so great a noise with its wings, that, when heard at a distance, it resembles a rumbling of distant thunder, for which it may be mistaken. Mr. Stair con- cludes his remarks by observing that, when on the eve of departing for England in 1845, although he made every effort to procure more specimens of the bird, and offered what was then considered large rewards, he could not succeed in obtaining any more specimens. He considers they may perhaps yet be found at Savaii, the largest and most mountainous island of the group ; but he does not think they at present exist on the island of Upolu.” Sir R. Schomburgk on Diardigallus Crawfurdi. 383 A communication was also read from Sir Robert Schomburgk, H.M. Consul-General for Siam, dated Bangkok, August 15th, stating that a male of the splendid Pheasant Diardigallus Crawfurdi was still alive in his possession, and in excellent health; and giving the following description of the female bird, of which he also sent a Chinese drawing and some feathers :— ** Cere oblong, of a bright-red colour, such as it is in the male, set with short hair-like feathers of a blackish colour, disposed in rows following the cere in its outline; eye black, with a golden-coloured iris; bill horn-coloured. The crown of the head, and the short feathers under the chin, of a slate-colour, but otherwise a reddish brown is the prevailing colour; of such a tint is likewise the mantle, only somewhat darker, and the feathers are speckled with black ; those of the throat and breast are lighter in tint, and frequently margined at their ends with white to the extent of 2 lines. ** Primaries and scapulars of a dark slate-colour, almost black, barred transversely at intervals with bands of white speckled with black. These bars do not possess regular outlines. The large or middle tail-feathers are marked in a similar manner; the lower or side tail-feathers are of a reddish brown. “The thighs are clothed with dark-brown feathers; below the knee the feet are naked and of a bright red colour, similar to the cere. There is no trace of spurs upon the leg. *‘T give the measurements taken from what I believe to be the oldest of the two hens in my possession :— ft. in. tenths. Length from a of bill to end of middle tail- feather . “ 6 GUOAP AIAG Samu eioa Ge Lgoe0 PBR e AS A Bata hate StI Po eh Nie 010 5 meat (0) Re Bo ee ee D 79) (6 Gli legst MINORU we by ns At BA kee at 0) 7A from the foot or tarsus to thigh...... 0 4 0 Length of foot from the tip of the middle claw tonthatiot the binds toets 2/279 ite aS aleeitcr es « OF Sig9 — of the large or middle toe .......... One 210 of wing from shoulder to end of largest pElrnatry:. quintet Me Se et Os Re eee 010 0 Depth of wna ila parks hei a A aes Sa 0 4 2 Circumference over the crown of the head and round the aw of, tte eyes! 835 sae t 0.540 ae hil UOTE A Aaa ara stale etremare bie 5 ONE Dera Depth . ats Wee, « RNa A OP eS tere: PUL ONE Bai Length GT eT ee Wee oY Oy PR A.2 Sir Robert Schomburgk added that Crawfurd’s drawing of the male bird alluded to by Mr. Gould in his account of this bird in the ‘ Birds of Asia,’ “although stiff, was otherwise good,” and that the habitat of this Pheasant was now fully ascertained to be the Shan States to the east of Kieng-mai, at Muang Nan, Muang Phi, &c. The following letter, addressed to the Secretary by Dr. J. Shortt, 384, Zoological Society :— F.ZS., dated Chingleput, 9th August, 1862, was read to the meet- ing :— *‘Srr,—I have much pleasure in sending you a short account of the Viper Daboia elegans (Vipera Russellii)—the Tamil name being ‘ Kunuadi Vyrien,’ or ‘ Kuturee Pamhoo.’ ** Since sending you the skin, with skull entire, I have succeeded in procuring several specimens, alive and dead, both here and on the Shervaroy Hills, during a recent stay there of two months. The largest specimen in my collection at present measures 5 feet in length, and 7 inches in circumference at the thickest part of its body. Its head is large, elongate, depressed, rounded on the sides, and covered with acutely and regularly-keeled scales; nostrils large, subsupe- rior, anterior, and in the centre of a ring-like shield, edged with a large scale above ; eyes convex, pupil round ; nasal shield smooth in front ; superciliary shield narrow, elongate, and distinct in front ; jaws weak, upper toothless, with large, slightly curved, double fangs ; lower jaw toothed ; tongue long and forked: colour brown, with three rows of oblong (in the young, circular or oval) white-edged brown spots ; two brown spots on each side of the occiput, separated by a narrow, oblique, yellow temporal streak. Scuta 168, subcaudals 52. “From the three rows of white-edged spots being linked to each other, it is commonly called the Chain Viper. The Tamil name of ‘Kunuadi Vyrien’ literally means Glass Viper; that of ‘ Kuturee Pamhoo,’ Scissors Snake. This name it receives from having double fangs, which are invariably present, of equal length, if not on both, on one side at least: these the natives of Southern India fancy re- semble a pair of scissors. “It is very common in these parts, and also at an elevation of 4800 feet above the sea (Shervaroy Hills): at the latter place I procured two specimens; the largest measured 43, and the other, which was young, was | foot in length. These reptiles are generally found under stones and in rocky places ; frequently in the low country it is found in prickly-pear bushes (Opuntia vulgaris). “In their habits they are extremely active for their size, and live on frogs, mice, birds, &c. On opening the Viper I procured on the Shervaroy Hills, I removed from its inside a Mynah(Indian Grackle), from a second in this place a field-rat, and from a third an immense toad was taken. These Vipers are readily killed by the slightest blow ; on one occasion I had one caught alive by fixing a noose round its body, but raising it from the ground and suspending it by the noose for a few seconds killed it. “The natives dread these snakes greatly, as their bite is said to prove rapidly fatal. Although they are common in this district, I have not heard of an instance of this occurring during a residence of five years at this place. Dr. A. Hunter, of our service, tells me that when he was Zillah Surgeon here, some years ago, a sepoy was bitten by one, and that the man’s life was saved by his sucking out the wound. During my stay on the Shervaroys, the first specimen that was brought to me was immediately recognized by my friend B. A. Daly, Esq., Dr. J. E. Gray on new Species of Mammalia. 385 a coffee-planter, who related the following circumstance that oc- curred to him a few years ago. Mr. Daly was out shooting with a few dogs (mongrel spaniels), when he came upon one of these Vipers, and the dogs having attacked the snake before he could kill it, three were bitten, one after the other; the first died almost instantly, the second in about two hours after, whilst it was being carried home, and the third lingered for nearly three months from emaciation, general debility, loss of appetite, &c., and eventually made a good recovery. ‘This we can readily understand : the first dog bitten re- ceived the largest quantity of poison, whilst the second received less, and when it came to the third the supply was no doubt all but ex- hausted, and the rapidity with which the wounds must have been inflicted left no time for fresh poison to be secreted. This accounts for the ultimate recovery of the dog. “In January last a lady at this place was returning from a walk with her child, followed by a bull-terrier puppy about six months — old; her house was situated some distance from the gate, and the road on either side was covered with spear-grass. It was just dusk. The puppy suddenly darted in front and began to bark vociferously. Although the lady had seen nothing, she took alarm at the movements of the puppy, and called out to me as I happened to be passing by the gate at that moment. On going to see what was the matter, I found a large Viper coiled up in the centre of the road, and the puppy making a great noise from a respectful distance. The snake was closely coiled up, with the neck bent abruptly backwards, and the head fixed almost horizontally ; it began to puff itself out something after the manner of the Puff-Adder, and hissed loudly, intently watch- ing the movements of the dog, no doubt awaiting an opportunity to strike it, when I called the puppy away. The instant the puppy turned its head, the snake glided with the rapidity of lightning into the surrounding grass and disappeared. The next day it was killed in the same garden, and brought to me; it measured 4 feet 6 inches in length. “These Snakes were formerly designated ‘Cobra Manil’ by the Portuguese, in consequence of their bite proving as rapidly fatal as that of the Cobra. The word Manil is a corruption of the Tamil word Mannunippamhoo, which literally means Earth-eating Snake, and is the name given by the natives to the Uropeltis grandis, commonly termed ‘ Double-headed ’ Snake, and which they believe lives entirely on earth, from its being frequently found underground.” The following papers were read :— DESCRIPTION OF SOME NEw SPECIES OF MAMMALIA. By Dr. Joun Epwarp Gray, F.R.S., F.L.S., ere. Among some Mammalia which Mr. A. R. Wallace has lately sent to the British Museum, which he collected in Morty Island in 1861, are two species of a frugivorous Bat, which does not appear to have been hitherto registered in the Catalogue. This Bat may be easily known from all the other Cynopteri by the extraordinary length of 386 Zoological Society :— its tail, which induces me to form for it a section or subgenus, which I propose to call Uronycteris. Cynoprerus (URONYCTERIS) ALBIVENTER. Tail elongate, free, produced beyond the narrow, short, interfemoral membrane. Nostrils much produced, tubular, far apart at the base, and diverging outwardly. Fur brown-olive, with greyer base to the hairs. Face and throat only slightly hairy, grey. Sides of the neck and breast yellow-brown. Side of the body brown. Chest and middle of the belly white. Wings brown. Hab. Morty Island (4. R. Wallace). The length of the forearm-bone 2 inches ; length of the tail (dry) nearly 2 of an inch. The wing-bone, on the upper surface of the wing, of both speci- mens is marked with some irregular white spots. These may be only accidental, or even artificially produced in the process of pre- servation or by carriage, as the spots on the two sides of the same wings are more or less unlike, and those of the two specimens are dissimilar. Mr. Keilish, the furrier, has kindly sent to the British Museum for examination the skin of a Leopard which he has received from Japan. It is well tanned, and marked on the inner side with the red impressions of two Japanese seals. The skin at first sight seemed much like that of a fine-coloured Hunting Leopard, but it is at once distinguished from that animal by the comparatively shorter legs, by the larger size and brown centre of the black spots, and from all the varieties of the Leopard by the linear spots on the nape and the spots on the back not being formed of roses or groups of smaller spots. I propose to call it LEOPARDUS JAPONENSIS. Fur fulvous, paler beneath. Back and limbs ornamented with ovate or roundish unequal-sized black spots. The spots on the shoulders, back, and sides converted into a ring by a single central spot of the same colour as the fur. Spots on the back and legs large, oblong, and transverse. Head with small, regularly disposed, black spots. Nape with four series of narrow elongated black spots (the outer ones sometimes confluent into lines), and with a series of large black spots on each side of the back of the neck. Chest with a series of larger spots, forming a kind of necklace. Tail elongate, very hairy, spotted, paler, and with four black rings at the tip. Hab. Japan. The skin in its tanned state is 4 feet 6 inches, and the tail 2 feet 10 inches long. Mr. W. Fosbrooke has kindly presented to the British Museum a small and beautiful species of Boshbock, which was captured by John Dunn, Esq., in the Ungo-zy Forest, between the Umbrelans and Umblatore, in the country of the Amazula. Mr. Dunn could not learn that the natives had any special name for this animal. Mr. A. D. Bartlett on the Habits of the Beaver. 387 It is a most peculiarly-marked species, and of a very small size. The hunter mistook it for a young animal, and fed it with milk, on which it died; but when it was examined, the mammee were found dilated with milk, showing that it was approaching full age, and probably had lately produced a fawn. It is the smallest species of the genus, standing only 10 inches high to the top of its head, and _ weighing not more than three pounds. It is most like Cephalophus Whitfieldii, figured in the Knowsley Menagerie, from a specimen in the British Museum which was brought from the Gambia by Mr. Whitfield. It differs from that species in the general shade of the brown colour; and there is no white about that animal, which is so prominent in the Natal specimens. CrEPHALOPHUS BICOLOR. Fur soft, brown, with the rump, the whole of the hind legs, the chin, throat, chest, belly, the inner side of the fore legs, a broad ring over the fore hoofs, and a large spot occupying the front of the face and forehead pure white. The ears blackish, white within. The side of the forehead darker brown. The crumen on the side of the face linear, well marked. Horns not present in the female sex. Hab. Natal. Mr. R. Swinhoe, having shown me a part of the collection of mammals which he formed while residing in the island of Formosa, has kindly allowed me to describe a new specimen of Wild Goat or Goat-Antelope. , This species agrees in all its characters with the Cambing-outang (Capricornis sumatrana) of Sumatra, and the Capricornis crispa of Japan, but is very distinct from either of them. In colour it more nearly resembles the Japanese species, C. crispa, which has a white face; but it is easily distinguished from that species, which I only know from a figure and very general description in Schegel’s ‘ Fauna Japonica.’ I propose to call it, after its discoverer, CAPRICORNIS SWINHOII. The fur harsh and crisp, brown, with a narrow streak down the back of the neck; a spot on the knee and the front of the fore legs below the knee black. The hind legs are bay. The sides of the chin pale yellowish. The underside of the neck yellow-bay—this colour being separated from the darker colour of the upper part of the neck by a ridge of longer, more rigid hairs. ‘The ears are long, brown, paler internally. The horns are short and conical. The skull has a deep and wide concavity in front of the orbits, and a keeled ridge on the cheek. NOTES ON THE BEAVER IN THE ZOOLOGICAL GARDENS. By A. D. Barrett. During one of the heavy storms of wind and rain that prevailed during the last month a large willow-tree was partly blown down. The limbs and branches of this fallen tree were given to many of the animals, and to them proved to be a very acceptable windfall. 388 Zoological Society. To the Beaver, however, I wish to direct especial attention, as this ani- mal has exhibited in a remarkable manner some of his natural habits and intelligence. One of the largest limbs of the tree, upwards of 12 feet long, was firmly fixed in the ground, in the Beaver’s enclo- sure, in a nearly upright position, at about twelve o’clock on Saturday last. The Beaver visited the spot soon afterwards, and walking round this large limb, which measured 30 inches circumference, com- menced to bite off the bark about 12 inches above the ground, and afterwards to gnaw into the wood itself. The rapid progress was (to all who witnessed it) most astonishing. The animal laboured hard, and appeared to exert his whole strength, leaving off for a few mi- nutes apparently to rest and look upwards, as if to consider which way the tree was to fall. Now and then he left off and went into his pond, which was about 3 feet from the base of the tree, as if to take a refreshing bath. Again he came out with renewed energy, and with his powerful teeth gouged away all round the trunk. This process continued till about four o’clock, when suddenly he left off and came hastily towards the iron fence, to the surprise of those who were watching his movements, The cause of this interruption was soon explained; he had heard in the distance the sound of the wheelbarrow, which, as usual, is brought daily to his paddock, and from which he was anxiously waiting to receive his supper. Not wishing to disappoint the animal, but at the same time regretting that he was thus unexpectedly stopped in his determination to bring down this massive piece of timber, his usual allowance of carrots and bread were given to him; and from this time until half-past five he was engaged in taking his meal and swimming about in his pond. At half-past five, however, he returned to his tree, which by this time was reduced in the centre to about 2 inches in diameter. To this portion he applied his teeth with great earnestness, and in ten mi- nutes afterwards it fell suddenly with great force upon the ground. It was an interesting sight to witness the adroit and skilful man- ner in which the last bite or two were given on the side on which the tree fell, and the nimble movement of the animal to the opposite side at the moment, evidently to avoid being crushed beneath it. Upon examining the end of the separated tree, it was found that only one inch in diameter was uncut; and it was of course due to the nearly erect position in which the tree was put into the ground that it stood balanced, as it were, upon this slender stem. After carefully walking along its entire length as it lay on the ground, and examining every part, he commenced to cut off about two feet of its length, and by seven o’clock the next morning he had divided it into three pieces: two of these he had removed into the pond, and one was used in the under part of his house. The Beaver, the subject of the foregoing remarks, was presented to the Society by the Hudson’s Bay Company, in the autumn of 1861, and was probably then about six months old. It is, no doubt, less vigorous than the large wild animals of this species, who would, in all probability, bring down trees of much larger dimensions in a shorter time. In fact, it was evident that our Beaver was a novice in the undertaking, as he more than once slipped and rolled over on Miscellaneous. 389 his back in his eagerness to accomplish the task. It was impossible to witness the actions of this animal without being struck by the amount of skill and intelligence exhibited. When the space cut through towards the centre was too narrow to admit its head, its teeth were applied above and below so as to increase the width from the outside towards the centre, until the remaining parts above and below formed two cones, the apices of which joined in the middle. Again and again the animal left off gnawing, and, standing upright on its hind legs, rested its front feet on the upper part of the tree, as if to feel whether it was on the move. This showed clearly that the creature knew exactly what it was about. MISCELLANEOUS. ‘The Land and Freshwater Mollusks of the British Isles,’ To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GENTLEMEN,— While thanking you for your notice of my little book, ‘The Land and Freshwater Mollusks of the British Isles,’ I beg permissiort to offer a word of comment on some remarks therein made on some changes in nomenclature. Your reviewer says :— ** Planorbis imbricatus is changed to Planorbis crista, on the authority of the following synonymy :— * Nautilus crista, Linneus (1758), Syst. Nat. 10th edit. p. 709. * Turbo nautileus, Linneeus (1767), Syst. Nat. 12th edit. p. 1241. «And the author remarks,—‘ It may be observed, on reference to the synonymy, that Linnzeus made two species of this.’ But Linnzeus did not make two species out of Planorbis nautileus. The facts are that he described Nautilus crista in the tenth edition of the ‘Systema Nature ;’ and in the twelfth edition changed the name of the species to Turbo nautileus, and referred to his Nautilus crista of the tenth edition as a synonym. We can only account for Mr. Reeve’s mistake by supposing that he has never consulted the twelfth edition—a sup- position which is confirmed by the fact that throughout his volume the tenth edition is almost invariably referred to.”’ As this declaration of opinion involves a principle in nomenclature to which I cannot agree, I beg leave to state that I purposely referred throughout my volume to the tenth edition of the ‘ Systema Nature’ for the authority of the Linnean species, after the example of M. Moquin-Tandon, because it is the first edition in which the species are established by the definition of specific names and characters. I followed also Moquin-Tandon in adopting the name of erista given to this Planorbis in the tenth edition of the ‘Systema Nature,’ be- cause I agree with the learned author of the ‘Mollusques Terrestres et Fluviatiles de France’ in thinking that Linnzeus was not justified in changing it, in his twelfth edition, to nautileus. An author is no more justified in changing his own established name of a species than any other writer would be. With reference to your reviewer's observations on my remark that o 390 Miscellaneous. Linneeus made two species of this Planorbis, it is clear, from the opening lines of the paragraph, that the sense intended to be con- veyed is not that which he has presented. They are as follows :— «The minute, semitransparent, horny shell of this species, more generally known to collectors by the second name which Linnezeus gave to it, &e.’? Iam, Gentlemen, Your obedient Servant, Lovett REEVE. With reference to the foregoing letter, we may remark— lst. That what Mr. Reeve says respecting the tenth edition of the ‘Systema Nature’ is totally at variance with the generally received opinion of naturalists that the twelfth is the standard edition of Linnzeus’s work, which is to be referred to and followed. 2ndly. That we are fully aware how greatly Mr. Reeve is indebted to the work of M. Moquin-Tandon, and regret that he has so im- plicitly followed that author in numerous erroneous changes in nomenclature. 3rdly. That Mr. Reeve, however, must not shift the adoption of the name Planorbis crista on to his favourite auth6r’s shoulders. Among Mr. Reeve’s own synonymy of the species, we find “ Planorbis (Gyraulis) nautileus, Mogquin-Tandon (1855), Hist. Moll. vol. ii. p.438, which is utterly irreconcileable with the statement in his letter that he follows that author in the adoption of the name Planorbis crista. _ 4thly. That only one construction can be put upon the following passage in his work :—“ It may be observed that Linneeus and Dra- parnaud both made two species of this. The names ecrista and cris- tata have been given to young specimens, and nauétileus and imbri- catus to adult specimens.” What can this mean, but that, just as Draparnaud made two species of the shell which he called cristatus and imbricatus, so Linnzeus made two species which he called crista and nautileus ?—a statement at variance with the facts. On the true Nature of Pleurodyctium problematicum. By Cary Romincer, M.D Under the above name I have long kept in my cabinet a specimen collected at Kirchweiler, in the Eifel Mountains. After having identified it with the fossil described by Goldfuss, I laid it aside ; and only recently, twenty years afterwards, when I happened to look over it again, the first glance convinced me that the Plewrodyctium problematicum is merely the cap of a Favosites, or, more accurately speaking, of a Michelinia. I have subsequently found that Milne- Edwards had already recognized the family affinity between Favosites and Pleurodyctium, without, however, suggesting a generic identity of the two. The fossil from Kirchweiler is represented by a lenticular cavity, a little over one inch in diameter and scarcely half an inch deep. To one side of this cavity are attached the bases of conical sub- Miscellaneous. 391 angular columns, three or four millimetres thick at the lower ends ; between these are interpolated a good many smaller and shorter columns. They all rapidly converge toward the centre of the oppo- site concavity. Their sides are longitudinally striated, and covered with punctiform impressions. Numerous small cross-bars connect the columns, which are otherwise isolated from each other by a narrow intervening space. The opposite side of the cavity, which forms the roof over the convergent smaller ends of the columns, is free, but closely approxi- mated to them, and bears the impression of fine concentric rings of growth. This latter character is not very plain in my specimen, but Goldfuss has given a very good figure of it. He thought it to be the impression of the inner surface of a membranaceous envelope, instead of taking it for what it is—the impression of the epitheca surrounding the lower side of the corallum. The vermicular body, frequently noticed adhering to or penetrating the root end of Pleurodyctium, is also seen in my specimen. I was greatly surprised at observing the same vermicular perfora- tion in some small specimens of Michelinia, which also in all other respects appear to be specifically identical with the coral of which the European Pleurodyctium is a cap. The specimens were found in the shales of the Hamilton group, Cayuga county, New York, and are in the possession of Prof. Winchell, of Ann Arbor. They form small cakes, not much over one inch in diameter. The lower side is almost flat, covered with a concentrically wrinkled epitheca: the upper side is semiglobular, and shows the mouth-ends of conical subangular tubes, the larger ones of which measure from four to five millimetres. On the polished vertical sections of the coral, longitudinal strize and rows of spinules, together with numerous side-pores, are visible along the walls of the tubes. The upper part of the tubes is generally filled with calcareous matter, and shows no diaphragms, which are only preserved in the lower ends, and are in part simple and straight, in part vesicular. The vermicular channel traverses the substance of the corallum, irrespective of the direction of the tubes, and seems to cut straight through them. After some flexures, it ascends to the upper surface, and opens there with a round mouth, while the other tubes are more or less angular. It is improbable that this perforating channel has anything to do with the organism of the coral, and is more likely the work of a parasitic animal ; but after all, it is still strange to see the majority of specimens, from such distant localities, attacked in the same way by a boring animal. In the Corniferous Limestone at Port Colborne, on Lake Erie, I lately found a cap exhibiting all the characters of Pleurodyctium. In association with it numerous specimens of Michelinia favositoidea (Billings) are found ; and there remains no doubt that this cast originates from a young specimen of this latter species. —Silliman’s Journal for January, 1863. 392 Miscellaneous. Piedmontese Plants. Dr. Rostan, an excellent botanist, residing at Perrier, in one of the Vaudois valleys in Piedmont, who, besides other additions to the native flora, has rediscovered several plants not known to botanists since the time of Allioni, proposes to publish a collection of 200 spe- cies of dried plants, to include the greater part of the rare and less- known species of Western Piedmont. In the list will be found Arabis pedemontana, Boiss., Isatis alpina, All., Dianthus furcatus, Balb., Cerastium lineare, All., Trifolium pannonicum, L., Ribes purpureum, Rost., Saxifraga valdensis, DC., Centaurea Kotschyana, Heuff., Campanula Elatines, L., Gentiana Rostani, Reut., Veronica succulenta, All., Allium valdensium, Reut., and many other very rare species. The parcels will be carefully made up, the specimens well dried, and several will be given of each of the smaller species. The price to subscribers who send their names to Dr. Rostan be- fore the 1st of August, 1863, will be 40 francs=32 shillings. Price to non-subscribers £2; in each case exclusive of carriage. Address applications, post-paid, to Dr. Rostan, Perrier, via Pignerol, Piedmont. It will facilitate the transmission of the parcels if each applicant will give an address in London to which they may be forwarded. Obituary Notice.—Wiii1aAM Groves Perry. Died on the 25th of March, 1863, at his residence in New Street, Warwick, Mr. William Groves Perry, at the age of sixty-seven. He was one of the early contributors to Loudon’s ‘ Magazine of Natural History,’ and a Fellow of the Botanical Society of Edinburgh. In 1820 he published a work called ‘ Plantee Varvicenses Selectze,’ or ‘The Botanist’s Guide through the County of Warwick,’ which, following the ‘ Flora Midlandica’ of Dr. Purton, made considerable additions to what related to the Warwickshire species included in that work, more especially in noting the localities with greater pre- cision. With a view to still greater exactness in this particular, a table was added, showing the distance of the several localities from the nearest market town. ‘This little work was never so well known as it deserved to be, owing probably to its having been published by the author himself at Warwick : it has, however, been long since out of print ; and a second edition was in progress at the time of Mr. Perry’s death, which we hope some day to see completed and published. In addition to his botanical studies, Mr. Perry possessed consider- able antiquarian knowledge, and was for many years Honorary Secretary of the Warwickshire Natural History and Archeological Society. As one of the early contributors to a periodical of which the present may be regarded as the continuation, we think this no- tice of his labcurs and of his death a proper introduction into our pages; and we are sure that all those with whom he was acquainted, and to whom his unvarying kindness of disposition and liberality in imparting information were known, will feel grateful for its appear- ance here. THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [THIRD SERIES. ] No. 66. JUNE 1863. XLII.—On the Capitelle and their Position in the System of the Annelida. By Epwarp Gruse*. By the communications published by Van Beneden+ upon the genus Capitella, Blainv. (Lumbriconais, Oerst.), and especially upon C. capitata (Lumbricus capitatus, Fab.), our knowledge of this very peculiar Annelide has been most essentially advanced. These statements not only complete what has been ascertained by A. 8S. Oersted{ and Leuckart§ as to the external structure and the nature of the intestinal canal, but they also include the whole remaining organization, the sexual relations (the divergence of which from fibee of the Dien brics was previously indicted by Leuckart), and furnish results which are confirmed by investiga- tions carried on independently. When I was at Copenhagen i in 1856, Oersted laid before me a series of drawings relating to the anatomy of the Capitelle, and incited me, during my stay there, to convince myself of the many peculiarities which had occurred to him in the course of his observations, and amongst which the presence of numerous definitely formed and comparatively large red corpuscles in the somatic cavity, the remarkable partial in- flation of the body, and the entire deficiency of blood-vessels, had most struck him. He had also learned how to distinguish males and females by their external and internal structure, and believed that he had recognized the anterior part of the nervous system. The occurrence of these Annelides in the great * Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1862, . 366. + “Hist. Nat. du genre Capitella,” Bull. de Acad. Roy. de Belgique, sér. 2. iii. Nos. 9, 10 (1857). | { “Conspectus generum specierumque Naidum,” Kroyer’s Tidssk. iv. 1842, p. 128, pl. 3. figs. 6, 10, 11. § Beitrage zur Kenntniss wirbellos. Thiere (1847), p. 151; and Archiv fur Natur geschichte, xv. (1849), p. 163. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 26 394 M. E. Grube on the Capitelle channel of Copenhagen enabled me, in the few days of my resi- dence there, to repeat these extremely interesting observations on a series of specimens; but although we then (at the end of July) still found ova in many females, we did net succeed in detecting spermatozoa in the testes of the males: these Oersted had represented of a more fusiform shape than Van Beneden, and with a more acute anterior extremity and a shorter terminal filament. That I did not at once comply with Oersted’s request to make known these observations was due partly to the want of a micrometer; for it appeared to me to be necessary to give the diameter of the corpuscles which floated in the somatic ca- vity. A second independent confirmation of Van Beneden’s in- vestigations has lately been given by Claparéde*, who, without any acquaintance with them, observed the same species in the Hebrides, but was not able any more than myself to subject the sexual peculiarities to a complete examination. As regards the fluid of the somatic cavity and the red corpus- cles contained in it in such abundance, Claparéde also expresses himself in favour of its analogy with the blood. Van Beneden describes the corpuscles as “ globules,” and says that their form is lenticular ; I convinced myself, during their flow from a wound in the wall of the body, that they are disciform and circular, as they show to the observer sometimes their broad surface and sometimes their margin. Claparéde also calls them “ disques,” and I could almost think that they are biconcave like the blood- corpuscles of the Mammalia: that they contain a true nucleus, as stated by Van Beneden and Claparéde, could not be ascer- tained positively by Prof. Reichert and myself—what might have been taken for a nucleus appearing only to adhere accidentally, and to be one of the corpuscles which also occur free in the so- matic cavity ; and the employment of acetic acid did not succeed in producing a more distinct appearance of a nucleus. By the action of this reagent the disks scarcely became somewhat smaller; and whilst their outer margin still remained circular, their interior appeared as if crumpled or granulated, minute sharply-defined granules being distinguishable therein. In ether they become decidedly more irregular, and the mar- gin and interior become more sharply discriminated. I must, however, remark that I have observed all this only upon Capt- telle which were sent to me in Breslau by the kindness of Prof. Van Beneden, and which, being favoured by the December weather, arrived indeed still living, but by no means lively in appearance ; nevertheless even the broken or half-dead specimens ‘exhibited no essential difference in this respect. The diameter i Mémoires de la Soe. de Phys. et d’Hist. Nat. de Genéve, 1861, p, 110, pla. and their Position in the System of the Annelida. | 395 of the corpuscles is given by Claparéde at 0:010 mill. (=0-005 line); I found it to be greater, namely 0:006-0:008 line, or about one-tenth of the length of the shorter uncini. As far as I can remember, those observed in Copenhagen presented a similar proportion, although, from the small size of the animals exa- mined by me (most of them measured only 5 lines), they ap- peared to me to be uncommonly large. The corpuscles flowed, with the fluid of the somatic cavity, from one segment into the other, above and below the ligaments (or dissepiments, as Van Beneden calls them) which fasten the wider portion of the ali- mentary canal to the wall of the body. This occupied by far the longest part of the body, and in a specimen of thirty-three segments (such as most of those examined by me in Copenhagen) extended through sixteen of them, increasing slowly in width towards the middle. The cesophagus, about half the size, usually reached in repose, when it describes one or two curves, into the ninth segment; the end of the intestinal canal, which, again, is considerably thinner, and lies in short convolutions, usually passed through from four to nine segments; but even in the hindermost part of the wider division of the. alimentary canal I detected balls of excrement. In the extremely narrow lumen of the very muscular cesophagus, which is linear in repose, I repeatedly observed ciliary movement. The uncini, which stand four or five together on the segments, one or two on the hindermost segments, were moved, as far as I could see, in the same way as the sete, single muscular threads proceeding from the wall to attach themselves to the free end of the bundle which projects into the ventral cavity. Sometimes in one of the bundles of sete, which occur only on the first seven segments (or eight, according to Van Beneden), and also con- tain four or five sete, single sete were replaced by uncini, but only in one, two, or three of the hindermost of them: Van Beneden gives this as the rule. Oersted called my attention to a flat, nearly oval body, running out, as it were, into two lobes, which was discovered by him lying over the buccal cavity, and which he thought to be the superior ganglionic mass of a buecal nervous ring. I regard this interpretation as the more probable because there was on each of the two lobes a well-defined black point, having exactly the appearance of an eye-point. Claparéde also notices these points, but adds that he could not detect a lens in them. Ova, which I observed in a specimen at Copenhagen, occurred neither in paired sacs repeated in the segments nor in the sos matic cavity, into which they get from these, according to Van Beneden, but in two delicate-walled sacs situated at the sides of the intestine, which commenced at the twelfth segment and 26% 396 M. E. Grube on the Capitelle reached to the seventeenth, and the diameter of which was not much greater than that of an ovum. D’Udekem*, in his “ Classification,” also speaks only of two ovaries. In one of the specimens from Ostend, sent to me in March by Van Beneden, I likewise found ova; their diameter was 0°05 line, and that of their germinal vesicle 0°0015 line. Upon the organs secreting urine, which, according to d’Udekem, are situated in almost all the segments of the body, I have made no observations. The remarkable anchor-shaped Gregarine which Oersted dis- covered in the intestine of his Capitelle have also been found by Van Beneden, Leuckart, Claparede, and myself. Claparéde’s figuret shows a completely developed form, in which the nucleus is indicated merely by the pale spot in the foremost third of the body. In younger animals, in which the body is not yet so much filled with greenish mass, this nucleus appears far more distinctly : it is sometimes nearly circular, sometimes oval, con- tains a nucleolus, and is situated nearly always in the same spot, but sometimes more anteriorly, between the bases of the arms of the anchor. As the median body increases in length and be- comes more slender, these arms also gradually grow out ; they are at first very short, like two mere teeth, and extended hori- zontally ; and in still younger states, where the length of the body is still scarcely one-fourth of that of the mature animal, no trace of them is to be seen, the form of the animal being then a rhomb with rounded angles, much produced posteriorly. This entire series of changes, of which I only saw a few, has been observed by Oersted. The next question which presses upon me is, whether the Capitelle observed in Copenhagen, and those found at Ostend, on Heligoland, and on the Hebrides, belong to one and the same species with the Lumbricus capitatus described by Fabricius. The differences of size of sexually mature individuals are very considerable: whilst Oersted states the length of his Lwmbrico- nais marina at 10 or 12 lines, and I even had males of only 5 lines, Van Beneden found the males 24-27 lines and the females as much as 4 inches. long ; Claparéde sometimes found them still longer, and Leuckart even met with specimens as much as 7 inches in length. The indication of Fabricius— “jongitudine Lumbrici terrestris’”—shows that, although, ac- cording to his statement, the Greenland animals of this species do not attain such large dimensions as the Norwegian (amongst which he mentions one a foot in length), his specimens were certainly of the larger kind. The Capitelle from Greenland * Mémoires de Acad. Roy. de Belgique, xxxi. 1859, p. 25. + Mémoires de la Soc. de Phys. et d’Hist. Nat. de Genéve, pl. 1. fe, 15, and their Position in the System of the Annelida, 397 which I possess are 1°3 line in thickness and more than 2 inches in length. In the same way the number of segments varies, in accordance with the size, from thirty-three and forty-five (in the small Copenhagen specimens) up to sixty and eighty-two; in all the males examined by Van Beneden, Oersted, and myself, it is on the eighth and ninth segments that the peculiar, large, crooked ventral sete occur, and in the ninth that the sexual orifice and the testis are situated*. In the number of bristles there is a remarkable diversity. Van Beneden gives eight as the normal number both in the bundles of sete and in the transverse rows of uncini. I counted in the Copenhagen specimens never more than four or five, in many Belgian ones twelve, and in the Greenland specimens twelve or more sete, and far more than twelve (even nearly thirty) uncini, of which, however, those standing nearest to the median line of the ventral surface were scarcely distinguishable, whilst in the opposite direction they imcrease considerably in length. As the smallest number of bristles belongs to the smallest specimens, it may easily be sup- posed that the number increases with the growth; and in these diversities, as in those already mentioned, I see no inducement to the assumption of two species, but rather believe that the Capitelle of the Baltic, like many other animals which it has in common with the North Sea, do not attain such large dimensions as in the latter. I must further indicate that Dalyell’s Lumbricus capitatus+ does not belong here, but that the Lumbricus capitatus described by Johnston}, the length of which was from 3 to 6 inches, is the same species, and that he also united with it his previously de- scribed Lumbricus littoralis§, which he had characterized as *aculeis uniserialibus.” That he assumed for the blood, the very irregular ebb and flow and grumous masses of which also struck him, two lateral vessels situated between the intes- tine and the wall of the body, may be easily excused if he did not perseveringly observe. He himself says that the movement of the blood appears to depend upon the movements of the body and the extension of its segments. The synonym of Lumbricus fragilis, Miull., which is now recognized as a Scoloplos, is only cited by him with doubt. Our Annelide is also regarded by Fabricius as identical with Olaffsen’s LZ. littoralis minor from * Van Beneden’s statement of the ninth and tenth segments (p. 17) appears to be a mere printer’s error, his figure representing the eighth and ninth as those in question. In a specimen from Greenland, I find these bristles, singularly enough, not on the ventral, but on the dorsal surface ! + The Powers of the Creator, vol. ii. 1853, pl. 17. figs. 8, 9. ‘t Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. viii. p. 258, § Zool. Journ. ii. p. 328. S95". M. E. Grube on the Capitellze Iceland. But the distribution of Capitella capitata is not closed with the Icelandic and Pnglish coasts; for the Lumbricus cana- lium, mentioned en passant by Nardo as an inhabitant of some of the shallower and less frequented canals of Venice*, is hike- wise nothing but our Capitella, as I have ascertained by the examination of the spirit specimens captured by him. Whether it,also occurs on the French coast has not yet been ascertained. The determination of the position which the genus Capitella should occupy in the system appears to Claparede not to be settled by the discussion with which Van Beneden closes his memoir; and I am of the same opinion. Van Beneden comes to the conclusion that the Capitelle are dicecious Lumbricine : all that can be cited in favour of the supposition that they be- long to the Polycheetz is limited to the mode of development, to the form of the embryos, which escape into the world with a globular body, with two eyes and two tufts of cilia close to these, and then pass through a metamorphosis, a posterior circlet of cilia being added to the ciliary circlet before the eyes, which originates in the above-mentioned tufts, and the portion of the body between these extending itself and dividing into rings; the absence of vessels and the distribution of the male and female sexual organs upon two individuals are not of sufficient importance to have much stress laid upon them. But what is there positively in favour of referrmg the Capitelle to the Lum- bricinz, and in what signification is this name taken? It does not correspond with the family which I have established under this name, as Van Beneden also refers to it Tubifex (Senuris), Enchytreus, and Chetogaster, but rather to D’Udekem’s sub- order of Agemmes, which forms the opposite to his Gemmipares (the Naitdes). As the Lumbricine, in D’Udekem’s sense, in- clude nothing but Annelides with series of but slightly project- ing uncini standing singly or in pairs, Capitella would approxi- mate to them less than to Tubifex, a genus three of the six spe- cies of which occur in the sea; whilst for the Lumbrict the pro- portion of marine forms is far less favourable. The organization of the Agemmes is expressed (besides the occurrence of uncini, rarely also of setze) especially m the con- centration of the genital organs in certain limited regions of the body, in their hermaphrodism, and in the appearance of the so- called loop-like organ; whilst external organs of respiration never appear (except in Alma nilotica). If, therefore, the Caprtelle be, as Van Beneden supposes, Lumbrici of a low degree of organiza- tion, this degeneration of the type shows itself in the disap- pearance of the blood-vessels and the simpler arrangement of * Prospetto della Fauna marina volgare del Veneto estuario, 1847, p. 11. and their Position in the System of the Annelida. 399 the generative organs. As something new added, we have the large curved bristles at the orifice of the testis, the arrangement of the bristles in lateral rows, the separate sexes, the different structure of the ova, and the metamorphosis of the young ; but it must certainly be admitted that we do not know the young states of the marine forms of the Agemmes; and whether these pass through a metamorphosis it is as impossible to predict as it was to suppose, in the case of the Lobster, that it follows a different course of development from that of its nearest ally the river crayfish. Turning to the Polychetz, would it be more difficult to find among them forms with which the Capitelle could be arranged ? I admit that, however I was determined by Oersted’s first com- munications, and before I had myself seen these animals, to follow him and place them among the Naides, I afterwards hesi- tated about leaving them in this position ; and at the first sight of a large spirit specimen I thought no more either of the Naides or of other Oligochetz. In this specimen the segments were proportionally considerably longer, in the anterior portion of the body, furnished only with sete, half as long, in the posterior portion, bearing uncini, one and a half times as long as broad; moreover the uncini were grouped in regular combs, and in- serted in distinct ridges. This had also struck Claparéde, and appeared to him so important that he approximated the Capi- telle to the Maldanie*, which, indeed, stand near the Lumbri- cin, according to the views of Cuvier and Milne-Edwards, but were placed by Savigny and Lamarck, with whom I agreed, near the Arenicole and Terebelle. For my own part, I was more vividly reminded of the genus Dasybranchus (olim Dasy- mallus +) and of Notomastust. If Van Beneden only assumes that the evolution of the organization in the Lumbricine ma retrograde, and the vascular system disappear, this decidedly takes place among the Polychetz. As regards the respiratory organs, in the first place, we find, in the genus Eunice, together with species with greatly developed branchiz (such as EL. gigantea and E. Harassii), others with very rudimentary branchie (such as LE. siciliensis), and, in the genus Lumbriconereis (in the wide sense), species with very simple branchiz, and others with none at all. Quatrefages§ has already shown by examples how, be- sides the Polychzetz with a vascular system ramifying every- where, others occur in which it is only partially developed, and others, again, in which it is entirely wanting; and in the latter * Mémoires de la Soc. de Phys, et d’Hist. Nat. de Genéve, 1861, p.110. + Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 1846, p. 166, tab. 5. fig. 3. { Sars, Fauna litt. Norveg. i. p. 11]. tab. 2. figs. 8-17. § Ann. Se, Nat. sér. 3, Zool. xiv. pp. 268, 294, 296. 400 M. E. Grube on the Capitelle the corpuscles contained in the fluid of the somatic cavity appear more numerous and more highly developed. I have hitherto been unable to detect blood-vessels in the Dasybranchi, either in the living state or in a spirit specimen; their branchiz seem to resemble those of the Glycere, forming a diverticulum of the somatic cavity, and taking up its fluid when they extend them- selves. Just as the Glycere stand near Polychete with vascular branchie, I place the Dasybranchi near the Arenicole. The Notomasti, however, agree so closely with the Dasybranchi that they are essentially distinguished only by the want of branchiz. In them also I have hitherto detected no blood-vessels; but in a living specimen, I distinctly saw a red fluid moving between the intestine and the body-wall; its accumulation caused the segments to dilate, and it consisted almost entirely of circular corpuscles, 0'006 line in diameter; in a spirit specimen, which wanted the posterior half, I found regular balls of apparently similar corpuscles in the somatic cavity. With regard to the alimentary canal, the same statements apply to both genera: it commences with a rather short protrusible pharynx, surrounded by pro- and re-tractor muscles, forming a proboscis; then follows a narrow tube (cesophagus or stomach?); and about where the change of bristles takes place this tube passes into an intestine embraced by dissepiments, the anterior part of which, in the spirit specimens examined, is not wider than the tube, and is narrower than the posterior portion, which is usually filled with much excrement. The distinctly double nervous cord, with se- parated inflations, shows the greatest similarity to Lumbricus*, and the arrangement of the muscular system to Arenicola. I must further remark that in both genera the bristles are grouped on each side in two rows; that on the anterior segments only sete, and on the remainder, which are far more numerous, only uncini, occur: the former stand in very short transverse rows behind narrow and low ridges; the latter in combs upon ridges. It is worthy of notice that the projecting part of both kinds of bristles is bordered+—a peculiarity which occurs fre- quently in the setz of the Polychztz, although very rarely in the uncini (as in several genera of Eunicez, on individual segments in Leucodore and Colobranchus among the Ariciadee), but which I have not met with among the Oligochetz. If we return again to the Capitelle, everything that I have just explained is repeated, leaving out of consideration the ge- nerative organs and the sexual relations in general, as to which, im Das ybranchus and Notomastus, I can say nothing; and in treating of generic characters it would be difficult to state how * See Cuvier, Berne Animal, Annelid. pl. 1, fig. 2 t Van Beneden, J. c. pl. 1. figs. 8, 9; Claparéde, 2. ce. pl. 1. fig. 12. and their Position in the System of the Annelida. 401 the Notomasti are distinguished from the Capitelle. Nay, it may even appear questionable whether Dasybranchus and Noto- mastus are to be generically separated ; for if it be confirmed that some Glycere are destitute of branchiz, and the presence of these organs here furnishes no generic character, the same thing might be applied to Dasybranchus. In both, the superior combs of uncini at the commencement of the posterior division of the body are brought quite upon the back, and are much narrower than the inferior ones, by which Nofomastus acquires a greater similarity to Dasybranchus than to Capitella; it 1s also only in these two that a proboscis (protrusible pharynx) is ob- served ; nevertheless, from what I have seen in the anatomy of a Capitella, I must assert that in them also the commencement of the alimentary canal can be turned out. The appareil sécré- tore rénal, which D’Udekem describes in Capitella, I have hitherto been unable to find in Dasybranchus and Notomastus ; but the specimens examined by me were not in the best possible condition ; and it would be very important, in future investiga- tions, to pay attention to this point. The large curved bristles which appear in a transverse series before and behind the genital orifice of the male, and have their apices directed towards each other, have hitherto only been ob- served in the Capitelle; they may perhaps be regarded as a transformation of the combs of small bordered uncini, which are wanting on the segments in question. But are we acquainted with the males of Dasybranchus and Notomastus? Perhaps they may possess a similar character. At any rate, these organs remind us of the two strong hook-lke bristles (spicula) which are so striking on the ventral surface of the Thalasseme, Echiuri, and Bonellie, and are likewise placed hefore the paired and me- dian genital orifices of these animals. In the Echiuri a posterior pair is also concealed within the skin*. The more distinct se- paration or partial amalgamation of the genera Dasybranchus, Notomastus, and Capitella must be left for further and more accurate investigations; but I think I have demonstrated that these three genera stand in a close relationship, and must be referred to one family, the Capztellacee, which, in my opinion, are related to the Arenicole in the same way as the Gephyrei without vessels and with a highly developed fluid in the somatic cavity to the Gephyrei with vessels. The development of the Capitella, wpon which we have such interesting information from Van Beneden, and which so much resembles that of the Arenicolet, the form of the ova, and the separation of the sexes, all agree * M. Miiller, Obs. Anat. de Verm. quibusd. marinis, 1843, p. 11. + Schultze, Ueber die Entwickelung von Arenicola piscatorum, Halle, 1856; transl. in Ann. Nat. Hist. ser, 2. vol. xviii. pp. 105 et seq. 402 M. Lestiboudois on the Vessels of the Latex, excellently with the rule in the section of the Polychete, and would form an exception if we referred the Capitellacee to the Oligochztz ; this applies also to the absence of the vascular system, and to the form of the bristles and their insertion in ridges. With regard to the distinctions between Dasybranchus and Notomastus indicated by Sars’in addition to the occurrence and want of branchie, I will only remark that, in well-preserved small spirit specimens of Dasybranchus caducus, the two-ringed nature of the segments is very distinct, and the proboscis of such a specimen appears not so much scaly as covered with papillee. XLIII.—Remarks on the Vessels of the Latex, the Vasa propria, and the Receptacles of the elaborated Juices of Plants. By M. Lestrzovpois*. Tue older botanists looked upon the coloured fluids m vegetable organisms as peculiar to certain plants, and called them “ proper juices.” The vessels containing these juices they, moreover, named “ proper vessels,” and the plants in which such secretions were recognized, laticiferous or lactescent plants. Besides coloured liquids, other juices, of a completely distinct character, occur in plants, such as gum, resin, oil, &c. Grew termed the receptacles of resinous fluid in the Coniferz “ tur- pentine-vessels,” and those that contained a milky or white fluid “milk-vessels.” Linck designated all such organs by the name of “reservoirs of special secretion.” Mirbel gave the title of “ proper vessels” to all receptacles of special secretion, whether milky, resinous, or oily, calling those “solitary” which were scattered throughout the tissues, and those “ fascicular” which were aggregated together. In this latter category he placed the textile fibres of Asclepias, of Hemp, &c., although such struc- tures were destitute of laticiferous juices and were, in fact, nothing more than the cortical fibres of those plants. DeCandolle, whilst recognizing the heterogeneous nature of special secretions, at first regarded them as the nutritive juices of the plants, but subsequently abandoned this opinion (Organo- graphie, 1827), and ranged all coloured fluids among secreted products, or those prepared by vesicular glands, and thus esta- blished a distinction between them and the juices occupying the lacunz of the cellular tissue. These latter cavities he agreed with Linck in calling “ reservoirs of proper secretion.” In his ‘Physiologie végétale,’ published afterwards in 1882, although * Translated by Dr. Arlidge from the ‘ Comptes Rendus’ for March 1863, the Vasa propria, and Receptacles of the Juices of Plants. 403 then acquainted with the earlier researches of M. Schultz, he adhered to the opinion that the laticiferous juices are of the nature of secretions. M. Schultz specially studied the proper vessels of plants, and enunciated various striking discoveries. He advanced the opinion that the coloured juices of plants were no other than the nutritive fluid ; that this fluid is coagulable, and characterized by the pre- sence of granules floating in a transparent liquid; that it circu- lates in thin, transparent, contractile vessels, without pores or fissures, which ramify and anastomose together. The nutritive fluid he called the /atex, its containing vessels laticiferous vessels, and its circulatory movement cyclosis. This movement he attri- butes to the contractility of the walls of the vessels, and to the properties of attraction and repulsion subsisting between the granules and the walls of the vessels. The movement of attrac- tion he terms autosyncrisis, and that of repulsion autodiacrisis. Such plants as have no coloured sap have, he believes, a latex analogous to that found in laticiferous ones, differmg only in its not possessing colouring granules. Moreover, he repre- sents the laticiferous vessels as occurring in a state of expansion when they are dilated and filled with granules, in a state of contraction when they exhibit only a fine granular streak, and in a state of articulation when they are gorged with juices, but are divided, in consequence of advancing age, into sections by com- plete septa. According to these views, plants possess a fluid analogous to blood, and a circulatory apparatus resembling the vascular system of animals. The statements of M. Schultz produced a great sensation at the time of their publication among botanists, by many of whom they were accepted as true. However, his hypothesis was very soon keenly attacked, and its foundations disputed, by Mohl, Meyer, Treviranus, and others. Mohl denied the existence of the molecular movements of the globules of the latex (the auto- syncrisis and autodiacrisis), and also the phenomenon of eyclosis. According to him, any onward movement that may be observed in the liquid within the proper vessels of a plant is not a normal condition, but a consequence of a wound or section of the tissues permitting an escape of their fluid, or else of pressure, of heat, &e., whereby the liquid is driven from one vascular ramification into another. Lastly, the very existence of vasa propria has been denied, and the structures so called have been asserted to be merely passages or channels which, as a secondary phase of growth, acquire distinct walls; at the same time, the analogy of the latex with the blood of animals has been disowned ; and these various objections have induced many botanists, who at 404 M. Lestiboudois on the Vessels of the Latex, first accepted Schultz’s views, to abandon them more or less completely. Thus Adrien de Jussieu entirely accepted M. Schultz’s views in the first edition of his ‘Cours élémentaire,’ but in the fifth edition of that work omitted the description of laticiferous ves- sels, referring to the channels so called by Schultz as lacune or intercellular spaces which, as an effect of age, ultimately acquired a special wall. He also no longer recognized cyclosis, nor the nutritive nature of the coloured juices. M.A. Richard has like- wise ceased to adopt Schultz’s opinions, and, instead of recog- nizing an analogy between the special juices of plants contained in vessels and the blood of animals, concludes that those juices are rather of an excrementitious nature, more akin to bile or saliva, or fluids which are only indirectly concerned in nutrition. “The proper juices are not,” he writes (Hlémens de Botanique, 7ieme Edition, p. 253), “the same with the descending sap.” M. Lestiboudois would endeavour to dispel the obscurity and doubt which thus prevail respecting the existence and nature of latex and laticiferous vessels. He wishes to determine whether plants have a special vascular system for the circulation of a fluid analogous to the blood of animals, or, in other words, whether there is such a generally diffused nutritive fluid, called latex, distributed to all the organs of a plant by a system of vessels termed laticiferous vessels. With this object m view, he pro- poses to study the question first in the case of plants furnished with coloured juices, which have more particularly been com- pared by analogy with blood, and next in respect to plants with limpid juices; and he advances the followmg propositions for solution :— 1. Are the coloured juices of plants analogous to blood? 2. Are such juices distributed through the medium of vessels, as in the vascular system of animals ? ; 3. Are such juices gifted with the movement of cyclosis ? 4, Are they met with in other reservoirs besides vessels ? 5. Can the coloured juices in different reservoirs be distin- guished from one another ? 6. Are vessels of a similar character discoverable in the ge- nerality of non-lactescent plants ? 7. In non-lactescent plants are reservoirs found analogous to the non-vascular reservoirs of coloured fluids ? 8. Is there an organic apparatus in plants of a more general character than that which encloses coloured juices, and which may be considered to be intended to transport the nutritive sap ? ene with the first question, respecting the analogy of the coloured fluids of plants with blood, he remarks that such fluids the Vasa propria, and Receptacles of the Juices of Plants. 405 contain globules, that they coagulate by rest, and that in these particulars they consequently present some features in common with blood. Yet though the coloured liquids become inspissated, they do not present the phenomena of blood-coagulation ; for in this latter the fibrinous portion coagulates in a solid mass con- taining the globules to form the clot, the other portion remain- ing liquid in the form of serum; whilst in the case of coloured vegetable juices, the globules are aggregated together im a thick mass, and the liquid portion evaporates. In blood, again, the globules have a determinate form and a special organization ; while in the proper juices of plants they are often irregular in form, without organization, and of very varied composition. The composition of blood is in harmony with that of the tissues of animals ; it contains their elements : on the contrary, no such analogy subsists between the proper juices of plants (the com- position of which is very varied and complex) and the funda- mental tissue of plants, constituted of cellulose. Lastly, the proper juices are not found at every part, and indeed are gene- rally absent from young tissues, in which the process of growth principally proceeds. Therefore it may be said that the coloured juices of plants neither resemble a fluid which has to furnish organs with the materials of growth, in their physical properties, in their com- position, or in the situations in which they are found. In the next place, are the vessels in which the proper juices are contained analogous to blood-vessels? Now, it must be admitted that, in certain lactescent plants, these fluids are con- tained in ramifying and anastomosing vessels having simple translucid walls without pores or fissures, just as Schultz has represented them. To see such vessels, this observer recom- mended the examination of the stipules of Ficus elastica, the epidermis of which is very readily detached from the subjacent tissue. On placing a portion of the tissue so prepared under the microscope, the network of laticiferous vessels is at once seen. If, again, of a large number of lactescent plants portions be boiled, the vessels contaming the coloured juices are readily displayed, because the granules of those fluids are coagulated into a more or less compact and continuous mass, filling the tubes and rendermg them very visible. By maceration for a longer or shorter time, the surrounding cellular tissue becomes broken up, and the ramifying tubules or vessels are left isolated and open to the ready examination of their characters. Such preparations may be made from the leaves, stems, or roots of the plants, and among others from those of Campanula Medium, C. pyramidalis, C.rapunculotdes, Euphorbia sylvestris, E. Lathyris, Cichorium Intybus, Lactuca sata, Papaver somniferum, Ascle- 406 M. Lestiboudois on the Vessels of the Latex, pias syriaca, Ficus elastica, Broussonetia papyrifera, and Cheli- donium majus. In these plants, the reservoirs of the coloured juices clearly constitute a vascular system such as one is accustomed to conceive; there are tubes of more or less tenuity, frequently isolated, though sometimes aggregated in bundles, which ana- stomose and reunite to form larger trunks, are often flexuose, with thin transparent walls, not lined by a lamina pierced by fissures or pores, and without trace of a cellular organization. They further contain a coloured fluid, varied in appearance by a multitude of small granules held in suspension—these granules being at times comparatively few, but at others so numerous as to render the tubules altogether opake. After the granular liquid is condensed by boiling, the granular matter is either uniformly diffused through the tubes or agglomerated in irregular masses. The tubules readily break across, and the disunited fragments either remain in contact, giving rise to the semblance ‘of an articulation, or become detached and leave a thread of the coagulated liquid they contained stretching between them as an extensible connecting link. In leaves, these vasa propria are generally situated externally to the bundles of cortical fibres and spiral vessels; and they are also met with alongside these bundles, either above or beneath them, as, for example, in Ficus and Asclepias. Their arrangement may be readily examined in Asclepias, for instance, by preparing the leaves in the following manner :— After boiling them and leaving them to macerate for some days, the epidermis is removed from the veins on the under surface, and the transparent fibrous tissue situated beneath the spiral vessels is then to be separated. On placing a small portion of that tissue under the microscope, the vasa propria are readily distinguishable in the form of opake wavy and branching ves- sels, whilst the neighbourmg fibrous tissue is seen to be formed of transparent, very slender, straight, simple tubes with more or less acute extremities, either empty or occupied with more or fewer granules. The ramifications of the proper vessels are so disposed that the several branches follow the plan of venation of the leaf; some of them, however, are given off in advance of the venous branches, and have rather the appearance of collateral vessels than of ramifications of the vasa propria. Sometimes, again, vessels which have been given off in company with a branch in the system of venation send back a recurrent branch, which re- traces its course towards the original point of departure of the vessel—a fact, like the two former, also illustrated in the struc- ture of the leaves of Aselepias. the Vasa propria, and Receptacles of the Juices of Plants. 407 _ The remotest venules are accompanied by fine vascular branches; for in the course of division the latter become more and more attenuated. This circumstance is observable in Ficus and Che- lidonium. The vasa propria of stems appertain especially to the cortical system. Thus, in Papaver and Lactuca, the special juices are seen, on section, not to flow from the central medulla ; or if they do so at all, it is only in very minute quantity. Nevertheless in some other plants, as Campanule and Chelidonium majus, very many such special vessels occur in the woody lamina; and there are plants, indeed, in which such structures are more abundant in the medulla than in the cortical zones; among such is Asclepias syriaca. The vessels of stems may be detached in considerable numbers, and isolated by maceration after pre- vious boiling. The proper vessels of the cortex are distributed in the different tissues of its layers: thus, in Campanula they are diffused in the parenchyma and in the fibrous layer of the bark ; in Chelidonium they lie outside the fibrous bundles. The vasa propria of stems are generally but slightly ramified, though not, indeed, devoid of frequent divisions. In Asclepias these vessels anastomose at every node, in such a manner, too, as to form a plexus and a kind of septum in the medulla. Some of the branches emanating from this plexus are continued to the petiole of the leaf at its junction with a node, and to the young branch which springs from its axil; in this way they traverse the me- dullary space left between the bundles of woody fibre, and anas- tomose with the vasa propria of the bark, thus establishing a communication between the vascular network of the medulla and that of the cortical system. The proper juices are in general more dense and of a deeper colour in the lower and older parts of a plant. In young shoots they are pale, and not thick; towards the base of the stem they are habitually much more intense in colour. Thus, in Asclepias syriaca, the juices, which are of a pure white colour in the upper portions of the plant, are of a yellow colour near the base of its stem. In Chelidonium the juices at the extremities of the branches are of a very pale yellow, but of a deep yellow tint in the main stem, and a reddish yellow in the root. These dispositions are reversed, however, in certain species : in Papaver the proper juices are of a milky-white colour and well marked in the capsules, though scarcely opaline in the root. The proper juices of this plant seem to be derived principally from the fruit, which gives off a white juice on incision in great abundance: yet if the petiole be cut, little exudes; and if the incision be low down in the stem, no escape at all will probably take place. . : 408 M. Lestiboudois on the laticiferous Vessels of Plants. In other plants where the juices are more coloured and denser in their lower portions, they are there less abundant: thus, for example, in Chelidonium, sections of the root are followed by a very small discharge of laticiferous fluid. The Asclepias syriaca, which possesses so many latex-vessels in its stem, has very few such in its stock, and none at all in those parts which give off no buds: for instance, the portions contiguous to the aérial stems allow the escape of a coloured fluid ; while the remoter parts, together with the roots, give off a scarcely appreciable quantity. I should state, however, that I have sometimes ob- served a few isolated vessels in the roots. These radical vessels are impregnated with a mucilaginous liquid, of thick consistence and capable of coalescing in little globules of various diameters, themselves sometimes becoming confluent, and apparently being proper juices. In certain plants the coloured fluids, instead of being less abundant in the roots, accumulate there in a larger quantity than in the aérial portions: thus, in the stem of Lactuca sativa the vasa propria do not constitute the principal elements of the cortical bundles, which are composed of woody fibres ; whilst in the root they almost exclusively form the cortical bundles, into the composition of which few fibres enter. Hence this portion of the plant contains the largest proportion of the laticiferous juices ; and on tearing the plant up by the roots, little drops of white fluid are seen to escape from all the torn ends of the fibrils. Asarule, the vasa propria are distinguishable from neigh- bouring tissues, and particularly from cortical fibres, by the cir- cumstance of their being filled with a granular fluid of some particular colour, and by their flexuous, thin, branching, ana- stomotic, and isolated form—the fibres being, on the contrary, straight, parallel, closely packed, and often empty. However, in certain plants these proper vessels are straight, very long, with few ramifications, and contain excessively minute eranules few in number; on ah other hand, cortical fibres occur of very fine calibre, of delicate form, and more or less filled with granular matter, and therefore not so readily distinguishable from vasa propria. This happens in Campanula Medium, C. rapuncu- loides, and C. pyramidalis, in Euphorbia Lathyris, E. sylvatica, &e. The distinction is rendered still more difficult when the vessels are articulated. According to Schultz, the articulations are not primary, but are the consequence of age; on this point we shall have something to say hereafter. The reported movements of expansion and contraction we shall also defer, remarking here only that though the difficulties in determining the existence of proper vessels are often great, yet the plan of boiling the Rev. A. M. Norman on Acantholeberis, Lilljeborg. 409 parts to be examined, and thereby suddenly destroying vitality and ‘coagulating the proper juices, renders the existence of vasa propria in certain parts clearly demonstrable. XLIV.—On Acantholeberis (Lilljeborg), a Genus of Entomo- straca new to Great Britain. By the Rev. ALrrep MERLE Norman, M.A. [Plate XI. ] Fam. Daphniide. Genus AcantHoLeBeERis (Lilljeborg). (Syn. Acanthocercus, Schodler.) Anterior antennee large and conspicuous, porrected from the front of the head. The upper branch of the posterior antennz four-jointed, and bearing at its termination three plumose setz and a spine: lower branch three-jointed, and having the first joint provided with a remarkably long-spined seta, the second also furnished with one very long seta, and the last jot termi- nating in three sete and a spine. ‘The postero-ventral angle of the carapace is fringed with very long sete of a spine-like cha- racter. Feet five pairs. Intestinal canal simple and straight at first, but furnished with a loop near the anus. The genus Acanthocercus was founded by Schédler, in the ‘ Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte’ for 1846, for the reception of a remarkable Entomostracan which Miller had described in the ‘Zoologia Danica,’ under the name of Daphne curvirostris. Fitzinger had, however, established a genus of reptiles under the same name three years previously ; and Lilljeborg, therefore, in his work on the Entomostraca (De Crustaceis ex ordinibus tribus Cladocera, Ostracoda, et Copepoda in Scania occurrentibus) changed the name of the genus to Acantholeberis. Th general characters Acantholeberis is closely —perhaps almost too closely—allied to Macrothriz (Baird). The resemblance is seen in the general form of the carapace and of the organs of the body, but especially i in the large size and position of the anterior antenne, and in the peculiar and exceptional structure of the long seta of the first joint of the lower branch of the posterior antenne. The chief differences are to be found in the number of sete on the upper branch of the posterior antennz, which in Macrothriz are tour, but in Acantholeberis only three; and in the fact that there is a loop in the intestinal canal of Acantho- leberis towards the posterior extremity below the poit of attach- ment of the fifth feet ; while in Macrothrix there is no such fold, the course of the canal being straight. In 1858, Lievin described a second species of the genus ; but Ann, § Mag. N. Hist. Serv.3. Vol. xi. 27 410 Rey. A.M. Norman on Acantholeberis, Liljeborg, his A. sordida shows such marked points of divergence from the type as to make us doubt whether the genus has been founded on sufficiently good grounds, and whether it should not rather be united with Lathonura, Lilljeborg (= Pasithea, Koch), and Macrothrix. A. curvirostris and A. sordida are the only known members of the genus, and both these species have now been found in Great Britain. Acantholeberis curvirostris (Miller). Pl. XI. figs. 1-5. Daphne curvirostris, O. F. Miller, Zool. Dan. Prod. p. 200. No. 2403. Daphnia curvirostris, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 93, pl. 13. f. 1 & 2. Acanthocercus rigidus, Schédler, Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 1846, B. i. p- 301, pl.11 & 12. Lievin, ‘‘ Die Branchiopoden der Danziger Gegend,” Neueste Schriften der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Danzig, B. iv. p. 33, pl. 8. f. 1-5. Leydig, Naturgeschichte der Daphniden, p. 195. Acantholeberis curvirostris, Lilljeborg, De Crust. ex ord. Clad. Ostrac. et Copep. p. 52, pl. 4. f. 3-7, & pl. 23. f. 10, 11. The carapace is somewhat oblong in form, rather truncate below, and with the hind margin nearly straight, since the ma- trix is but little protuberant im the gravid female. The head does not lean forward, as is usually the case among the Daph- niide, but is remarkably upright. To the upper point of the beak the anterior antenne (PI. XI. fig. 2) are attached, and from it they are projected at nearly a right angle. These organs are very large, and strap-shaped; they are slightly serrate on the upper margin, and gradually widen towards the extremity, which is furnished with six or eight cylindrical tentaculiform filaments. The supplemental eye-spot is situated close behind their bases, and is very small. The posterior antenne are long and slender ; their peduncles are not very muscular, are corrugated on the basal half, and bear a few minute spines on the surface towards the distal extremity. The upper and four-jointed branch of these antennz hag the first articulation very small, the second considerably longer, and furnished with a spine on the upper margin, but no seta; the third is unprovided with appendages; the fourth terminates in three two-jointed plumose sete and a spine, which does not equal one-third of the basal portion of the sete in length. The first. joint of the lower branch bears an unusually long two-jointed seta of remarkable character, and which, indeed, forms one of the chief features in this interesting Entomostracan. The basal portion of this seta is provided with short cilia on the outer or upper margin, while the inner margin is smooth; the second portion of the seta (Pl. XI. fig. 3) has a series of rather distant spines upon the outer margin ; and between these spines a high power of the microscope shows a fringe of short, closely-set cilia. a Genus of Entomostraca new to Great Britain. 41] The second joint of the lower branch of the posterior antennz bears another seta of great length, which differs, however, in its armature from that of the first joint. This seta is plumose on both margins throughout its entire length; and between the longer hairs of the outer margin of the distal portion are short closely-set cilia (fig. 4), similar in character to those between the spines of the seta which is attached to the first joint. The third joint ends in three two-jointed plumose cilia and a spine. The labrum has a large and conspicuous, much elevated, acutely papilliform process in front. The terminal portion of the abdomen is bordered with a closely-set array of spines, and. has the sides, moreover, thickly studded with an admixture of slender spines and hairs. The abdominal setz are long, while the terminal claws (fig. 5) are rather short, a little flattened, and minutely pectinated along the edges. The ventral margin of the carapace is fringed throughout its entire length with plumose sete; and these setz attain an extraordinary length at the angle formed by the junction of the ventral and posterior margins. Acantholeberis curvirostris was discovered last summer b Mr. D. Robertson, in the Isle of Cumbrae in the Firth of Clyde, living in some abundance in a small shallow pond about 12 feet square, which had been eut out of the sandstone rock, and was covered at the bottom with moss and Conferve. Mr. Robertson informs us that though the species seems fond of remaining quietly among the weeds, it nevertheless is tolerably active when swimming, which it effects with a slight jerking motion, often in curves. It has a habit of mounting to the surface of the water, and then allowing itself passively and slowly to sink to the bot- tom, with its antenne spread out on either side. It rarely re- sumes active motion when in its downward course, unless it is disturbed. A second locality for the species is Crag Lake, Northumber- land, where it has been met with, during the present spring, by Mr. G. S. Brady. Acantholeberis sordida (Lievin). Pl. XI. figs. 6-9. Acanthocercus sordidus, Lievin, “ Die Branch. der Danziger Gegend,” Neueste Schriften der naturf. Gesells. im Danzig, B. iv. p. 34, pl. 8. f. 7-12. Fischer, Bull. de la Soc. Imp. des Nat. de Moscou, 1854. Leydig, Naturgeschichte der Daphniden, p. 199. Carapace nearly round, widest below, and slightly truncate on the inferior margin, tumid, and having the surface clothed with short hair. Anterior antenne largely developed, long, cylin- drical. Posterior antenne short and stout; their peduncles 27% 412 Rev. A.M. Norman on Acantholeberis, Lilljeborg, - very large, stout, and powerfully muscular. Both branches very short, the separate articulations being scarcely longer than they are broad, and the total length of the branches barely exceeding the width of the bases of the enormously developed peduncles. Upper and four-jointed branch terminating in three plumose setae and a long spine, which equals two-thirds the length of the basal portion of the sete. Lower and three-joimted branch having a seta at the extremity of the first and second joints, and three setze and a spine at the termination of the third joint. The sete of the first two joints do not differ materially in cha- racter from those at the extremity. The last portion of the abdomen (Pl. XI. fig. 7) is in the form of a somewhat flattened semicircular plate, margined with large spines. The claws are large, produced, simple, and cylindrical. Just below their base is a cluster of small spines, which are succeeded by some still smaller spines; behind these the spines increase in size, becom- ing both numerous and large. The abdominal setz are long and slightly plumose. The ventral edge of the carapace is frmged with plumose setz (fig. 8); but at the posteroventral angle these sete become much longer, assume quite a spine-like cha- racter, and bear, as it were, smaller spines attached to one side (fig. 9). The entire animal is of a brilliant crimson colour. This Daphnian is remarkable alike in history and in habits. On examining with a hand-lens the vegetable matter in a bottle of water brought home from a clear pond which had been cut out of the limestone rock, to contain water for the supply of the engine at a now unworked colliery at Bishop Middleham, in the county of Durham, a small blood-red Ento- mostracan, which was lying upon its back in the water, attracted attention; and on further search, two more individuals were found in the same bottle. They at once became a source of great interest ; for A. sordida is the most helpless animal possible. It is totally unable either to swim or to walk. The sete of the antennee are apparently of insufficient length to confer the power of swimming; and the feet in this family, though valuable agents in respiration, are totally unfitted in their structure for purposes of locomotion, and, indeed, being contained within the carapace, could not by any possibility be used for the support of the body. The animal therefore lies upon its back, kicking and struggling, swinging to and fro its brawny arms (the posterior antenne), and thrusting im and out of the carapace-valves its largely developed and strongly spined abdomen in the vain attempt ito push itself from place to place; but the efforts, though most vigorous, are of little avail, and its progress is extremely slow. It is probably.in consequence of these sluggish a Genus of Entomostraca new to Great Britain. 413 habits, and of the animal rolling itself in the mud, as well as owing to the pilose covering of the shell, that it owes the coating of mud, Diatoms, and Desmids which render it so difficult a a matter to see the structure of the organs of the body contained within the carapace. That the coating of extraneous matter is the effect, and not the cause, of the inability of the animal to swim is proved by the fact that one of the specimens obtained, which was sent to Mr. G. S. Brady for the purpose of obtaining his kindly extended and valuable aid in the delineation of the species, gave birth to five young while in his possession ; and he informed us that, though these young, when first born, were able to raise themselves slightly in the water, yet it was not more than about half an inch, nor could this be effected without great effort, or, apparently, without the assistance of the sides of the vessel in which they were contamed; and when two or three days old, even this limited power of locomotion was lost. Mr. Brady wrote to us the following vivid description of the motions of these young specimens :—“It is a sight to see the brutes swim, or ¢ry to swim, under the microscope. When a good view from the dorsal aspect is obtained, one sees that they put their two great antenne together, and strike out in a good bold sweep like any Christian, the superior antenne working synchronously, but in a smaller arc, inside the greater ones. The motion of these lesser antennee is very beautiful; and the muscular con- tractions in the basal joints of the greater ones are remarkably plain, throwing the limb into great wrinkles. When the animal is tired of this sort of exertion, it stops its arms, and begins working its branchial apparatus at a great rate; but, so far as I can see, the two systems are never in active motion together. They seem to attract dust and parasitic growths; for, though kept in simple water, they are surrounded with confervoid fila- ments, Diatoms, Oscillatoriz, &c.” Another remarkable feature in the history of this Daphnian is the great scarcity of the species individually. As a rule, where an Entomostracan occurs at all, it is to be met with in abund- ance. This is very far from being the case with A. sordida. Failing in the attempt to make out the structure of the three specimens we had obtained in the Bishop-Middleham colliery pond, and being unwilling to destroy them by attempted dissec- tion, we hoped to render the dense character of the carapace- valves more transparent by mounting them in Dean’s medium. The result was far from satisfactory. The pond was therefore revisited in the hope of again finding the species, and this not once, but many times; but, though the greatest trouble and care were taken, no further specimens could be met with. Sub- sequently, however, a single example was obtained under pre- 414 Rev. A.M. Norman on Acantholeberis, Lilljeborg. cisely similar circumstances to those under which the former had been taken, among material collected in the Forge Dam at Sedgefield, a spot about two and a half miles distant from the first locality. It is from this example that the figures and description of this paper have principally been derived. All after-attempts (and they were not a few) to take this species in the Forge Dam were as unavailing as they had proved in the case of the colliery pond. We had at first thought that this abnormal species might be new to science; and when we found the description of this ani- mal in Leydig’s work, we could not help being amused at the remarkable parallelism between our own experience and that of Fischer and Leydig; and we really are afraid that it was some consolation, after the great trouble that had been taken in the vain attempt to obtain additional specimens, that other natu- ralists had suffered precisely similar disappoitments. Fischer says that he could only find a single specimen, and therefore is obliged to content himself with referrmg to the description of Lievin; and Leydig writes, “I have only once observed Acan- thocercus sordidus, in a muddy lake at Tubingen. It was a single specimen, which struck me by its blood-red colour, and also by the ample investiture of mud which surrounded the animal. Added to that, it did not swim, but crept slowly along the bot- tom of the vessel. Circumstances prevented my drawing the animal, and every subsequent trouble I took to find the animal again was in vain.” We have already referred to the fact that this species does not appear to embrace all the characters which are assigned to the genus Acantholeberis. It agrees with A. curvirostris in the number of sete attached to the posterior antenne, and also in the presence of setz of great length at the posterior ventral angle of the carapace. It differs in the fact that the set of the first two joints of the lower branch of the posterior antenne are short, and do not differ in character from the ordinary plumose sete of the Daphniide. But a more important instance of divergence would appear to exist in the structure of the intestinal canal, which does not seem to possess a loop near the excretory ori- fice, as in A. curvirosiris ; nevertheless a great dilatation of the canal exists im an analogous position, forming apparently a strong muscular rectum. At the same time, we speak with hesitation on this point, and our opportunities of investigating the structure of the species have not been sufficient to enable us to speak with certainty on this and other points. Sedgefield, county Durham. May 18, 1863. Rev. 8S, Haughton on the Ceils of the Wasp and Bee. 415 EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. Fig. 1. Acantholeberis curvirostris (Miiller), ? . Fig. 2. Anterior antenna of the same species. Fig. 3. Portion of the terminal half of the seta attached to the first joint of the lower branch of the posterior antenne; greatly magnified. Fig. 4. Portion of the terminal half of the seta attached to the second joint of the lower branch of the posterior antennz, greatly en- larged. Fig. 5. Abdominal claws. 5 6. Acantholeberis sordida (Lievin), 9 . Fig. 7. Abdomen of the same species. 8. Seta from the ventral margin of the carapace. Fig. 9. Sete from the posteroventral angle of the carapace. XLV.—On the Form of the Cells made by various Wasps and by the Honey Bee; with an Appendix on the Origin of Species. By the Rev. Samurn Haveuton*, Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. THe geometrical form affected by the cells of various kinds of wasps and bees has attracted the attention, and called forth the speculations, of naturalists and geometers from the earliest periods. By one class of writers the geometrical properties of these cells have been used as proofs, not so much of the skill and instinct of the insects as of the wisdom and intelligence of their Creator ; while, by the opposite class of writers, these same geometrical properties of the cells are alleged as a sufficient cause for the production of the insects that make them, from the advantages which these forms of cells are supposed to possess over other forms—advantages said to be so important as to de- cide the battle of life in favour of the insects that adopt the geometrical plan of making their cells. I have for a long time felt convinced that both parties in this coutroversy are in error, as men generally are when they attempt to speculate on the reasons for the existence of things; and that the properties of the cells are only the necessary consequence of their geometrical form, which form itself is the necessary con- sequence of mechanical conditions totally unconnected with design, and incapable of rendering an account of the origin of the insects that make the cells. The geometrical cell of the wasps and bees that I have had an opportunity of examining may be divided into three classes. Ist. Hexagonal cells formed of adjoimg pyramidal figures, with slightly curved axes, not terminating in a point, but ina rounded extremity. * Read before the Natural History Society of Dublin, November 21, 1862. [Reprinted from a separate pamphlet by permission of the author. | 416 Rev. 8S. Haughton on the Form of the Cells The British tree-wasp forms its pupa-cells in this manner, and, in consequence of the pyramidal form of the hexagonal cells, the comb opens out on the lower side, so as to present a larger surface than on the upper side. 2nd. Hexagonal cells formed of adjoming prismatic figures, with rectilinear axes, terminated by a truncated plane, at right angles to the axes of the prisms. These cells are found in wasps’ nests from St. Lucia, in the West Indies, and at Graham’s Town, in South Africa, which were placed at my disposal for this investigation by Mr. Robert J. Montgomery. 3rd. Hexagonal cells formed of adjoining prismatic figures, with rectilinear axes, terminated by three faces of a rhombic dodecahedron, which three faces also form each one-third of the termination of a similar set of adjoining hexagonal prismatic cells, placed end to end behind the first set of prisms. This double comb is produced by the well-known form of the cells of the honey-bee. All these varieties of cells may be accounted for, simply by the mechanical pressure of the insects against each other during the formation of the cell. In consequence of the instinct. that compels them to work with reference to a plane, and of the cylindrical form of the insects’ bodies, the cells must be hexa- gons ; and in consequence of the instinct that induces the bees to form double combs, the mutual pressure of their heads against each other compels the bottom of the cell to assume the form of the rhombic dodecahedron. If we could imagine spherical insects endowed with the instinct of working from a point and not a plane, their cells would cease to affect the forms of the hexagon and rhombic dodecahedron, and would imitate the totally different form of the pentagonal dodecahedron—instances of which may be seen in the bubbles produced in the froth of an organic solution, and in the shapes of the elementary cells of vegetables, equally restricted in their growth in every direction— and also in the pentagonal faces assumed by leaden bullets made to fill completely the inside of a hollow shell, and then dis- charged against a bank of earth, or a wall, from a mortar. On this subject, I cannot do better than quote the words of Buffon, who was the first person that put forward a rational theory of the shape of the cells of bees. The passage which I quote may be found in his ‘ Histoire Naturelle,’ tom. iv. p. 99 :— “ Dirai-je encore un mot; ces cellules des abeilles, ces hexa- gones, tant vantés, tant admirés, me fournissent une preuve de plus contre l’enthousiasme et Padmiration : cette figure, toute géométrique et toute réguliére qu’elle nous paroit, et qu’elle est en effet dans la spéculation, n’est ici qu’un résultat mécanique made by various Wasps and by the Honey-Bee. 417 et assez imparfait qui se trouve souvent dans la nature, et que Pon remarque méme dans ses productions les plus brutes; les cristaux et plusieurs autres pierres, quelques sels, &c., prennent constamment cette figure dans leur formation. Qu’on observe les petites écailles de la peau d’une roussette, on verra qu’elles sont hexagones, parce que chaque écaille croissant en méme temps se fait obstacle, et tend & occuper le plus d’espace qwil est possible dans un espace donné: on voit ces mémes hexa- gones dans le second estomac des animaux ruminans, on les trouve dans les graines, dans leurs capsules, dans certaines fleurs, &c. Qu’on remplisse un vaisseau de pois, ou plutét de quelque autre graine cylindrique, et qu’on le ferme exactement apres y avoir versé autant d’eau que les intervalles qui restent entre ces graines peuvent en recevoir; qu’on fasse bouillir cette eau, tous ces cylindres deviendront de colonnes & six pans. On en voit clairement la raison, qui est purement mécanique; chaque graine, dont la figure est cylmdrique, tend par son ren- flement & occuper le plus d’espace possible dans un espace donné, elles deviennent done toutes nécessairement hexagones par la compression réciproque. Chaque abeille cherche & occuper de méme le plus d’espace possible dans un espace donné, il est donc nécessaire aussi puisque le corps des abeilles est cylindrique, que leurs cellules soient hexagones,—par la méme raison des obstacles réciproques. On donne plus d’esprit aux mouches dont les ouvrages sont les plus réguliers; les abeilles sont, dit-on, plus ingénieuses que les guépes, que les frelons, &c., qui savent aussi l’architecture, mais dont les con- structions sont plus grossiéres et plus irréeuligres que celles des abeilles: on ne veut pas voir, ou lon ne se doute pas que cette régularité, plus ou moins grande, dépend uniquement du nombre et de la figure, et nullement de Vintelligence de ces petites bétes; plus elles sont nombreuses, plus il y a des forces qui agissent également et qui s “opposent de méme, plus il y a par conséquent de contrainte mécanique, de régularité forcée, et de perfection apparente dans leurs productions” °— Buffon. The opinions of the older writers, especially of mathematicians, on this subject, differ widely from those advanced by Buffon. I shall here translate some of the most important of the pas- sages bearing on this point. “The famous Pappus, of Alexandria, in the Introduction to the Fifth Book of his Mathematical Collections, says :— “God has imparted to men, indeed, the best and most perfect knowledge of wisdom and discipline; and has assigned to some animals, devoid of reason, a certain portion. To men, there- fore, as making use of reason, He has permitted that they should do all things by reason and demonstration ; but to other animals 418 Rey. 8S. Haughton on the Form of the Cells without reason, He has given the possession of what is useful and conducive to life, by a certain natural providence. «Any one may understand this to be so, as well im many other kinds of animals, and more especially in bees. For order, and a certain admirable deference to those who rule in their republic, ambition, moreover, and cleanliness, heap together an abundance of honey ; but their foresight and economy concern- ing its conservation are much more admirable: for holding it for certain, as is just, that they carry back some portion of ambrosia from the gods to choice men, they pour out this, not rashly on the ground, or into wood, or any other unformed and misshapen matter; but collecting from the sweetest flowers that grow in the earth, they form from them most excellent vases as a receptacle for the honey (which the Greeks call «npia, and the Latins favi), all mdeed, equal, similar, and cohering among themselves, of the hexagon species. Now it is thus evident that they construct these by a certain geometrical fore- sight ; for they consider it fit that all the figures should cohere together and have common sides, lest anything, falling into the intervening spaces, should spoil and corrupt their work. ‘Hence, three rectilinear and ordinate figures can effect what is proposed—I mean ordinate figures which are equilateral and equiangular, for ordinate and dissimilar figures did not please the bees themselves. Now, equilateral triangles, and squares, and hexagons (neglecting other dissimilar figures filling space) may be placed next each other, so as to have common sides— other ordinate figures cannot; for the space about the same point is filled, either by six equilateral triangles, or by four squares, or by three hexagons; but three pentagons are less than sufficient, and four are more than sufficient to fill the space round a point, neither can three heptagons be established, so as to fill the space round a point*. “The same reasoning will apply much more to figures having a greater number of sides. There being, then, three figures, which, of themselves, can fill up the space round a point, viz. the triangle, the square, and the hexagon; the bees have wisely selected for their structure that which contains most angles, suspecting, indeed, that it could hold more honey than either of the others. “‘The bees, forsooth, know only what is useful to themselves, viz. that the hexagon is greater than the square or triangle, and can hold more honey, an equal quantity of material being em- ployed in the construction of each ; but we, who profess to have more wisdom than the bees, will investigate something even * The proofs of these assertions are omitted in this translation. made by various Wasps and by the Honey-Bee. 419 more remarkable, viz. that, of plane figures, which are equi- lateral and equiangular, and have equal perimeters, that is always the greatest which consists of most angles, and the circle is the greatest of all, provided it be included in a perimeter equal to theirs.” ——Pappus. In 1712, Maraldi published, in the ‘ Mémoires de I’Académie des Sciences, Paris, 1712, p. 299, a remarkable paper, in which is investigated, for the first time, the terminal pianes of the bees’ cell, which are now well known to be formed of the faces of the rhombic dodecahedron. He appears to have believed that the object of having lozenges of the same form, as termi- nating planes, was to enable the bees to carry in their mind the idea of one geometrical form only, in addition to their original idea of the hexagon. The angles of the lozenge are found by him to be 110° and 70°, by observation; and 109° 28' and 70° 32’ by calculation. He gives, also, the following mean measurements of the cells:—In a foot long of comb there are from 60 to 66 cells, about two lines for each cell, and the depth of the cell is five lines. Réaumur appears to have been the first who introduced the fantastic idea of economy of wax, as the motive cause of the peculiar shape of the terminating planes, and, not being a geo- meter, he obtained the assistance of Konig to calculate the angle of the lozenge which should give the least surface with a given volume. Konig determined this angle at 109° 26’, agree- ing with Maraldi within two minutes, MacLaurin published, in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions,’ 1748, p. 565, an elaborate geometrical paper on the subject, in which he proves that the tangent of the angle in question is the square root of 2, and that it is therefore equal to 109° 28' 16”; and he computes the saving of wax as “almost one-fourth part of the pains and expense of wax they bestow, above what was necessary for completing the parallelogram side of the cells.” L’Hullier, in 1781, published, in the ‘ Berlin Memoirs,’ p. 277, an elaborate discussion of the entire problem, in which he arrived at the following results, already found by MacLaurin’s geometrical method :— a. That the economy of wax is less than one-fifth of what would make a flat base. b. That the economy of wax, referred to the total expenditure, is 37st, so that the bees can make fifty-one cells, instead of fifty, by the adoption of the rhombic dodecahedron. He does not share, however, in the enthusiasm of the natu- ralists, but maintains and proves that mathematicians could make cells, of the same form as those of the bees, which, instead of using only a minzmum of wax, would use the minimum mini- 420 Rev. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. morum, so that five cells could be made of less wax than that which now makes only four, instead of fifty-one out of fifty. _ Notwithstandmg this conclusive decision in favour of the mathematicians, the advocates of final cause, and those who maintain that economy of wax can create a new species, have both persisted in using the bees’ cell in illustration of their re- spective theories, with a pertinacity that proves the persistent vitality of an exploded theory. In illustration of this remark- able tendency of false theories to reproduce themselves, I shall here add, as an appendix to my account of the form of the wasps’ and bees’ cells, some remarks on the origin of species, the substance of which originally appeared im the ‘ Natural His- tory Review’ of 1860. Appendix on the Origin of Species. The active and restless mind of man has never been content with the knowledge of the present, but has always sought to know the future and the past. The guesses of the ancients as to the future of man are amongst the most interesting and, at the same time, the most puerile of their philosophical specula- tions. The reader of the Tusculan Disputations rises from his task, charmed by the style of the writer, but thankful that a certain revelation of the future renders him immeasurably su- perior in knowledge to the weavers of these pleasant webs of fiction ; and though he admires the skill of the ingenious sophists who live again and dispute in the pages of Cicero, he would not for an instant exchange his own position for theirs. The moderns have resolved, by their speculations on the past, to show that in ingenuity and oddness of conceit, and, probably, also in wideness from the truth, they are in no respect inferior to the ancients. The future being shut out from us, we are re- solved to try what we can effect, in proof of our versatility of imagination, by guessing at the history of the past. To establish a character for subtlety and skill, in drawing large conclusions on this subject from slender premises, the first requisite is ignorance of what other speculators have attempted before us in the same field ; and the second is, a firm confidence in our own special theory. Neither of these requisites can be considered wanting im those who are engaged in the task of reproducing Lamarck’s theory of organic life, either as alto- gether new, or with but a tattered and threadbare cloak thrown over its original nakedness. The sciences of geology and political economy are mainly answerable for the revival of these exploded and forgotten fancies,—geology, in supplying the lost history of organic lie, which could never be studied profoundly from the creatures Rev. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. 421 living at any given time; and political economy, in furnishing, from its mean and sordid motives, a Malthusian force, supposed to be sufficient to supply the wants of previous theories. One of the earliest speculators on the origin of the diversified forms of life we see around us, and class as varieties, species, and genera, was Buffon, who published in 1766* his theory of the derivation of all mammal forms by degradation, from fifteen primary and perfect types, and nine special or isolated species. This theory of Bvoyeveots by degradation, although now superseded by the theory of progression, has much to be said in its favour, and derives additional importance from the facts of the history of life made known since Buffon’s time, by the science of geology. The principal of these additional facts are, the degradation of fishes from their first introduction in the Old Red Sandstone period to the present day; the corresponding degradation of the Cephalopods, and, though in a somewhat less degree, of the Reptiles. Some of the classes given by Buffon are as old as the time of Moses, who defines with accuracy the class Ruminantia, distin- guishing it from the Pachydermata and Rodentia, in his classifi- cation of “clean” and “unclean” beastst. Whatever may be thought by the more enlightened moderns of the merits of this classification of mammals, Buffon certainly agrees with them in one-respect: he takes the non-reality of species as the starting-point of his theory, and by a continued degradation downwards, developes all the varieties of life we see on the surface of the globe. To those who love to dwell upon the past, this theory of degradation will afford solace and consolation in the troubles of the present, as they can reflect upon how good and excellent their ancestors were, and congratulate each other upon their superiority to those that will come after them. Every system of philosophy provides its followers with a “ solatium doloris ;” the degradationists find it in the contemplation of the past, and the progressionists in the prospect of the future; to those who are contented with the present, and deny our knowledge of the past or future, both theories appear as the idle dreams of child- hood, the awakening from which will disclose a reality totally different from the troubled fancies of the night. Lamarck is the father of the progressionists ; and of the many who quote his name as an authority im support of their systems, or express their disapproval of his doctrine, few have taken the trouble to understand his theory or trace it to its origin. It is apparently founded on the confusion of species, like that of Buffon ; but there is in reality an arriére-pensée, like an unseen * Histowe Naturelle, tom, xiv. t Leviticus, xi. 2-8, 422 Rev. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. presence, which corrupts his reasoning, and discloses the motive force of his entire system. This hidden spring of action and theorizing is a profound and, as many think, a well-founded con- tempt for humanity, which pervades his writings as thoroughly as it does the “ Voyage to the Houyhnhnms.” Lamarck was tco quick-witted and acute an observer, however deticient he may have been as a reasoner, to have believed his own theory, the real mainspring of which is the desire to degrade man into an intelligent baboon or Yahoo ; what difference is there in a name ! In his desire to do so, he overlooks every fact at variance with his foregone conclusion, and writes of mankind with a virulence which, though devoid of the wit of Swift, springs from the same profound and unalterable conviction of the worthlessness of the creature he describes :— “Si Newton, Bacon, Montesquieu, Voltaire, et tant d’autres hommes ont honoré l’espéce humaine par l’étendue de leur intelligence et de leur génie, combien ne la rapprochent pas de Vanimal cette quantité @’hommes bruts, ignorans, en proie aux préjugés les plus absurdes, et constamment asservis par leurs habitudes, qui cependant composent la masse principale chez toutes les nations ?”* Lamarck’s contempt for his species is again shown in the strange list of resemblances he selects for his comparison between man and the chimpanzee—a comparison fully as degrading as Swift’s mock imitation of a naturalist’s description of a Yahoo. Lamarck’s theory consists in the assertion of the followmg laws, six in number, which he dignifies with the title of Laws of Nature :— I. Law of Specialization of Function, by which a function at first general, or belonging to the whole body, is determined to a particular organ. II. Law of Nutrition producing Death by the forced inequality between the materials fixed by assimilation and removed by excretion. This law is intended to account for death, which is a puzzle to the naturalists. III. Law of Movement of Complex Fluids in Canals. This law I profess my inability to understand. In the statement of it, Lamarck, who, like most naturalists, is unacquainted with physics, and untrained in the severe discipline of mathematical reasoning, attributes properties to fluids in motion which must be considered by lookers-on as little short of miraculous. IV. Law of Change of Composition of Fluids in Circulation. This law is as obscure, and as miraculous in its results, as the * Recherches sur l’Organisation des Corps Vivans, p. 127. Paris, 27 Floréal, An X. Rev. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. 423 preceding. Natural religion, however, would appear to consider herself entitled to her miracles, as well as revealed religion. V. Organic Forms, acquired under the presiding influence of ex- ternal circumstances, are transmitted by Generation. This law in- volves the famous Law of Natural Selection, attributed within the last few months to Mr. Darwin. VI. By the concurrence of the preceding Laws, of a long lapse of time, and an almost inconceivable diversity of surrounding circum- stances, all Species have been formed in succession. Lamarck’s theory is essentially one of progression, and is totally opposed to that of Buffon, which is one of degradation; yet it is remarkable that they both rest upon the same foundation—the assumed non-reality of species. Like his successors in the Pro- gression theory, Lamarck spent his life in the establishment of the reality of species ; and it is a humiliating reflection, that, at the close of it, he believed himself to have lived under a delusion. Let us hear his confession :— “ Jai long-temps pensé qu'il y avait des Hspéces constantes dans la nature, et qu’elles étoient constituées par les individus qui appartiennent & chacune d’elles. Maintenant je suis con- vaincu que j’étois dans l’erreur a cet égard, et qu’il n’y a réelle- ment dans la nature que des individus.” What must we think of the principles that guide the specula- tions of naturalists, when we find minds like those of Buffon and Lamarck drawing opposite conclusions from the same premises ? It matters little in this question whether the premises be true or false, whether species be truly distinct or not; our surprise at the logic of the naturalists is natural, and must border on a courteous contempt. The English revival of Lamarckianism, or “ Progress in Organic Life,’ by Mr. Darwin, involves no idea in advance of those contained in Lamarck’s six laws, but gives a greater pro- minence to the law of Continuation of Peculiarities by Genera- tion, by the assertion that such peculiarities, and such only, as are useful to’ the creature, in its struggle for existence, will become hereditary—the reason being, that animals provided with such peculiarities will have the advantage in the battle of life over their fellows in the competition for food, females, and other necessaries for the preservation of the individual and species. This notable argument is borrowed from Malthus’s doctrine of population, and will, no doubt, find acceptance with those political economists and pseudo-philosophers who reduce all the laws of action and human thought habitually to the lowest and most sordid motives. It is dignified with the title of a Law of Nature, called the Law of Natural Selection, and forms the only bond fide addition made by Darwin to Lamarck’s famous 4.24 Rev. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. theory of Progression, in which, however, it is implicitly in- volved. I make no account of Mr. Darwin’s geological additions to Lamarck, for two reasons. In the first place, the laws of geo- graphical distribution explained by geological change are not ad rem, and were previously fully treated of by Buffon and Forbes ; and in the second place, Mr. Darwin admits that the facts of geology are opposed to his (Lamarck’s) theory; and they are pleasantly alluded to as the geological difficulty! So far as the history of life on the globe indicates a progression, Lamarck is entitled to the benefit of it—as in the case of mammals and plants,—but certainly not to the exclusion of the facts in favour of degradation—such as the case of Fishes, Reptiles, and Cepha- lopods, which must be credited to the account of Buffon and his followers. Lamarck says distinctly—“ Ce ne sont pas les organes, c’est- i-dire, la nature et la forme des parties du corps d’un animal, qui ont donné lieu a ses habitudes et a ses facultés particuliéres ; mais ce sont au contraire ses habitudes, sa maniére de vivre, et les circonstances dans lesquelles se sont rencontrés les individus dont il provient, qui ont avec le temps constitué la forme de son corps, le nombre et l’état de ses organes, enfin les facultés dont il jout.” This statement implies all that is essential in Mr. Darwin’s “Jaw of Natural Selection,” which, by its prominence, fills in his system the place occupied by the law of Imitation in the original theory of Lamarck. This difference arises from the difference of the points of view of the Frenchman and the Englishman—a difference characteristic of the two races. The Frenchman, with the vivacity and perception of the ridiculous belonging to his nation, seizes upon the quality most likely to elevate a monkey into a man, selects the faculty of imitation, and, with a bitter satire, endows his monkey with the human desire to better his condition, and lift himself above his brother chatterers. He thus magnifies the monkey power of imita- tion—which is truly wonderful, and extends to the most extra- ordinary actions—into the position of a law of nature, sufficient to create man! The Englishman, on the other hand, firmly believes his theory, and, with a confident faith in the power of food and comfort, equally characteristic of his country, elevates the desire to supply the stomach into a law of sufficient force to convert an eel into an elephant, or an oyster into an orang- outan. Other theorists, whose name is legion, have printed their crude fancies, and have met with numerous readers among the young and inexperienced, the sciolists of science. It is not to Rev. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. 425 be supposed that a public which accepted mesmerism and table- turning could judge with accuracy of the pretensions of loose and ill-reasoned speculations on the origin of life. It has rained, hailed, and poured theories of life—religious, philosophical, and pseudoscientific—with a marvellous rapidity within the last few years. Some theorists have started from the nebular hypo- thesis of Laplace; others have speculated on the results of superfoetation ; and others on the brilliant and seductive theory of the correlation of physical forces ; but they may all be classed as, knowingly or not, the followers of Lamarck. Some have taught that all the planets, being composed of the same mineral constituents as the earth, must produce in succession the same organic phenomena, and weary the reader with the idea of the same Pterodactyles and Cetacea, the same monads and men, ap- pearing on all the globes that circle round the sun! Others have called to mind the loss of heat of our planet, and, by the correlation of forces, have reproduced it in the increasing intelli- gence of the successive forms of life that have peopled our globe!! In a word, there is no folly that human fancy can devise, when truth has ceased to be of primary importance, and right reason and sound logic have been discarded, that has not been produced and preached as a new revelation. Neither have the disciples of Lamarck wanted the martyr spirit, 2. e. the dis- position to make martyrs of others, which is generally supposed to be essential to the apostles of anew faith. They have courted persecution, and reviled their opponents with bitter words, and with such weapons as are permitted by the free civilization under which we live. They argue, with a logic worthy of their system, that because truth has been often in a minority, there- fore minorities and theories in a minority must necessarily be true. It is curious to observe the natural instinct by which Lamarck and his followers appeal from the judgment of their peers to the young, the enthusiastic, and the inexperienced. I shall quote but two instances of this necessary instinct of self-preservation :— “(Que de réflexions ces considérations pourront faire naitre dans l’esprit du petit nombre de ceux qui en sont susceptibles et qui sont lents & prononcer ! les autres auront bientot fait a cet égard: ils trancheront sans examen, et décideront d’aprés ce qui leur conviendra le mieux, ou selon la portée de leurs con- ceptions.”—Lamarck, p. 128. “T by no means expect to convince experienced naturalists, whose minds are stocked with a multitude of facts, all viewed, during a long course of years, from a point of view directly opposite to mine...... ; but I look with confidence to the future, to young and rising naturalists, who will be able to view Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3, Vol, xi, 28 426 Rev. 8S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. both sides of the question with impartiality.”—Darwin’s Origin of Species, pp. 481-82. The theories of Bioyéveois, already described, and many others, are based upon the following three unwarrantable assumptions, the denial of which, until proved, brings to the ground the entire structure, like a child’s house of cards— I. The indefinite variation of species continuously in the one direction. Il. That the causes of variation assigned, viz. cross-breeding (Buffon), imitation (Lamarck), and natural advantage in the struggle for existence (Darwin), are sufficient to account for the effects asserted to be produced. III. That succession implies causation. On each of these a few words of explanation are necessary. I. The indefinite variation of species continuously in the one direction. This has been expressed by some Lamarckians as a state of unstable equilibrium of nature; but should we assume the existence of a law which is contrary to all we know of every other department of nature? If we must have a mechanical analogy to fix our ideas, nature might be better compared to a . condition of dynamic equilibrium, in which all the parts are in motion, and never return to precisely the same relative positions, but, nevertheless, continually balance round certain definite positions of equilibrium, which never change. What should we think of the astronomer who, from a few years’ observation of the precession of the equinoxes, should predict that in due time the north pole of the earth’s axis would point to the same posi- tion among the stars that the south pole now occupies? yet this very species of assumption is made by Lamarck and Darwin, in their appeal to the supposed influence of a long lapse of time. Yet, in the writings of the latter progressionist there is this singular inconsistency, that while he shows the utmost effects of . human breeding on domestic animals to be capable of produc- tion in ten or twenty years, he denies the right of his adversaries to appeal to the unaltered condition of the ass, the ostrich, or the cat for 3000 years as a proof that specific forms balance round central types, and have no tendency to depart indefinitely from them. Is it rational to suppose that man can alter the head and neck of a pigeon into any desired form in six years, and that nature, with her greater skill, cannot in 8000 years lengthen the ostrich’s wings by a single inch, although, according to the theory, it is her evident wish to do so? Il. The causes of variation assigned are not adequate to pro- duce the effects assigned to them.—The discussion of the imade- Rey. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. 42%. quacy of the causes ussigned would lead to a treatise longer than. that of Buffon, Lamarck, or Darwin; and I must therefore content myself with an example. The humble bee and the hive- bee coexist together, and the latter is supposed to be developed from the former by the Jaw of natural selection, breeding, in succession, bees possessed of the talent of economizing more and more of wax in the construction of their cells, 1. The humble bee constructs single cells and uses 100 units of wax. 2. A bee (not known to’ science, but, doubtless, extinct) was grown, that made cells in the form of equilateral triangles placed in double combs, with flat bottoms to the cells. This bee used only 50 units of wax. 3. A bee (also extinct) was grown, that built square cells m double combs. This bee used only 41% units of wax. 4. A bee (also extinct) was grown, forming hexagonal cells with flat bottoms, in double combs. This bee used 33} units of wax. 5. The hive-bee (now living side by side with his humble progenitor) was produced by natural selection dependent on the * economy of wax, arising from the contrivance of substituting for the flat bottoms of the hexagonal cells the trihedral angles and planes of the rhombic dodecahedron, This bee (owr bee) uses 322 units of wax. 6. The Bee of the Future (not yet produced), which shall have learned how to construct the cell described by the mathe- matician L’Hullier. This bee will be broader and shorter than the present, the breadth and length admitting of prediction to any degree of approximation. This Bee of the Future will only require 243 units of wax! ! Vivat Geometria ! Of these six species of bee (the first and the fifth are living), No. 5 using only 322 lbs. of wax in the construction of its cells for every 100 Ibs. used by No. 1. According to the Malthusian law, No. 5 has exterminated No. 4, by virtue of the trifling advantage of 3rds of a pound of wax in every 100 lbs. ; and this slight advantage is gravely alleged as the efficient cause of con- ver ring one species of bee into another! This would be all Hail well, if No. 1, the spendthrift humble bee, were not still living, and ‘holding i ground well against his enemies, to bear witness against this silly theory. In fact, the whole question of the economy of wax, and other such questions, require a thorough sifting. To my mind, it is evident that economy of wax has nothing whatever to do with the making of the bee’s cells, but that this and other properties, 28% 428 Rey. S. Haughton on the Origin of Species. such as maximum resistance to fluid pressure, &c., necessarily reside in the bee’s cell because they are the inherent properties of the rhombic dodecahedron, which is the form affected by that cell. The true cause of that shape is the crowding together of the bees at work, jostling and elbowing each other, as was first shown by Buffon. From this crowding together, they cannot help making cells with the dihedral angles of 120° of the rhombic dodecahedron; and the economy of wax has nothing to do with the origin of the cell, but is a geometrical property of the figure named. III. The most serious logical blunder committed by all who invent a theory of life from the geological succession is, that Succession implies causation. It is agreed that the Palzeozoic Cephalopoda produced, in some way or other, the Red Sandstone fishes; that these in turn gave birth to the Liassic reptiles ; that the non-placental mammals of the Upper Oolite grew after some fashion, and ultimately produced the Tertiary mammals, some of which, in an unhappy hour, gave birth to man. The only fact at the basis of this astonishing inverted cone of reasoning is, that these creatures did succeed each other in the manner described; and from this, forsooth, it follows (post hoc, ergo propter hoc) that they succeeded each other in the way of cause and effect. I propose to test this strange theory by a cor- responding theory of the mineralogical succession of igneous rocks, which opens up a fertile field of speculation, hitherto un- wrought. The igneous rocks of the Paleozoic period contain abundance of felspar, whose principal constituent is potash ; the Mesozoic igneous rocks abound in soda, replacing potash ; and in the Tertiary period, soda itself gives way to lime and magnesia. Viewed in the light of the Lamarckian philosophy, here is a distinct indication that soda and lime are only allotropic condi- tions of potash. We may read the history of their formation in the crust of the globe, if we will only open our eyes and see it written. I may add, by the way, that this theory of the origin of lime is more intelligible than that of many geologists, who would attribute the greater accumulations of calcareous rocks m secondary and tertiary strata to the creation of lime by organic force. If any chemist or mineralogist were to put forward such a geological theory of the origin of soda and lime as the fore- going, he would be regarded as a lunatic by other chemists and mineralogists. How does it happen that a theory of the origin of species, which rests on the same basis, is accepted by multitudes [?] of naturalists as if it were a new gospel? I believe it is because our naturalists, as a class, are untrained in the use of the logical On the former Connexion of N. Africa with S. Europe. 429 faculties which they may be* charitably supposed to possess in common with other men. No progress in natural science is possible as long as men will take their rude guesses at truth for facts, and substitute the fancies of their imagination for the sober rules of reasoning. It has been well observed by the greatest of living palzonto- logists, “that past experience of the chance aims of human fancy, unchecked and unguided by observed facts, shows how widely they have ever glanced away from the golden centre of truth !” XLVI.-—On the former Connexion of North Africa with South Europe. By Prof. Epwarp Svurss*, A LerrerR lately received from M. Anca, of Palermo, addressed to M. Senoner, induces me to return to a subject which I have previously discussed, but the repeated consideration of which appears to me adapted to show the value which is possessed by the researches of M. Anca and some similar observations, even in connexion with the investigations now being carried out at Vienna. On the former occasion, I mentioned, as having resulted from the investigations of our distinguished Professor Hornes regarding the fossil Mollusca of the. Vienna Basin, an unex- pected identity of some species of our marine strata with shells now living on the coast of Senegambia. I then named as examples Cyprea sanguinolenta, Buccinum lyratum, and Oliva flammulata, and inferred, in accordance with the descriptions we possess of the great Sahara, that a sea once extended from the Gulf of Gabes to the region south of the Idjil range in the province of Aderer uniting the Senegambian shores with those of the Mediterranean. I appealed to the de- tailed statements of Laurent, who was commissioned to execute Artesian borings on the north border of the desert. In his report, he represented the desert as once covered by a wide arm of the sea which flowed in from the Gulf of Gabes, and of which unmistakeable traces are to be seen in the repeated terraces along the south border of the Aoures Mountains, where the former positions of the sea-coasts are indicated also by one of the most abundant inhabitants of the Mediterranean coast, Cardium edule, the shells of which lie here strewn about in great quantities, and which is even said to be still living in some pools of the desert, I also added that, at present, considerable tracts of the * From the Transactions of the Royal Imperial Geological Institution of Vienna, January 1863, Communicated by Mr. S. P. Woodward. 480 . _ Prof. E. Suess on the former Connexion desert still lie far below the level of the sea, and that the wide- spread saline incrustations have from the remotest times been regarded as proofs of a former overflow of the sea. With the progress of Hoérnes’s investigations, indications of the accuracy of this conclusion have increased. Not only have we become acquainted with several species of bivalves whose present distribution extends as far as the Senegal, such as Lu- traria oblonga, Tellina crassa, T. lacunosa, Venus ovata, and three of our four species of Artemis, namely, A. exoleta, A. lincta, and A. Adansoni, but we now meet in our basin with some of the most prominent of Adanson’s types, which at present are only to be found living on the coast of Senegambia, namely, Adanson’s “Tugon” (Tugonia anatina) and “ Vagal” (Tellina strigosa) : the great Mactra Bucklandi, also, no longer living on European shores, is met with still at the Senegal. All accounts of the desert, however, agree so closely with the supposition of an overflowing, that, independently of these palzeontological indi- cations, other observers as well as Laurent were led to it solely by the form and constitution of the soil. Barth appears to have kept to the old Roman road between Tripoli and Mourzuk, almost always beyond the easterly margin of this ancient sea ; and it would not be uninteresting to ascertain how far the out- lines of this sea agree with Duveyrier’s account of the boundaries of the land. ’ The present land-fauna of Morocco and Algeria, as far as Cyrenaica, agrees at the present time in its most essential points entirely with that of South Hurope—on the one hand with that of the Pyrenean peninsula, and on the other with that of South Italy ; whilst on the Senegal and Gambia, and the other successive regions beyond the desert, as far as the Nile, only the true African type appears. The elephant, rhinoceros, hippopotamus, giraffe, crocodile, and many other important members of the African fauna do not extend beyond the Sahara ; and the contrast of this Morocco-Algerian land-fauna is very remarkable, as opposed to the true African fauna in most classes of animals, whilst the connecting links with Europe are not to be mistaken. Moritz Wagner’s ‘ Journey in the Kingdom of Algeria’ con- tains numerous proofs of this, and they increase with every comparison. ‘The extension of the Jnuus ecaudatus to Gibraltar is well known. The Sorew etruscus, an otherwise exclusively Italian animal, is met with in Algiers. The fox, paler in Italy than in Germany, appears in Algeria as a still hghter variety. Of greater value for these investigations is the distri- bution of reptiles, as they are very little influenced by man; and it may be mentioned that the new ‘ Algerian Herpetology ’ of of North Africa with South Europe. . 431 Strauch contains most of the known reptiles of Southern Europe, as Cistudo europea, Lacerta viridis, Tropidonotus natriz, Rana esculenta, &c., and that others, as the Chameleo africanus, are known to occur in Spain and Sicily. Hrichson, from the exa- mination of Wagner’s collection, observes of the Coleoptera—“ A certain number of species belong to the fauna of Middle Europe; a greater portion is spread over all the coast-lands of the Medi- terranean Sea; a few of these are, but the greater portion are not, Egyptian, the Egyptian fauna partaking more of the character of that of Central Africa. Algeria has most species in common with the adjacent Italian islands, Sicily and Sardinia, but fewer with the Italian mainland, as is the case with the Spanish pen- insula and the proximate Morocco land; and it is often found that Spanish-Moroccan and Italian-Algerian species stand to each other in analogous relations.” It is the same with the land-Mollusca. According to Forbes, the agreement between the species of Morocco and Spain is so great that, even upon the heights, the Spanish moun- tain-snails reappear. Glandina algira occurs, in a slenderer form, from Isonzothale to Constantinople, whilst the broader variety unites Lower Italy, Sicily, and Algeria; other South- European species, which appear to have come from the Hast, are, on the contrary, absent in Algeria, as Cyclostoma elegans, whilst Cyclostoma sulcatum is found upon the Italian islands and Malta, in the South of France, and South-east Spain, and also in North Africa. All the South-European freshwater bivalves are said to occur in Algeria. In the vegetable kingdom, to avoid giving superfluous examples, it may suffice to mention Chamerops humilis and its distribution on the coast of the Mediterranean, After this it will not be wondered at if, taking another line of argument, Andrew Wagner wrote, in the year 1846, “ In a natural-history point of view, the Mediterranean separates North Africa much less from Europe than the Sahara separates it from the African continent. According to all evidence, the Sahara was once covered by the sea, and Barbary thus became an island in the Mediterranean.” The present land-fauna also leads us to recognize a close con- nexion between the Canary Islands, Morocco, Algiers, and South- western Europe, the extension of which to Cornwall was rendered probable by the late Edward Forbes. This fauna is called the Lusitanian land-fauna. Let us now proceed to the investigations of M. Anca. In June 1860, M. Anca succeeded in finding in the bone-caves of Sicily a number of determinable remains accompanied by land- or sea- shells, such as Helix aspersa and Cardium edule, which are living at this day: the richest list, that of the Grotto of 8. Teodoro, is 432 Prof. E. Suess on the former Connexion as follows, according to Lartet:—the spotted hyena, a bear (Ursus arctos ?), wolf, fox, porcupine, rabbit, Klephas antiquus ?, E. africanus ?, hippopotamus (one or two species), Sus (probably Sus scrofa) resembling the North-African, ass?, ox (two forms), stag (one or two species), sheep or some similar animal, a large toad, and a bird. The recent letter of M. Anca confirms the occurrence, in this grotto, of Elephas africanus, while EH. antiquus belongs to deposits of another date. We have therefore here, along with typical European forms, as, for example, stags and bears, which are quite foreign to Southern and Eastern Africa, and of which even Morocco and Algiers possess very few repre- sentatives (bears, perhaps only fossil, in caves), a small number of such animals as no longer pass beyond the region of the desert, but are Nilotic and Abyssinian, the African elephant, species of hippopotamus, and a hyena, not the striped species which at present lives in North Africa and frontier India, but the spotted hyzna which inhabits South and West Africa. These Sicilian bone-caves prove, therefore, the existence of a close contact between South-European and genuine African types, which is nowhere seen in our day. This fact gains in importance if we bear in mind that similar points of contact could also be pointed out in Spain, at the time when the prevailing types of both the faunas were living. It must not be overlooked that, at an earlier period Cuvier sought the nearest representatives of our diluvial fauna in Southern Africa, even at the Cape; and that our rich antilopean fauna of Pikermi and Baltavar has a decided African character. At the present time it is scarcely possible even to conjecture in what way and by what causes the disappearance from Europe of the present African group of forms, which long had their home in our part of the world, was brought about. M. Anca tells us that, even during the existence of the present fauna, a connexion has continued. As a first indication of a communication, we regard the submarine ridge stretching from Sicily to the opposite coast of Africa, and respecting which Admiral Smyth has informed us that it comprises the extensive plateaux of the «Adventure Bank” and the Skirki Rocks, which must be the sunken Are of Virgil. If, however, as stated, we are still igno- rant of the causes of these changes, we are nevertheless already able not only to distinguish in the present population of Europe a certain number of independent form-groups of faunas, out of which the present population of Europe has sprung; but we can even give the succession in which they have appeared. The first still capable of being recognized is that which we call the African: it has long since disappeared ; its last traces in Europe are made known to us by M. Anca, The second is the northern, the of North Africa with South Europe. 433 remnants of which still contifue to exist on our high mountains, like an elevated stratum overlying all the others which live be- neath. These lowest are, on the ‘ene hand, the western fauna, which we designate the Lusitanian, the types of which are the forms common to the North of Africa and Kurope ; on the other, the eastern fauna, which we may perbaps.venture to call the Asiatic, and which is broken up into severalynembers, depend- ing on the physical differences existing, for example, between the Caspian Steppes and Asia Minor. " It is not my intention here to point out what r superposition of the individual faunas of the European to this ; but we may draw attention to the fact that the Mollusca which Vienna has in common with Senegambia (as Tugdnia anatina) were without doubt formerly inhabitants of some part of the present Mediterranean east of Sicily, probably became extinct during the diluvial epoch, and were subsequently unable to regain their former abode. M‘Andrew, it is true, informs us that, favoured by the current, some tropical species, as, for instance, Cymba olla, make their way through the Straits of Gibraltar to the North-African coast ; but they do not pro- ceed very far, and the character of the Mediterranean fauna is totally distinct from the Senegambian. We are accustomed to consider climatic variations as the essential cause of all these displacements of land- and sea-faunas and floras; and some distinguished naturalists in Switzerland, impressed with the great effects which the sirocco produces on their glaciers, have thought that they could explain the greater extension of the ice- masses in former times by its absence. In this way they have arrived at the same result as that obtained by the study of paleontology, geology, and geographical distribution—namely, that the Sahara Desert, the source of the sirocco, was once co- vered with water. Upon the heights of a continental Europe a more severe climate may certainly have been produced by such a cause; but for Europe, broken up into a sort of archipelago (such as we must imagine it to have been at the time when the Senegambian Mollusca of to-day were living near Vienna), no great lowerig of the temperature of the sea could have resulted, and the whole archipelago had, without doubt, notwithstanding the absence of the sirocco, a moderate sea-climate. Questions and doubts still arise on all sides, but we are at least able to form some idea of the path we have to pursue in studying the origin of the present creation from the preceding, and by which it will be possible to arrive at a more correct con- ception of the repeated changes of the organic world, 434: Dr. G. C. Wallich on Amoeba villosa XLVII.—Further Observations on Amoeba villosa and other indigenous Rhizopods. By G. C. Wauuicu, M.D., F.LS., F.G.S., &c. [Continued from p. 371.] [Plate X.] Berore proceeding to offer a few general remarks on the rela- tions of Ameba villosa, and two other forms obtained from the same locality, with the rest of the group to which they belong, it is desirable that I should adduce some supplementary ob- servations made by me during another month’s study of these organisms. In many specimens of the Ameda, and more especially such as appear to be in full vigour of growth, the protoplasm is densely charged with certain granules, of larger size than those mere points which pervade it under all circumstances, but nevertheless extremely small. If examined cursorily, these granules may rea- dily be mistaken either for extraneous bodies derived from with- out, or for mere consolidated particles of the sarcode itself. They are so minute as to render it difficult to trace any difference in their dimensions, when seen under the medium powers of the microscope. But their aspect when isolated along with a thin film of their sustaining protoplasm, and examined under a power of from four to five hundred diameters, at once led me to suspect their crystalloid character ; and this view was fully borne out on submitting them to a still higher degree of magnifymg power ; for whilst no analogous bodies, or, indeed, any insoluble saline particles, were discoverable in the material in which the Amebe were cual _these Beale ts proved to be distinct rhombo- ness renders the precise dane of their iia amatter of con- siderable difficulty; but nevertheless, by taking the mean of a number of measurements, I found the more obtuse angle to be about 140°. Hitherto I have been unable to determine their na- ture by chemical tests, further than discovering that when a slide, on which a number of the Amabe have been dried, is treated with dilute hydrochloric acid, all trace of the cr ystals i is entirely lost. Coupling their rhombohedral figure with this fact, it seems probable that they may consist of carbonate or some other salt of lime. This, however, is a point demanding further careful in- vestigation. JI may mention that precisely similar erystalloids have also been detected by me in the sarcode of Euglypha, a pie and Acanthometra. (See Pl. X. fig. 7.)* * As is well known, “ prismatic crystals”? were observed by Hunley in Thalassicolla. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 435 Tn addition to these crystalloids, which seem to occur more largely in some individuals than in others, two other kinds of corpuscles are to be found. Both have a spherical outline, and are not discoidal, as may be seen on watching them roll over when at the immediate extremity of a pseudopodium. They vary from s3ooth to y/gpth of an inch in diameter, are devoid of any ap- preciable cell-wall, even when examined under the higher powers of the microscope, and are formed of a peripheral layer of pale, nearly colourless, granular protoplasm surrounding a clear fluid centre, the average diameter of which is about +,1,;th of an inch (fig. 5). To these bodies (which are in all probability identical with the ‘discoid ovules” described by Carter, in his admirable observations on the Organization of the Infusoria of Bom- bay *, as occurring in A. Gleichenti, and as also seen in A. verrucosat) I have applied the term nucleated corpuscles, as not involving a function which must still be regarded as only hypo- thetical, although I fully agree with Mr. Carter in the view that these bodies perform some important part in the process of reproduction. The second kind of spherical corpuscle to which allusion has been made, although not nucleated as in the former case, appears destined to exercise the function of a true ovule in some of the Rhizopods, if not in all, as shall presently be shown ; and therefore, taking into consideration the very marked re- semblance of the latter, in all save the trivial item of depth of colour, to the “ yellow bodies” met with in the Foraminifera, Polycystina, Thalassicollide, Acanthometrina, and two new fami- lies I propose to establish for the reception of certain allied but heretofore imperfectly understood pelagic genera, it appears absolutely necessary to distinguish between the two kinds of structure. To these bodies I have accordingly given the name of Sarco- blasts. In Ameba they are somewhat larger than the nucleated corpuscles, being from 5,),,th to ,4.,th of an inch in diameter. In their earlier stages they present a faint yellow tint, are some- what oily-looking, but afterwards become almost colourless. They are distinctly granular, nearly homogeneous throughout, and, like the corpuscles, devoid of cell-wall (fig. 6). Both, how- ever, are distributed equably through the endosarc, and take an equal share in the pseudocyclosis which involves all foreign matters and, under certain circumstances, the nucleus, con- tractile vesicle, and vacuoles. There seems reason to believe that all organic substances in- tended for food are invariably subjected to the digestive process through the medium of vacuolar cavities specially extemporized * Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xviii, pl. 5. fig. 5. + Ibid. vol. xx. p. 37. 436 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Ameeba villosa for their reception. In the case of insoluble substances—such as particles of mineral matter, many of which effect an entrance into the endosare of the Amoebans, either along with alimentary matter or accidentally—the vacuolar cavity is not necessarily present, but the atom simply rests within the protoplasm. In A. villosa the food-vacuoles are generally observable, although with difficulty when the body is much distended by extraneous substances and endogenous organic granules. In some speci- mens they are very strikingly developed. For these vacuoles I propose the term food-vacuoles, im contradistinction to the simple vacuoles which form and disappear spontaneously within the protoplasmic substance and, when in such great numbers as to umpart an almost parenchymatous character to portions of the structure, apparently forebode its disruption or death. From the manner in which the food-vacuoles are formed at the surface—in Ameba by the coalescence of pseudopodia which envelope the object about to be incepted, and in Actinophrys, by the projection of a coarse irregular network of ectosare, aided by the coalescence of the pseudopodia in the immediate vicinity— it would appear that a certain quantity of the surrounding water is always admitted into the newly formed cavity. This water is probably essential to the due performance of the digestive process, and in part enters into the composition of the alimentary fluid. On the other hand, it is probable that, in certain cases, a portion of the water becomes absorbed by endosmosis, without under- going chemical change, more especially where the food-particles have been completely dissolved through the digestive process. In this condition, the vacuoles may frequently be seen sharing in the pseudocyclosis, till by slow degrees they entirely dis- appear,—the effete watery particles, as I have already stated, being then poured exosmotically into the contractile vesicle, and ultimately discharged. In my previous notice I drew attention to the highly deve- loped membranous capsule withm which the nucleus of A. vil- losa is contained. According to Carpenter (the latest authority on the subject)*, the nucleus of Ameba presents “ the aspect of a clear flattened vesicle surrounding a solid and usually spherical nucleolus, and is adherent to the imner portion of the ectosare, and projects from it into the general cavity.” Carter also de- scribes it “as an organ situated on the outer portion of the sarcode, which, when well marked, presents under the micro- scope the appearance of a full moon (to use a familiar simile), with similar slight cloudiness.” He adds, “It is discoid in shape, of a faint yellow colour, and fixed to one side of a trans- * Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera, London, 1862, p. 24. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 437 parent capsule, which, being more or less larger than the nucleus itself, causes the latter to appear as if surrounded by a narrow pellucid ring”’*. Now, whilst both these observers speak to a vesicular boun- dary to the nucleus, it is evident, I think, that they do not allude to that highly specialized membranous covermg which is so remarkably manifest in A. villosa, and is actually sepa- rable from the body. The point is not so immaterial as it would seem to be at the first glance, inasmuch as a definite vesicular covering has also been supposed by Claparéde and others to appertain to the contractile vesicle of Actinophrys, whereas, as I shall presently endeavour to show, none is in reality present either in the contractile vesicle of that genus or of Ameba; and hence the character becomes to this extent a distinctive one. Moreover it is important from its at once stamping as complete the analogy I desire to draw between the nucleus of Amaba and of Plagiocantha, Thalassicolla, Acantho- metra, and Dictyocha, whereby the relation of the several parts to each other in these genera although belonging to a distinct order, becomes intelligible. The position of the nucleusin Ameba villosa has already been shown to be variable. I am not aware that, under any circum- stances, the nucleus of this form can strictly be said to adhere to the inner portion of the ectosarc, as indicated by Carpenter, or to be situated on the outer portion of the endosare, as stated by Carter—its temporary location in the vicinity of the villous patch, spoken of in my former paper, being due, as I conceive, to that more highly differentiated condition of the posterior part of the organism which constitutes so striking a feature in A.villosa. I have as yet been unable to ascertain positively the manner in which both nucleus and contractile vesicle are periodically sus- tained near the villous patch; but, from the constricted shape frequently assumed in this region, and the tendency to project the pseudopodia principally from the advanced or anterior por tions of the body, there can be little doubt that it is brought about by the augmented contractile power of the posterior ex- tremity. On the same hypothesis we may account for that peculiar state in which a mass of granular matter, resembling * On the Organization of the Infusoria, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xviii. . 221. Mr. Carter is of opinion that there is a central cavity in Ameba, at times distensible with water. Thus he speaks of an ‘‘ Amcebous cell under spherical distension.”” This may account for the view held by him with regard to the position of the nucleus in the Bombay form; but I must distinctly observe that no such cavity is present in A. villosa. (Ann. Nat. Hist. vol. xvii. p. 223, and explanation appended to fig. 1. plate 5, accom- panying his paper.) 428 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Amoeba villosa that of the true nucleus, and which is derived in all probability from the sarcoblasts already referred to, becomes first aggregated in that region. It only remains to be further noticed regarding the nucleus, that in that condition of the organism in which a very limited quantity of foreign matter is present, and the crys- talloids, nucleated corpuscles, and sarcoblasts are most abun- dant, this organ frequently undergoes subdivision—two separate nuclei occurring under these circumstances, and sometimes, but much more rarely, three. Endogenous subdivision (that is, endogenous with reference to the capsule) does not take place in such cases, but nucleus and capsule both undergo complete and simultaneous binary division. I am unable to say whether, in those examples that present three nuclei, the whole of these be- come separated by one duplicative act or by two. It has already been shown that where the multiple nuclear bodies supervene on the accumulation of granular matter at the posterior portion of the Amebea, I failed to trace any capsular coverings. ~ It seems probable, therefore, that, in the former case, the process may be regarded as one of simple fission, in the latter, of mole- cular segregation*., But on this head anything like positive in- formation is still wanting. Great diversity of opinion seems to exist amongst naturalists not only regarding the office, but also the actual structure of the “contractile vesicle.” That misapprehension should exist on the subject is by no means surprising, however, when we bear in mind that the name has been indiscriminately applied both to the rhythmically contracting organ of the Rhizopods and of the true Infusoria, and that, under the supposition that identity of action involves identity of conformation, a true vesicular wall has been assigned by several of our most eminent writers to the pulsating cavity of the former group of organisms. Without entering at present upon the question whether the Rhizopods ought to be regarded as unicellular, multicellular, or altogether devoid of cell-structure, I would observe that, if the presence of such structure within the substance of certain members of the Ameeban group has not been already demonstrated by the per- haps less definite examples adduced by Carter and others, the indisputable envelopment cf the nuclear body of Ameaba villosa by a distinct membranous capsule at once settles the point. But, on the other hand, my own observations tend to prove that this structure is only to be met with in the two higher orders of the Rhizopods, and not in the lowest order, which, according to * Carter describes a somewhat similar process as occurring in Ame@ba radiosa, and “ending in the production of a mass of spherical, delicate, transparent, granuliferous cells.’ (See his paper on the Organization of In- fusoria, Ann, Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xviii. p. 225.) _ and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 439 my arrangement, comprises the Gromida, Foraminifera, and Polycystina. In these families, the nuclear granules are diffused, and assume the multiple character of sarcoblasts, which, on separation from the parent sarcode, constitute the rudiment or “primordial segment” of the new brood. In my experience, the contractile vesicle does not make its appearance either in the Herpnemata (which constitute the first or lowest order) or the ProropERMata or second order (which comprises the Thalassicollidee, Acanthometrina, and their allies), but occurs, for the first time, in the third order or PRoTEINA, in which I associate the Actinophryna, Lagynide, and Amebina— the name of this order being adopted from the classification of MM. Claparéde and Lachmann, who, in like manner, associate Actinophrys and Ameba, but on widely different grounds from those that have led me to assume their ordinal unity. In the third order both nucleus and contractile vesicle, I be- lieve, are invariably present, although naturally difficult of detec- tion in the testaceous genera. The latter organ, however, in so far as my experience of living representatives of nearly every important form enables me to arrive at a correct opinion on the subject, ought not to be regarded as a definite-walled contractile sac, distinct in composition from the remainder of the proto- plasmic matter, but simply as a specialized vacuolar cavity formed out of a portion of the ectosarc. Mr. Carter, in his paper on the Organization of the Infusoria, already referred to (/. c. p. 180), says, “That the vesicula is a distinct organ, and not merely a space like the digestive globule, might be inferred from its always appearing in the same place in the same species”*, For reasons already adduced, I am in- clined to regard it in an opposite light—that is to say, as merely a space bounded by a layer of ectosarc, and not by a membranous wall of distinct origin and character. And I think my view will be at once recognized as correct when it is taken into considera- tion that we constantly see multiple contractile vesicles, not only already formed, but actually forming under our eyes and again * On reference to what has been stated in a preceding page, it will be seen that Dr. Carpenter speaks of the nuclear capsule as “a clear flattened vesicle ;*’ whilst he considers the contractile vesicle to be “ a vacuole with a defined wall” (Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera, p. 14). Mr. Carter, again, describes the nucleus as discoid in shape, and fixed to one side of a transparent capsule, whereas he refers to the contractile organ as “ distinct and not merely a space like a digestive globule.” In directing attention to these definitions, I am desirous of showing that both these authorities express their opinions on the subject with a degree of reserve which was fully warranted under the circumstances, but which leaves the proofs as to the existence of a true membranous vesicle in one case depend- ent on equal proofs of its existence being forthcoming in the other, 440 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Amoeba villosa coalescing to constitute a single cavity, or, as happens occasion- ally, each undergoing a separate systole. This I maintain could not possibly take place except under the conditions I have en- deavoured to describe. The vacuoles within which organic substances, or animalcules, incepted for food become amenable to the digestive process are similarly constituted ; and if what has been advanced by me in my previous paper be correct (that is to say, if endosare and ectosare are not permanent portions of the Rhizopodal structure, but mutually and temporarily convertible one into the other), it is manifest that the higher state of differentiation exhibited by the vacuolar wall is wholly due to a like cause, namely, contact with a portion of the surrounding fluid. T am well aware that the permanently visible villous area of the Hampstead Amba appears to militate in some measure against the universal correctness of this hypothesis. But I have already stated that this species can hardly fail to be regarded as em- bodying the highest type of Rhizopod life, and as bridging over the hiatus between true Rhizopod and true Infusorial organi- zation. If a boundary exists at all between these two great groups of the Protozoa, it will, I think, be found to consist in this—that whereas in the Rhizopods there is no permanent orifice for the inception and extrusion of foreign or effete matter, and the endosare and ectosare are not permanent portions of the organism, but, as already maintained, mutually convertible one into the other, im all mature Infusorial forms permanent orifices occur for the inception and extrusion of such matter, and there is no convertibility of parts once established*. Hence, even granting, for the sake of argument, that the villous patch in Ameba villosa is not only permanent in position as regards the rest of the body, but, in a like sense, permanent in composition during the entire period of the individual’s existence, I contend that we should not be warranted, on this ground alone, in press- ing such an objection. But I am by no means prepared to allow that such a permanent condition of the villous region does exist, inasmuch as it appears to me to be far more probable and conform- able with the phenomena referred to, to assume that a slow but constant interchange of protoplasmic matter takes place there, as it does, although more rapidly and perceptibly, in the other portions of the structure. During the bygone month I have seen numerous examples of the infundibuliform excretory tubule of A. villosa. But I have likewise been able to satisfy myself that this tubule is an extem- * Asplanchna furnishes no valid objection to this generalization, even if we hesitate to accept the most recent views promulgated regarding its structure; for one orifice may serve both purposes. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 441 porized part of the organism, and that, in many cases, the layer of protoplasm which constitutes it during the extrusion of effete matter, and occasionally also of minute but perfectly formed Amebe, is actually disengaged along with the object whose egress from the main body it presides over and probably effects ; so that even here we encounter phenomena which, although as yet mexplicable, tend directly to prove the accuracy of the views referred to. In short, the vacuolar sac becomes the tubule, being in some cases reabsorbed into the substance of the body, in others actually expelled entire, as shown in Pl. IX. figs. 3 & 4. Again, it appears to me that, assuming the hypothesis to be admissible, we not only render intelligible the mysterious and otherwise inexplicable properties of sarcode, but find a clue to the determination of the function performed by the contractile vesicle. I am able fully to confirm the statement of Carter that this body invariably discharges itself externally in the Rhizopods, although aware that this view is opposed by M. Lachmann and others. The orifice through which the discharge of its watery contents is effected is not of a permanent nature, but, like the tubule occasionally seen in the region of the villi, comes into existence only under the operation of the force that distends the wall and eventually bursts it. We frequently see that the systole of the vesicle is interrupted before the entire obliteration takes place, which most commonly occurs. But it is a mistake to suppose that the circular outline then left, and which forms the basis, as it were, of the vesicle when renewed, represents the orifice by which the contained fluid escaped. That orifice we can very rarely detect, even under the highest powers of the microscope*. I can personally speak to its subtle but neverthe- less appreciable character, having watched its action for a con- siderable period on two occasions, in Bengal—namely, in an Ameba closely allied to, if not identical with, A. villosa, and in a Kerona, its distinctness in the Infusorial animalcule bemg only rendered greater by the greater ease with which the latter was maintained in the position best fitted to carry on the ob- servation. Mr. Carter, in describing the contractile vesicle (/oc. cit.), says it is neither a circulatory nor a respiratory, but an excretory organ, and, referring more particularly to Ameba and Actino- phrys Sol, he adds,—* During the act of dilatation, the vesicula projects far above the level of the pellicula, even so much so as * T would distinctly guard myself against appearing to convey the idea of a valvular opening such as is supposed to exist by Weston in Actino- phrys Sol (Quart. Journ. Mier. Soe. vol. iv. p. 116). Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xi. 29 442 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Amceba villosa occasionally to form an elongated, transparent, mammuilliform eminence, which, at the moment of contraction, subsides pre- cisely like a blister of some soft tenacious substance that has been pricked with a pin’*. Mr. Carter does not mention any special excretion—that is to say, whether he means the excretion of effete nutritious matter or water only. If the latter, I en- tirely agree with him—my view being that, whilst the general substance of the body absorbs water from the surrounding me- dium by endosmotic action, and partly also by admission en masse into the extemporized food-vacuoles; through the agency of the opposite or exosmotic action the fluid is poured into the contractile vesicle, gradually distending it, as described, until rupture ensues. The moment that the tension on the most pro- minent and, consequently, the most attenuated portion of the vesicle is relieved by the escape of its contents, the orifice be- comes obliterated by the union of its edges, and the process is repeated. In this sense, then, the contractile vesicle may be regarded as a true water-vascular and excretory organ. I need only add that, according to my own experience, and in ac- cordance with the opinion expressed by several eminent ob- servers, the contractile vesicle takes no share, under any circum- stances, in the capture, inception, or extrusion of any solid substances. Inu a former page, allusion has been made to a mode of repro- duction which, although closely bordering on simple gemmation, must, I think, rather be regarded in the light of viviparous parturition. I had never noticed it prior to my recent and almost continuous observation of the Hampstead Ameba, nor am I aware that it has previously attracted the attention of other naturalists, although M. Jules Haime records examples amongst the Infusoria in which minute bodies ejected from the body of the parent have become converted into young animals whilst still under observation}. In Amba, however, such an oversight may easily be accounted for by the circumstance that the newly liberated individuals are so minute, in comparison with the parent form, as to be barely distinguishable unless examined under high powers and with a knowledge of their origin. They rarely measure more than 5;4,5th to ,,/,5th of an inch in their most extended state, and yet, when carefully analysed, exhibit nucleus, contractile vesicle, villous tuft, and even protoplasmic granules, with every distinctive character discernible in the parent from which they sprang. It is also a very significant and re- markable fact, that, even in this minute stage of their existence, * Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xviii. p. 126. + Carter on the Organization of Infusoria (Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xviil. p. 223. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 443 they throw out pseudopodial processes so various in outline that, were it legitimate to base specific distinctions on such variations, we might have nearly every form heretofore regarded as spe- cifically distinct by some observers produced from one parent source. Indeed, coupling this fact with others bearing on the same subject, although not prepared to affirm that the whole of the varieties of Ameba are reducible to a single primary specific type, I candidly confess that the balance of evidence appears to me to point towards such a conclusion, and to indicate that the divergences in form and outward characters may be wholly de- pendent on the local and even temporary conditions of the me- dium in which the young animal happens to make its appear- ance in the world. It is one of the most perplexing accompaniments of micro- scopic research, that, in addition to the ordinary difficulties at- tending the study of the reproductive phenomena in organisms which admit of observation by the unaided vision or with the aid of low magnifying powers, the chances are greatly against our having the object under our eye at the exact moment that the phenomena are taking place which we desire to witness. From the extreme rapidity with which they are sometimes completed, compared with analogous processes in the higher orders of being, this result is scarcely surprising, even if we treat lightly the difficulty separable from the survey of vital actions on so minute a scale. On the other hand, there is reason to fear that erroneous interpretations have often been put upon micro- scopic phenomena in consequence of a failure on the part of the observer to watch them from their commencement to their termination*. The following instances, which are not the only ones that have presented themselves to my notice durmg my recent close scrutmy of the indigenous Rhizopods, will prove the truth of this remark. Fig. 11 represents an abortive effort at division taking place in a specimen of Ameba radiosa. It will be seen that nothing could be less conformable with the published descriptions and figures of that form than the individual here portrayed. But nevertheless I can vouch for its beg the form which has been so named, not only from the fact of the locality in which it was found containing numerous specimens unmixed with * The drying up of the minute portion of water in which living or- ganisms are bemg submitted to long-continued observation under the microscope may be very successfully obviated by resting the slide, when not actually required, across the mouth of a wine-glass containing water, and carefully placing a strip of fine calico across the thin cover, with its ends hanging down into the fluid im such wise as to allow capillary attrac- tion to do all that is requisite. 29* 444. Dr. G. C. Wallich on Ameceba villosa other varieties, but from the specimen itself having ultimately assumed all the characteristics of A. radiosa immediately after the termination of the appearances depicted in the figure. Judging from the appearances at first presented, I naturally expected the occurrence of binary division—two lobes instead of three being then only visible; and accordingly I directed special attention to the share taken in the process by the nucleus and contractile vesicle. But these bodies gave no sign of partici- pation beyond passing several times, during the ordinary con- tractile movements of the lobate masses, through the connecting isthmuses, either into the same or into separate lobes. No pressure was exerted, nor was the form assumed due to the juxtaposition of foreign matters. Nevertheless fission did not take place ; and after an hour’s apparently incessant struggle to part company, during which period the lobes and isthmuses did not materially alter their relative proportions, the three portions gradually coalesced, and the specimen moved away energetically, putting forth the tapering and radiate pseudopodia supposed to be distinctive of Ameba radiosa. It is no doubt true that the unity of the nucleus may have interfered with the consummation of the process. But here, again, generalization fails to some extent ; for on two occasions I have seen Amoeba villosa divide without the nucleus being involved. In both cases the villous patch was nearly equally parted ; only that half of the body, however, which retained the nucleus moved about vigorously and exhibited the typical characters, whilst the other half assumed a spherical shape, and merely oscillated very slowly and steadily to and fro on the same spot, without projecting pseudopodia, or materially alterimg its out- line. In these examples, also, all undue pressure was avoided ; and the extrusion of nearly the whole of the effete alimentary par- ticles by each half—which I have frequently found to be the precursor of the process of fission—took place almost at its commencement. The third example I have to mention occurred in a large specimen of Actinophrys Eichhornii which I disengaged from the side of the vessel to which it was adhering, and carefully placed for observation in a watch-glass. When removed, it was appa- rently undergoing the common process of binary division. At all events, whether that process was going on or the case was one of “ zygosis ” or amalgamation of two individuals, it is quite certain that there was a partial, but nevertheless effective, fusion of the sarcode substance at the constricted portion. In this species, as shall presently be shown, the nuclear bodies are small and, generally speaking, multiple. Hence no informa- and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 445 tion was derivable from their distribution. The contractile vesicles were multiple also, two being distinctly visible, and in regular rhythmical action along the peripheral plane of each half; whilst others may have been present, but obscured on the upper or under surfaces of the structure. When first seen, the well- marked peripheral layer of protoplasmic cellules belonging to each half was uninterrupted at the constricted portion; and around the latter was a somewhat irregular zone of bubble-like protoplasm, which merged into that of the masses on either side of it. But soon the constriction became more and more com- plete; and after a time the two halves were held together only by a narrow isthmus of sarcode. At this stage, however, a re- trogressive action commenced, and ultimately the two portions became fused into a single Actinophrys. No movement was observable except on the systole of the contractile vesicles, when the half on which the vesicle was situated oscillated slightly, but very perceptibly. I have only to add that no other specimen was placed on the watch-glass during these appearances, which lasted over a period of four hours. The single specimen then measured 7pth of an inch in diameter independently of the pseudopodia. These examples are instructive for two reasons: firstly, be- cause they tend directly to confirm the statement originally put forward by Schneider with reference to the occasional zygosis or coalescence of two previously distinct individuals; and secondly, because they indicate how much caution ought to be exercised before an opinion is pronounced upon the nature of phenomena the order of which has not been followed from their commence- ment to their termination*. It now remains for me to direct attention to forms of Actino- * In my notes on the presence of animal life at great depths in the ocean (published in November 1860), and also in a paper in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for July 1861, I directed attention, for the first time, to the occurrence of the Coccoliths (minute discoidal struc- tures previously detected by Huxley in the material of the soundings, but regarded by him as inorganic) in spherical cells, to which I accordingly applied the name of Coccospheres ; and I further pointed out that as entire Foraminiferous shells, aud more especially those of Textularia and Rotolia, are frequently met with in the soundings wholly made up of seg- ments resembling these Coccospheres in every particular, these bodies would appear to be connected with the reproductive process. Although I have not had the opportunity of tracing the actual sequence, I think it highly probable that the Sarcoblasts, to which I have alluded in a former page, first become Coccospheres, and are then developed into the perfect shell by the ordinary process of gemmation. Here, then, is a case in which the difficulties attending the study of the reproductive phenomena in the Rhizopods are yet further enhanced. I may take the opportunity of - stating that I have recently met with Coccospheres in great abundance in dredgings from the English Channel. The means of clearmg up the point are therefore at hand. 446 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Ameeba villosa phrys and Difflugia (also from Hampstead) which, although not specifically new, offer some important and, if I mistake not, hitherto unnoticed characters. As is well known, in A. Sol the body consists of a spherica or nearly spherical mass of sarcode, the external layer of which is said to be permanently distinct from the endosarc, notwith- standing the admission that no definite boundary-line is traceable between these two portions of the structure, and that they m- sensibly merge one into the other. Carpenter * describes it as follows :-—The pseudopodia seem to be derived from the ectosare alone, the endosare not extending itself into them. They pos- sess, moreover, a degree of consistence which usually prevents them from coalescing when they come into contact with one another ; and whenever such a coalescence does take place, it is to a much smaller extent than is common among Foraminifera.” And again, ‘ Although the existence of a nucleus in Actinophrys has been denied, its presence (in certain species at least) must be regarded as a well-established fact.” Speaking of the mcep- tion of food, he says, “ The body taken in as food is received into one of the vacuoles of the endosare, where it lies, in the first instance, surrounded by hquid.”.... ‘ Several vacuoles may be occupied at one time by alimentary morsels; frequently from four to eight are seen thus filled, and occasionally ten or twelve, Ehrenberg having in one instance counted as many as sixteen.” From what has been already advanced by me with regard to Ameba, it almost follows that I should view with extreme doubt the specific value of the characters assigned by different writers to the various forms of Actinophrys that have been described as distinct ; and, in addition to the reasons I shall adduce in support of this view, I would call attention to the indirect evidence of its correctness afforded in the errors of identification com- mitted by some of the most acute observers with regard to the forms looked upon as the most persistent and definite. Thus KOlliker mistook A. Hichhornii for A. Sol. Claparéde wrote a long paper on A. Hichhornii, and afterwards discovered he had been describing A. Sol}. Perty is of opinion that A. Hich- hornii is an enlarged state of A. Sol, whilst Stein also affirms that A. Eichhornii is no other than the latter species. I have only to observe on this head, that it would indeed be surprising if the confusion thus created were one whit less than it is, where such characters as the length of the pseudopodia, the diameter of the * On the Study of the Foraminifera, p. 18. + See Prichard’s ‘ Infusoria,’ 4th ed. p. 560, and M. Claparéde’s paper in the ‘ Annals,’ 2nd ser. vol. xv. pp. 211 and 285. These examples might, however, be multiplied. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 4.47 body, the perfectly regular or irregular outline of the latter, and even trifling modifications in its colour, have been accepted as specifically valid*. Why, then, it may be asked, have I referred the Hampstead form to A. Hichhornii? I reply, solely because the characters presented by this variety are those which appear to me to illus- trate im the same individual the true offices and relations of the several parts of the Actinophryan structure to each other and to allied genera, and ought therefore to be regarded as typical of that genus. The Hampstead form, like the Ameba already described, is unusually large, at times attaining a diameter of jth of an inch, irrespectively of the pseudopodia. Whilst I write, I have a number of living specimens before me, obtained two months ago, in which the entire structure is so pellucid and definite that it can be resolved with a common pocket-lens. The shape is spherical, not discoidal, under ordinary conditions, even when the creature is adherent to the sides of the glass vessel in which it is contained,—this being reconcileable with a fact I can attest, namely, that the surface of the body does not come in contact with the glass, but is entirely supported by the tenacity of the intervening pseudopodia. The sarcode substance is colourless, as is the sarcode of all Amebans and Actinophryans, except under abnormal .circumstances. The pseudopodia are sometimes long, sometimes short ; at times perfectly rigid and smooth, at times slightly tuberculated and sinuous. When rigidly extended, they never coalesce; when bent and supple, and more especially when about to encircle some food-particle in their inevitable embrace, they coalesce as freely as those of the Foraminifera. Now and then, but rarely, the vacuolation, so universal and marked in the form as it most constantly occurs at Hampstead (fig. 1), is partially superseded by the coalescence of a number of the cell-like cavities, and the ectosare or endosare exhibits the aspect of ordinary unvacuolated protoplasm, and we may more legitimately apply the terms “ medullary ” and “ cor- tical” to the inner and outer portions of the organism. But physiologically there exists no such permanent distinction of parts. There is invariably a line of demarcation between the “cortical” and “medullary” portions; but the most careful analysis of the structure, even when assisted by the highest powers of the microscope, does not enable us to detect the * Tf the characters of A. oculata are correctly drawn, and if, as asserted, food does not pass into the “ medullary” substance, but remains during the assimilative process within the “ cortical” layer, that form must not only be regarded as specifically distinct, but as presenting a feature which is quite anomalous in the group to which it belongs. 448 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Ameceba villosa slightest appreciable difference between the intimate texture and composition of the two parts, the figure of their polygonal cavities, the proportional thickness of the walls of the latter, their optical characters, or the capability of the two portions to coalesce *,—the fact being that each polygon is essentially com- posed of both endosare and ectosare, the latter being the necessary result of the contact of its internal surface with its fluid contents, which do not consist principally of protoplasm, but of water ; whereas the former may be said to occupy the interval between the wall of adjacent cavities, and is actually distinguishable by its finely granular and viscid appearance wherever fusion or coalescence has taken place to a certain extent. The pseudo- podia and slightly thickened peripheral layer are also finely granular. The former are given off from the external surface, it is true; but, on the other hand, the walls of the polygonal cavities ‘present no appreciable differences in character from the pseudopodia, beyond being flattened instead of filamentous ex- pansions of the same tissue. And, lastly, I would lay special stress on a phenomenon which this form of Actinophrys con- stantly enables us to witness, namely, the absorption of the vacuolar food-cavities, formed at the immediate surface of the organism only at the period when required, and which are not previously existing and persistent portions of the creature, as has been supposed. As in Ameba, the process of inception of food consists simply in the formation of an extemporized cavity, partly derived from the coalescence of the pseudopodia that have captured the object, partly from the portion of ectosare that happens to be brought into contact with the object, and the subsequent elimination of the nutrient matter by the vacuole thus formed and now drawn into the centre of the body by the inherent contractility of the surrounding protoplasm. If this view of the phenomena be correct, we must either assume that a constant diminution in bulk of the ectosare must take place at each formation of a food-vacuole, or admit what I con- tend for, namely, that for every portion of the outer layer, con- stituting the ectosarc for the time being, which is so removed from its position, a portion of the subjacent endosare forthwith steps forward and fills up the vacant rank. Asis well known, the organism captured for food is sometimes almost as large as the Actinophrys itself (see fig. 4). Unless my hypothesis be admitted, * There appears no good ground for supposing that the vacuolation witnessed in A. Eichornit is anything more than an extreme example of what takes place frequently in Ame@ba to a great, but not so great. an extent. In Thalassicolla nucleata we have a near approach to the same structure; and, as in the form under notice, the larger vacuoles are ex- ternal, the smaller ones internal, with reference to each other. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 449 if the vacuole for the reception of such particle is formed at the surface (and it unquestionably is so), there is nothing for it but to accord to Actinophrys the power of turning itself inside out after the fashion of Hydra. But even assuming this incredible explanation to be correct, we must remember that in Hydra, after the operation, the external surface becomes differentiated into the normal condition previously existing. In short, here, as in Ame@ba, the portion of protoplasm in immediate contact with the surrounding medium becomes ipso facto, and for ‘the time being only, ectosarc; and on no other supposition is it possible rationally to account for the phenomena. [have stated that in Actinophrys Hichhorni there is invariably present a line of demarcation between the external and internal— or “cortical” and “medullary ””—portions of the structure. This is not produced by any difference in the intimate composi- tion of these two portions, but is entirely dependent on the occurrence of a larger and more symmetrically arranged series of polygonal vacuolated cavities around a smaller and irregular central series. Owing to the uniform size of the former series, and the union of such of their polygonal planes as are nearest the centre of the body, the appearance of a distinct concentric ring is produced. Sometimes, however, more than one ring is observable. This is due to the formation of a second series of symmetrical cavities in the protoplasm. My reasons have already been given for discarding the view that the outer and inner portions of A. Hichhornit represent the ectosare and endosare as separable from each other. On what then, it may be asked, does the peculiarity referred to depend? I would answer, on that manifest idiosyncrasy which in one case leads to the formation of a symmetrically sculptured test composed altogether of an exudation from the animal, and in another of a test in which the animal exudation shows no sculpturing, and is merely the basal matter into which mineral or other foreign particles are impacted. And, lastly, I need hardly remind the reader that, in the vegetable kingdom, we constantly meet with manifestations of a like idiosyncrasy, in similar lines of demarcation between the cells constituting the external and internal layers of a leaf or a stem. Taking all these circumstances into consideration, I think there is sufficient ground for believing rather that A. Sol, A. oculata, A. viridis, and A. Hichhornii are varietal forms of the same species, at different periods of its history, or engendered by the varying conditions of the medium in which it is found, than that they are specifically distinct forms. Allusion has been made to the multiple nuclei of A. Hichhornit. Before briefly describing their appearance, it is desirable that I 450 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Ameeba villosa should define the meaning of a term which has been so indis- criminately applied to the most widely differing portions of the Rhizopodal structure. Miiller* uses the term at one time to signify the central or primordial chamber of the siliceous shell of the Polycystia, and at another to distinguish the more brilliantly coloured contents of that chamber from the otherwise identical sarcode of those portions of the structure that are sub- sequently developed. He also employs it in defining the central point of union of the siliceous framework of Acanthometra. Stein, it would appear, applies it to the entire “ medullary” portion of Actinophrys oculata, which I regard as nothing more than a small form of A. Eichhornii ; whilst Carter and Carpenter em- ploy it in its only legitimate sense—that is, to denote a perma- nent part of the protoplasmic substance, more or less distinctly granular when fully developed, having a definite outline, con- tained within a definite-shaped cavity, often seen to undergo binary division whilst the rest of the body still remains entire, and apparently serving some important purpose in the reproduc- tion of the individual. In the latter sense the term is used by me.in these pages. In A. Hichhornit, the subdivision of the nuclear body seems to keep pace with the extraordinary degree of vacuolation to which reference has already been made. For instead of meeting with it as a simple aggregated mass such as we find in Ameba, it is split up into numerous minute spherical masses, each of which presents the characters of a true nucleus on a reduced scale. These multiple nuclei are distributed, here and there, through the protoplasm—each occupying a spherical cavity which is completely filled up by the granular matter, and quite distinct in outward appearance from the polygonal soap-bubble-like mass of which the rest of the body is constituted. Facts are, how- ever, still wanting to show whether the subdivision of the nuclei in A. Kichhornii is due to a repetition of the process which brings about the double or treble nucleus of the Amewbe, or whether it is to be regarded as a normal and original condition in this form. If normal, it would certainly furnish a substantial character whereon to build a specific distinction. (See figs. 1 and 2.) The hyaline transparence of the form under notice is admi- rably suited for affording an unobstructed view of the structure and mode of action of the contractile vesicles. As already stated, these vary in number. I have counted as many as five in the same specimen, all of which maintained a regular but per- fectly independent rhythmical action. They never change their position, nor do they produce any appreciable effect on the cellular- * Uber die Thalass. Polycyst. und Acanthom. des Mittelmeeres. Berlin, 58. and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 451 looking protoplasm with which they are in immediate apposition, beyond what would be produced were they solid substances pressing mechanically on the structure with which they are in contact. As before stated, they never take part in the capture or inception of food, but continue their pulsations uninter- ruptedly even when in close proximity to a food-particle which is being dragged inwards. It is deserving of mention, that on the completion of the systole of the vesicle a depression or pit is temporarily formed, as shown in fig. 3, the surface of which is studded with villous corrugations not unlike those seen in the villous patch of Amba villosa; and further, that, previous to the actual contact of the food-particle with the surface towards which it is being drawn by the cooperation of the surrounding pseudopodia, that portion of the surface, acting under an unex- plained vital impulse, projects its irregular network of sarcode often far beyond the peripheral outline, to assist in building up the vacuolar cavity. This projection constitutes the “ probosci- diform”’ apparatus of Ehrenberg. Lastly, | have to mention the existence, in the majority of the polygonal cavities, of little clusters of the minutest grapules, which during the vigorous condition of the organism are freely suspended by the watery contents, but fall down by their own specific gravity on the death of the creature, and rest passively on the most dependent planes of their polygons. Minute as are the crystalloids of Ameba, these are still more minute, and hence I have heretofore been unable to determine if they are of similar nature. However, from their appearance, their superad- dition to the mere points that form an integral part of the pro- toplasm, and their uniform size, it is not improbable that these bodies will eventually turn out to be crystalloids also. Rich as the Hampstead pools have thus been proved to be in facts illustrative of the life-history of the Rhizopods, many others remain to which my limits prevent any allusion being made on the present occasion. I must, however, briefly call attention to two forms of Difflugia that occur abundantly in the same ma- terial as the Ameba, and which, in like manner, have their tale to tell. In the variety depicted in fig. 12, the test is sometimes made up entirely, as there represented, of minute cylindrical pellets, probably chitinous, but certamly of animal origin. These are placed side by side in very regular order, resting, as it would appear, ona delicate and continuous membranous layer of the same substance. Sometimes, however, a part or the whole of these pellets is superseded by angular particles of sand. So far this form exhibits no novelty. But its new and unexpected feature consists in the mouth of the flask-shaped test being de- veloped into a distinct septum and tube, whereby its character at once merges into that of a Dithalamous shell resembling those of 452 Dr. G. C. Wallich on Ameceba villosa certain Foraminifera. In crushed specimens the septal plate, and its aperture (which is situated at the dorsal side of the tubular expansion) may readily be seen. Fig. 13 exhibits a somewhat different shape, but no material difference in the composition or general character of the test, as is evident from the construction of that portion around the aperture, of chitinous pellets iden- tical with those in the previously described variety. So that whereas in one form we observe a decided tendency to assume a character not ordinarily met with in any of the freshwater Rhi- zopods, in the other we have presented to us, in the same indi- vidual, a combination of characters on each of which it has been thought expedient by some writers to found as many distinct species. Nay, more than this, if the principles so admirably enunciated by Dr. Carpenter* are those on which alone a na- tural classification of the Rhizopods can be built up, we must at once and for ever discard as Ordinally distinctive those differ- ences which do not involve the animal that forms the test, but only the test that is formed by it. It is, I conceive, impossible to examine the pseudopodia and other soft parts of Arcella and Difflugia, without at once perceiving their generic identity. It is equally impossible to examine those of Euglypha, Lagynis +, and some allied but less-known forms, without perceiving that the animals producing them are also generically identical. At most, mere modifications in the shape and proportionate quanti- ties of the organic and inorganic elements that enter into the formation of the shell ought only to be employed to discrimi- nate between species. But even here we may go a step too far, as is shown by the varieties of Difflugia, unless we start with the admission that the separation of such forms is simply a matter of convenience. In conclusion, it only remains for me to state that, whilst courting the scrutiny on which the acceptance of every new scientific fact very properly depends, I have for the present pur- posely abstained from the extension of my hypothesis beyond those lowest forms of animal life to which reference has been made—my desire in so doing having been to dispel, with as little delay as possible, what I cannot regard otherwise than as a most unsatisfactory and untenable view of the mystery of Sarcode. * Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera. + If we include those forms of decided Euglyphe to which Schlumberger has given the distinct specific appellations of Cyphoderia, Sphenoderia, and Pseudodifflugia, the force of the observation becomes doubly manifest. Errata in paper on Amceba in the ‘ Annals’ for May: p. 366. Twelfth line from bottom, dele “not.” Eleventh line from bottom, instead of “ but is” read “and not.” Seventh line from bottom, dele “ not.” Page 369, end of twentieth line from top, dele “ comma.” and other Indigenous Rhizopods. 453 EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. Fig. 1. Actinophrys Eichhornii, showing the complete vacuolation of the * cortical” and “ medullary ” portions. A Macrobiotus and an Astasia are seen undergoing digestive absorption within the body, these organisms being enclosed within separate food-vacuoles. At ma second Macrobiotus is in the act of being drawn into the peripheral substance, and partially surrounded by the layer of sarcode which especially constitutes its special vacuole: c »v, cv, contractile vesicles. Fig. 2. A portion of the same individual, more highly magnified, in order Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. . to show more distinctly the vacuolation and polygonal character of the protoplasmic matter in this species of Actinophrys: n,n, nuclei; m, the Macrobiotus now completely enveloped by the layer of sarcode, and being slowly drawn into the endosarc ;_ f, v, a food-vacuole, either after its contents have been altogether absorbed or after the excrementitious matter has been extruded. Both the above organisms are shown as focused down to a hori- zontal plane. 3. Showing the villous appearance of the depression produced on the completion of the systole of the contractile vesicle. 4, Actinophrys Sol, containing a large Pinnularia within a food- vacuole: 0, 0, oily globules within the protoplasm of the latter. This specimen, which was obtained from Hampstead also, is figured with a view to show how impossible it would be to distin- guish it from an Ameba when, as often happens, the pseudo- podia are entirely retracted. The food-vacuole was here very distinct. 5. Nucleated corpuscles of Ameba villosa. 6. Sarcoblasts or granular corpuscles of the same. 7. Rhombohedral crystalloids of the same. 8. Detached gemmule of the same, after the pseudosegmentation of the granular protoplasm of which it is composed; p, its mamilliform process. 9. A young Ameba villosa, supposed to be the advanced stage of the gemmule, fig. 8: a, its villous tuft; ¢ v, contractile vesicle; x, nucleus. Minute viviparous forms of A. villosa. Ameba princeps (var. radiosa), showing an abortive effort at fission: ¢ v, contractile vesicle; m, nucleus. . Difflugia proteiformis (var. septifera), showing a dithalamous ten- dency. . Diffugia proteiformis (var. acuminata), showing transitionary ten- dency towards the characters of Arcella aculeata; at c, the por- tion of the test around the aperture built up entirely of chitinous pellets. d, terminal spine. . Showing the configuration of the test in Arcella vulgaris, consisting of hexagonal depressions, through which the line of fracture ge- nerally passes. Showing the configuration of the test of Euglypha — ? from Stony Stratford; the chitinous pellets taking a perfectly symme- trical form, namely, discoidal masses connected one with the other by regularly disposed bands of the same material. The line of fracture accordingly follows that of the thinnest portion of the test—that is to say, the spaces intervening between the rows of pellets. 454, BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. A History of British Sessile-eyed Crustacea. By C. Spence Bare, F.R.S., F.L.S. &c., and J. O. Westrwoop, M.A., F.L.S. Parts I.-XI. 8vo. London: Van Voorst, 1861-1863. In a former Number of this Journal (January 1862) we called the attention of our readers to the appearance of the first numbers of this important work, and we have now to notice the completion of its first volume with the eleventh number just published. This volume contains the descriptions of nearly all the British Amphi- poda—only the Hyperine forms and the Lzmodipoda of Latreille (which are included by Mr. Spence Bate among the Amphipoda) being left for the second volume. Being usually of small size, and destitute of that variety of form which renders the Stalk-eyed Crustacea so interesting even to the unscientific, the animals treated of in this volume would seem per- haps to possess few attractions, except for the zealous student of nature ; but this is far from being the case; for, notwithstanding a general uniformity of structure, the different genera exhibit many curious peculiarities in the various development of their parts; and this will apply still more strongly to numerous forms of Amphipoda and Isopoda which still remain to be described. The importance of these creatures in the economy of nature is also very great: making up for the smallness of their size by the immense numbers in which they exist and the ubiquity of their presence, they are ready at the first moment to seize upon the dead animal matter which constitutes their ordinary food, and thus to act their part as scavengers of the ocean without the least delay, whilst in their turn they furnish an abundance of excellent nourishment to fishes and other aquatic ani- mals, some of which thrive better upon this Crustacean diet than upon any other. Many of the species also (Podoceride) are preda- ceous in their habits; and most of these form dwellings for them- selves, the construction of which presents many singularities. Among the forms still to be described, we have both terrestrial and aquatic, herbivorous, carnivorous, and even parasitic species; so that, what- ever might be our opinion at the first glance, we soon discover that the Sessile-eyed Crustacea really present a greater variety of interest both in structure and habit than the more striking Podoph- thalmous forms. Under any circumstances, the Edriophthalma form a group which the student of our marine zoology must not neglect; and he may congratulate himself on the excellent guide through the intricacies of a somewhat difficult branch of natural history which is afforded him by the joint work of Messrs. Spence Bate and Westwood. If we had much pleasure in speaking in high terms of the first few numbers, it is an equal gratification to be able to say, now that it has advanced halfway on its course, that the excellent character of the work has been maintained throughout, and that, notwithstanding the limited public upon which such books depend for their support, Bibliographical Notices. 455 both the authors and the publisher have used every effort to render their ‘ History of British Sessile-eyed Crustacea’ as perfect as pos- sible. It is a work to which we most heartily wish success, and which we can warmly recommend to the notice of our readers. The Tropical World : a Popular Scientific Account of the Natural History of the Animal and Vegetable Kingdoms in the Equatorial Regions. By Dr.G. Hartwic. With eight Chromoxylographie Plates and numerous Woodcuts. 8vo. London, Longmans, 1863. One of our ancient Universities is adorned by the presence of an academic dignitary, of whom it has been somewhat irreverently said that, while science is his forte, omniscience is his foible. It seems to us that Dr. Hartwig’s talents entitle him to a remark exactly the converse. Notwithstanding the expectation held out to us by his title-page, we have been entirely at a loss to discover the “ scientific ”’ element in his work. It is completely swamped by the “ popular ” treatment. Moreover we do not see the advantage of culling, from authors who have, in the best sense of the word, achieved “ popu- larity,’ passages which are as generally known to Englishmen as the way from Hyde-Park Corner to the Mansion House. Nor, in stringing together these extracts, does the compiler anywhere exhibit the skill or art of the magician who, with one wave of his wand, re- animates dry bones and calls up ideas that might otherwise remain dormant even in the minds of the imaginative. Sir Emerson Ten- nant has had his thousands of readers, and Dr. Livingstone his tens of thousands. What, then, but the very demon of book-making has prompted the Heidelberg doctor to publish this exceedingly useless work? We indeed admire his knowledge of our difficult idiom, which he writes with scarcely a mistake, and generally with a purity to which many of our countrymen are strangers; but (and we say it advisedly) his language never rises with his theme above the very commonest of common-place expression. One chapter of the descrip- tive portion of ‘Tom Cringle’s Log’ will give a person who has never left the temperate zone a better notion of many physical aspects of the tropical world than a perusal of the whole of this big octavo. Thus we fully endorse the strictures that were passed upon Dr. Hartwig’s former volume in these pages*. The two books are, mutatis mutandis, as like one another as two peas. We have the same abundant poverty of illustrations—woodceuts not better than those which deface many a penny broad sheet, and,worse than these, the marvellous tricoloured engravings dignified by the euphonious designation of “chromoxylographic plates.’ It is well, however, to be thankful for small mercies: ‘The Sea and its Living Wonders’ was embellished by a dozen of these monstrous productions; in the ‘ Tropical World’ the number is diminished by one-third. We have been puzzling ourselves to no purpose by trying to account for the insertion, among so much rubbish, of the figure of the Mongoose * Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., January 1861, pp. 63-67. 456 Bibliographical Notices. (p. 323), the very curve of whose tail enabled us to detect the true value of the design, before we recognized in the corner the “ hall- mark ”’ of Mr. Wolf’s initials. Nothing disgusts a mechanic so much as to witness a loss of power in an engine of any sort—a pulley unskilfully applied, a lever acting at a manifest disadvantage, a pinion obviously misfitted. This, then, is our feeling when we regard Dr. Hartwig’s works. Here is a German gentleman with an amount of application uncommon among any but those of his own nation, having the advantages of a very accurate acquaintance with English and of scientific tastes, who yet will insist upon fitting out our countrymen with a knowledge of what they either know already or may easily know of themselves. On the other hand is a vast mass of scientific literature in a language which comparatively few Englishmen comprehend, and which it would be of the greatest use for them to understand. Why should not Dr. Hartwig employ his powers in aiding them in this respect ? Why should he not publish, in London, translations of some of those valuable treatises which are still sealed books to English naturalists ? We are not defending our ordinary educational course, we are but simply giving utterance to a fact, when we say that a large majority of our fellow-labourers in this country are unable to become acquainted, except at a great sacrifice of time, with much that has been already worked out, and oftentimes admirably worked out, by the industrious brains of our Teutonic neighbours. Phosphorescence, or the Emission of Light by Minerals, Plants, and Animals. By T. L. Pureson, Ph.D., F.C.S. London: Reeve & Co., 1862. 12mo. The phenomena referred to by Dr. Phipson, in the little work be- fore us, under the general term “ phosphorescence,” are of a very varied nature, and can scarcely be regarded as all falling under one category. They include all emissions of light which cannot be ac- counted for directly as phenomena of electricity or combustion ; nay, some even of the latter, such as the luminosity of phosphorus, are considered as examples of phosphorescence by our author. Cer- tain cosmical and meteorological phenomena, such as the zodi- acal light, the apparent train of light left in the track of many aérolites, luminous fogs, &c., are also mentioned as examples of phos- phorescence ; indeed the author seems to have been anxious to omit noticing no luminous phenomenon the cause of which cannot readily be explained. Apart from all these doubtful instances, we have, how- ever, a large number of phenomena to which no other term than that of phosphorescence can be applied : there are numerous mineral, vegetable, and animal substances to which the name of “light- bearers”? may with justice be applied, and the emission of light from which is still entirely unexplained. We have minerals which give out light after exposure to the sun, and others which present similar phenomena when heated to a temperature far below that of incan- descence. From others light is given off when they are rubbed or Miscellaneous. 457 violently fractured: the same thing is observed in other mine- ral substances while undergoing particular chemical or molecular changes. Of the phenomena described by the author as examples of phos- phorescence in flowering plants, most, if not all, must be regarded as originating in electrical action ; but the luminosity of certain Fungi rests upon a good foundation. The catalogue of luminous animals is a long one, and the chief points connected with them are well discussed by Dr. Phipson, in whose pages the reader will find an interesting account of a great number of curious phenomena. In his theoretical view of the nature of phosphorescence, the author endeavours to bring all these multifarious phenomena under the same category ; and here, we think, he is scarcely successful. At the base of his theory lies the correlation of the physical forces and their mutual convertibility; such a conversion of forces into light he assumes to take place in phosphorescent bodies, and thus thinks he has accounted for their phosphorescence. Thus the insolation of Bologna phosphorus, according to him, sets up certain vibrations (electric, chemical, or magnetic) in that body, which cease on its being removed into the dark, and, in ceasing, cause the emission of a proportionate amount of light. In like manner, on the application of heat to a body which emits light at a comparatively low tempera- ture, we should have a certain amount of heat converted into light when a given point is reached. In these cases, such an hypothesis may certainly be the true one, but it is still far from explaining the phenomena ; for a theory of phosphorescence ought at least to show some plausible reason why light is emitted under certain conditions by one body and not by others. The luminosity of the Fungi is regarded by Dr. Phipson as due to chemical action ; but, curiously enough, that of animals is ascribed to the conversion of nerve-force into light, although the luminous matter even of the higher forms of phosphoric animals (insects and Myriapods) will continue shining when smeared over other objects. Under these circumstances, and considering that decayed wood and putrescent animal matter are often luminous in the dark, we should prefer regarding the phosphorescence both of animals and plants as due to a chemical action, the subjection of which to the will in the former does not seem to present any special difficulty. MISCELLANEOUS. Notice of three Wombats in the Zoological Gardens. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c. THERE are at present in the Zoological Gardens in the Regent’s Park three kinds of Wombats from Australia: two were sent from the Acclimatization Society of South Australia, at Victoria ; but no- thing is known of their peculiar habitat. They are evidently dis- tinct from the common silver-grey Wombat, which we have long had alive. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 30 458 Miscellaneous. Two of them are true Phascolomys, and have a blunt nose, with a distinct, bald, rugose, callous muzzle; and they have moderate-sized ears, which are usually bent back on the sides of the head. They differ considerably in colour and in the form of the muzzle. 1. Phascolomys ursinus. Dark silver-grey ; middle of back, nose, and outside of limbs blacker ; fur very dense, rather curled and crisp, consisting of abun- dance of under-fur and close-set, slender, very dark brown hair with slender silver-white tips, and a few interspersed white and fewer black, tapering, slender bristles; it has a subtrigonal muffle, pointed behind, and almost as long as broad. The ears are rounded at the tip. This is the animal which is best known and usual in collections. Hab. Van Diemen’s Land. 2. Phascolomys Angasit. The fur is blackish brown, nearly uniform ; the muffle is oblong, transverse, rounded behind, and broader than long. The ears are rather pointed at the tip. Had. South Australia. I have named this species after Mr, G. French Angas, who has paid so much attention to Australian and African zoology. The third specimen is certainly a distinct genus, as distinct from Phascolomys as Halmaturus from Macropus, or Ovibos from Bos. It may be called LASIORHINUS. The nose is truncate and hairy, with large open nostrils on the sides, and without any naked muflle between them. The ears are large, produced, erect, acute, covered externally with short fur. Lasiorhinus M‘Coyt. The fur is pale silver-grey, the hairs being black with silver-grey tips ; the whiskers are long, strong, rigid, in a line on each side of the nose; the ears elongate, acute. This animal seems to be the Broad-nosed Wombat (P. latifrons) of South Australia, described by Mr. G. F. Angas, in the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society,’ June 25, 1861, p. 268, from a specimen then living in the Botanic Garden in Adelaide, caught near the Sawler River, about thirty miles north of Adelaide. It has just been figured as Phascolomys lasiorhinus by Mr. Gould in his ‘ Australian Mammals ;’ but this name is applicable to the genus. I have named this species after Prof. M‘Coy, the Director of the Melbourne Museum, who is forming a museum that is equalling, and, I may say, rivalling the museums of several European or American capitals. Mr. Angas may possibly be correct in applying the specific name of latifrons to this species ; and the characters that Professor Owen pointed out may prove to be generic: but this can only be deter- Miscellaneous. 459 mined when the skulls of these species can be compared with the typical skull described in the Proc. Zool. Soc. 1845, p. 82. In the British Museum there is a very large specimen of a true Phascolomys, which, from the colour and rigidity of the fur, appears to be a third species. Unfortunately the skin is without any skull, and has no reliable habitat attributed to it, as it was purchased of Mr. Jamrach, in 1859, who received it from “Australia.” It is very probably the “ big yellow fellow,’ or Wombat, that the natives say is found on the banks of the Murray. (See Proc. Zool. Soc. 1861, . 271.) : Phascolomys setosus. Nearly uniform pale brown; the fur rigid, with a small quantity of under-fur on the shoulders and limbs, consisting almost entirely of dark brown bristles with pale tips, and rather more rigid black- brown longer bristles ; the muffle subtrigonal, as long as broad. Hab. Australia. This is the specimen figured by Mr. Gould, in Part xi. of his ‘Mammalia of Australia,’ under the name of Phascolomys latifrons; but how he determined that it was the P. latifrons of Owen I do not know, as the only skin we have has no skull, and P. latifrons is only described from a skull. The different character of the fur is the best distinction. The young Tasmanian Wombat (P. ursinus) is dark, like the adult. On the Occurrence of living Water-Beetles in the Intestines of th Common Trout. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. Preston Rectory, Wellington, Salop, May 21, 1863. GENTLEMEN,— While examining the intestines of the common Trout (Salmo fario, Linn.) for Echinorhynchi, I was surprised to find, at the space of about half an inch from the anal orifice, two specimens of a small brown water-beetle, alive and active, amongst the contents of the intestine. I have not yet determined the species of beetle, nor do I at all know whether the discovery of a living non-parasitic animal in such a locality is a matter of ordinary occur- rence. But in this case there is, it would seem, undoubted evidence of the power of an insect to survive unharmed the digestive process of afish. The beetles had been swallowed by the trout with other food, and here they were quite lively and ready to be evacuated in a very short time. That I have made no mistake in the matter is evident from the fact, that attached to the underside of one of the beetles was a quantity of mucus from the fish’s intestine, in which were imbedded the proboscides of two or three specimens of Echinorhynchus Proteus. I have examined the stomach and intestines of various freshwater fish, but never before witnessed the occurrence of living forms of 30* 460 Miscellaneous. non-parasitic animals in the locality indicated. Is there anything remarkable in this, or is it an event of ordinary occurrence ? There is only one other way of accounting for the insect’s admis- sion—by supposing that it had entered the intestine through the anal orifice (?). “‘ Sub gudice lis est.” I am, Gentlemen, Yours very truly, W. Hoventon. Pretended ‘‘ Parthenogenesis”’ of the Bernhard Crab. * Cornwall, Sept. 5, 1770. ** Sir,—I pass a great deal of my time in walking on the cliffs and by the sea-side im this county. As I was one day going over the rocks at low water, I saw an infinite number of Periwinkles, out of which projected two claws resembling those of a Lobster. Curiosity induced me to break the shells of several, to discover, if I could, how the little creature could introduce itself, as the body of the Periwinkle generally filled its shell. “J was soon satisfied in my searches, but, to my astonishment, found that it was the body of the Periwinkle that was undergoing this metamorphosis. This occasioned my breaking several shells more, in all of which I found the same appearances, and had the satisfaction of demonstrating to several gentlemen of undoubted veracity that the body of the Periwinkle actually underwent this change till it became a perfect Lobster. In some you might discern the most minute change, others were half-formed, and some were completely formed. I spread a dozen at least on a table at one time, which they traversed many times, to the satisfaction of several gentlemen present. «It is a received opinion that the infant Lobster takes refuge in the empty shell of a Periwinkle. I was one of those who imbibed that opinion before I made this discovery. “As I am little versed in studies of this nature, I request the thoughts of your ingenious correspondents on the subject. It seems probable that the Periwinkles may be produced from the berries of the Lobster, as it seems impossible that the Lobster can be produced in the first state from the Periwinkle. *T am, Sir, yours, &c., “ CORNUBIENSIS.” * New American Otter. In the ‘ Canadian Naturalist’ for June 1863, Mr. George Barnston describes and figures the skull of a new North-American Otter, which he calls Lutra destructor. He observes, ‘‘I propose to show that there exists throughout a great portion of the British territory of North America, if not further south, a smaller species of Otter, well known to the aboriginal Ojibways and the Crees as the Pinatkewaw- keek, the breaker of beaver-houses and the dams. He closely re- * Extracted from a newspaper of the above date. Miscellaneous. 461 sembles the larger Otter in dentition, colour, and shape, but is of more slender structure, and possesses marked differences in the pro- portion of the coronoid bone. He has, besides, distinct habits and modes of life, especially in his search for sustenance, which, I think, altogether entitles us to consider him as specifically distinct from the Lutra canadensis.” On two Forms of Anthriscus sylvestris. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. On the banks of the Thames, between Kew and Richmond, there are now to be seen growing in abundance, side by side, so close to- gether that their leaves are often to be seen intermixed, two very distinct forms of Anthriscus sylvestris: at least, I consider they are both that plant, as I cannot find any character in the flower, the fruit, or the leaves by which I can separate them. One is a large succulent plant, of a bright, rather palish green colour, much branched, and with large broad leaves; the stem is thick, and has a few large ridges, and the flowers are rather large. The other is a slender rigid-stemmed plant, with comparatively few and distant branches, and comparatively few and smaller leaves. The stem has many small, subequal ridges. The stem and foliage are always dark, and generally of a more or less purple shade; but 1 have seen a few plants in which the stem and leaves were dark reen. These differences cannot arise from soil or any difference of ex- ternal circumstances, such as situation, exposure, &c., as they grow side by side, and come into flower at the same time. I have observed a similar fact, but one not so strongly marked, of two forms growing side by side and flowering at the same period, in the Wood-Anemone (Anemone nemorosa), which I described a short time ago. Now, I wish some of your readers would explain to me, by any of the modern or ancient theories of the origin of species, what we are to learn from the existence of two forms of the same species in the same locality, under the same circumstances, and occurring at the same time. They cannot be regarded as varieties produced by soil or external circumstances, or any of the other conditions that are supposed to cause variation in species; and yet they are not species as we commonly regard species, though, if such specimens were col- lected in a foreign country, and only examined from the specimen in an herbarium, one might be inclined to regard them as allied species or very distinct varieties. I do not find the two forms of this plant noticed in any of the English works on botany, nor in any of the floras of France or Ger- many that occur to me. Indeed, what a wonderful thing it is to consider how plants of the same kind flower at the same period! how one week the banks of the railways are covered with one, and then with another kind, all the plants of each in bloom at once, and that the different species follow one after the other in the same succession year after year—varying, 462 i Miscellaneous. it is true, as the season is late or early, but yet each retaining its general place in the succession, and each appearing at the same time. The banks of the railway-cuttings, which some condemn as being ugly, are the flower-gardens that gladden the eyes, especially in early spring, of thousands who have been pent up in the smoke of London for months. When first the golden coltsfoot spangles the banks, I can scarcely resist the desire to be moving along the lines. These flowers come and go in aday, almost asif by magic. They are followed, at least near London, by the lilac lady-smock ; then come the cowslips, and in the copses which are often to be seen at the bot- tom of the banks, and in the hedges by the field-sides, the primrose and the wood-anemone, and, more obscure, but easily seen by sharp eyes, the wood-sorrel ; and the hyacinth forms a blue carpet in the distance, and the beautiful golden broom and furze on the bank itself. Then come the large white beds of the wild chervil (Anthris- cus sylvestris); and these are followed by the ox-eye daisy, all nearly of the same height, and each turning its little star-flower to- wards the great luminary as the world moves. The plants of the same kind being all nearly of the same height add much to the beauty of their appearance. This is especially seen in the fields of clover, which form a purple carpet ; but I was especially struck with it in an alpine meadow that was just about to be cut down near the hospital on the Via Mala: there the flowers showed four beautifully even carpets, each to be seen through the other. Just above the pale green herbage, chiefly composed of the alpine dandelion, came the purple gentian, then the blue Phyteuwma, and above all was the beautiful golden Yrollius, or globe-flower. It was a sight never to be forgotten. Planorbis crista. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GENTLEMEN,—Will you permit me to withdraw that portion of my letter in your last Number which states that I followed M. Moquin-Tandon in adopting the Linnean name Planorbis crista? Having adopted it, as any reader of my book may see, in opposition to the views of that author, it only remains for me to apologize to you for my carelessness in making the statement. I am, Gentlemen, Your obedient Servant, May 1, 1863. Lovetu REEVE. On the Occurrence of Lymneza stagnalis in Scotland. By Rosert O. Cunnineuam, Esq., Prestonpans. Mr. Lovell Reeve, in his recently published valuable work on the Land and Freshwater Mollusks of Great Britain, says, with respect to Lymnea stagnalis, ‘This fine species stands alone among the Lymnzacea of the Eastern hemisphere for the conspicuous pro- minence of its size. In the Western hemisphere it is represented in a remarkable degree of parallelism by the Lymnea gugularis of Miscellaneous. 463 Lake Superior, distinguished by the same prominent assemblage of characters. It ranges, in this country, with Z. auricularia, not being found in Scotland, and appearing extremely rare and local in England, north of the midland counties.” In the summer of 1857, while engaged in looking over the collec- tion of Mollusca of the late Prof. Fleming, of Edinburgh, he men- tioned in the course of conversation that the Lymnea stagnalis was reported to have been obtained by the late David Don, the botanist, in Gulane Loch, between seventeen and eighteen miles to the east of Edinburgh ; but that, so far as he was aware, its occurrence in the aforesaid locality had not been confirmed by any subsequent ob- server. At the same time, he strongly recommended me to attempt, if possible, to ascertain the truth of the report. Accordingly, since that time I kept a sharp look-out for this interesting species in the habitat specified. It was not, however, until the 30th of April of the present year that my efforts were crowned with success, when I succeeded in procuring abundance of excellent specimens. Gulane Loch is a sheet of water of inconsiderable depth, but of some extent, in the sandy common of the same name, which slopes gently downwards to the seashore in the neighbourhood of the small village of Aberlady. Owing to the extent and variety of its surface, this common has for a long time been known to the botanist as a locality for rare plants, several of which occur in the loch itself,— e.g. Utricularia vulgaris, Menyanthes trifoliata, Sium repens, and other plants which are not commonly met with in the adjoming district. Owing to the water being very much choked up with aquatic plants, it becomes a matter of very considerable difficulty to drag it with a net, more especially in the middle of summer, when the plants have grown up; and to this I attribute my want of success hitherto; for, on visiting the locality last month, which was much earlier than my wont, and when most of the plants were yet beneath the surface of the water, I easily procured the specimens already mentioned. The animals were generally clinging to plants of the genus Chara, near the surface of the water, and were associated with individuals of Lymnea peregra, L. palustris, Physa fontinalis, Cyclas cornea, and various small species of Planorbis. I brought home about two dozen specimens, the greater number of which are at present in a state of captivity, and appear to be, on the whole, very active. I think it of some importance to record this fact, be- cause of its interesting relation to the geographical distribution of this so much the finest species of our British Lymn. Should Mr. Reeve desire to possess Scotch specimens of it, I shall be only too happy to furnish him with them. Descriptions of two new Species of Pycnogonoidea. By Georce Honee. Pallene attenuata, n.sp., Hodge. Rostrum thick, constricted at the base, swelled near the middle, and rounded at the apex. Legs long, sparingly hispid ; first, second, 464 Misceilaneous. and third joints short, the second the longest ; fourth rather stout, and as long as second and third united; fifth and sixth slender, and about the length of fourth ; seventh very short ; eighth con- vex on outer margin, straight on inner, with a few short hairs scattered along both margins. A single claw at the extremity, which, when pressed against the limb, reaches to junction of seventh jot. Foot-jaws long and slender, projecting consider- ably beyond end of rostrum. Anterior portion of thorax attenu- ated, and advanced to nearly on a line with the tip of rostrum, where it slightly bulges, and gives origin to foot-jaws; imme- diately behind which is seated the oculiferous tubercle, which is long and narrow. Abdomen long, rounded at apex, slightly taper- ing to base. At the origin of each leg on the dorsal aspect is a large wart-like protuberance. One female of this species was taken near the Dogger Bank, in 25-30 fathoms, on an oozy bottom. Nymphon brevirostre, n. sp., Hodge. Rostrum short and stout; foot-jaws thick, divergent ; second joint or hand nearly as long as first; palpi five-jointed, brush-like ; first and second joints long and nearly of the same length, each of which is equal to the three terminal, the last being the shortest. Thorax robust. Abdomen stout and conical. Oculiferous tubercle midway between first pair of legs. Legs stout, sparingly furnished with stout spine-like hairs; first and third joints short; second slender at origin, but swelling upwards; fourth and fifth each as long as the three first ; sixth much longer, slender ; seventh short ; eighth long, slightly bent, and furnished along its inner margin with a few short spines, and terminating in one moderately large claw and two small ones. One female of this species was taken near the Dogger Bank, under the same circumstances as the foregoing.—Trans. Tynes. Nat. Field Club, 1863, p. 281. On the Change in Form of the Teeth of the Susu (Platanista). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c. The front of the beak, in the younger specimens, is dilated and ob- long, but it gradually becomes as compressed as the rest of the beak ; and in the older specimens the end of the beak is turned up. The teeth in the front half of the younger specimens are very long, slender, subcylindrical, slightly arched, and more or less flattened on the front and hinder side by the friction of the teeth of the other jaw, which alternate and fit between them when the jaws are closed. The hinder teeth of the animal at this age are short and cylindrical, with a conical end; the hindermost ones are very short, scarcely raised above the gums. As the animal increases in age, the bases of the teeth increase in longitudinal diameter, and the apices become worn off, until they be- ‘Miscellaneous. 465 come the short, compressed, conical teeth figured by Sir Everard Home in the ‘Philosophical Transactions’ for 1818-1820, where they have a compressed, more or less hollow base ; but in the more aged animal the bases of the teeth are solid, squarish, very rugose, or divided into short tubercles or broader lobes. In the Museum of the College of Surgeons there is the skull of a young specimen, and another of an animal rather older than the one above described; and in the British Museum there is one rather older, showing the gradual change in the form of the teeth, and in- termediate between the younger state and the jaws figured by Sir E. Home, which are also to be seen in the College of Surgeons’ Museum. In the British Museum there is the skull of an aged individual, in which the teeth have solid rugose and lobed bases, as above described. The change in form is so great that I was inclined at one time to consider the skull of the young animal as forming a genus distinct from Platanista, which is always characterized as having compressed teeth ; and any one comparing the teeth of the old and young ani- mals, without the intermediate gradations, might, at first sight, easily come to the conclusion that they could scarcely pass from one form to the other, as the long cylindrical front teeth of the young animal are converted, in the older one, into short, conical, compressed ones, by the wearing away of the tops and the alteration of the form of the base. The sutures of the skull of this animal seem to be soon knit, for they are well closed in the skulls of the young animals. Aquatic Hymenoptera. Ata recent meeting of the Linnzean Society, Mr. J. Lubbock read a paper on two aquatic Hymenoptera, one of which uses its wings in swimming. Till now, the author stated, no aquatic Hymenoptera or Orthoptera had been discovered, though the former group alone has been estimated as comprising some 50,000 species, 3500 of which live in Great Britain. In a basin of pond-water, on an early day in August last, he had been astonished to see one of these Hymenoptera (Polynema natans) quite at ease in the watery element, and actually swimming by means of its wings. At first he could hardly believe his eyes; but having found several specimens, and shown them to some friends, the fact was undoubted. The same phenomenon, moreover, was again observed, within a week, by Mr. Duchess, of Stepney. Another of the aquatic Hymenoptera, now first described under the name of Walkeria aquatica, was found in the same pond; but this, unlike the former, which swam by means of its wings, held its wings motionless when under water, and used its legs only ; and though these were neither flattened nor provided with any well- developed fringe of sete, they seemed very well to serve this pur- pose; indeed the motion of this species was more rapid than that of the former. Both species are fond of creeping along the sides of the vessel in which they are kept, or on the leaves and stems of aquatic plants; but they frequently quit their support, and swim boldly out Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xi. 31 466 Miscellaneous. into the open water. In these insects respiration appears to take place in the usual way, through spiracles. A common house-fly, placed under water, ceased to move in half an hour, while the speci- mens now referred to lived under water for several hours without suffering any apparent inconvenience, and one was observed to be quite lively after having been so placed at least twelve hours, which, it was stated from further observation, is probably about the limit of their endurance. Drawings of the two insects accompanied the paper, which also contained an account of their organization. On the Appearances of Cotton-fibre during Solution and Dis- integration. By Cuaruies O’Neix1, F.C.S. These experiments referred to the application of Schweizer’s sol- vent. ‘Two strengths were used: the weaker contained oxide of copper equal to 4°3 grains metal per 1000, and 47 grs. dry ammonia; the stronger contained 15°4 grs. metal and 77 grs. dry ammonia per 1000. The latter is about the most concentrated solution which can be made. Referring to the researches of Payen, Frémy, Peligot, Schlossberger, and others who have employed this solvent, the au- thor said the only experimenter who seemed to have worked in the same direction with himself, and that apparently only to a small extent, was Dr. Cramer, whose paper he had only been able to see in a translation appended as a note to a memoir of M. Payen in ‘Comptes Rendus,’ vol. xviii. p. 319. Mr. O'Neill considers that cotton exhibits, under the action of this solvent (1) an external membrane distinct from the true cell- wall or cellulose matter; (2) spiral vessels situated either in or out- side the external membrane ; (3) the true cell-wall or cellulose ; and (4) an inner medullary matter. The external membrane is insoluble in the solvent, and may be obtained in short hollow cylinders by first acting upon the cotton with the dilute solvent so as to gradually remove the cellulose, and then dissolving all soluble matters by the strong solvent. If the strong solution is first applied, the extra- ordinary dilatation of the cellulose bursts the external membrane, and reduces it to such a state of tenuity that it is invisible. This mem- brane is very elastic, appears to be quite impermeable to the solvent, and, when free from fissures, protects the enclosed matter from its action. It is not seen in cotton which has been submitted to the action of bleaching agents, being either chemically altered or, what is most probable, entirely removed. The spiral vessels are unmistakeably apparent, running round the fibre in more or less close spirals, sometimes single, sometimes double and parallel, and at other times double and in opposite directions, or again seemingly wound close and tight round the cylinder. They are well seen in the spherical swellings or beads, but are prominent at the points of strangulation of long ovals formed when the ends of the fibres are held tightly. They collect in a close mass, forming a ligature, and are frequently ruptured, the ends projecting from the side of the fibre. Miscellaneous. 467 The cellulose is enotmously dilated by the weaker solvent, and expands the external membrane into beautiful beads, which are doubtless the result of the spiral vessels acting as ligatures at the points of strangulation; at the open end of a fibre it can be seen oozing out as a mucilaginous substance. The stronger solution bursts the beads, or dissolves all the cellulose into a homogeneous mass, amidst which the empty cuticular membrane and the spiral vessels remain nearly unacted upon. The substance called medullary matter is seen occupying the axes of the fibres; it is nearly insoluble in the solvents. It may be well seen projecting from the open end of a fibre where the cellulose is exuding, and often remains im situ when the fibre has quite disap- peared. It has many appearances of being a distinct body, but the author in some cases thought it might be only the thickened or modified inner cell-wall ; in others it looked like a shrunk membrane, probably the dried-up primordial utricle. It is generally absent or indistinct in old cotton, or cotton which has been submitted to bleaching agents.—Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester, April 1863. On a singular Malformation of the Beak and Foot in the Young of the Domestic Fowl. “Dear Sir,—With this I send you the body of the chicken I spoke to you about, the beak and feet of which bear a close resem- blance to those of a Parrot, and I beg your acceptance of it. “Tt may perhaps be as well if I state the circumstances which, it has occurred to me, may account for this freak of nature. I had one of the Parrot tribe, which, on account of the noise it made, was frequently placed in the yard where I kept a breed of white bantam fowls. If any of these came near the Parrot’s cage to /7>M pick up the food it scattered, it be- AON came much enraged and screamed violently. Soon after this I set two hens on eggs, and in each brood 1 had one chicken of this strange form. My impression at the time was, and now is, that one of the hens had been frightened by the Parrot, and an effect thereby roduced on some of her eggs. “When I first mentioned it to you, I thought it had but three toes; on closer inspection I perceive there is a fourth toe ; but the form of the foot still very closely resembles that of a Parrot. “Yours very truly, “Wm. Horn.” «P.S. The Parrot was never let out of the cage, and was, I be- lieve, a female.” “J, E. Gray, Esq., British Museum.” —Proc. Zool. Soc. Feb. 24, 1863. 31* INDEX to VOL. XI. Acauurs, new species of, 219. Acanthogorgia, new species of, 140. Acantholeberis, on two British species of, 409. Adams, A., on new genera and spe- cies of Brachiopods, 98; on the Japanese species of Siphonalia, 202; on new genera and species of Um- boniidee, 264; on Microstelma and Onoba, 347; on the Japanese La- cunide, 350. Adams, H, and A., on some new ge- nera of Mollusca, 18. Aheetulla, on some species of, 283. Alder, J., on the British Tunicata, 153. Allman, Prof., on the Hydroida, 1. Allopora, new species of, 142. Amara, new species of, 215. ae new British species of, Amblyopus, new species of, 139. Ameeba, on an undescribed indigenous form of, 287, 365, 434. Anisotoma, new species of, 216. Annelids, on natural and_ artificial section in some Cheetopod, 323 ; on the position of the Capitellze in the system of the, 393. Anther, on the development, struc- ture, and functions of the tissues of the, 229. Anthriscus sylvestris, on two forms of, 461. Archeopteryx macrurus, on the re- mains of, 122. Ascidia, new British species of, 154. Atlantis, new species of, 219. Atractylis, new British species of, 45. Poe characters of the new genus, Baily, W. H., on some coal-measure Crustacea belonging to the genus Belinurus, 107. Barnston, G., on a new species of Otter, 460. Bartlett, A. D., on the habits and affinities of the Kagu, 227; on the habits of the Beaver, 387. Batrachians, descriptions of new, 26. Beaver, on the habits of the, 387. Bee, on the form of the cells made by the, 415. Belinurus, on two new species of, 107. Bennett, Dr. G., on the habits of Megapodius Freycineti, 380; on the Mooruk and on the Didunculus strigirostris, 381. Benson, W. H., on new species of Helix, Clausilia, and Spiraxis, 87 ; on new land-shells, and on the ani- mal of Sophina, 318. Blackwall, J., on new Spiders from Rio Janeiro, 29. Blanford, W. T., on the Indian spe- cies of Helix and Nanma, 81. . Books, new: — Jukes’s Manual of Geology, 51; Hull’s Coal-fields of Great Britain, 53; Gibson’s Flora of Essex, 117; Kirby’s European Butterflies, 120; Balfour’s Outlmes of Botany, 221; Reeve’s Land and Freshwater Mollusks, 291, 389; Woods’s Geological Observations in South Australia, 294 ; Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, 296; Hayden’s Geology and Na- tural History of the Upper Missouri, 371; Spence Bate and Westwood’s British Sessile-eyed Crustacea, 454 ; Hartwig’s Tropical World, 455 ; Phipson’s Phosphorescence, 456. Botrylloides, new British species of, N72: Boussingault, M., on the nature of the gas produced from the decom- position of carbonic acid by leaves, 309. Brachiopods, on new genera and spe- cies of, 98. Brachypterus, new species of, 217. Brachysoma diadema, note on, 23. Brachyura, on the classification of the, 233. Brachyurophis, description of the ge- nus, 21. Brehm, Dr. A. E., on the Unicorn of the ancients, 72. Bulimus, new species of, 322. INDEX. Burmeister, Dr., on a new species of Chlamyphorus, 308. Calceolina, characters of the genus, 267. Capitelle, on the position of the, in the system of the Annelida, 393, Capricornis, new species of, 387. Carter, H. J., on the colouring matter of the Red Sea, 182. Caryophyllia clavus, on the occurrence of, on the coasts of Britain, 145. Catopra, new species of, 137. Centropogon, new species of, 136. Cephalophus, new species of, 387. Cercocalamus, description of the ge- nus, 21. Chatin, A., on the structure and func- tions of the tissues of the anther, aan: Chlamydera, new species of, 55. Chlamyphorus, new species of, 308. Chloroscartes, characters of the ge- nus, 134. Chromotis, characters of the new ge- nus, 19 Clausilia, new species of, 89, 321. Clava, new species of, 8. Cohn, Prof. F., on the contractile tissue of plants, 188. ; Coleoptera, new, 214; on the occur- rence of, in the intestines of the Trout, 459. Comatula rosacea, on the embryogeny of, 297. Coptostethus, new species of, 218. Corals, descriptions of new, 140, 143. Coriphilus, new species of, 57. Corymorpha nutans, on the structure Ci eal Cotton-fibre, on the appearance of, during solution and disintegration, 466. Crania, new species of, 100. Cratognathus, new species of, 215. Crocidura, new species of, 131. Crocodilus, new species of, 222. Crustacea, on the homologies of the antennary joints in the Decapod, 233. Cryptophagus, new species of, 217. Cryptotis, description of the genus, 2f. Cubiceps gracilis, notes on, 242. Cunningham, R. O., on the occur- rence of Lymnza stagnalis in Scot- land, 462. 469 Cynopterus, new species of, 386. Cynthia, new British species of, 161. Cytus roseus, notes on, 246. Daboia elegans, note on, 384. Dana, J. D., on the higher subdivi- sions in the classification of mam- mals, 207. Diardigallus Crawfurdi, note on, 383. Diatoms, on the structure of the valves of some, 351. Diazona hebridica, notes on, 169. Didunculus strigirostris, on the habits of, 381. Diemansia annulata, note on, 24. Distoma, new British species of, 172. Dryophis, new species of, 22. Dysdera, new species of, 43. Echeneis brachyptera, notes on, 241. Echinodera, new species of, 219. Epeira, new species of, 29. Ephedra, observations on, 248. Epheria, new species of, 350. Ethalia, new species of, 266. Eudendrium, new British species of, 9. Euryotis, new species of, 132. Fermentation, on the production of, by Infusoria without access of atmo- spheric air, 31]. Fishes, new, 58, 114, 134, 237; on some fossil, from Dura Den, 73. Flabellum, new species of, 143. Foraminifera, on the nomenclature of the, 91. Fowl, on a singular malformation of the beak and foot in the young of the, 467. Galena, new species of, 39. Gersticker, D., on the geographical distribution and varieties of the Honey-bee, with remarks on the exotic Honey-bees of the Old World, 270, 333. Glyphisodon, new species of, 115. Glyptodon, on the extinct genus, 123. Glyptolepis, new species of, 73. Gould, J., on a new species of Chla- mydera, 55. Gracula, new species of, 58. Gracula pectoralis, notes on, 15. Gray, G. R., on a Flycatcher new to the fauna of Great Britain, 228. Gray, Dr. J. E., on some new Mam- malia, 131, 385, 457 ; on two forms of Anthriscus sylvestris, 461; on the change in form of the teeth of the Susu, 464. 470 Grube, E., on the Capitelle, and their position in the system of the Anne- lida, 393. Giinther, Dr. A., on new species of Reptiles and Fishes, 20, 26, 114, 134, 283. Gulliver, Prof. G., on the raphides of British plants, 13, 263. Halcyon, new species of, 57. Haliplus, new species of, 216. Haughton, Rev. S., on the form of the cells made by various Wasps and by the Honey-bee, 415; on the origin of species, 420. Helix, on the Indian species of, 81 ; new species of, 87, 318. Hemipodius, on the osteology of, 300. Hincks, Rev. T., on new British Hy- droids, 45. Hodge, G., on a new species of Ophi- ura, 311; on two new species of Pycnogonoidea, 463. Holdsworth, E. W. H., on two new species of Flabellum, 143; on the oceurrence of Caryophyllia clavus on the coasts of Britain, 145. Honey-bee, on the geographical dis- tribution and varieties of the, 270, 333. Horn, W., on a malformation of the beak and foot in the young of the domestic Fowl, 467. Houghton, Rev. W., on the occur- rence of living Coleoptera in the intestines of the Trout, 459. Huxley, Prof., on a new specimen of Glyptodon, 123. Hydroida, notes on the, 1; new Brit- ish, 45. Hyla, new species of, 28. Hymenoptera, on aquatic, 465. Infusoria, on the production of fer- mentation by, 311. Insects, on the composition of the head and the number of abdominal segments in, 173. ’ Ismenia, new species of, 99. Isnardia, on the raphides of, 263. Johnson, J. Y., on new genera and species of Fishes, 58, 237 ; on some new Corals from Madeira, 140, 299. Jones, T. R., on the Foraminifera, 91. Labrichthys, new species of, 116. Lacuna, new species of, 350. Lzmonema, new species of, 62. Lagenorhynchus albirostris, on the INDEX. occurrence of, at the mouth of the Dee, 268. Laomedea, new British species of, 46. Laparocerus, new species of, 219. Lasiorhinus, description of the new genus, 458. Lates, new species of, 114. Latex, on the vessels of the, 402. Leaves, on the nature of the gas pro- duced from the decomposition of carbonic acid by, 309. Leidy, Dr. J., on the Pliocene fauna of the Niobrara river, 149. Leiopyrga, characters of the new genus, 19 Leopardus, new species of, 386. Leptodira, new species of, 23. Lestiboudois, M., on the vessels of the latex and the receptacles of the elaborated juices of plants, 402. Leuconyx, characters of the new ge- nus, 18. Lingula, new species of, 101. Lotella, new species of, 116. Lubbock, J., on two aquatic Hy- menoptera, 465. Lutra, new species of, 460. Lymneea stagnalis, on the occurrence of, in Scotland, 462. Lymnodynastes, new species of, 26. Lynde, J.G., on the action of magenta on vegetable tissue, 308. Mammals, on the higher subdivisions in the classification of, 207. Masoreus, new species of, 214. Megapodius Freycineti, on the habits of, 380. Melambaphes, characters of the genus, SS Metabletus, new species of, 214. Metric weights and measures, on the use of, 71. Microscopical investigations, on the application of magenta dye in, 152. Microstelma, characters of the genus, 347. Microthyca, characters of the genus, 265. Miers, J., on Ephedra, 248. Minor, W. C., on natural and artificial section in some Cheetopod Annelids, SPBE Molgula, description of the genus, 158. Mollusca, new genera and species of, 8. INDEX. Moore, T. J., on the occurrence of Lagenorhynchus albirostris at the mouth of the Dee, 268. Mooruk, on the habits of the, 380. Mopsea, new species of, 299. Miiller, Dr. F., on the transforma- tions of the Porcellane, 47. Murray, A., on Crocodilus frontatus, 222. Mus, new species of, 132. Muscicapa parva, capture of, in Great Britain, 228. Nanina, on the Indian species of, 81. Nanophyes, new species of, 218. Neelaps, description of the genus, 24. Neill, C. O’, on the appearance of cotton-fibre during solution and disintegration, 466. Nesiarchus, characters of the new ge- nus, 64. Norman, Rev. A. M., on Acantho- leberis, a genus of Entomostraca new to Great Britain, 409. Nymphon, new British species of, 464. Onoba, new species of, 348. Ophiura, new British species of, 311. Opisthoporus, new species of, 322. Owen, Prof., on Archeopteryx ma- erurus, 122. ; Pallene, new British species of, 463. Parascidia, new British species of, 172. Parker, W.K., on the Foraminifera, 91; onthe osteology of the genera Pterocles, Syrrhaptes, Hemipodius, and Tinamus, 300. Parthenogenesis ofthe Bernhard Crab, on the, 460. Pasteur, L., on the production of fermentation by the presence of Infusoria, 313. Perigonymus, new British species of, 10. Perileptus, new species of, 216. Perry, W. G., notice of the late, 392. Peters, Dr. W., on a new Phyllodac- tylus, 152; on a new Pteropus, 231. Phascolomys, on some species of 457. Phoca foetida, capture of, at Aberyst- with, 309. Phrynobatrachus, characters of the genus, 135. Phyllodactylus, new species of, 152. Pitta, new species of, 133. 471 Planorbis crista, note on, 462. Plants, on the raphides of British, 13, 263; on the contractile tissue of, 188 ; on the laticiferous vessels of, 402. Platanista, on the change in form of the teeth of, 464. Platyplectrum, description of the ge- nus, 27. Plectana, new species of, 38. Pleurodyctium problematicum, on the true nature of, 390. Pleurosigma, on the structure of the valves of, 351. Peecilostolus, description of thegenus, 25. Polyclinum, new British species of, 169, Porcellanz, on the metamorphoses of the, 47. Priacanthus, new species of, 71. Primnoa, new species of, 299. Pseudochromis, new species of, 139. Pseudomureena, new species of, 59. Pseudophycis, new species of, 116. Pterocles, on the osteology of, 300. Pteropus, new species of, 231. Ptilonopus, new species of, 58. Pycnogonoidea, new species of, 463. Raphides, notes on the, of British plants, 13, 263. Reeve, L., on Planorbis crista, 462. Reptiles, descriptions of new, 134. Rhinochetus jubatus, on the habits and affinities of, 227. Rhizopods, observations on some, 434. Rhombosolea, new species of, 117. Rhombus cristatus, notes on, 238. Rhynchonella, new species of, 100. Roberts, Dr., on the application of magenta dye in microscopical in- vestigations, 152. Rominger, Dr., on the true nature of Pleurodyctium problematicum,390, Royal Society, proceedings of the, RN i Saururus cernuus, on a remarkable form of rotation in the pith-cells of, 150. Schaeffer, Dr. G. C., on a remarkable form of rotation in the pith-cells of Saururus cernuus, 150. Schaum, Dr. H., on the composition of the head, and on the number of abdominal segments, in insects,173. 472 Schedophilus, new species of, 67. Schomburgk, Sir R., on Diardigallus Crawfurdi, 383. Sciurus, new species of, 132. Scorpena ustulata, notes on, 239. Setarches, characters of the new ge- nus, 68. Shells, on the Indian species of land-, 81, 87. Shortt, Dr., on the habits of Daboia elegans, 384. Silvanus, new species of, 217. Siphonalia, on the Japanese species of, 202. Sitones, new species of, 220. Snakes, descriptions of new, 20. Solea oculata, notes on, 237. Sophina, on the animal of, 323. Species, on the origin of, 415. Spiders, descriptions of new, 29. Spiraxis, new species of, 90. Stenotis, new species of, 351. Stieda, L., on the Tzeniz, 101. Stimpson, Dr.W., on the classification of the Brachyura, and on the homo- logies of the antennary joints in the Decapod Crustacea, 233. Suess, Prof. E., on the former con- nexion of North Africa with South Europe, 429. Synaphobranchus, characters of the new genus, 60. Syrrhaptes, on the osteology of, 300. Teenie, on the anatomy of the, 101. Taheitia, characters of the new genus, 19. Tarus, new species of, 214. Teinostoma, new species of, 267. Teleuraspis nummifera, notes on, 25. Telopes, new species of, 218. Tetragnatha, new species of, 41. Textulariz, on the, 91. INDEX. Thomson, Prof. W., on the embryo- geny of Comatula rosacea, 297. Thylacium, new British species of, 167. Thyrsoidea, new species of, 60. Tinamus, on the osteology of, 300. Todopsis, new species of, 57. Trechus, new species of, 216, Trichodesmium Ehrenbergii, observa- tions on, 182. Tubiclava, characters of the new ge- nus, 9. Tubularia, new species of, 12. Tubularidze, new British species of, 8. Tunicata, on the British, with de- scriptions of new species, 153. Mae characters of the genus, 265. Umboniide, on new genera and spe- cies of, 264. eras of the ancients, note on the, 2: ; Vegetable tissue, on the action of magenta on, 308. Walker, R., on some fossil fishes of Dura Den, 73. Wallace, A. R., on the proposed change in name of Gracula pectoralis, 15 ; on new birds from New Guinea, 56; on three new species of Pitta, 133. Wallich, Dr., on an undescribed indi- genous form of Amoeba, 287, 365 ; on the structure of the valves of Pleurosigma and other Diatoms, 351; on Amoeba villosa and other Rhizopods, 434. Wasps, on the form of the cells made by various, 415. Wollaston, T. V., on new Canarian Coleoptera, 214. Zeus conchifer, notes on, 245. Zoological Society, proceedings of the, 55, 131, 222, 299, 380. END OF THE ELEVENTH VOLUME. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, See ys Midis AMSA Vibe Aaa Ann &Mag Nat. Hist.8.3VoAW.PLL. J. Bastre sc. “Ud DLT fo sidajoqdh)4 wswee i ' ¢ j | i | i ; sweet? ALG EEE oe Ann.déMag Nat Mist. Vol PUM. e' ass wees ieee ae We) 2 A. Cercocalamus collarts. B Brachyur CTH. “oph us semirascratw ASPUS nammnu C.Telews Ann.&Mag Nat.Hist. 53 Vel 1 PLIV. ORL ROG EE OMEN FT ‘ord. WWest ump A Platyplectrum marmoratum. B Cryptotis brovis. C Hyla Krefftw. Ann. t-Mag. Nat. Hist. §.3.Vol. i. PL. {inp Dublin Forster £( et the WHBatly ded, CPUSCACEML. “4 Meuszire d. fhelimuris Regine. di y C OW ay > ae DON POWnRAUS. Prestwich: APCALAMMLS uy Cc dD PL, Ki 8 : S J Basire. sc. Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8.3. Vol N.Pt.Vif, lider del. 5.3. Vol.11. PUIX. St, Mag. Nat fi = s S Nj "Se agi es, aI a chy, del. ee lith. SE oO ee en Ann & Mag Nat. Hist.5.3.Vol.11.PUX. Ay fs "u) a nao s Be ry in } res rh mies) Mii NA l ey ‘) AST Wawra AA. ee Hib A ih LEN Pewee yy Ceres PRK Oe OS ba) Ra (wy / rien ryan he 2 VP Bye a , ia as ‘i 7 f ete Mateh * ATEN TRA AA, HRA AA if ey here y mY ey bee hk Luter y he pe “hie es aa wh iy ob CA yy 4 , eh LE ey) Bye yy) re een rey eee ; ” ht i } thh rns fares f ty vas rey LHL Meh Wie eater F D i it ty Pas yl oe I v ’ eh ee PEAY Aue Dolo MOS HY hath (Wty aan) yA oan ia meee ve " 4 telat ny YALU Wie A 4 Ay i fhe canteen lit 18 omit de fhe! LER Va yes ide sate faite el Roa i a! hae isi ry x iy ‘ wher ANA By 3 hy ty *% LAead He ie Aas ‘] Mine 1 ae FAP SATA TALI Ni iit ghaniane Ge hor Sa) LOU uh, AN WCU Wn ew ai ar’ CNN NON is iN Doel Big is oa ae Ks Pag ey ' a EWR eek VA a Witte big Bog f ‘ i, HUGH Eh idee tanta oti RUM SLE pee SULA hy ¢ ihe eB f “ioautl AOD b il Mah 4 h if j ass ) hah Wary te Sah ; : ba \ ‘i Nf iy we ye aa if f " nok GPLN OUD ie rath ity : 64 ro a ; es ‘} Mf ia z fon fo} 4 4 ; Seay iN ear, - ef VN tah eet Sarr % Hive wy ( Puy) ROM CEN are eu ‘ ¥ ie v nf Ie HA t hh ‘ 2% thy cy bid te! RE tA HW tal te TA Rhea ne Why wa eat were | eae oe me Me ik WAST ASM a aa HOE IMPRIMER cone ACN BAUER CW sath Mg SUN aN Gib ‘goat Hehe neh URN Ae SEW Le cua rela iy Fh) 1 i gcut A ft Mi ‘ 4 AAV J) WN i 7 AAT Raine i = by eke tes kL. ines ee a tee edt rae eh ; 4 fy , of (ens Ls in a Dodie }. \ Ly i ¢. 1 * iy * rs f ; ‘ p sf ‘ 4 SBS gh 8 ahs \ eu 4 it HiNie (% : A AA J ‘ pA TAY Ss ee |b ay Cea) ate ety MiB if WEG [ rh Lai Nair eo eAA DENN ‘ iter teealhs = Aw PSN ni shy & ‘ ‘ A v P ais oo La a i Ge ines i i say Pay hey UB aa TO hs i ey Uebes day Me Mai eA AICI ‘4 a UA a , nA Pye ABUL NA Vee HAN we Dea qayaey ‘ badly al oe ee Bk we hhh, ans Uh + ey ni bed ane Y: habe Be ba, ier We ALL Gey ‘ VeRy Tas ids he Aor Wb AAD ee ee eb wha Sa bh bye We oie IS Len an 3 ‘ yar yr Soaks ay vii ade is a? ed beth Aa # ‘ ah iy) ¢ ‘ n \ 4) Me fs , M 3 } 5 “FP abe Pek ¥how ie i Oe Wat 3 y i 7 \ Ch t ah \ » 4 N sk tebe re uy My i A sete bg eee Relies tah ai tesa ow ani . ea H ie Wi a : eta Wet : : 4 DOO eR a Eee b * Nines ec f Neen H Pi Fs Wty . 48 VA wot He ee iv ah ie NSM Seth SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES WL 088 01313 9613